Implicit Nonlin

C O N T E N T S
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide
Preface ■ List of MSC.Nastran Books, ii

■ Technical Support, iii
■ Internet Resources, vi
1
Introduction ■ MSC. Software Products, 2
■ MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600), 3
❑ Defining the Model, 3
❑ Nonlinear Analysis, 4
❑ Results, 5
■ Feature List, 7
■ How SOL 600 Solves Nonlinear Problems, 10
■ This User’s Guide, 12
❑ Other MSC.Nastran Documentation for SOL 600, 12
❑ MSC.Marc Documentation, 12
❑ MSC.Patran Documentation, 12
2
MSC.Nastran Bulk ■ The MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File, 16
Data File and ❑ Input Conventions, 17
Results Files ❑ Section Descriptions, 18
❑ Include File Options (for Advanced Users Familiar with
MSC.Marc), 19
❑ Example, 19
❑ Running Existing Nonlinear Models, 21
❑ Generating and Editing the Bulk Data File in MSC.Patran, 22
■ Output Requests, 24
❑ Stress and Strain Measures for Nonlinear Analysis, 24
■ Results Files, 35
❑ Files Generated During the Analysis, 35
❑ Postprocessing with MSC.Patran, 36
3
Solution Methods ■ Introduction, 40
and Strategies in
■ Linear Static Analysis Procedure, 41
Nonlinear Analysis
■ Applying Constraints, 43
❑ Single Degrees-of-Freedom, 43
❑ Multiple Degrees-of-Freedom, 44
■ Adding Nonlinear Effects, 49

❑ Sources of Nonlinearity, 49
❑ Subcases, Load Increments, and Iterations, 50
❑ Nonlinear Equation Solution, 51
❑ SOL 600 Analysis Procedure, 53
■ Numerical Methods in Solving Equations, 54

❑ Direct Methods, 54
❑ Iterative Methods, 55
❑ Preconditioners, 55
❑ Storage Methods, 56
❑ Nonsymmetric Systems, 56
❑ Specifying the Solution Procedure, 58
■ Iteration Methods, 59
❑ Full Newton-Raphson Algorithm, 59
❑ Modified Newton-Raphson Algorithm, 60
❑ Strain Correction Method, 61
❑ The Secant Method, 62
❑ Specifying the Iteration Method, 63
■ Load Increment Size, 64

❑ Fixed Load Incrementation, 64
❑ Direct Substitution, 64
❑ Adaptive Load (AUTO) Incrementation, 66
❑ Specifying the Load Incrementation Method, 76
■ Residual Load Correction, 77

■ Convergence Controls, 78
❑ Specifying Convergence Criteria, 81
■ Singularity Ratio, 82
■ Guidelines for Analysis Methods, 84
❑ Analysis Methods, 84
❑ General Tips, 84
❑ Choosing a Solution Method, 85
❑ Time Steps or Load Increments, 85
❑ Nonlinear Dynamics, 86
❑ Efficiency, 87
■ References, 88
4
Nonlinearity and ■ Linear and Nonlinear Analysis, 90
Analysis Types ❑ Linear Analysis, 90
❑ Nonlinear Analysis, 91
■ Nonlinear Effects and Formulations, 92

❑ Geometric Nonlinearities, 96
❑ Material Nonlinearities, 107
❑ Nonlinear Boundary Conditions, 118
■ Overview of Analysis Types, 122

■ Static Analysis, 124
❑ Post-Buckling, 124
❑ Creep, Viscoplastic, and Viscoelastic Behavior, 125
■ Body Approach, 126

■ Buckling Analysis, 127
❑ Eigenvalue Buckling Prediction, 127
❑ Bifurcation Approach, 129
❑ Eigenvalue Extraction Methods, 130
■ Normal Modes, 131

❑ Eigenvalue Analysis, 133
❑ Free Vibration Analysis, 136
■ Transient Dynamic Analysis, 138

❑ Direct Transient Response, 138
❑ Technical Background, 140
❑ Time Step Definition, 145
❑ Initial Conditions, 146
❑ Damping, 147
■ Creep, 149
❑ Viscoelasticity, 152
■ Rigid-Plastic Flow (Available in MSC.Nastran 2005), 154

❑ Steady State Analysis, 155
❑ Transient Analysis, 155
❑ Technical Background, 155
■ Superplastic Flow (Available in MSC.Nastran 2005), 157

■ References, 160
5
Analysis ■ Domain Decomposition, 162
Techniques ❑ Specifying Domain Decomposition, 162
❑ DDM Submittal in MSC.Patran, 163
❑ DDM Results in MSC.Patran, 164
❑ DDM Configuration, 164
■ RESTARTS, 166
❑ Specifying Restarts and Parameters, 166
6
Modeling ■ Coordinate Systems, 168
❑ Nodal Coordinate Systems, 168
❑ Element Coordinate Systems, 168
■ Nodes, 171
■ Elements, 172
■ Modeling in MSC.Patran, 174
❑ Creating Geometry in MSC.Patran, 174
❑ Creating Finite Element Meshes in MSC.Patran, 176
7
Setting Up, ■ Solution Type, 180
Monitoring, and ❑ Specifying the Solution Type, 180
Debugging the
■ Analysis Procedures, 181
Analysis
❑ Analysis Types, 181
❑ Specifying the Analysis Type for a Subcase, 183
■ Translation Parameters, 185

❑ Specifying the Translation Parameters, 185
■ Solution Parameters, 188

❑ Specifying Solution Parameters, 188
■ Subcases, 191
❑ Specifying Subcases, 191
■ Subcase Parameters, 194

❑ Specifying Static Subcase Parameters, 194
❑ Specifying Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 197
❑ Specifying Buckling Subcase Parameters, 199
❑ Specifying Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters, 201
❑ Specifying Creep Subcase Parameters, 204
❑ Specifying Body Approach Subcase Parameters, 207
■ Execution Procedure for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear from the
Command Line, 209
❑ Using MSC.Patran to Execute MSC.Nastran, 210
❑ How to Tell When the Analysis is Done, 210
❑ How to Tell if the Analysis Ran Successfully, 211
■ Monitoring the Analysis, 212

❑ Using MSC.Patran to Monitor the Analysis, 214
❑ Editing a MSC.Nastran Input File, 215
■ Debugging the Analysis, 216

❑ Resolving Convergence Problems, 216
❑ Standard Exit Messages, 224
❑ Using MSC.Patran to Debug an Analysis, 224
8
Output from the ■ Overview, 228
Analysis
■ Output Requests, 229
❑ Specifying Output Requests, 229
■ MSC.Marc Results Quantities, 238

❑ Using MSC.Patran to Postprocess Results Quantities, 244
■ MSC.Nastran Results Quantities, 246

❑ Using MSC.Patran to Postprocess MSC.Nastran Results
Quantities, 246
9
Assigned ■ Constraints, 250
Conditions ❑ Boundary Conditions, 250
❑ Multi-Point Constraints, 250
❑ Support Conditions, 266
■ Loads and Boundary Conditions, 267

❑ Using MSC.Patran to Apply Loads and Boundary Conditions, 270
❑ Displacement LBCs, 273
❑ Force LBCs, 274
❑ Pressure LBCs, 276
❑ Temperature LBCs, 279
❑ Inertial Loads LBCs, 283
❑ Velocity LBCs, 285
❑ Acceleration LBCs, 286
❑ Distributed Load LBCs, 287
❑ Total Load LBCs, 290
❑ Contact LBCs, 292
■ Initial Conditions, 293
❑ Initial Displacement LBCs, 293
❑ Initial Velocity LBCs, 294
❑ Initial Temperature LBCs, 295
10
Materials ■ Overview, 298
❑ Constitutive Models, 299
❑ MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear Material Entries, 300
■ Linear Elastic, 303

❑ Isotropic Materials, 304
❑ Orthotropic Materials, 305
❑ Anisotropic Materials, 308
■ Nonlinear Elastic, 310

❑ Hypoelastic - Isotropic, 310
❑ Hyperelastic - Isotropic, 310
❑ Viscoelastic, 342
■ Inelastic, 361
❑ Yield Conditions, 362
❑ Work Hardening Rules, 368
❑ Flow Rules, 373
❑ Rate Dependent Yield, 376
❑ Experimental Stress-Strain Curves, 379
❑ Temperature-Dependent Behavior, 390
❑ Specifying Elastoplastic Material Entries, 391
■ Failure and Damage Models, 397

❑ Isotropic/Orthotropic/Anisotropic Failure Models, 397
❑ Hyperelastic Damage Models, 408
■ Creep, 415
❑ Oak Ridge National Laboratory Laws, 419
❑ Viscoplasticity (Explicit Formulation), 419
❑ Creep (Implicit Formulation), 420
❑ Narayanaswamy Model, 421
❑ Specifying Creep Material Entries, 421
■ Composite, 423
❑ Specifying Composite Material Entries, 424
■ Gasket, 428
❑ Specifying Gasket Material Entries, 433
■ Material Damping, 434
❑ Specifying Material Damping Entries, 435
■ Experimental Data Fitting, 437
11
Element Library ■ Overview, 462
❑ Element Types, 462
■ Element Selection, 465

❑ Element Interpolation, 465
❑ Element Integration, 465
❑ Incompressible Elements, 467
❑ Overriding MSC.Nastran Element Selections, 467
■ Global Element Controls, 468

❑ Assumed Strain, 468
❑ Constant Dilatation, 468
❑ Setting Global Element Parameters in MSC.Patran, 468
■ Mass Elements, Springs, Dampers, and Bush Elements, 470

❑ MSC.Patran FE Application Input Data, 470
■ Gap Elements, 472

■ Line Elements, 473

■ Membranes, Panels, and Shells, 474

■ Solid Elements, 476

❑ Axisymmetric Elements, 477
❑ Plane Strain Elements, 477
❑ 3D Solid Elements, 479
12
Contact ■ Overview, 482
■ Contact Methodology, 484
❑ Contact Bodies, 484
❑ Numerical Procedures, 495
❑ Implementation of Constraints, 500
❑ Separation, 502
❑ Higher Order Elements, 503
❑ 3D Beam and Shell Contact, 504
❑ Friction Modeling, 505
■ Defining Contact Bodies, 515
❑ Deformable and Rigid Surfaces, 515
❑ Motion of Surfaces, 515
❑ Cautions, 516
❑ Upper Bound Quantities, 517
❑ Control Variables and Option Flags, 517
❑ Time Step Control, 518
❑ Dynamic Contact - Impact, 518
❑ Two-dimensional Rigid Surfaces, 518
❑ Specifying Contact Body Entries, 535
■ Selecting and Controlling Contact Behavior, 540

❑ Contact Parameters, 540
❑ Contact Table, 547
❑ Movement of Contact Bodies, 552
❑ Initial Conditions, 554
■ References, 555
13
Example Problem ■ Overview, 558
■ Model Description, 559
■ Constructing the Model, 560
❑ Create Pipe Geometry, 560
❑ Create Finite Elements for Pipe, 565
❑ Create Rigid Surfaces, 571
❑ Create Material Properties, 575
❑ Create Element Properties, 576
❑ Apply Loads and Boundary Conditions, 577
■ Running a SOL 600 Analysis, 583

❑ Submit an Analysis from Inside MSC.Patran, 583
❑ Look for the Analysis Results Files, 584
❑ Troubleshoot a Failed Analysis, 584
❑ Read the Results in MSC.Patran, 585
■ Postprocessing the Results, 586

❑ Generate a Quick Plot, 586
❑ Create an Animation, 589
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)
SECTION
Introduction
1
■ MSC. Software Products
■ MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)
■ Feature List
■ How SOL 600 Solves Nonlinear Problems
■ This User’s Guide

2 Introduction
1.1 MSC. Software Products

MSC.Software Corporation provides an extensive array of software products that
make it possible to simulate almost any engineered component with any level of detail
you require. MSC is recognized as a leader in finite element analysis software with a
product list that includes MSC.Nastran, MSC.Patran, MSC.Marc, MSC.Dytran and
many others. Each of these codes within themselves are powerful general-purpose
1 analysis codes that can be used to solve structural, heat transfer, and coupled thermal-
structural finite element problems. When paired together and supplemented with
special purpose application modules and interfaces these software products can be
tailor made to suit specific industries and engineering problems unique to those
2 industries.
6
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) 3
1.2 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)

MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) is an application module in the
MSC.Nastran system that pairs the full features of MSC.Nastran with the MSC.Marc
solver to analyze a wide variety of structural problems subjected to geometric and
material nonlinearities, and contact. An extensive finite element library for building
your simulation model, and set of solution procedures for the nonlinear analysis,
which can handle very large matrix equations, are available in MSC.Nastran Implicit
1
Nonlinear (SOL 600). MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) is tightly integrated
into the MSC.Nastran environment, all of its analysis capabilities and generated
results are available from within the MSC.Nastran environment.
Defining the Model

2
A finite element model consists of a geometric description, which is given by the
elements and their nodes and a set of properties associated with the elements,
describing their attributes. These properties include material definitions, cross-section
definitions in the case of structural elements like beams and shells, and other
3
parameters for contact bodies, springs, dashpots, etc. There may also be constraints
that must be included in the model - RBE elements, or “multi-point constraints'' or
“equations'' (linear or nonlinear equations involving several of the fundamental
solution variables in the model), or simple “boundary conditions'' that are to be 4
imposed throughout the analysis. Nonzero initial conditions, such as initial
temperatures, displacements, velocities, and even initial stresses and/or plastic
strains may also be specified.
The model is described and communicated to MSC.Nastran in the form of a text file, 5
called a MSC.Nastran Input file. You can generate this file using any text editor, but it
must adhere to MSC.Nastran conventions for the ordering and format of the model
information.
Using MSC.Patran with SOL 600

6
The amount of information that needs to be conveyed in the MSC.Nastran Input file
is extensive for even a modest size model. The amount of information and the
complexity of most models makes it virtually impossible to generate the MSC.Nastran
Input file with a text editor alone. Typically you benefit from using a preprocessor
such as, MSC.Patran. MSC.Patran is another MSC Software simulation code that
provides a graphical user interface and an extensive line of model building tools that
you can use to construct and view your model, and generate a MSC.Nastran Input file.
4 Introduction
If you are using MSC.Patran as a preprocessor, you are required to specify an analysis
code. Selecting MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) as the analysis code under
the Analysis Preference menu, customizes MSC.Patran in five main areas:
• Material Library.
• Element Library.
• Loads and Boundary Conditions.
1
• MPCs.
• Analysis forms.
The analysis preference also specifies that the model information be output in the
2 MSC.Nastran Input File format.
Throughout this Users Guide, actual examples are described in the context of using
MSC.Patran. Actual MSC.Patran forms and instructions are provided.
3 Nonlinear Analysis
Linear analysis assumes a linear relationship between the load applied to a structure
and the response of the structure. The stiffness of a structure in a linear analysis does
not change depending on its previous state. Linear static problems are solved in one
4 step-a single decomposition of the stiffness matrix. A linear analysis can provide a
good approximation of a structure’s response at a time and cost savings. A number of
important assumptions and limitations are inherent in linear static analysis. Materials
are assumed to be homogeneous and isotropic in which stress is directly proportional
to strain (linear) and to loads that do not take the material beyond its permanent yield
5 point (the material remains elastic). Linear analysis is restricted to small
displacements, otherwise the stiffness of the structures changes and must be
accounted for by regenerating the stiffness matrix. Lastly, loads are assumed to be
applied slowly as to keep the structure in equilibrium.
6 It becomes necessary to consider nonlinear effects in structures when modeling
materials with nonlinear behavior and where large deformations (rotations and/or
strains) occur. In addition, contact problems exhibit nonlinear effects due to changes
in boundary conditions.
In a nonlinear problem the stiffness of the structure depends on the displacement and
the response is no longer a linear function of the load applied. As the structure
displaces due to loading, the stiffness changes, and as the stiffness changes the
structure’s response changes. As a result, nonlinear problems require incremental
solution schemes that divide the problem up into steps calculating the displacement,
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) 5
then updating the stiffness. Each step uses the results from the previous step as a
starting point. As a result the stiffness matrix must be generated and decomposed
many times during the analysis adding time and costs to the analysis.
Nonlinear problems present many challenges. A nonlinear problem does not always
have a unique solution. Sometimes a nonlinear problem does not have any solution,
although the problem can seem to be defined correctly.
Nonlinear analysis requires choosing a solution strategy which includes dividing the
1
loading into logical steps, controlling the numerical processing, and planning for the
possibility of changing the solution strategy during the analysis using restarts. Which
solution method to use depends on the structure itself, the nature of the loading, and
the anticipated nonlinear behavior. In some cases, one method can be advantageous
over another; in other cases, the converse might be true.
2
If a solution is obtainable, there is also the issue of efficiency. Each solution procedure,
has pros and cons in terms of matrix operations and storage requirements. In addition,
a very important variable regarding overall efficiency is the size of the problem. The
time required to assemble a stiffness matrix, as well as the time required to recover
3
stresses after a solution, vary roughly linearly with the number of degrees of freedom
of the problem. On the other hand, the time required to go through the solver
varies roughly quadratically with the bandwidth, as well as linearly with the number
of degrees of freedom. 4
Applications for Nonlinear Analysis
Early development of nonlinear finite element technology was mostly influenced by
the nuclear and aerospace industries. In the nuclear industry, nonlinearities are 5
mainly due to high-temperature behavior of materials. Nonlinearities in the aerospace
industry are mainly geometric in nature and range from simple linear buckling to
complicated post-bifurcation behavior. Nonlinear finite element techniques have
become popular in metal forming manufacturing processes, fluid-solid interaction,
and fluid flow. In recent years, the areas of biomechanics and electromagnetics have
6
seen an increasing use of finite elements.
Results
Like the enormous amount of data needed to define the simulation model to an
analysis code, there is a large volume of data returned from the simulation analysis.
And just as it is virtually impossible to construct a model with a text editor alone, it is
equally as difficult to read and interpret the results by hand. Using a postprocessor
with a graphical user interface such as MSC.Patran is highly recommended.
6 Introduction
Postprocessing Features of MSC.Patran

The MSC.Patran Results application gives you control of powerful graphical
capabilities to display results quantities in a variety of ways:
• Deformed structural plots

• Color banded fringe plots
1 • Marker plots (vectors, tensors)
• Freebody diagrams
• Graph (XY) plots
2 • Animations of most of these plot types.

The Results application treats all results quantities in a very flexible and general
manner. In addition, for maximum flexibility results can be:
• Sorted
3 • Reported
• Scaled
• Combined
4 • Filtered
• Derived
• Deleted
5 All of these features help give meaningful insight into results interpretation of
engineering problems that would otherwise be difficult at best.
The Results application is object oriented, providing postprocessing plots which are
created, displayed, and manipulated to obtain rapid insight into the nature of results
6 data. The imaging is intended to provide graphics performance sufficient for real time
manipulation. Performance will vary depending on hardware, but consistency of
functionality is maintained as much as possible across all supported display devices.
Capabilities for interactive results postprocessing also exist. Advanced visualization

capabilities allow creation of many plot types which can be saved, simultaneously
plotted, and interactively manipulated with results quantities reported at the click of
the mouse button to better understand mechanical behavior. Once defined, the
visualization plots remain in the database for immediate access and provide the
means for results manipulation and review in a consistent and easy to use manner.
Feature List 7
1.3 Feature List

The complete features of MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) are presented in
the following list.
1. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) solves linear and nonlinear
(material, contact and/or geometric) static, modal (vibration), buckling, and
transient dynamic structural finite element problems. 1
2. Eigenvalue solutions are available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL
600) for solving linear or nonlinear modal and buckling analyses using either
Lanczos or Inverse Power Sweep methods of iteration. Through the use of
parameters you can control the convergence of the eigenvalues, and the
modes to retain.
3. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) has a bandwidth minimizer
2
designed to optimize models.
4. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) supports the following
elements/bodies:
• 3 and 6 noded triangular shell/membrane/plane 3
stress/(generalized) plain strain/axisymmetric elements.
• 4 and 8 noded quadrilateral shell/membrane/plane
stress/(generalized) plain strain/axisymmetric elements.
• 4 and 10 noded solid tetrahedral elements. 4
• 6 and 15 noded solid wedge elements.
• 8 and 20 noded solid hexahedral elements.
• 2 and 3 noded beam element.
• 2 and 3 noded bar element.
5
• 2 and 3 noded axisymmetric shell element.
• 2 noded gap element.
• 1 and 2 noded spring elements. 6
• 1 and 2 noded damper elements.
• Rigid and deformable contact bodies.
• Point Mass element.
RBE elements and multi-point constraint equations are supported in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) to tie specific nodes or degrees-
of-freedom to each other. Special MPC entities are supported, (e.g. rigid
links) which can be used to tie two nodes together or equate the motion of
two DOFs.
8 Introduction
5. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) supports the following loads and
boundary conditions:
• Constrained nodal displacements (zero displacements at specified
degrees-of-freedom).
• Enforced nodal displacements (non-zero displacements at specified
degrees-of-freedom in the nodal coordinate system).
1 • Forces applied to nodes in the nodal coordinate system.
• Pressures applied to element edges or faces, including strain-rate
controlled application for super-plastic forming simulations.
• Temperature applied to nodes. Temperature can be applied as a load
in a structural analysis. The reference temperature is user definable.
2 • Inertial body forces. Linear acceleration and rotational velocity can be
applied in the global coordinate system.
• Beams can be loaded by nodal forces, body forces, prescribed
displacements and loads due to thermal expansion and contraction.
3 • Contact between two bodies can be defined by selecting the
contacting bodies and defining the contact interaction properties.
6. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) supports isotropic, orthotropic
and anisotropic material properties. Temperature dependent isotropic and
4 orthotropic material properties can be defined for elastic, elastic-plastic,
hyper-elastic, visco-elastic (no temperature dependence for visco-elastic)
and creep constitutive models. Nonlinear elastic-plastic materials can be
defined by specifying piecewise linear stress-strain curves, which may be
temperature dependent.
5 7. Physical properties can be associated with MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
(SOL 600) elements such as the cross-sectional properties of the beam
element, the area of the beam and rod elements, the thickness of shell, plane
stress, and membrane elements, spring parameters, masses, gap element
parameters, the alternate material coordinate frame for solid elements and
6 material IDs.
8. Laminated composite solid and shell elements are supported in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) through the PCOMP card of the
materials capability. Each layer has its own material, thickness, and
orientation and may represent linear or nonlinear material behavior. Failure
index calculations are also supported.
9. Analysis jobs consisting of (possibly) complex loading histories (such as
would occur in a multi-step manufacturing process) for MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) are defined using subcases. A single subcase
may represent the entire analysis, or may be one step in a multi-step
Feature List 9
simulation. The loads and constraints in each subcase represent the total load
at that point in the analysis, making it easy to determine the state of loading
at any point in the analysis. The starting point of the current subcase is the
ending point of the previous subcase.
10. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) jobs are submitted using text-
based input decks that may be generated manually with a text editor, or by
a variety of pre/post processing programs such as MSC.Patran. The input
file is read in and a number of text files, such as the .f06, .log, .f04 files are 1
generated.
11. Results can be requested in several output formats such as .f06, .t16, .t19,
.xdb, .op2, or punch files. These files are typically read back into the pre/post
processing programs for the purpose of evaluating the results with plots
such as deformed shape plots, contour stress/strain plots, or X-Y history
plots.
2
12. Nodal displacements, velocities and accelerations, mode shapes, element
and nodal stresses, element and nodal strains, element and nodal plastic
strains, element and nodal creep strains, nodal reaction forces and contact
interface stress/force values, shell element stress resultants, element strain 3
energy, strain energy density, and phase angle values can all be requested as
output and visualized with the aforementioned results visualization tools
such as MSC.Patran. Stress functions, for example von Mises, beam stresses,
strains, and internal forces, can also be requested as output. Composite
element results are returned for each layer of the composite. 4
13. A restart capability is available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL
600). Any analysis can be saved from any point for a possible restart. A new
static load case or a buckling analysis can be solved by restarting from the
original static analysis.
5
6
10 Introduction
1.4 How SOL 600 Solves Nonlinear Problems

The primary steps in running a MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) analysis
are as follows:
1. Read MSC.Nastran Input File in IFP (input file processor) as in other
MSC.Nastran solution sequences.
1 2. Convert MSC.Nastran input to MSC.Marc input and write out a MSC.Marc
input deck (jid.marc.dat in IFP).
3. If there are no input errors, execute MSC.Marc.
4. If you request, do any of the following:
2 a. Translate MSC.Marc’s t16 file to obtain MSC.Nastran op2 or xdb
output (this is done by code in MSC.Nastran that created output op2
data blocks on a file, which we call the f11 file, then generating DMAP
on the fly to use inputt2 to placed the f11 datablocks into the
MSC.Nastran database, and finally use OUTPUT2 to produce an OP2
3 file which has the geometry datablocks and the f11 output datablocks
all in one file (or similar DMAP to generate an xdb file with geometry
and output datablocks.
b. As in step a, DMAP can be extended to produce printed output in
4 the.f06 file or punched output in the .pch file having the exact formats
MSC.Nastran uses for all other solution sequences (this is done by
generating OFP DMAP on the fly).
c. Copy MSC.Marc’s output file (known as the .out file) to the .f06 file
with or without changing any text strings. This output will have the
5 MSC.Marc formats, but names such as MSC.Marc can be changed to
any desired user name (for example MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear).
It is strongly suggested that steps b and c are not both done in the
same run, or the f06 file output could become confusing.
d. Retain or delete the MSC.Marc input and output files (which normally
6 consist of jid.marc.dat, jid.marc.out, jid.marc.sts, jid.marc.log,
jid.marc.t16 and possibly others which have the name jid.marc.*).
The process of reading input data from a MSC.Nastran Input File, translating the
model data to a MSC.Marc input file, running a MSC.Marc solution, and translating
back the results files is shown in the flowchart that follows.
How SOL 600 Solves Nonlinear Problems 11
MSC.Nastran Input Deck deck echo and

error messages
IFP Processes Input Deck Nastran.f06,

.f04, .log files
Successful No
1
Translation?
Yes
Write jobname.marc.dat
Post-processing 2
DMAP in place?
Submit Marc No Yes

Analysis?
.t16/19 results to Nast db 3
Yes
Submit Marc job -see note Use std Nast output req -
generate std xdb,op2,f06
4
Marc writes.out,.t16,.t19
.sts, etc (these will be
deleted later by Nastran Stop
if marccpy = 1 or 3) -.sts
and .log may be used by
MSC.Patran to monitor
5
the progress of the job Note - every attempt will be
while it is running made to have the MSC.Nastran Input
File Processor (IFP) catch all
input format errors. However, 6
No this may not be possible
Is marccpy in early releases. It may
= 1or 2?
sometimes be necessary for you
to debug the MSC.Marc analysis.
Yes
Append runtime error
messages to .f06 and .log
Figure 1-1 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) Solution Process

12 Introduction
1.5 This User’s Guide

This manual provides a complete background to SOL 600 and fully describes using
SOL 600 within the MSC.Nastran environment. The theoretical aspects of nonlinear
analysis methods, types, and techniques are included as well as thorough descriptions
for nonlinear material models.
1 Where appropriate, actual MSC.Patran forms and menus are shown so you can easily
use SOL 600 from the MSC.Patran environment.
Other MSC.Nastran Documentation for SOL 600

2 MSC.Nastran Reference Manual
The MSC.Nastran Reference Manual provides supporting information that relates to
MSC.Nastran input formats, element libraries, and loads and boundary conditions.
3 Quick Reference Guide (QRG)

The QRG contains a complete description of all the input entries for MSC.Nastran.
Within each section, entries are organized alphabetically so they are easy to find. Each
entry provides a description, formats, examples, details on options, and general
remarks.
4
You will find the full descriptions for many of the SOL 600 input entries in the QRG.
MSC.Marc Documentation
5 MSC provides extensive documentation covering all aspects of the MSC.Marc code. In
particular the following manuals are recommended to use in conjunction with SOL
600:
• MSC.Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information - explains the
capabilities of MSC.Marc and gives pertinent background information.
6
• MSC.Marc Volume C: Program Input - describes the file format of the
MSC.Marc input file.
MSC.Patran Documentation
Three key books from the MSC.Patran library may be of assistance in running SOL
600:
This User’s Guide 13
• MSC.Patran User’s Guide - this introductory guide gives you the essential
information you need to immediately begin using MSC.Patran for SOL 600
projects. Understanding and using the information in this guide requires no
prior experience with CAE or finite element analysis.
• MSC.Patran Reference Manual -a counterpart to the MSC.Nastran Reference
Manual, this manual provides complete descriptions of basic functions in
MSC.Patran, geometry modeling, finite element modeling, material models, 1
element properties, loads and boundary conditions, analysis, and results.
• MSC.Nastran Preference Guide - gives specific information that relates to
using MSC.Patran with MSC.Nastran as the intended analysis code. All
application forms and required input are tailored to MSC.Nastran.
2
6
14 Introduction
6
SECTION
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and
2 Results Files
■ The MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File
■ Output Requests
■ Results Files
16 MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
2.1 The MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File

The MSC.Nastran Input File, referred to as the Bulk Data File (BDF) is made up of
three distinct sections:
1. Executive Control - describes the problem type and size.
2. Case Control - defines the load history.
1 3. Bulk Data - gives a detailed model description.
Input data is organized in (optional) blocks. Key words identify the data for each
optional block. This form of input enables you to specify only the data for the optional
blocks that you need to define your problem. The various blocks of input are
2 “optional” in the sense that many have built-in default values which can be used in
the absence of any explicit input from you.
A typical input file setup for the MSC.Nastran program is shown below.
3 • Executive Control Statements

Terminated by an CEND parameter
• Case Control Commands
Terminated by the BEGIN BULK option
4 • Bulk Data Entries
Model data starting with the BEGIN BULK option and terminated by the
ENDDATA option
6
The MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File 17
• (Additional History Definition

Option for the second, third, ..., Increments).
Model Data - grids,

elements, etc.
Element and
Material
Bulk Properties,
Fixed Displ,
Data Etc.
1
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
Load Incrementation,
Complete Input Deck
Applied Loads,
Case
Control Information
Applied Displacement
Control Etc.
2
Title, Job Control,
Solution Sequence,
Executive Control Etc.
3
Input Conventions
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear performs all data conversion internally so that the 4
system does not abort because of data errors made by you. The program reads all
input data options alphanumerically and converts them to integer, floating point, or
keywords, as necessary. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear issues error messages and
displays the illegal option image if it cannot interpret the option data field according 5
to the specifications given in the manual. When such errors occur, the program
attempts to scan the remainder of the data file and ends the run with a FATAL ERROR
message.
Two input format conventions can be used: fixed and free format. You can mix fixed 6
and free format options within a file.
The syntax rules for fixed fields are as follows:
• Give floating point numbers with or without an exponent. If you give an

exponent, it must be preceded by the character E or D and must be
right-justified. If data is double precision, a D must be used.
The syntax rules for free fields are as follows:
• Check that each option contains the same number of data items that it would
contain under standard fixed-format control. This syntax rule allows you to
mix fixed-field and free-field options in the data file because the number of
options you need to input any data list are the same in both cases.
• Separate data items on a option with a comma. The comma can be
surrounded by any number of blanks. Within the data item itself, no
1 embedded blanks can appear.
• Give floating point numbers with or without an exponent. If you use an
exponent, it must be preceded by the character E or D and must immediately
follow the mantissa (no embedded blanks).
2 • Give keywords exactly as they are written in the manual.

• All data can be entered as uppercase or lowercase text.
• Small field format is limited to 8 columns per field. Large field is 16 columns,
see the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more details.
3
Section Descriptions
Executive Control
4 This group of entries provides overall job control for the problem and sets up initial
switches to control the flow of the program through the desired analysis. This set of
input must be terminated with an CEND parameter. See “Executive Control
Statements” in Chapter 3 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide for additional
5 descriptions on input formats.
Case Control
This group of options provides the loads and constraints and load incrementation
6 method and controls the program after the initial elastic analysis. Case Control
options also include blocks which allow changes in the initial model specifications.
Case Control options can also specify print-out and postprocessing options. Each set
of load sets must be begin with a SUBCASE command and be terminated by another
SUBCASE or a BEGIN BULK command. If there is only one load case, the SUBCASE
entry is not required. The SUBCASE option requests that the program perform
another increment or series of increments. See “Case Control Commands” in
Chapter 4 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide for additional descriptions on
input formats.
Bulk Data Entries

This set of data options enters the initial loading, geometry, and material data of the
model and provides nodal point data, such as boundary conditions. Bulk data options
are also used to govern the error control and restart capability.This group of options
must be terminated with the ENDDATA option. See “Bulk Data Entries” in Chapter 8
of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide for additional descriptions on input formats.
For version 2004, multiple BEGIN entries and superelements are not allowed. 1
Include File Options (for Advanced Users Familiar with
MSC.Marc)
There may be cases where MSC.Marc functionality is required that is not supported
directly through the MSC.Nastran input data format. Three new parameters are
2
introduced for “Include Files” to allow you to introduce whatever input is desired
once a MSC.Nastran input file has been translated into a MSC.Marc input file.
Separate include files may be used for MSC.Marc's Parameter (section 2), Model Data
(section 3), or Load Case (section 4) portions of the MSC.Marc input deck. These 3
parameters are:
PARAM,MARCINP2,fn2 (fn2 is a file name limited to 8 characters for section 2)
PARAM,MARCINP3,fn3 (fn3 is a file name limited to 8 characters for section 3) 4
PARAM,MARCINP4,fn4 (fn4 is a file name limited to 8 characters for section 4)
All file names are limited to 8 characters and must have the extension .inc. Each file
will be placed at the end of its respective section. In addition, PARAM,MARCINPP,ID
is introduced with values of 0 or 1 (default=0). If ID=0, fn4 is placed at the end of 5
section 4 once. IF ID=1, fn4 is placed in section 4 just prior to each MSC.Marc continue
card. See “Parameters” in Chapter 5 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide for
additional descriptions on input formats.
6
Example
The following text illustrates a simple example of an MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
input file. It includes the required Executive Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data
sections that are required for any MSC.Nastran analysis.
$ NASTRAN input file created by the MSC MSC.Nastran input file
$ translator (MSC.Patran 2004) on February 03, 2003 at 15:09:41.
$ Direct Text Input for File Management Section
$ Advanced Nonlinear Analysis
SOL 600, 106 PATH=1 STOP=1

CEND
SEALL = ALL
SUPER = ALL
1 TITLE = MSC.Nastran job created on 03-Feb-03 at 15:04:03

$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data
SUBCASE 1
$ Subcase name : Default
2 SUBTITLE=Default
NLPARM = 1
SPC = 2
3 LOAD = 2
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL
SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL
4 STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL
$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase
BEGIN BULK
5 PARAM PRTMAXIM YES
NLPARM 1 10 AUTO 1 25 P YES
$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data
6 $ Elements and Element Properties for region : shell_props
PSHELL 1 1 .253 1 1
$ Pset: "shell_props" will be imported as: "pshell.1"

CQUAD4 1 1 1 2 5 4
CQUAD4 2 1 2 3 6 5
CQUAD4 3 1 4 5 8 7
CQUAD4 4 1 5 6 9 8
$ Referenced Material Records

$ Material Record : steel
$ Description of Material : Date: 03-Feb-03 Time: 15:01:32
MAT1 1 3.+7 .3 .0075
$ Nodes of the Entire Model
1
GRID 1 0. 0. 0.
GRID 2 5. 0. 0.
GRID 3 10. 0. 0.
GRID 4 0. 5. 0.
2
GRID 5 5. 5. 0.
GRID 6 10. 5. 0.
GRID 7 0. 10. 0.
3
GRID 8 5. 10. 0.
GRID 9 10. 10. 0.
$ Loads for Load Case : Default
4
SPCADD 2 1
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix_edge
SPC1 1 123456 1 4 7
5
$ Contact Table for Load Case: Default
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : point_load
FORCE 1 9 0 100. 0. 0. -1.

6
$ Referenced Coordinate Frames
ENDDATA
Running Existing Nonlinear Models

Some users may have existing models that have been developed and analyzed using
MSC.Nastran Nonlinear Solution Sequences 106 or 129. These models may be run
through MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) by changing the SOLUTION
procedure input to MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) input.
The following is an example of the change required to run existing models through
SOL 600. The first line shows an existing MSC.Nastran SOL 106 Executive Control
Statement and the second shows its revision for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
(SOL 600).
SOL 106
1 SOL 600,106
You would also need to include an OUTR request if you want MSC.Nastran formatted
output. If you do not include any OUTR requests (i.e. you wish to postprocess using
the T16 file), you then need to include STOP=1 to prevent MSC.Nastran from running
a SOL 106 analysis.
2
Generating and Editing the Bulk Data File in MSC.Patran
MSC.Patran offers a MSC.Nastran interface that provides a communication link
between MSC.Patran and MSC.Nastran. It provides for the generation of the
3 MSC.Nastran Input file as well as customization of certain features in MSC.Patran.
The interface is a fully integrated part of the MSC.Patran system.
Generating the BDF

4 Selecting MSC.Nastran as the analysis code preference in MSC.Patran, activates the
customization process. These customizations ensure that sufficient and appropriate
data is generated for the MSC.Nastran interface. Specifically, the MSC.Patran forms in
these main areas are modified:
5 • Materials
• Element Properties
• Finite Elements/MPCs and Meshing
6 • Loads and Boundary Conditions
• Analysis Forms
Using MSC.Patran, you can run a MSC.Nastran analysis or you may generate the
MSC.Nastran Input File to run externally. For information on generating the
MSC.Nastran Input file from within MSC.Patran, see “Analysis Form” in Chapter 3
of the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis.
Editing the BDF

Once the Bulk Data File has been generated, you can edit the file directly from
MSC.Patran.
1. Click the Analysis Application button to bring up Analysis Application

form.
2. On the Analysis form set the Action>Object>Method combination to
Analyze>Existing Deck>Full Run and click Edit Input File...
MSC.Patran finds the BDF with the current database name and displays the
file for editing in a text editing window.
1
6
2.2 Output Requests

As a part of the input, you can request which results quantities you want to be
returned from MSC.Marc back to MSC.Nastran and the formats of the results files.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) produces stress and strain results that
differ from those results available with SOL 106 and 129. A detailed discussion of the
1 stress and strain measures for SOL 600 is given in the following section. For a complete
listing of all possible results quantities that can be returned for a SOL 600 analysis, see
“Output from the Analysis” in Chapter 8.
Any of the results quantities can be placed on MSC.Marc’s t16/t19 output files to be
2 postprocessed by MSC.Patran. In addition, the more basic types of output
(displacements, velocities, accelerations, Cauchy stress tensor and one type of strain
tensor) can be translated to MSC.Nastrans’s standard op2, xdb, punch and even f06
files using the OUTR option described above. At present, new datablock definitions
have not been created to handle new types of nonlinear output. Therefore, it is
3 strongly suggested that the t16 or t19 file be selected for postprocessing in order to
view all types of output. For MSC.Nastran 2004, the op2 and xdb files for SOL 600
should only be used by those unable to postprocess t16/t19 files. MSC.Patran can
postprocess nearly all types of output selected by the MARCOUT entry. For a
4 complete description of the outputs available using MARCOUT, please see “Bulk
Data Entries” in Chapter 8 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Stress and Strain Measures for Nonlinear Analysis

5 One of the most striking characteristics of elastomeric materials is that they can sustain
large deformations, while remaining elastic. This so-called hyperelastic material
behavior is commonly based on a total stress versus total strain relationship. Since this
relationship is usually nonlinear, a material description like Hooke’s law cannot be
applied. Instead, the nonlinear behavior will be described using a strain energy
6 function.
The strain energy functions can be subdivided into two classes. The first class contains
stain energy functions written in terms of strain invariants. The second class contains
strain energy functions written in terms of principal stretch ratios. In order to
understand the basic features of these strain energy functions, in the current chapter
first some strain and stress measures will be given and then the concept of a strain
energy function will be discussed.
Output Requests 25
Undeformed
B B Deformed
u
dA 0 1
X ^
dF dA
N
dF
E2 n
x
2
E1
E3
3
Figure 2-1 Body B in undeformed and deformed
Deformations
Consider a three dimensional body B in its undeformed and deformed configuration 4
(see Figure 2-1). With respect to a Cartesian coordinate system ( E 1, E 2, E 3 ) , the
position vector of a material point in the undeformed configuration is written as:
X = X1 E1 + X2 E2 + X3 E3 Eq. 2-1 5
In the deformed configuration, the material point has a position vector x , given by:
x = x1 E1 + x2 E2 + x3 E3 Eq. 2-2
6
The displacement vector u is defined as the difference between the position vector in
the deformed and the undeformed configuration and reads:
u = x –X = u1E1 + u2E2 + u3E3 Eq. 2-3
It will be assumed that there is always a unique relation between the position vector
of a point in the deformed and the position vector of this point in the undeformed
configuration. This can formally be expressed as:
x = x (X ) Eq. 2-4
Based on equation Figure 2-4, a fundamental deformation measure can be given,

namely the deformation gradient F , which is defined by:
1 ∂x 1 ∂x 1 ∂x 1
--------- --------- ---------
∂X 1 ∂X 2 ∂X 3
∂x 2 ∂x 2 ∂x 2
F = --------- --------- --------- Eq. 2-5
∂X 1 ∂X 2 ∂X 3
∂x 3 ∂x 3 ∂x 3
2 --------- --------- ---------
∂X 1 ∂X 2 ∂X 3
Substituting Eq. 2-5 into Eq. 2-3 shows that the deformation gradient can also be
written as a function of the coordinates in the undeformed configuration and the
3 displacement components:
∂u 1 ∂u 1 ∂u 1 ∂u 1 ∂u 1 ∂u 1
1 + --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
∂X 1 ∂X 2 ∂X 3 ∂X 1 ∂X 2 ∂X 3
4 ∂u 2 ∂u 2 ∂u 2 ∂u ∂u ∂u
F = --------- 1 + --------- --------- = I + --------2- --------2- --------2- Eq. 2-6
∂X 1 ∂X 2 ∂X 3 ∂X 1 ∂X 2 ∂X 3
∂u 3 ∂u 3 ∂u 3 ∂u 3 ∂u 3 ∂u 3
--------- --------- 1 + --------- --------- --------- ---------
∂X 1 ∂X 2 ∂X 3 ∂X 1 ∂X 2 ∂X 3
5
in which I is the 3x3 unit tensor:
1 0 0
6 I = 0 1 0 Eq. 2-7
0 0 1
Starting out from the deformation gradient, several well-known symmetric strain
tensors can be defined, namely the engineering strain tensor e , the Green-Lagrange strain
tensor E and the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor C :
1 T
e = --- ( F + F – 2I ) Eq. 2-8
2
Output Requests 27
1 T
E = --- ( F F – I ) Eq. 2-9
2
T
C = F F Eq. 2-10
T
where F denotes the transpose of F .
Notice that the Green-Lagrange and the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor are related 1
by:
1
E = --- ( C – I ) Eq. 2-11
2
Example
2
Suppose that the deformation of a body is described by:
1 1 1
x 1 = 4X 1 cos α – --- X 2 sin α , x 2 = 4X 1 sin α + --- X 2 cos α , x 3 = --- X 3
2 2 2 3
This deformation can be obtained by first stretching a block of material in the E 1 -
direction and then rotating it around the E 3 -axis (see Figure 2-1). The deformation
gradient can easily be evaluated as:
4
1
4 cos α – --- sin α 0
2
1
F = 4 sin α --- cos α 0
2 5
1
0 0 ---
2
so that the engineering and the right Cauchy-Green strain tensors are given by:
6
7
4 cos α – 1 --- sin α 0 16 0 0
2
1
7 1 0 --- 0
e = --- sin α --- cos α – 1 0 , C = 4
2 2
1
1 0 0 ---
0 0 – --- 4
2
E3
E2 L2
L3
α
1 L 2 + ∆L 2
L1 L 3 + ∆L 3
E1 L 1 + ∆L 1
Figure 2.1 Stretching and rotating a body
2
From these expressions, it can be concluded that the engineering strain tensor only
provides a useful deformation measure if the angle α remains small, so that cos α ≈ 1
and sin α ≈ 0 . On the other hand, the components of the right Cauchy-Green tensor,
and by virtue of Eq. 2-11 also the components of the Green-Lagrange strain tensor, are
3 independent of the value of the angle α .
The deformation gradient can be rewritten as:
4 0 0
4 cos α – sin α 0 1
0 --- 0
F = sin α cos α 0 2 = RU
0 0 1 1
0 0 ---
2
5 in which R is a rotation tensor and U is a symmetric stretch tensor, where the stretch
tensor and the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor are related by:
1⁄2
C = U
6
It can be proved that in this way any deformation gradient can be uniquely
decomposed into a rotation tensor and a stretch tensor.
If there is no rotation of the material the non-zero components of the right Cauchy-
Green strain tensor can be expressed in terms of the components of the engineering
strain tensor as:
C 11 = 1 + e 11 , C 22 = 1 + e 22 , C 33 = 1 + e 33
Instead of 1 + e 11 , 1 + e 22 and 1 + e 33 , one often uses the principal stretch ratios

λ 1 , λ 2 and λ 3 , respectively.
Output Requests 29
A geometrical interpretation of the principal stretch ratios can be given by indicating

the initial edge lengths as L 1 , L 2 , L 3 and the changes in edge lengths as ∆L 1 , ∆L 2 ,
∆L 3 (see Figure 2-1). Now the principal stretch ratios can be written as:
L 1 + ∆L 1 L 2 + ∆L 2 L 3 + ∆L 3
λ 1 = ------------------------ , λ 2 = ------------------------ , λ 3 = ------------------------
L1 L2 L3
In the example discussed above, the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor only has non- 1
zero terms on its main diagonal, indicating that the deformation consists of a pure
stretch. In a general state of deformation, there will also be non-zero off-diagonal
terms. Then the principal stretch ratios must be determined based on the eigenvalues
of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor. Denoting these eigenvalues as C' 11 , C' 22 and
C' 33 , the principal stretch ratios are generally given by:
2
λ1 = C' 11, λ 2 = C' 22, λ 3 = C' 33 Eq. 2-12
It can be concluded that the principal stretch ratios completely define the stretch of a
material, but not the rotation.
3
Another way to characterize the deformation of a material is based on the invariants of
the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor. These invariants are defined as:
I 1 = C 11 + C 22 + C 33 Eq. 2-13 4
2 2 2
I 2 = C 11 C 22 + C 22 C 33 + C 33 C 11 – C 12 – C 23 – C 31 Eq. 2-14
I 3 = C 11 C 22 C 33 + 2C 12 C 23 C 31 – C 11 C 23 +
2
Eq. 2-15
5
2 2
– C 22 C 31 – C 33 C 12
Because I 1 , I 2 and I 3 are invariants of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor, their
6
values can also be determined based on the eigenvalues of the right Cauchy-Green
strain tensor. Using Figure 2-12, this yields:
2 2 2
I1 = λ1 + λ2 + λ3 Eq. 2-16
2 2 2 2 2 2
I2 = λ1 λ2 + λ2 λ3 + λ3 λ1 Eq. 2-17
2 2 2
I3 = λ1 λ2 λ3 Eq. 2-18
It should be noted that incompressibility of the material can be expressed as:
λ1 λ2 λ3 = 1 Eq. 2-19
or:
I3 = 1 Eq. 2-20
1 The compressibility can also be expressed in terms of the determinant of the
deformation gradient, det ( F ) . Since F = RU , this can be evaluated as:
det ( F ) = det ( RU ) = det ( R )det ( U ) =
2  --2-
1
= det ( U ) = det  C  = λ 1 λ 2 λ 3 Eq. 2-21
 
so that incompressibility of the material yields:

3
det ( F ) = 1 Eq. 2-22
Stresses
4 Consider the deformed configuration of body B , as indicated in Figure 2-1. On an
elemental area dA with unit normal vector n , an elemental force vector dF is acting.
This force vector is a result of forces being transmitted from one portion of the body
to another. According to the Cauchy stress principle, the stress vector or traction vector
5 t is defined as:
dF
t = --------- Eq. 2-23
dA
6 Similar to Eq. 2-1 to Eq. 2-3, the components of t , n and dF are indicated as t 1 , t 2 ,
t 3 , n 1 , n 2 , n 3 , dF 1 , dF 2 and dF 3 . Now the following relation between the
components of the stress vector and the components of the normal vector can be
given:
t1 T 11 T 12 T 13 n1
t2 = T 21 T 22 T 23 n2 Eq. 2-24
t3 T 31 T 32 T 33 n3
which, by virtue of Figure 2-23, can also be written as:

Output Requests 31
dF 1 T 11 T 12 T 13 n1
dF 2 = T 21 T 22 T 23 n 2 dA Eq. 2-25
dF 3 T 31 T 32 T 33 n3
In Eq. 2-24 and Figure 2-25, T 11 to T 33 are the components of the true or Cauchy stress
tensor T . The components T 11 , T 22 and T 33 are called the normal or direct stress
components, while the other components are called shear stress components. The first
1
index of the stress components defines the normal of the plane on which the stress
vector acts. The second index indicates the positive direction of the component (see
also Figure 2-1). It can be shown that the Cauchy stress tensor is symmetric, so
T 12 = T 21 , T 13 = T 31 and T 23 = T 32 . The physical meaning of the Cauchy 2
stress tensor is that it gives the current force per unit deformed area.
Another frequently used stress tensor in a large deformation analysis is the second
Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor. In order to define this tensor, the force vector dF is
transformed using the inverse of the deformation gradient F : 3
dFˆ 1 dF 1
–1
dFˆ 2 = F dF 2 Eq. 2-26
dF̂ 3
dF 3 4
^
Assuming that the transformed force vector d F acts on the elemental area dA 0 with
unit normal vector N in the undeformed configuration (see Figure 2-1), the
components S 11 to S 33 of the symmetric second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor S are 5
defined as:
E3 6
T 23
T 21
E1 E2
T 22
Figure 2.2 Interpretation of stress components

dFˆ 1 S 11 S 12 S 13 N1
dFˆ 2 = S 21 S 22 S 23 N 2 dA 0 Eq. 2-27

S 31 S 32 S 33 N3
dFˆ 3
The physical meaning of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor is not so clear. It can
1 be considered to give the transformed current force per unit undeformed area.
Using the deformation gradient, the Cauchy stress tensor and the second Piola-
Kirchhoff stress tensor can be related to another by:
2 S = det ( F )F
–1
T(F
–1 T
) Eq. 2-28
1 T
T = ------------------ FSF Eq. 2-29
det ( F )
3 Notice that for small deformations and small rotations, F ≈ I , so the differences
between the Cauchy stress tensor and the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor vanish.
In that case they reduce to the so-called engineering stress tensor σ , which is known to
give the force per unit undeformed area.
4 Example
Due to a uniaxial tensile load, the state of deformation of a body is assumed to be
given by (see also Figure 2-1):
5 1 1
x 1 = 4X 1, x 2 = – --- X 2, x 3 = – --- X 3
2 2
The force is assumed to be homogeneously distributed over the cross section A in the
E 2 - E 3 -plane. Evaluating equation Figure 2-25 for the cases that n = E 1 ,
6 n = E 2 and n = E 3 yields:
F T 11 T 12 T 13 1
0 = T 21 T 22 T 23 0 A
0 T 31 T 32 T 33 0
0 T 11 T 12 T 13 0
0 = T 21 T 22 T 23 1 A
0 T 31 T 32 T 33 0
Output Requests 33
A0
A0
F
A
F
E3
E2
A 1
E1
Figure 2-2 Uniaxially loaded body
0 T 11 T 12 T 13 0
2
0 = T 21 T 22 T 23 0 A
0 T 31 T 32 T 33 1
so that the only non-zero component of the Cauchy stress tensor is: 3
F
T 11 = ---
A
Because: 4
4 0 0
1
F = 0 – --- 0 , det ( F ) = 1
2
1
5
0 0 – ---
2
it follows from Figure 2-28 that the only non-zero component of the second Piola-
Kirchhoff stress tensor is: 6
1F
S 11 = ------ ---
16 A
Upon rewriting the current cross sectional area A in terms of the original cross
sectional area A 0 as A = 1 --- A 0 , the non-zero component of the second Piola-
4
Kirchhoff stress tensor can also be written as:
1F
S 11 = --- ------
4 A0
in which F ⁄ A 0 is recognized as the engineering stress σ 11 . The differences

between the various stress components can be summarized as:
1
T 11 = 4σ 11 , S 11 = --- σ 11
4
6
Results Files 35
2.3 Results Files

When a SOL 600 analysis has been completed successfully, a message file and a results
file are created and saved. If you request that a print file be saved in addition to the
standard results file, or if the analysis aborts prematurely due to an error, a print file
is also saved.
Files Generated During the Analysis

1
Print Files
The print files jobname.f06 and jobname.marc.out contain a complete text
output of solution information, including an input summary, solution diagnostics 2
from each processor, a geometry summary, and results if requested.
Because of the potential size of the print file, certain information is not included.
Instead of printing out a complete echo of the input deck, a summary is provided.
Stress and strain results, at the nodes of each element, are not included in the print file. 3
Except for some nonlinear analyses, only centroidal stresses and strains are written to
the print file.
Analysis Results Files 4

The analysis results file contains all of the numerical results computed in the analysis.
This file in MSC.Nastran is designated as jobname.op2 or jobname.xdb. Because SOL
600 uses the MSC.Marc solver, a MSC.Marc results file is also available, designated
jobname.t16/t19. If you are using MSC.Patran, the full set of stress and strain
measures are available in the t16/t19 file while the more basic measures are available
5
in the .op2 and .xdb files. The t19 file is an ASCII file. The t16 file is a binary file and
can be moved and used on different platforms.
For more information, see MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 6: Results
Postprocessing.
6
Message Files
The message files jobname.marc.sts and jobname.msg contain all diagnostic
error and warning messages output by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600).
The message file is the best way to immediately check an analysis for successful
execution.
1 SOL 600 has five levels of messages:

1. Informative messages.
2. Nonfatal warning message of something that could affect the results.
3. Serious warnings.
2 4. Fatal errors (all occurrences will be found before aborting).
5. Immediately fatal errors.
• An example of a Level 1 message is a message that indicates that a new
processor has begun execution. These messages provide job information.
3 • An example of a Level 2 message is one indicating that the aspect ratio is
greater than 15. This may or may not be a serious problem.
• An example of a Level 3 message is a warning about a highly distorted
4 element.
• An example of a Level 4 message is the warning “undefined node used in
rigid element.”
• An example of a Level 5 message is “Unable to open file” message. The job is
5 immediately aborted.
Postprocessing with MSC.Patran

The results from an MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear Analysis can be read into and
6 postprocessed using MSC.Patran. Typically you will get the most complete set of
results (i.e. rigid contact body information such as reaction forces, etc.) if you use the
.t16 or .t19 results options (see Section 14.1 “Output from the Analysis” on how to
select which output files will be created), but you can also postprocess using an .xdb
or .op2 formatted file.
The Results application in MSC.Patran provides the capabilities for creating,
modifying, deleting, posting, unposting and manipulating results visualization plots
as well as viewing the finite element model. In addition, results can be derived,
combined, scaled, interpolated, extrapolated, transformed, and averaged in a variety
of ways, all controllable by the user.
Results Files 37
Control is provided for manipulating the color/range assignment and other attributes
for plot tools, and for controlling and creating animations of static and transient
results.
Results are selected from the database and assigned to plot tools using simple forms.
Results transformations are provided to derive scalars from vectors and tensors as
well as to derive vectors from tensors. This allows for a wide variety of visualization
tools to be used with all of the available results. 1
If the job was created within MSC.Patran such that a Patran jobname of the same name
as the Nastran jobname exists, you only need to use the Results tools and MSC.Patran
will import or attach the jobname.xxx file without you having to select it. If you did
not create the job in MSC.Patran you can still import the model and results and
postprocess.
2
6
6
SECTION
Solution Methods and Strategies in
3 Nonlinear Analysis
■ Introduction
■ Linear Static Analysis Procedure
■ Applying Constraints
■ Adding Nonlinear Effects
■ Numerical Methods in Solving Equations
■ Iteration Methods
■ Convergence Controls
■ Singularity Ratio
■ Guidelines for Analysis Methods
■ References
40 Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
3.1 Introduction
The finite element method is a powerful tool for analyzing complex problems in
structural and continuum mechanics. The analysis of a structure using the finite
element method has four basic steps:
1. Modeling, in which the structure is subdivided into an assemblage of
1 discrete volumes called finite elements, and properties are assigned to each
element.
2. Evaluation of element characteristics, such as stiffness and mass matrices,
followed by assembling the element characteristic matrices to obtain the
assembled or so-called “global” matrices characteristic of the entire
2 structure. A similar process is followed to obtain the total loads, in vector
form, applied to the structure.
3. Solution of the system equations for displacements, natural frequencies and
mode shapes, or buckling load factors.
3 4. Calculating other quantities of interest, such as strains, stresses and strain
energy.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses the finite element displacement method, in
4 which a large system of equations is solved to obtain the displacements at all node
points of the structure. Strains are then obtained on the element level as derivatives of
displacements and stresses are obtained by multiplying a small matrix of material
constants by the strains. Comprehensive presentations of the finite element method
together with numerous applications are available in textbooks and the research
5 literature.
The main purposes of this chapter are more limited, namely:

1. To give a brief overview of the finite element displacement method for
6 solving linear and nonlinear structural problems in statics.

2. To describe the theory, techniques and algorithms specifically used in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600).
3. Outline some guidelines for selecting appropriate analysis methods.
Linear Static Analysis Procedure 41
3.2 Linear Static Analysis Procedure

In a linear static analysis there is assumed to be a linear relationship between the
applied loads and the response of the structure. Because of the linear relationship you
need only calculate the stiffness of the structure once. From this stiffness
representation you can find the structure’s response to other applied loads by
multiplying the load vectors by the decomposed stiffness matrix. In addition, loads
can be combined using the principle of superposition.
1
A linear analysis is the simplest and most cost effective type of analysis to perform.
Because linear analysis is simple and inexpensive to perform and often gives
satisfactory results, it is the most commonly used structural analysis. Nonlinearities
due to material, geometry, or boundary conditions are not included in this type of 2
analysis. The behavior of an isotropic, linear, elastic material can be defined by two
material constants: Young’s modulus, and Poisson’s ratio.
In actuality, linear analysis is merely an approximation to the true behavior of a
structure. In some cases the approximation is very close to the true behavior, in other 3
cases linear analysis may provide highly inaccurate results.
The following is a summary of the main steps in a linear static analysis:
1. Input: The problem geometry (nodes and elements), physical and material
properties, and loads and boundary conditions are taken from the
4
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear input file and put into the MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear database.
2. Bandwidth: Minimization (Optional). The nodes are renumbered internally
for minimum bandwidth. 5
3. Element stiffness matrix and force vector calculation: The element
stiffness matrices and equivalent nodal forces for distributed forces are
computed. The detailed descriptions in the “Element Library” in Chapter 11
provide the kinds of forces that each element can support. 6
4. Global stiffness matrix and load vector assembly: The global stiffness
matrix and the combined nodal force vectors are assembled. Boundary and
constraint conditions are incorporated by modifying the element stiffness
matrices and force vectors.
5. Solution of equations: The nodal displacement vector {δ} is computed by
solving the system of simultaneous equations Eq. 3-6.
6. Strain energy and reaction force calculation: The strain energy and
reaction forces (unbalanced grid point forces) are computed using the
displacement vector, the element stiffness matrices and the force vectors.
7. Stresses and strains calculation: The strains and stresses are computed at
selected points for each element. See the “Element Library” in Chapter 11 for
a detailed descriptions of the stress recovery points for the MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear elements.
6
Applying Constraints 43
3.3 Applying Constraints

Once you have constructed a model of your structure, constraints are added that force
selected portions of your model to remain fixed or to move by a specified amount.
These constraints can be either:
• Single Point Constraints

• Multipoint Constraints 1
Single Degrees-of-Freedom
A constraint on a single degree-of-freedom (Single Point Constraint, or SPC) assigns a
zero or nonzero value to a single degree-of-freedom. It can be expressed as: 2
δi = u Eq. 3-1
where u is the value of the prescribed displacement on the degree-of-freedom δi. The
case of u = 0 is the most common case, and is often used as a boundary condition, to 3
“fix” or “ground” the movement of a point in a certain direction.
Since the value of δi is known, one could in principle eliminate the specified degree-
of-freedom from the other degrees-of-freedom to be solved for as unknowns. This
would reduce the size of the system of equations to be solved, but on the other hand 4
it would take time to perform the elimination, and this approach adds complexity to
the code.
MSC.Nastran implicit Nonlinear uses a different technique. A number which is large
compared to the stiffness coefficients (say, for discussion, 1020) is added to the 5
diagonal term Kii of the equation for the degree-of-freedom to be constrained. Also, if
the degree-of-freedom is to be constrained to a nonzero value u, then u x 1020 is added
to the right hand side of the modified equation. This modified equation is now:
K i1 δ 1 + … + ( K ii )10 20 δ i + … + K in δ n = F i + ( u × 10 20 ) 6
Assuming all Kij to be small with respect to 1020, the solution of the system of
equations is obtained with negligible error.
The modified system of equations remain well conditioned. The value used by
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear for the large number is 1010 times the largest stiffness
coefficient found in the assembled matrix.
Multiple Degrees-of-Freedom
A multipoint constraint (MPC) equation is a relationship between several degrees-of-
freedom that must be enforced on the structure.
Some examples are as follows:
Consider the structure in Figure 3-1, made up of three plane stress elements. To make
1 node 4 lie exactly on the straight line between nodes 2 and 7, we need to enforce the
two MPC equations.
UX(4) = 0.5 x UX(2) + 0.5 x UX(7)
UY(4) = 0.5 x UY(2) + 0.5 x UY(7)

2
Y
6 7 8
3 1 4
3
5
X
1 2 3 92-168
4 Figure 3-1 Multipoint Equations to Enforce Compatibility of Node 4 Along

Line Connecting Nodes 2 and 7
To connect a plate or beam element (which has six degrees-of-freedom per node—
three displacements and three rotations) to a solid element (which has only three
5 translations), it is necessary to relate the rotation of the plate to the displacements of
the solid. As an example, consider Figure 3-2 where we see the side view of a
plate-to-solid transition. The equation:
ROTZ ( 3 ) = ( UX ( 2 ) – UX ( 6 ) ) ⁄ ( DELTAY )
6
where DELTAY is the difference in Y-coordinate between nodes 2 and 6, will enforce
the desired compatibility on the rotation about the global Z axis. Other constraints
would need to be written to ensure the compatibility of the other displacements and
rotations.
Y
5 6
Z
1
X
3
4
1 2 92-169
2
Figure 3-2 Side View of a Solid-to-Plate Transition
Compatibility requires that the rotations of the plate element be related to the
displacements on the top and bottom of the solid element. 3
8. Consider Figure 3-3, showing a rigid link connecting two nodes M and S,
each of which has six degrees-of-freedom and is attached to other elements
in the structure.
The displacements at the dependent node S are related to those at the 4
independent node M by the following relationship:
 UX s   UX m   ROTX m 
     
 UY s  =  UY m  + [ H ]  ROTY m 
      5
 UZ s   UZ m   ROTZ m 
and
 ROTX s   ROTX m  6
   
 ROTY s  = [ I ]  ROTY m 
   
 ROTZ s   ROTZ m 
where [I] is a 3 X 3 unit matrix and [H] is given by
0 ( Zs – Zm ) ( Ym – Ys )
[H] = ( Zm – Zs ) 0 ( Xs – Xm )
( Ys – Ym ) ( Xm – Xs ) 0
Z
M (XM, YM, ZM)
1
S (XS, YS, ZS)
2
M = Independent (master) node
S = Dependent (slave) node
X
92-170
3
Figure 3-3 Example of a “Rigid Link” in the Model
If both nodes have six degrees-of-freedom, then multipoint constraint equations can
be written to ensure that, for small displacements, the two nodes move as a rigid body.
4
Incorporating MPC Equations
Various techniques can be used to incorporate MPC equations into the equilibrium
equations. Two of the methods are as follows:
5 Lagrange Multiplier Method. This method uses the mathematical technique of
Lagrange multipliers to enforce the constraints. The number of degrees-of-freedom is
increased, and the conditioning and definiteness of the global matrix may be
adversely affected.
6 Transformation Method. Using the constraint equations, this method eliminates
dependent variables from the list of unknowns, modifying the stiffness associated
with the independent degrees-of-freedom to account for the constraints.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses a special version of the transformation method
which keeps the dependent variables in the system, and applies the constraints at
element level (before assembly).
The following describes the multipoint constraint algorithm used in MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear.
First, we rewrite the constraint equations in matrix form as
{ δ }s = –[ A ] { δ }m Eq. 3-2
where {δ}s are the dependent (“slave”) variables and {δ}m are the independent
(“master”) variables.
Then, the global matrix of Eq. 3-6 can be rewritten in partitioned form as
K ss K sm K si  δ s   Fs  1
   
K ms K mm K mi  δ m  =  F m  Eq. 3-3
   
K is K im K ii  δ i   Fi 
where the subscript i refers to those degrees-of-freedom which are not referenced in 2
any constraint equation.
Substituting {δ}s from Eq. 3-2 into Eq. 3-3 and rearranging, we get
 K
 mm K mi – K ms A 0   δ m   Fm  3
 K   =   Eq. 3-4
 im K ii K is A 0   δ i   Fi 
and
4
 δm 
( [K sm K si ] – [Ks s A 0] ) ×   = { F s } Eq. 3-5
 δi 
T
Premultiplying Eq. 3-5 by [A, % 0] , we get
5
 T  δ
 A K sm A T K si – A T K ss A 0   m   A T Fs 
    =   Eq. 3-6
 0 0 0 0   δi   0 
6
Now subtracting Eq. 3-6 from Eq. 3-4:
 K  δ T
 mm K mi – K ms A 0 A T K sm A T K si A T K ss A 0   m   Fm – A Fs 
 K
– +
   =  
 im K ii K is A 0 0 0 0 0   δi   Fi 
Eq. 3-7
This symmetric Eq. 3-7 gives the reduced equations, which can be solved for the
variables {δ}m,{δ}i. Values of {δ}s can then be recovered from Eq. 3-2. However, this
needs rearrangement of the coefficients in the stiffness matrix. Hence, we do some
more manipulation.
First, we combine Eq. 3-2 with Eq. 3-7:
1 [I] [A] 0  δs 
 
 0 
 F – ATF 
0 ( K mm – K ms A – A K sm + A K ss A ) ( K mi – A K si ) δ
T T T
 m =  m s
   
0 ( K im – K is A ) K ii  δi   Fi 
Eq. 3-8
2 Then we restore symmetry to Eq. 3-8 by first premultiplying the first equation of
Eq. 3-8 by [A]T[Kss] and adding the resulting equation to the second part of Eq. 3-8,
and then, premultiplying the first equation of Eq. 3-8 by Kss. This results in
3 K ss K ss A 0  δs   0 
   TF 
T (
A K ss ( K mm – K ms A – A K sm + 2A K ss A ) mi
T T K – A T K ) δ F
si  m  =  m – A s
   
0 ( K im – K is A ) K ii  δi   Fi 
4 Eq. 3-9
If we solve this modified Eq. 3-9, which is symmetric, the resulting solution vector
will satisfy the constraint equations.
5 For large problems, the modifications implied by Eq. 3-9 will take a substantial
amount of computer time, if performed on the global stiffness matrix. Fortunately, it
is possible to perform the modification at the element level, before assembly. Since the
size of the element stiffness matrices is much smaller than the global matrix, the
6 saving in computer time is considerable. Hence, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
applies the constraints at the element level, rather than on the assembled global
stiffness matrix.
Adding Nonlinear Effects 49
3.4 Adding Nonlinear Effects

Linear analysis is based on the following assumptions:
• the structure is only subjected to small displacements when loads are

applied.
• the materials in the structure exhibit a linear relationship between stress and
strain. 1
• boundary conditions remain constant.
When these assumptions are violated, linear analysis is no longer valid and nonlinear
effects must be introduced.
2
Nonlinear problems are classified into three broad categories: geometric nonlinearity,
material nonlinearity, and boundary condition nonlinearity (contact).
Sources of Nonlinearity
3
Geometric Nonlinearity
Geometrically nonlinear problems involve large displacements; “large” means that
the displacements invalidate the small displacement assumptions inherent in the
equations of linear analysis. For example, consider a classical thin plate subject to a
4
lateral load; if the deflection of the plate’s midplane is anything close to the thickness
of the plate, then the displacement is considered large and a linear analysis is not
applicable.
Another aspect of geometric nonlinear analysis involves follower forces. Consider a
5
slender cantilever beam subject to an initially vertical end load. The load is sufficient
to cause large displacements.
In the deformed shape plot, the load is no longer vertical-it has “followed” the
structure to its deformed state. Capturing this behavior requires the iterative update
techniques of nonlinear analysis.
For details on the finite element formulations for geometric nonlinearities, see
“Geometric Nonlinearities” in Chapter 4.
Material Nonlinearity
Recall that linear analysis assumes a linear relationship between stress and strain.
Material nonlinear analysis solution sequences can be used to analyze problems in
static analysis where the stress-strain relationship of the material is nonlinear. In
addition, large strain situations can be analyzed. Examples of material nonlinearities
1 include metal plasticity, materials such as soils and concrete, or rubbery materials
(where the stress-strain relationship is nonlinear elastic). Various plasticity theories
such as von Mises or Tresca (for metals), and Mohr-Coulomb or Drucker-Prager (for
frictional materials such as soils or concrete) can be selected by the user. Three choices
for the definition of subsequent yield surfaces are available in MSC.Nastran Implicit
2 Nonlinear. They are isotropic hardening, kinematic hardening, or combined isotropic
and kinematic hardening. With such generality, most plastic material behavior, with
or without the Bauschinger effect, can be modeled.
For details on the finite element formulations for material nonlinearities, see
3 “Material Nonlinearities” in Chapter 4.
Contact
Contact problems exhibit nonlinear effects due to changes in boundary conditions. If
4 there is a change in constraints due to contact during loading, the problem may be
classified as a boundary nonlinear problem and would require CGAP elements or
slide line contact algorithm.
For details on the finite element formulations for boundary nonlinearities, see
5 “Nonlinear Boundary Conditions” in Chapter 4.
Subcases, Load Increments, and Iterations

In a nonlinear analysis, loading is typically applied in subcases both to allow for the
6 nonlinear behavior to occur in the numerical processing and to give you control over
restarts if problems (divergence, excessive iterations, etc.) occur during the solution.
The subcase structure in a nonlinear analysis differs from a typical linear analysis. In
a nonlinear analysis, subcases are cumulative; that is, the loads and boundary
conditions at the end of a subcase are the initial conditions for the next subcase.
Superposition cannot be applied in nonlinear problems. In general, a different loading
sequence (reordering of the subcases) requires a complete new analysis.
Function of the Subcase

In a nonlinear static analysis, you first determine the total value of loading to be
applied at a particular stage of the analysis. This loading value is selected with the
LOAD Case Control command specifying a load set ID that exists in the Bulk Data. In
this case, the subcase functions as a type of landmark in the loading history. It may be
an expected point or a point at which the nature of the loading changes (for example,
first applying an internal pressure loading and then an axial loading on a cylinder). 1
The subcase is a major partition of the loading history. The loading history should be
divided into subcases since this provides you with more control over the solution and
restart strategy.
Load Increments 2
In the loading history, the total change of loading applied during a subcase can be
subdivided into smaller parts to allow the solution to converge. These subdivisions
within a subcase are termed load increments. Load increments are specified in
MSC.Patran on the Load Increments subform and are defined in the Bulk Data file by 3
the NINC field on the NLPARM entry. Selecting a number of increments divides the
total load change applied during the subcase into NINC equal parts. Load increments
may be saved for restart if desired.This is important because sometimes the solution
does not converge during a subcase. If the loading is divided into increments and
these values are saved to the database, the restart strategy can continue from a loading
4
value closer to the problem value than having to go back to the previous subcase.
Iterations
In the incremental solution process, the unbalanced forces that occur during a load
5
increment are reintroduced internally into the solution until the solution has
converged. The process of redistributing the unbalanced force within a load increment
is known as an iteration. The iteration is the lowest level of the solution process.
Iterations continue within a load increment until the solution converges or any of the 6
specified convergence parameters are exceeded.
Nonlinear Equation Solution

A linear finite element system is expressed as:
Ku = F Eq. 3-10
And a nonlinear system is expressed as:
T
K ∆u = F – R = r Eq. 3-11
T
where K is the elastic stiffness matrix, K is the tangent stiffness matrix in a nonlinear
system, ∆u is the displacement vector, F is the applied load vector, and r is the
residual.
The linearized system is converted to a minimization problem expressed as:
T T
ψ ( u ) = 1 ⁄ 2u Ku – u F Eq. 3-12
1 For linear structural problems, this process can be considered as the minimization of
the potential energy. The minimum is achieved when
–1
u = K F Eq. 3-13
2 The function ψ decreases most rapidly in the direction of the negative gradient.
∇ψ ( u ) = F – Ku = r Eq. 3-14
One method to solve both linear and nonlinear problems is to use iterations. The
3 objective of the iterative techniques is to minimize the function, ψ , without
decomposing the stiffness matrix. In the simplest methods,
uk + 1 = uk + αk rk Eq. 3-15
4 where
T T
α k = r k r k ⁄ r k Kr k Eq. 3-16
The problem is that the gradient directions are too close, which results in
5 poor convergence.
An improved method led to the conjugate gradient method, in which
uk + 1 = uk + αk Pk Eq. 3-17
6
T T
α k = P k r k – 1 ⁄ P k KP k Eq. 3-18
The trick is to choose P k to be K conjugate to P 1, P 2, …, P k – 1 . Hence, the

name “conjugate gradient methods. Note the elegance of these methods is that the
solution may be obtained through a series of matrix multiplications and the stiffness
matrix never needs to be decomposed.
Certain problems which are ill-conditioned can lead to poor convergence. The
introduction of a preconditioner has been shown to improve convergence. The next
key step is to choose an appropriate preconditioner which is both effective as well as
computationally efficient. The easiest is to use the diagonal of the stiffness matrix. The
incomplete Cholesky method has been shown to be very effective in reducing the
number of required iterations.
SOL 600 Analysis Procedure

Figure 3-4 is a diagram showing the flow sequence of the MSC.Marc portion of SOL
600. This diagram shows the input phase, equivalent nodal load vector calculation, 1
matrix assembly, matrix solution, stress recovery, and output phase. It also indicates
load incrementation and iteration within a load increment.
2
Input Phase:
Read Input Data
Space Allocation
Data Check
Incremental
Loads
Equivalent Nodal
3
Load Vector
Matrix Assembly
Iteration Loop
Matrix Solution
4
Time Step Loop
Stress Recovery
No
Convergence
5
Yes
Output Phase
6
Adapt Mesh
(version 2005)
Yes Next
Increment
No
Stop
Figure 3-4 MSC.Nastran Advanced Nonlinear Flow Diagram

3.5 Numerical Methods in Solving Equations

The finite element formulation leads to a set of linear equations. The solution is
obtained through numerically decomposing the system or obtaining the solution
using iterations. Because of the wide range of problems encountered with
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, there are several solution procedures available.
1 Most analyses result in a system which is real, symmetric, and positive definite. While
this is true for linear structural problems, assuming adequate boundary conditions, it
is not true for all analyses. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has two main modes of
solvers – direct and iterative. Each of these modes has two families of solvers, based
upon the storage procedure. While all of these solvers can be used if there is adequate
2 memory, only a subset uses spill logic for an out-of-core solution. Finally, there are
classifications based upon nonsymmetric and complex systems. This is summarized
below:
3 Direct Direct Iterative

Multifrontal
Sparse
Vendor
Provided
Profile Sparse Sparse
(default) Sparse*
Solver Option 0 4 2 8 6
Real Symmetric Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Real Nonsymmetric Yes No No Yes No
Complex Symmetric Yes No No Yes SUN only
Complex nonsymmetric No No No Yes No
Out-of-core Yes Yes No Yes SGI only
5 Possible problem with poorly
No No Yes No No
conditioned systems
*Available for SGI, HP, and SUN platforms only.
6 Direct Methods
Traditionally, the solution of a system of linear equations was accomplished using
direct solution procedures, such as Cholesky decomposition and the Crout reduction
method. These methods are usually reliable, in that they give accurate results for
virtually all problems at a predictable cost. For positive definite systems, there are no
computational difficulties. For poorly conditioned systems, however, the results can
degenerate but the cost remains the same. The problem with these direct methods is
that a large amount of memory (or disk space) is required, and the computational
costs become very large.
Numerical Methods in Solving Equations 55
Iterative Methods
Iterative solvers are a viable alternative for the solution of large systems. These
iterative methods are based on preconditioned conjugate gradient methods. The single
biggest advantage of these iterative methods is that they allow the solution of very
large systems at a reduced computational cost. This is true regardless of the hardware
configuration. The disadvantage of these methods is that the solution time is
dependent not only upon the size of the problem, but also the numerical conditioning 1
of the system. A poorly conditioned system leads to slow convergence – hence
increased computation costs.
When discussing iterative solvers, two related concepts are introduced: fractal
dimension, and conditioning number. Both are mathematical concepts, although the
fractal dimension is a simpler physical concept. The fractal dimension, the range of
2
which is between 1 and 3, is a measure of the “chunkiness” of the system. For instance,
a beam has a fractal dimension of 1, while a cube has a fractal dimension of 3.
The conditioning number is related to the ratio of the lowest to the highest eigenvalues
of the system. This number is also related to the singularity ratio, which is reported in
3
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear output when using a direct solution procedure. In
problems involving beams or shells, the conditioning number is typically small,
because of large differences between the membrane and bending stiffnesses.
4
Preconditioners
The choice of preconditioner can substantially improve the conditioning of the
system, which in turn reduces the number of iterations required. While all positive
definite systems with N degrees of freedom converges in N iterations, a well 5
conditioned system typically converges in less than the square root of N iterations.
The available preconditioners available in the sparse iterative solver are
Preconditioner Sparse 6
None No
Diagonal Yes
Scaled Diagonal Yes
Incomplete Cholesky Yes
Element Cholesky No
The sparse iterative solver requires an error criteria to determine when convergence
occurs. The default is to use an error criteria based upon the ratio between the
residuals in the solution and the reaction force. After obtaining the solution of the
c
linear equations u evaluate:
C C
Ku = F Eq. 3-19
The residual from the solution procedure is:
A C A C
Res = F – F = F – Ku Eq. 3-20
1 If the system is linear ( K does not change) and exact numerics are preformed,
then Res = 0 .
Because this is an iterative method the residual is nonzero, but reduces in size with
further iterations. Convergence is obtained when
2 Res ⁄ Reac < TOL Eq. 3-21
The tolerance is specified through the NLPARM, TSTEPNL, NLAUTO, and NLSTRAT
options.
3
Storage Methods
In general, a system of linear equations with N unknowns is represented by a matrix
2
of size N by N , or N variables. Fortunately, in finite element or finite difference
4 analyses, the system is “banded” and not all of the entries need to be stored. This
substantially reduces the memory (storage) requirements as well as the
computational costs.
In the finite element method, additional zeroes often exist in the system, which results
5 in a partially full bandwidth. Hence, the profile (or skyline) method of storage is
advantageous. This profile storage method is used in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
to store the stiffness matrix. When many zeroes exist within the bandwidth, the sparse
storage methods can be quite advantageous. Such techniques do not store the zeroes,
but require additional memory to store the locations of the nonzero values. You can
6 determine the “sparsity” of the system (before decomposition) by examining the
statements:
“Number of nodal entries excluding fill in” x
“Number of nodal entries including fill in” y
If the ratio ( x ⁄ y ) is large, then the sparse matrix storage procedure is advantageous.
Nonsymmetric Systems
The following analyses types result in nonsymmetric systems of equations:
• Inclusion of convective terms in heat transfer analysis
Numerical Methods in Solving Equations 57
• Coriolis effects in transient dynamic analysis

• Fluid mechanics
• Soil analysis
• Follower force stiffness
• Frictional contact
The first three always result in a nonsymmetric system. The last three can be solved
1
either fully using the nonsymmetric solver, or (approximately) using a symmetric
solver. The nonsymmetric problem uses twice as much memory for storing the
stiffness matrix.
Iterative Solvers
2
In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, an iterative sparse solver is available using a
sparse matrix technique. This method is advantageous for different classes of problems.
There exist certain types of analyses for which the sparse iterative solver is not 3
appropriate. These types include:
• elastic analysis
• explicit creep analysis
• complex harmonic analysis
4
• substructures
• central difference techniques
• eigenvalue analysis 5
• use of gap elements
Elastic or explicit creep analysis involves repeated solutions using different load
vectors. When a direct solver is used, this is performed very efficiently using back
substitution. However, when an iterative solver is used, the stiffness matrix is never
6
decomposed, and the solution associated with a new load vector requires a complete
re-solution.
The sparse iterative solver can exhibit poor convergence when shell elements or
Herrmann incompressible elements used for hyperelastic analyses are present.
Specifying the Solution Procedure

Selection of the solution procedure is made through the solver related parameters
(ISOLVER, ISYMM, NONPOS, MBYTE, MAXITER, PREVITER, PRECOND, CJTOL)
on the NLSTRAT Bulk Data entry or the parameter MARCSOLV.
References
1 • “NLSTRAT” on page 1502 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• For selecting the solution procedure in MSC.Patran, see “Defining Solution
Parameters in MSC.Patran” in Chapter 7.
6
Iteration Methods 59
3.6 Iteration Methods

MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) offers four iterative procedures that are
employed to solve the equilibrium problem at each load increment: Newton-Raphson,
Modified Newton-Raphson, Newton-Raphson with strain correction, and a secant
procedure.
Full Newton-Raphson Algorithm

1
The basis of the Newton-Raphson method in structural analysis is the requirement
that equilibrium must be satisfied. Consider the following set of equations:
K ( u )δu = F – R ( u ) Eq. 3-22 2

where u is the nodal-displacement vector, F is the external nodal-load vector, R is the
internal nodal-load vector (following from the internal stresses), and K is the tangent-
stiffness matrix. The internal nodal-load vector is obtained from the internal stresses
as 3
T
R = ∑ ∫β σ dv Eq. 3-23
elem V
In this set of equations, both R and K are functions of u . In many cases, F is also a 4
function of u (for example, if F follows from pressure loads, the nodal load vector is
a function of the orientation of the structure). The equations suggest that use of the full
Newton-Raphson method is appropriate.
Suppose that the last obtained approximate solution is termed δu , where
i i
indicates 5
the iteration number. Equation 3-22 can then be written as
i–1 i–1
K ( u n + 1 )δu = F – R ( u n + 1 ) Eq. 3-24
i
This equation is solved for δu and the next appropriate solution is obtained by 6
i i–1 i i i–1 i
∆u = ∆u + δu and u n + 1 = u n + 1 + δu Eq. 3-25
Solution of this equation completes one iteration, and the process can be repeated.
The subscript n denotes the increment number representing the state t = n .
Unless stated otherwise, the subscript n + 1 is dropped with all quantities referring
to the current state.
The full Newton-Raphson method is the default in MSC.Nastran Advanced Nonlinear

(see Figure 3-5). The full Newton-Raphson method provides good results for most
nonlinear problems, but is expensive for large, three-dimensional problems, when the
direct solver is used. The computational problem is less significant when the iterative
solvers are used. It is also the best method for contact problems.
1 r1
Fn + 1
Fn
2
Force
δu1
Solution Converged
3 0 ∆u1 ∆u2 ∆u3

Incremental Displacements
Figure 3-5 Full Newton-Raphson
4 Modified Newton-Raphson Algorithm

The modified Newton-Raphson method is similar to the full Newton-Raphson
method, but does not reassemble the stiffness matrix in each iteration.
5 0
K ( u )δ u
i
= F – R( u
i–1
) Eq. 3-26
6 Fn + 1
r1
Fn
Force δu1
Solution Converged
0 ∆u1 ∆u2 ∆u5

Incremental Displacements
Figure 3-6 Modified Newton-Raphson
The process is computationally inexpensive because the tangent stiffness matrix is

formed and decomposed once. From then on, each iteration requires only forming the
right-hand side and a backward substitution in the solution process. However, the
convergence is only linear, and the potential for a very large number of iterations, or
even nonconvergence, is quite high.
If contact or sudden material nonlinearities occur, reassembly cannot be avoided. The
1
modified Newton-Raphson method is effective for large-scale, only mildly nonlinear
problems. When the iterative solver is employed, simple back substitution is not
possible, making this process ineffective. In such cases, the full Newton-Raphson
method should be used instead. 2
If the load is applied incrementally, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear recalculates the
stiffness matrix at the start of each increment or at selected increments, as specified.
Strain Correction Method 3

The strain correction method is a variant of the full Newton method. This method uses
a linearized strain calculation, with the nonlinear portion of the strain increment
applied as an initial strain increment in subsequent iterations and recycles. This
method is appropriate for shell and beam problems in which rotations are large, but 4
membrane stresses are small.
In such cases, rotation increments are usually much larger than the strain increments,
and, hence, the nonlinear terms can dominate the linear terms. After each
displacement update, the new strains E α β
i
i+1 i
are calculated from u and 5
δu ( = δ u ) which yield
i+1 i 1 i
E αβ = E αβ + --- ( δ u α, β + δu β, α ) + u κ, α δu κ, β + δu κ, α u κβ
i + δu
κ, α δu κ, α
2
This expression is linear except for the last term. Since the iteration procedures start
6
with a fully linearized calculation of the displacement increments, the nonlinear
contributions yield strain increments inconsistent with the calculated displacement
increments in the first iteration. These errors give rise to either incorrect plasticity
calculations (when using small strain plasticity method), or, in the case of elastic
material behavior, yields erroneous stresses. These stresses, in their turn, have a
dominant effect on the stiffness matrix for subsequent iterations or increments, which
then causes the relatively poor performance.
The remedy to this problem is simple and effective. The linear and nonlinear part of
the strain increments are calculated separately and only the linear part of
l i 1 i i
( E αβ ) = E αβ + --- ( δu α, β + δu β, α ) + u κ, α δu κ, β + δu κ, α u κ β
2
is used for calculation of the stresses. The nonlinear part
nl i+1 1
( E αβ ) = --- δu κ, α δu κ, β Eq. 3-27
2
1 is used as an “initial strain” in the next iteration or increment, which contributes to the
residual load vector defined by
C αβγ δ nl
R = ∫ δ κ, β X κ, α L ∆E γδ dV Eq. 3-28
2 V
This “strain correction” term is defined by
i i C
K ( u n + 1 )δu = F – R ( u n + 1 ) – R Eq. 3-29
3 Since the displacement and strain increments are now calculated in a consistent way,
the plasticity and/or equilibrium errors are greatly reduced. The performance of the
strain correction method is not as good if the displacement increments are (almost)
completely prescribed, which is not usually the case. Finally, note that the strain
4 correction method can be considered as a Newton method in which a different
stiffness matrix is used.
The Secant Method

5 The secant method used by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is based on the Davidon-
rank one, quasi-Newton update. The secant method is similar to the modified
Newton-Raphson method in that the stiffness matrix is calculated only once per
increment. The residual is modified to improve the rate of convergence. When the
iterative solver is employed, simple back substitution is not possible, making this
6 process ineffective. Use the full Newton-Raphson method instead.
Fn + 1
r1
Fn
Force
δu1
1
∆u1 ∆u4
Incremental Displacements 2
Figure 3-7 Secant Newton
The quasi-Newton requirement is that a stiffness matrix for iteration i could be found
based on the right-hand sides of iterations, i and – 1 , as follows 3
i i i i–1 i i–1
K δu = [ F – R ( un + 1 ) ] – [ F – R ( un + 1 ) ] = r – r Eq. 3-30
This problem does not uniquely determine K i . The Davidon-rank one update uses an
additive form on the inverse of the tangent stiffness matrix as follows: 4
i–1 0 –1 i i–1 i–1 0 –1 i i–1 T
i –1 0 –1 [ δu – (K ) (r – r ) ] [ δu – (K ) (r – r )]
(K ) = (K ) + ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ δu
i–1 0 –1 i
– (K ) (r – r
i–1 T
)] (r – r
i i–1
)
Eq. 3-31 5
Specifying the Iteration Method

Selection of the iteration method in MSC.Nastran is made through the IKMETH
6
parameter on the NLSTRAT Bulk Data entry and on the NLPARM entry.
References
• “NLSTRAT” on page 1502 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “NLPARM” on page 1490 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• For selecting the iteration method in MSC.Patran, see “Subcase Parameters”
in Chapter 7.
3.7 Load Increment Size

Selecting a proper load step (time step) increment is an important aspect of a nonlinear
solution scheme. Large steps often lead to many recycles per increment and, if the step
is too large, it can lead to inaccuracies and nonconvergence. On the other hand, using
too small steps is inefficient.
1 Fixed Load Incrementation

When a fixed load stepping scheme is used, it is important to select an appropriate
load step size that captures the loading history and allows for convergence within a
reasonable number of recycles. For complex load histories, it is often necessary to
2 break up the analysis into separate load cases with different step sizes. For fixed
stepping, there is an option to have the load step automatically cut back in case of
failure to obtain convergence. When an increment diverges, the intermediate
deformations after each recycle can show large fluctuations and the final cause of
3 program exit can be any of the following: maximum number of recycles reached (exit
3002), elements going inside out (exit 1005 or 1009) or, in a contact analysis, nodes
sliding off a rigid contact body (exit 2400). These deformations are normally not
visible as post results (there is a feature to allow for the intermediate results to be
available on the post file, see the POST option). If the cutback feature is activated and
4 one of these failures occurs, the state of the analysis at the end of the previous
increment is restored from a copy kept in memory, and the increment is subdivided
into a number of subincrements. The step size is halved until convergence is obtained
or the user-specified number of cutbacks has been performed. Once a subincrement is
5 converged, the analysis continues to complete the rest of the original increment. No
results are written to the post file during subincrementation. When the original
increment is finished, the calculation continues to the next increment with the original
increment count maintained. If the global remeshing option is activated in conjunction
with the cutback feature, then for exit 1005 or 1009, the chosen contact body is
6 remeshed and the analysis is repeated with the original time step before the first
cutback. These issues are avoided by using the AUTO increment options (AUTO on
the NLPARM card).
Direct Substitution
In the Eulerian formulation (R-P FLOW parameter), the governing equation of the
system can be expressed as
Kv = F Eq. 3-32
where v is a velocity vector, and F is a force vector.

Load Increment Size 65
This equation is very nonlinear because K is a nonlinear function of v . By default, a

i
direct substitution method is used to solve the problem. If v is the velocity at iteration
i , the result of iteration i + 1 is
i i+1
K( v ) v = F Eq. 3-33
If this method does not converge in 10 iterations, it is possible to switch into a full
Newton-Raphson method. 1
Load Correction
You usually stop iterating whenever the solution reaches a certain precision; this can
be measured, for instance, by how close 2
r = F–R Eq. 3-34
is from zero, or a variety of other measurements (convergence on energy or

generalized displacements).
3
In the solution of linearized set of equations, there is always a residual error, r , in a
solution. The best way not to let it creep up during incrementation is to carry this error
into the next increment. This procedure is known as Residual Load Correction.
The solution of the system of equations for which the solution needs to be obtained is: 4
i i i
K ( u n + 1 )δu = rn + 1 + rn Eq. 3-35
At every iteration, a modified Newton-Raphson solution is obtained first:

5
* i 1 –1 i
( δu ) = (K ) r Eq. 3-36
i
Substitution in Equation 3-30 allows the direct calculation of δu by means of several
vector operations. First, a coefficient C is obtained
6
i–1 i i–1 T i
[ δu + ( δu * ) – ( δu * ) ] r
C = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Eq. 3-37
i–1 i i – 1 T i–1
[ δu + ( δu * ) – ( δu * ) ] (r – r )
and finally, a correction to incremental displacements is calculated as:
i i i–1 i–1
δu = ( 1 – C ) ( δu * ) – Cδu + C ( δu * )
Adaptive Load (AUTO) Incrementation

In many nonlinear analyses, it is useful to have MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
figure out the appropriate load step size automatically. The basic scheme for
automatic load incrementation is NLAUTO which is appropriate for most
applications and is the default in SOL 600. In addition, so-called “arc-length methods”
are available which are designed for applications like post buckling and snap-through
1 analysis.
NLAUTO Basic Load Incrementation Scheme

The scheme appropriate for most applications is NLAUTO also known as AUTO STEP. The
2 primary control of the load step is based upon the number of recycles needed to obtain
convergence. There are a number of optional user-specified physical criteria that can
be used to additionally control the load step, but they are rarely used or required. For
the recycle based option, the user specifies a desired number of recycles. This number
is used as a target value for the load stepping scheme. If the number of recycles needed
3 to obtain convergence exceeds the desired number, the load step size is reduced, the
recycle counter is reset to zero and the increment is performed again with the new
load step. The factor with which the time step is cut back defaults to 1.2 and can be
specified by you. The load step for the next increment is increased if the number of
4 recycles required in the current increment is less than the desired number. The same
factor that is used for decreasing the time step is used for increasing it. The load step
is never increased during an increment. In addition, the same type of cut-back feature
for fixed load stepping, as described in “Load Increments” on page 51, is available for
this scheme as well.
5 There are some exceptions to the basic scheme outlined above. If an increment is
consistently converging with the original load step and the number of recycles
exceeds the desired number, the number of recycles is allowed to go beyond the
desired number until convergence or up to the user specified maximum number. The
6 time step is then decreased for the next increment. An increment is determined to be
converging if the convergence ratio was decreasing in three previous recycles.
Special rules also apply in a contact analysis. For quasi-static problems, the NLAUTO
option is designed to only use the automated penetration check option (see CONTACT
option, 7th field of 2nd data block; option 3 is always used). Even if you flag the
increment splitting penetration check option, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
internally converts it to the automated penetration check. During the recycles, the
contact status can keep changing (new nodes come in contact, nodes slide to new
segments, separate etc.). Whenever the contact status changes during an increment, a
new set of contact constraints are incorporated into the equilibrium equations and
more recycles are necessary in order to find equilibrium. These extra recycles, which
are solely due to contact changes, are not counted when the comparison is made to the
desired number for determining if the load step needs to be decreased within the
increment. Thus, only true Newton-Raphson iterations are taken into account. For the
load step of the next increment, the accumulated number of recycles during the
previous increment is used. This ensures that the time step is not increased when there
are many changes in contact during the previous increment.
1
In addition to allowing MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear to use the number of recycles
for automatically controlling the step size for NLAUTO, user-specified physical criteria
can be used for controlling the step size. You can specify the maximum allowed
incremental change within certain ranges for specific quantities during an increment.
The quantities available are displacements, rotations, stresses, strains, strain energy, 2
and temperature (in thermal or thermomechanically coupled analyses). These criteria
can be utilized in two ways. By default, they are used as limits, which means that the
load step is decreased if a criterion is violated during the current increment, but they
do not influence the decision to change the load step for the next increment (that is,
only the actual number of recycles versus desired number of recycles controls the load
3
step for the next increment). The criteria can also be used as targets; in which case, they
are used as the main means for controlling the time step for the current and next
increments. If the calculated values of the criteria are higher than the user specified
values the time step is scaled down. If the obtained values for a converged increment 4
are less than the user specified, the time step is scaled up. The scale factor used is the
ratio between the actual value and the target value and this factor is limited by
user-specified minimum and maximum factors (defaults to 0.1 and 10 respectively). If
this type of load step control is used together with the recycle based control, the time
step can be reduced due to whichever criterion that is violated. The decision to
5
increase the step size for the next increment is based upon the physical criteria.
In many analyses it is convenient to obtain post file results at specified time intervals.
This is naturally obtained with a fixed load stepping scheme but not with an automatic
scheme. Traditionally, the post output frequency is given as every nth increment. With
6
the NLAUTO procedure, you can request post output to be obtained at equally spaced
time intervals. In this case, the time step is temporarily modified to exactly reach the
time for output. The time step is then restored in the following increment.
The NLAUTO option also has an artificial damping feature available for mechanical
statics analyses and turned ON by default. If the time step is decreased to below the
user-specified minimum time step, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear normally stops
with exit number 3015; but if the artificial damping feature is activated, the analysis is
continued with a smaller time step. The solution is stabilized by adding a factored
lumped mass matrix to the stiffness matrix and modifying the force vector
consistently. This artificial stabilization is turned off once the time step increases
above the minimum time step. If the feature is used, it might be useful to write post
file results at fixed time interval; otherwise, many increments might appear on the
post file even for a small time period. The critical parameter for this feature is the
(artificial) mass density, is normally selected automatically by the program. Use of the
artificial damping feature allows solution of many post-buckling problems without
1 the need to use arc-length methods (see below).
The defaults of the NLAUTO option are carefully chosen to be adequate in a wide
variety of applications. There are cases, however, when the settings may need to be
modified. Assume that the default settings are used, which means that the recycle
based control is active with an initial load of one per cent of the total. If the structure
2 is weakly nonlinear, convergence is obtained in just a few recycles and the time steps
for successive increments get progressively larger. This can lead to problems if the
initially weakly nonlinear structure suddenly exhibits stronger nonlinearities; for
instance, occurrence of plasticity or parts coming into contact. Possible remedies to
3 this problem include:
• decrease the time step scale factor from 1.2 to a smaller number so the step
size does not grow so rapidly;
• use a physical criterion like maximum increment of displacements to limit
4 the load step;
• use the maximum time step to limit large steps;
• decrease the desired and maximum number of recycles to make the scheme
more prone to decrease the load step if more recycles are needed.
5
Another situation is if the structure is highly nonlinear and convergence is slow. In
this case, it may be necessary to increase the desired number and maximum number
of recycles. In general, there is a close connection between the convergence tolerances
used and the desired number and maximum number of recycles. In some rare cases,
6 it may be beneficial to use one or more physical criteria; for example, the increment of
plastic strain as targets for controlling the load step.
Arc-Length (AUTO INCREMENT) Methods Formulation

The solution methods described above involve an iterative process to achieve
equilibrium for a fixed increment of load. None of them have the ability to deal with
problems involving snap-through and snap-back behavior except the NLAUTO
method with artificial damping. An equilibrium path as shown in Figure 3-8 displays
the features possibly involved.
2
6
F
3
Force 1
4
5
u 2
Displacements
Figure 3-8 Snap-through Behavior
The issue at hand is the existence of multiple displacement vectors, u , for a given
applied force vector, F . This method provides the means to ensure that the correct 3
displacement vector is found. If you have a load controlled problem, the solution
tends to jump from point 2 to 6 whenever the load increment after 2 is applied. If you
have a displacement controlled problem, the solution tends to jump from 3 to 5
whenever the displacement increment after 3 is applied. Note that these problems
appear essentially in quasi-static analyses. In dynamic analyses, the inertia forces help 4
determine equilibrium in a snap-through problem.
Thus, in a quasi-static analysis sometimes it is impossible to find a converged solution
for a particular load (or displacement increment):
5
λ n + 1 F – λ n F = ∆λF
This is illustrated in Figure 3-8 where both the phenomenon of snap-through (going
from point 2 to 3) and snap-back (going from point 3 to 4) require a solution
procedure which can handle these problems without going back along the same 6
equilibrium curve.
As shown in Figure 3-9, assume that the solution is known at point A for load level
λ n F . For arriving at point B on the equilibrium curve, you either reduce the step size
or adapt the load level in the iteration process. To achieve this end, the equilibrium
equations are augmented with a constraint equation expressed typically as the norm
of incremental displacements. Hence, this allows the load level to change from
iteration to iteration until equilibrium is found.
g
λ F
n+1
B
λ F
n
A
r
1 F
2 Figure 3-9 Intersection of Equilibrium Curve with Constraining Surface
The augmented equation, c ( u, λ ) , describes the intersection of the equilibrium curve

with an auxiliary surface g for a particular size of the path parameter η :
3 r ( u, λ ) = λF – R ( u ) = 0
Eq. 3-38
c ( u, λ ) = g ( u, λ ) – ∆η = 0
Variations of the parameter η moves the surface whose intersection with the
4 equilibrium curve r generates a sequence of points along the curve. The distance
between two intersection points, denoted with η 0 and η , denoted by l is the so-called
arc-length.
Linearization of Equation 3-38 around point A in Figure 3-9 yields:
5 K P  δu   –r 
  =  –r  Eq. 3-39
n n 0  δλ 
T
 0
6 where:
∂r ∂r
K = ------ : P = ------ Eq. 3-40
∂u ∂λ
T ∂c ∂c
n = ------ : n 0 = ------ Eq. 3-41
∂u ∂λ
r = λF – R Eq. 3-42
r 0 = g ( u, λ ) – ∆η Eq. 3-43
It can be noted that a standard Newton-Raphson solution procedure is obtained if the

constraint condition is not imposed. The use of the constraint equation causes a loss of
the banded system of equations which would have been obtained if only the K matrix
was used. Instead of solving the N + 1 set of equations iteratively, the block
elimination process is applied.
i–1
Consider the residual at iteration i to which the fraction of load level λ
corresponds 1
i i–1 i–1 i i–1
r (λ ) = λ F – R (u ) Eq. 3-44
i
The residual for some variation of load level, δλ , becomes
i
r (λ
i–1 i
+ δλ ) = δλ F + r ( λ
i i i–1
) Eq. 3-45
2
which can be written as:
δu ( λ
i i–1 i
+ δλ ) = δu ( λ
i i–1
) + δλ δu *
i i
Eq. 3-46 3
i i–1 i –1
where δu ( λ ) = (K ) r Eq. 3-47
and δu * = ( K )
i i –1
F Eq. 3-48 4
i
Notice that δu does not depend on the load level. The equation above essentially
i
establishes the influence of a change in the load level δλ during one iteration on the
change in displacement increment for that iteration. After one iteration is solved, this
equation is used to determine the change in the load level such that the constraint is 5
followed. There are several arc-length methods corresponding to different constraints.
Among them, the most well-known arc-length method is one proposed by Crisfield,
in which the iterative solution in displacement space follows a spherical path centered
around the beginning of the increment. This requirement is translated in the formula: 6
2 i i
c = l = ∆u ∆u Eq. 3-49
where l is the arc length. The above equation with the help of Equation 3-46 and
Equation 3-25 is applied as:
i T i i 2 i–1 i i–1 T i i
[ ( δu * ) δu * ] ( δλ ) + 2 ( ∆u + δu ( λ ) ) δu * ( δλ ) +
T Eq. 3-50
i–1 i i–1 i–1 i i–1 2
[ ( ∆u + δu ( λ ) ) ( ∆u + δu ( λ )) – l ] = 0
1
The equation above is interpreted with i = 1 and δu = 0 in the prediction
phase while retaining the full form of Equation 3-50 in the correction phase. Two
solutions for δλ are available. We choose the one that maintains a positive angle of the
displacement increment from one iteration to the next.
i i
The two roots of this scalar equation are ( δλ ) 1 and ( δλ ) 2 . To avoid going back on the
original load-deflection curve, the angle between the incremental displacement
1 vectors, ∆u
i–1 i
and ∆u (before and after the current iteration, respectively) should
i i i
be positive. Two alternative values of ∆u (namely, ( ∆u ) 1 and ( ∆u ) 2 corresponding
i i
to ( δλ ) 1 and ( δλ ) 2 are obtained and the cosine of two corresponding angles ( φ 1 and
φ 2 ) are given by
2 [ ( ∆u n + 1 ) 1 ] ∆u n + 1
i T i–1
cos φ 1 = -------------------------------------------------------
- Eq. 3-51
l
i T i–1
[ ( ∆u n + 1 ) 2 ] ∆u n + 1
cos φ 2 = -------------------------------------------------------
3 and
l
- Eq. 3-52
0
Once again, the prediction phase is interpreted with i = 1 and ∆u n + 1 = ∆u n ,
while Equation 3-51 and Equation 3-52 retain their full form in the correction phase.
i i
4 As mentioned earlier, the appropriate root, ( δλ ) 1 or ( δλ ) 2 is that which gives a
positive cos φ . In case both the angles are positive, the appropriate root is the one
closest to the linear solution given as:
i–1 i i–1 i 2
i ( ∆u + δu ) ( ∆u + δu ) – l
δλ
5 = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 ( ∆u
i–1
+ δu )δu *
i i
Eq. 3-53
Crisfield’s solution procedure, generalized to an automatic load incrementation

process, has been implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear as one of the
6 options under the AUTO INCREMENT (NLSTRAT and PARAM,MARCAUTO) model
definition option. Various components of this process are shown in Figure 3-10.
2 1 –1 2
δu ( λ ) = K f
2
Force 1
r
1
2
0 1
λ  ∆u   ∆u 1 Incremental Displacement
 *  *
 δu 2
 *
3
Figure 3-10 Crisfield’s Constant Arc Length
The constraints in Equation 3-49 and Equation 3-50 are imposed at every iteration.
Disadvantage of the quadratic equation suggested by Crisfield is the introduction of 4
an equation with two roots and thus the need for an extra equation to solve the system
for the calculated roots if two real roots exists. This situation arises when the
1 1
contribution ∆u (or δu ) is very large in comparison to the arc-length. This can be
avoided in most cases by setting sufficiently small values of the error tolerance on the
residual force. In case the above situation still persists despite the reduction of error 5
tolerance, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has two options to proceed:
1. To attempt to continue the analysis with the load increment used in the
initial step of auto increment process.
2. Use the increment resulting from the linear constraint for the load.
6
This is circumvented in Ramm’s procedure due to the linearization.
Another approach to impose the constraint is due to Ramm, who also makes use of a
quadratic equation to impose the constraint giving rise to the Riks-Ramm method. The
difference is that while Crisfield imposes the constraint as a quadratic equation,
Ramm linearized the constraint.
Geometrically, the difference between the two methods is that the Crisfield method
enforces the correction on the curve of the augmented equation introducing no
residual for the augmented equation. Ramm takes the intersection between the
linearizations of the curves which gives a residual of the augmented equation for the
next step. Both methods converge to the same solution, the intersection of the two
curves, unless approximations are made.
The Riks-Ramm constraint is linear, in that:
2
c = l = ∆u n ∆u n + 1
1
which results in a linear equation for δλ :
T i i 2
∆u n ( δu + δλ δu * ) = l
2 Thus, the load parameter predictor is calculated as:
T i –1 i
1 ∆u n l – ( ∆u n ) [ ( K ) r ]
δλ n + 1 = ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Eq. 3-54
T 1
∆u n ( δu * )
3
while during the corrector phase it is:
i T i –1 i
i ( ∆u n + 1 ) [ ( K ) r ]
δλ n + 1 = – ------------------------------------------------------- Eq. 3-55
4 i
( ∆u n + 1 ) ( δu * )
T i
It is noted that in the definition of the constraint, the normalized displacement of the
∂c
previous step is used for the normal to the auxiliary surface ------ = n . Thus,
∂u
problems can arise if the step size is too big. In situations with sharp curvatures in the
5 solution path, the normal to the prediction may not find intersections with the
equilibrium curve. Note that the norm of the displacement increment during the
iterations is not constant in Riks-Ramm method.
In contact problems, sudden changes of the stiffness can be present (due to two bodies
6 which are initially not in contact suddenly make contact). Hence, a potential problem
exists in the Riks-Ramm method if the inner-product of the displacement due to the
i
load vector δu * and the displacement increment ∆u n is small. This could result in a
very large value of the load increment for which convergence in the subsequent
iterations is difficult to achieve. Therefore, a modified predictor can be used resulting
in a modified Riks-Ramm procedure as:
1 1 T 1
1 l n – 1 δu – [ αδu * ] δu
∆λ *
= --------------------------------------------------------------------- Eq. 3-56
1 1
[ αδ∆u * ]∆u *
where
T i
∆u n δu *
α = --------------------------
- Eq. 3-57
T i
∆u n δu *
This method effectively scales the load increment to be applied in the prediction and
is found to be effective for contact problems. 1
Refinements and Controls
The success of the methods depend on the suitable choice of the arc-length:
C = l
2
2
The initial value of the arc-length is calculated from the initial fraction β of the load
specified by you in the following fashion:
Kδu = βF – R Eq. 3-58 3

2
l ini = ∆u Eq. 3-59
In subsequent steps the arc-length can be reduced or increased at the start of a new
load step depending on the number of iterations I 0 in the previous step. This number 4
of iterations in compared with the desired number of iterations I d which is typically
set to 3 or 5. The new arc-length is then given by:
2 Id 2
l new = ---- l prev
I0
Eq. 3-60 5
Two control parameters exist to limit the maximum enlargement or the minimum
reduction in the arc-length.
2
6
l
min < -------- < max Eq. 3-61
2
l ini
In addition, the maximum value can be set to the load multiplier during a particular
iteration. In general, control on the limiting values with respect to the arc-length
multiplier is preferred in comparison with the maximum fraction of the load to be
applied in the iteration since a solution is sought for a particular value of the
arc-length.
Also, attention must be paid to the following:
1. In order to tract snap-through problems, the method of allowing solution if

the stiffness matrix becomes nonpositive needs to be set.
2. The maximum number of iterations must be set larger than the desired
number of iterations.
Specifying the Load Incrementation Method

1 Selection of the load incrementation method in MSC.Nastran is made on the
NLSTRAT Bulk Data entry.
References
2
• “NLPCI” on page 1497 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• For selecting the load incrementation method in MSC.Patran, see “Subcase
Parameters” in Chapter 7.
3
6
Residual Load Correction 77
3.8 Residual Load Correction

The residual load is applied as a correcting force to ensure that equilibrium is
maintained and, hence, that an accurate solution is obtained for nonlinear problems.
The residual load correction enforces global equilibrium at the start of each new
increment. This prevents the accumulation of out-of-equilibrium forces from
increment to increment and makes the solution less sensitive to the step size. 1
Figure 5-1 shows how stiffness is based on the state at the start of a step. The variables
are defined below for increments i = 1,2,3:
• F i applied forces for i = 1,2,3

• u i calculated displacements for i = 1,2,3 2
• R i residual loads for i = 1,2,3
Φ2 + ∆Φ2
Ρ3 3
Ρ2
Φ1 + ∆Φ1
Ρ1
Φ1
Υ1 Υ2 Υ3
5
Figure 5-1 Stiffness Based on State at Start of Step
The residual load correction is the difference between the internal forces and the
externally applied loads. The residual load correction is expressed as
6
R = P – ∫ β T σdV Eq. 3-62
where β is the differential operator which transforms displacements to strains, σ is

the current generalized stresses, P is the total applied load vector, and R is the
residual load correction.
In order to evaluate the residual load correction accurately, evaluate the integral by
summing the contributions from all integration points. The residual load correction
feature requires that stresses be stored at all the integration points. Data storage at all
integration points is the default in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
3.9 Convergence Controls

Three methods are available for determining if convergence is obtained on any given
iteration: residual force, displacement, and strain energy. You can select one of these
three criteria for convergence or you may specify a combination of residual and
displacement. The AND combination signals that both residual and displacement
must be met, while the OR combination specifies that either one can satisfy
1 convergence criteria. If you are using residual there may be cases in which the force
residuals are null in which case is it necessary to switch over to displacement. An
Autoswitching option allows for this switching. In addition you can specify that the
convergence measures be in absolute terms, in relative terms, or in both.
2 The default measure for convergence in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is residual
which is based on the magnitude of the maximum residual load compared to the
maximum reaction force. This method is appropriate since the residuals measure the
out-of-equilibrium force, which should be minimized. This technique is also
3 appropriate for Newton methods, where zero-load iterations reduce the residual load.
The method has the additional benefit that convergence can be satisfied without
iteration. You have complete control over how convergence is defined through the
Iterations Parameters form in MSC.Patran or through the options on the NLSTRAT
card.
4 The basic procedures are outlined below.
1. RESIDUAL CHECKING
F residual
5 ∞
---------------------------------- < TOL 1
F reaction
Eq. 3-63
∞
F residual M residual
∞ ∞
---------------------------------- < TOL 1 and ----------------------------------- < TOL 2 Eq. 3-64
F reaction M reaction
6 ∞ ∞
F residual < TOL 1 Eq. 3-65

∞
F residual < TOL 1 and M residual < TOL 2 Eq. 3-66

∞ ∞
Where F is the force vector, and M is the moment vector. TOL 1 and TOL 2
are control tolerances. F ∞ indicates the component of F with the highest
absolute value. Residual checking has one drawback. In some special
problems, such as free thermal expansion, there are no reaction forces. If the
AUTOSW flag on the NLSTRAT card is ON the program automatically uses
displacement checking in this cases.
Convergence Controls 79
2. DISPLACEMENT CHECKING
δu ∞
----------------- < TOL 1 Eq. 3-67
∆u ∞
δu ∞ δφ ∞
----------------- < TOL 1 and ----------------- < TOL 2 Eq. 3-68
∆u ∞ ∆φ ∞
1
δu ∞ < TOL 1 Eq. 3-69
δu ∞ < TOL 1 and δφ ∞ < TOL 2 Eq. 3-70
where ∆u is the displacement increment vector, δu is the correction to 2

incremental displacement vector, ∆φ is the correction to incremental
rotation vector, and δφ is the rotation iteration vector. With this method,
convergence is satisfied if the maximum displacement of the last iteration is
small compared to the actual displacement change of the increment. A
disadvantage of this approach is that it results in at least one iteration,
3
regardless of the accuracy of the solution.
δi Correction to incremental displacements of ith iteration 4

un Displacements at increment n
F i
δ
δ0 ----------------- ≤ Tolerance
δ1 i
δk ∑ δj 5
j = 0
0 k+1
u u
n+1 n+1
u
Figure 3-11 Displacement Control
6
3. STRAIN ENERGY CHECKING
This is similar to displacement testing where a comparison is made between
the strain energy of the latest iteration and the strain energy of the increment.
With this method, the entire model is checked.
δE
------- < TOL 1 Eq. 3-71
∆E
where ∆E is the strain energy of the increment and δE is the correction to

incremental strain energy of the iteration. These energies are the total
energies, integrated over the whole volume. A disadvantage of this
approach is that it results in at least one iteration, regardless of the accuracy
of the solution. The advantage of this method is that it evaluates the global
accuracy as opposed to the local accuracy associated with a single node.
1 Different problems require different schemes to detect the convergence efficiently and
accurately. To do this, the following combinations of residual checking and
displacement checking are also available.
4. RESIDUAL OR DISPLACEMENT CHECKING
2 This procedure does convergence checking on both residuals (Procedure 1)
and displacements (Procedure 2). Convergence is obtained if one converges.
5. RESIDUAL AND DISPLACEMENT CHECKING
This procedure does a convergence check on both residuals and
3 displacements (Procedure 4). Convergence is achieved if both criteria
converge simultaneously.
For problems where maximum reactions or displacements are extremely small (even
close to the round-off errors of computers), the convergence check based on relative
4 values could be meaningless if the convergence criteria chosen is based on these small
values. It is necessary to check the convergence with absolute values; otherwise, the
analysis is prematurely terminated due to a nonconvergent solution. Such situations
are not predicable and usually happen at certain stages of an analysis. For example,
5 problems with stress free motion (rigid body motion or free thermal expansion) and
small displacements (springback or constraint thermal expansion) may need to check
absolute value at some stage of the analysis, as shown in Table 11-1. However, it is also
difficult to determine when to check the absolute value and how small the absolute
criterion value should be. In order to improve the robustness of an FE analysis,
6 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to use the AUTOSW option specified on
the NLSTRAT card to switch the convergence check scheme automatically if the above
mentioned situation occurs during the analysis. Using the AUTOSW option allows
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear to automatically change the convergence check
scheme to Procedure 4 if small reactions or displacements are detected. This function
can be deactivated by specifying an absolute value check as before.
Convergence Controls 81
Table 11-1 Effectiveness of various Relative Tolerance Convergence Testing Criterion

Convergence Variable
Analysis Type Displacement/R Residual Strain Energy
otation Force/Torque
Stress-free motion Yes No No
Springback No Yes No
Free Thermal Expansion
Constraint Thermal Expansion
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
1
Yes – relative tolerance testing works.
No – relative tolerance testing doesn’t work.
Specifying Convergence Criteria 2

Selection of the convergence criteria in MSC.Nastran is made through the
convergence criteria parameters on the NLPARM and NLSTRAT Bulk Data entries.
References
• “NLPARM” on page 1490 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide. 3
• For selecting the load incrementation method in MSC.Patran, see “Solution
4
6
3.10 Singularity Ratio

The singularity ratio, R , is a measure of the conditioning of the system of linear
equations. R is related to the conditioning number, C , which is defined as the ratio
between the highest and lowest eigenvalues in the system. The singularity ratio is an
upper bound for the inverse of the matrix conditioning number.
1 1⁄R≤C Eq. 3-72
C and R establish the growth of errors in the solution process. If the errors on the
right-hand side of the equation are less than E prior to the solution, the errors in the
solution will be less than δ , with
2 δ ≤ CE Eq. 3-73
The singularity ratio is a measure that is computed during the Crout elimination
process of MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear using the direct solver. In this process, a
3 recursive algorithm redefines the diagonal terms
k–1
(k) (k – 1)
K kk = K kk – ∑ K mk K mk 1 ≤i≤k–1 Eq. 3-74
m = i
4 where i is a function of the matrix profile. K kk is a diagonal of the kth degree of
freedom. The singularity ratio is defined as
(k) (k – 1)
R = min K kk ⁄ K kk Eq. 3-75
5 (k) (k – 1)
If all K kk and K kk are positive, the singularity ratio indicates loss of accuracy
during the Crout elimination process. This loss of accuracy occurs for all positive
definite matrices. The number of digits lost during the elimination process is
approximately equal to
6
n lost = – log 10 R Eq. 3-76
The singularity ratio also indicates the presence of rigid body modes in the structure.
(k)
In that case, the elimination process produces zeros on the diagonal K kk ≅ 0 .
Exact zeros never appear because of numerical error; therefore, the singularity ratio is
of the order
– n digit
R = O  10  Eq. 3-77
 
Singularity Ratio 83
where n digit is the accuracy of floating-point numbers used in the calculation. For
most versions of MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, n digit > 12 . If rigid body
(k)
modes are present, K kk is very small or negative. If either a zero or a negative
diagonal is encountered, execution of MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is terminated
because the matrix is diagnosed as being singular.
You can force the solution of a nonpositive definite or singular matrix. In this case,
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear does not stop when it encounters a negative or small
(k)
1
term K kk on the diagonal. If you use Lagrangian multiplier elements, the matrix
becomes nonpositive definite and MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear automatically
(k)
disables the test on the sign of K kk . However, it still tests for singular behavior.
Note: The correctness of a solution obtained for a linearized set of equations in a

nonpositive definite system is not guaranteed.
2
6
3.11 Guidelines for Analysis Methods

Analysis Methods
Nonlinear analysis is usually more complex and expensive than linear analysis. Also,
a nonlinear problem can never be formulated as a set of linear equations. In general,
the solutions of nonlinear problems always require incremental solution schemes and
1 sometimes require iterations (or recycles) within each load/time increment to ensure
that equilibrium is satisfied at the end of each step. Superposition cannot be applied
in nonlinear problems.
2 General Tips
A nonlinear problem does not always have a unique solution. Sometimes a nonlinear
problem does not have any solution, although the problem can seem to be defined
correctly.
3 • Nonlinear analysis requires good judgment and uses considerable

computing time. Several runs are often required. The first run should extract
the maximum information with the minimum amount of computing time.
Some design considerations for a preliminary analysis are:
4 • Minimize degrees of freedom whenever possible.

• Always run a linear static analysis to check the model before attempting a
nonlinear analysis.
• Halve the number of load increments by doubling the size of each load
5 increment.
• Impose a coarse tolerance on convergence to reduce the number of iterations.
A coarse run determines the area of most rapid change where additional
load increments might be required. Plan the increment size in the final run
6 by the following rule of thumb: there should be as many load increments as
required to fit the nonlinear results by the same number of straight lines.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear solves nonlinear static problems according to one of
the following two methods: tangent modulus or initial strain. Examples of the tangent
modulus method are elastic-plastic analysis, nonlinear springs, nonlinear
foundations, large displacement analysis and gaps. This method requires at least the
following three controls:
• A tolerance on convergence.
• A limit to the maximum allowable number of recycles.
Guidelines for Analysis Methods 85
• Specification of a minimum number of recycles.

An example of the initial strain method is creep or viscoelastic analysis. Creep analysis
requires the following tolerance controls:
• Maximum relative creep strain increment control.

• Maximum relative stress change control.
• A limit to the maximum allowable number of recycles. 1
Choosing a Solution Method
Which solution method to use depends very much on the problem. In some cases, one
method can be advantageous over another; in other cases, the converse might be true. 2
The four iterative procedures available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are:
Newton-Raphson, Modified Newton-Raphson, Newton-Raphson with strain
correction modification, and a secant procedure. If the R-P flow contribution model is
chosen, a direction substitution is used. 3
For Static analysis, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses the Newton-Raphson
method as the default for solving the nonlinear equilibrium equations. The motivation
for this choice is primarily the convergence rate obtained by using Newton’s method
compared to the convergence rates obtained by alternate methods (usually modified 4
Newton or quasi-Newton methods) for the types of nonlinear problems most often
studied by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Time Steps or Load Increments 5

The issue of choosing suitable time steps is a difficult problem to resolve. First of all,
considerations are quite different in static, dynamic, and heat transfer cases. It is
always necessary to model the response as a function of time to some acceptable level
of accuracy. In the case of dynamic or heat transfer problems, time is a physical
dimension for the problem, and the time-stepping scheme must provide suitable steps
6
to allow accurate modeling in this dimension. Even if the problem is linear, this
accuracy requirement imposes restrictions on the choice of the time step. In contrast,
most static problems have no imposed time scale, and the only criterion involved in
time step choice is accuracy involved in modeling nonlinear effects. In dynamic and
heat transfer problems, it is exceptional to encounter discontinuities in the time
history, because inertia and viscous effects provide smoothing in the solution (an
exception is impact). However, in static cases, sharp discontinuities (such as
bifurcation caused by buckling) are common. Softening systems or unconstrained
systems require special attention in static cases, but are handled naturally in static or
heat transfer cases. Thus, the consideration upon which time step choice is made are
quite different for the three problem classes.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides both fixed and automatic time step choice.
Fixed time stepping is useful in cases where the problem behavior is well understood
(as might occur when the user is carrying out a series of parameter studies), or in cases
1 where the automatic algorithms do not handle the problem well. However, the
automatic schemes in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are based on extensive
experience with a wide range of problems, and therefore generally provide a reliable
approach.
2 For static problems, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses a scheme based

predominantly on the maximum force residuals following each iteration. By
comparing consecutive values of these quantities, MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear determines whether convergence is likely in a reasonable number of
iterations. If convergence is deemed unlikely, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
3 adjusts the load increment; otherwise MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear continues
with the iteration process. In this way, excessive iteration is eliminated in cases, where
convergence is unlikely, and an increment that appears to be converging is not
aborted due to its needing a few more iterations. One other ingredient in this
4 algorithm is that a minimum increment size is specified. This prevents excessive
computation in cases where buckling, limit load, or some modeling error causes the
problem to stall. Other controls are built into the algorithm, for example, it will cut
back the increment size if an element inverts due to excessively large geometry
changes.
5
Nonlinear Dynamics
In dynamic analysis when implicit integration is used, the automatic time stepping is
based on the concept of half-step residuals. The basic idea is that the time-stepping
6 operator defines the velocities and accelerations at the end of the step in terms of
displacement at the end of the step and conditions at the beginning of the step.
Equilibrium is then established at the end of the step. This, then ensures an
equilibrium solution at the end of each time step, and thus, at the beginning and end
of any individual time step. However, these equilibrium solutions do not guarantee
equilibrium throughout the step. The time-step control is based on measuring the
equilibrium error (the force residuals) at some point during the time step, by using the
integrator operator together with the solution obtained at the end of the step, to
interpolate within a time step. This evaluation is performed at the half step. If the
maximum entry in this residual vector (the maximum “half step” residual) is greater
than a user-specified tolerance, the time step is considered too big and is replaced by
Guidelines for Analysis Methods 87
an appropriate factor. If the maximum half-step residual is sufficiently below the user-
specified tolerance, the time step may be increased by an appropriate factor for the
next increment. Otherwise, the time step is deemed adequate.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is designed to analyze structural components, by
which is meant that the overall dynamic response of a structure is sought, in contrast
to wave propagation solutions associated with relatively local response in continua.
These are labelled “inertial problems”, classified as problems in which “wave effects 1
such as focusing, reflection, and diffraction are not important.” Structural problems
are considered “inertial” because the response time sought is long compared to the
time required for waves to traverse the structure. The equilibrium considerations are
similar to those for nonlinear statics.
2
Buckling
In problems which are linear until buckling occurs, due to a sudden development of
nonlinearity, it is sometimes necessary for you to guide the arc-length algorithm by
making sure that the arc length remains sufficiently small prior to the occurrence of 3
buckling.
Efficiency
Even if a solution is obtainable, there is always the issue of efficiency. The pros and 4
cons of each solution procedure, in terms of matrix operations and storage
requirements have been discussed in the previous sections. A very important variable
regarding overall efficiency is the size of the problem. The time required to assemble
a stiffness matrix, as well as the time required to recover stresses after a solution, vary
roughly linearly with the number of degrees of freedom of the problem. On the other
5
hand, the time required to go through the solver varies roughly quadratically with the
bandwidth, as well as linearly with the number of degrees of freedom.
In small problems, where the time spent in the solver is negligible, you can easily wipe
out any solver gains, or even of assembly gains, with solution procedures such as a
6
line search which requires a double stress recovery. Also, for problems with strong
material or contact nonlinearities, gains obtained in assembly in modified Newton-
Raphson can be nullified by increased number of iterations or nonconvergence.
There are some developments widely covered in the literature and available in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear which have not been covered in the chapter.
Namely, iterative methods and element-by-element iterative solution schemes, which
completely avoid the assembly of a global stiffness matrix and the subsequent direct
solution of a system of equations. The development of new solution procedures is still
an active field of research in the academic community.
3.12 References
1. Zienkiewicz, O. C. and R. L. Taylor. The Finite Element Method (4th ed.) Vol. 1.
Basic Formulation and Linear Problems (1989),) Vol. 2. Solid and Fluid
Mechanics, Dynamics, and Nonlinearity (1991) McGraw-Hill Book Co.,
London, U. K.
2. Bathe, K. J. Finite Element Procedures, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ,
1 1995.
3. Hughes, T. J. R. The Finite Element Method–Linear Static and Dynamic Finite
Element Analysis, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ. 1987.
4. Ogden, R. W. “Large Deformation Isotropic Elasticity: On The Correlation of
2 Theory and Experiment for Incompressible Rubberlike Solids,” Proceedings of
the Royal Society, Vol. A (326), pp. 565-584, 1972.
5. Cook, R. D., D. S. Malkus, and M. E. Plesha, Concepts and Applications of
Finite Element Analysis (3rd ed.), John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY, 1989.
6. Bathe, K. J. Finite Element Procedures, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ,
3 1996.
7. Riks, E. “An incremental approach to the solution of solution and buckling
problems”, Int. J. of Solids and Structures, V. 15, 1979.
8. Riks, E. “Some Computational Aspects of the Stability Analysis of Nonlinear
4 Structures”, Comp. Methods in Appl. Mech. and Eng., 47, 1984.
9. Crisfield, M. A. “A fast incremental iterative procedure that handles
snapthrough”, Comput. & Structures, V. 13, 1981.
10. Ramm, E. “Strategies for tracing the nonlinear response near limit points,” in K.
5 J. Bathe et al (eds), Europe-US Workshop on Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis
in Structural Mechanics, Ruhr University Bochum, Germany, Springer-Verlag,
Berlin, pp/ 63-89. Berlin, 1985.
6
SECTION
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
4
■ Linear and Nonlinear Analysis
■ Nonlinear Effects and Formulations
■ Overview of Analysis Types
■ Static Analysis
■ Body Approach
■ Buckling Analysis
■ Normal Modes
■ Transient Dynamic Analysis
■ Creep
■ Rigid-Plastic Flow (Available in MSC.Nastran 2005)
■ Superplastic Flow (Available in MSC.Nastran 2005)

90 Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
4.1 Linear and Nonlinear Analysis

In a linear static analysis we implicitly assume that the deflections and strains are very
small and the stresses are smaller than the material yield stresses. Consequently, the
stiffness can be considered to remain constant (i.e., independent of the displacements
and forces) and the finite element equilibrium equations
1 P = Ku
are linear. Where the stiffness matrix K is independent of both u , the generalized
displacement vector, and P , the generalized force vector. This linearity implies that
any increase or decrease in the load will produce proportional increase or decrease in
2 displacements, strains and stresses. Linear static problems are solved in one step-a
single decomposition of the stiffness matrix.
However, we know that in many structures the deflections and the stresses do not
change proportionately with the loads. In these problems the structure’s response
3 depends upon its current state and the equilibrium equations reflect the fact that the
stiffness of the structure is dependent on both u and P .
P = K ( P, u )u
4 As the structure displaces due to loading, the stiffness changes, and as the stiffness
changes the structure’s response changes. As a result, nonlinear problems require
incremental solution schemes that divide the problem up into steps calculating the
displacement, then updating the stiffness. Each step uses the results from the previous
step as a starting point. As a result the stiffness matrix must be generated and inverted
5 many times during the analysis adding time and costs to the analysis.
Linear Analysis
SOL 600 allows you to perform linear elastic analysis using any element type in the
6 program. Various kinematic constraints and loadings can be prescribed to the
structure being analyzed; the problem can include both isotropic and anisotropic
elastic materials.
The principle of superposition holds under conditions of linearity. Therefore, several
individual solutions can be superimposed (summed) to obtain a total solution to a
problem.
Linear analysis does not require storing as many quantities as does nonlinear analysis;
therefore, it uses the core memory more sparingly. The assembled and decomposed
stiffness matrices can be reused to arrive at repeated solutions for different loads.
Linear and Nonlinear Analysis 91
Nonlinear Analysis
Nonlinear analysis, while most complex and expensive, must be used to establish
accurate results when a structure is subject to large deformations, when the material
behavior falls outside of a linear elastic model, or where the structural interactions
include contact.
In the nonlinear analysis the stiffness matrix is assembled and decomposed repeatedly
throughout the incrementation process. This adds considerable time and cost to the
1
analysis. In addition, because the response is not proportional to the loads, each load
case must be solved separately and the principle of superposition is not applicable.
6
4.2 Nonlinear Effects and Formulations

There are three sources of nonlinearity: material, geometric, and nonlinear boundary
conditions. Material nonlinearity results from the nonlinear relationship between
stresses and strains. Considerable progress has been made in attempts to derive the
continuum or macroscopic behavior of materials from microscopic backgrounds, but,
up to now, commonly accepted constitutive laws are phenomenological. Difficulty in
1 obtaining experimental data is usually a stumbling block in mathematical modeling
of material behavior. A plethora of models exist for more commonly available
materials like elastomers and metals. Other material model of considerable practical
importance are: composites, viscoplastics, creep, soils, concrete, powder, and foams.
2 Figure 4-1 shows the elastoplastic, elasto-viscoplasticity, and creep. Although the
situation of strain hardening is more commonly encountered, strain softening and
localization has gained considerable importance in recent times.
Geometric nonlinearity results from the nonlinear relationship between strains and
3 displacements on the one hand and the nonlinear relation between stresses and forces
on the other hand. If the stress measure is conjugate to the strain measure, both
sources of nonlinearity have the same form. This type of nonlinearity is
mathematically well defined, but often difficult to treat numerically. Two important
types of geometric nonlinearity occur:
4 1. The analysis of buckling and snap-through problems (see Figure 4-2 and
Figure 4-3).
2. Large strain problems such as manufacturing, crash, and impact problems.
In such problems, due to large strain kinematics, the mathematical
5 separation into geometric and material nonlinearity is nonunique.
6
Nonlinear Effects and Formulations 93
σ
σ
1
ε ε
Elasto-Plastic Behavior Elasto-Viscoplastic Behavior
εc
2
σ
3
Creep Behavior t
Figure 4-1 Material Nonlinearity

4
P Linear
u Pc
Stable
5
Neutral
Unstable
6
u
Figure 4-2 Buckling
u
1
Figure 4-3 Snap-Through
Boundary conditions and/or loads can also cause nonlinearity. Contact and friction
2 problems lead to nonlinear boundary conditions. This type of nonlinearity manifests
itself in several real life situations; for example, metal forming, gears, interference of
mechanical components, pneumatic tire contact, and crash (see Figure 4-4). Loads on
a structure cause nonlinearity if they vary with the displacements of the structure.
These loads can be conservative, as in the case of a centrifugal force field (see
3 Figure 4-5); they can also be nonconservative, as in the case of a follower force on a
cantilever beam (see Figure 4-6). Also, such a follower force can be locally
nonconservative, but represent a conservative loading system when integrated over
the structure. A pressurized cylinder (see Figure 4-7) is an example of this.
4
Figure 4-4 Contact and Friction Problem

Figure 4-5 Centrifugal Load Problem (Conservative) 2
6
2
Figure 4-6 Follower Force Problem (Nonconservative)
5
Figure 4-7 Pressurized Cylinder (Globally Conservative)
6 The three types of nonlinearities are described in detail in the following sections.
Geometric Nonlinearities
Geometric nonlinearity leads to two types of phenomena: change in structural
behavior and loss of structural stability.
There are two natural classes of large deformation problems: the large displacement,
small strain problem and the large displacement, large strain problem. For the large
displacement, small strain problem, changes in the stress-strain law can be neglected,
but the contributions from the nonlinear terms in the strain displacement relations
cannot be neglected. For the large displacement, large strain problem, the constitutive
relation must be defined in the correct frame of reference and is transformed from this
frame of reference to the one in which the equilibrium equations are written.
The collapse load of a structure can be predicted by performing an eigenvalue
analysis. If performed after the linear solution (increment zero), the Euler buckling
estimate is obtained. An eigenvalue problem can be formulated after each increment
of load; this procedure can be considered a nonlinear buckling analysis even though 1
a linearized eigenvalue analysis is used at each stage.
The kinematics of deformation can be described by the following approaches:
• Lagrangian Formulation
• Eularian Formulation
2
The choice of one over another can be dictated by the convenience of modeling
physics of the problem, rezoning requirements, and integration of constitutive
equations, and can be specified using PARAM,MARUPDAT.
3
Lagrangian Formulation
In the Lagrangian method, the finite element mesh is attached to the material and
moves through space along with the material. In this case, there is no difficulty in
establishing stress or strain histories at a particular material point and the treatment
4
of free surfaces is natural and straightforward.
The Lagrangian approach also naturally describes the deformation of structural
elements; that is, shells and beams, and transient problems, such as the indentation
problem shown in Figure 4-8.
5
sz
6
∆u
Figure 4-8 Indentation Problem with Pressure Distribution on Tool

This method can also analyze steady-state processes such as extrusion and rolling.
Shortcomings of the Lagrangian method are that flow problems are difficult to model
and that the mesh distortion is as severe as the deformation of the object. Severe mesh
degeneration is shown in Figure 4-9b. However, recent advances in adaptive meshing
and rezoning (to be supported in version 2005) have alleviated the problems of
premature termination of the analysis due to mesh distortions as shown in
1 Figure 4-9c.
(a) Original (b) Deformed Mesh
3 (Undeformed Mesh) Before Rezoning
4 (c) Deformed Mesh

After Rezoning
Figure 4-9 Rezoning Example
5 The Lagrangian approach can be classified in two categories: the total Lagrangian
method and the updated Lagrangian method. In the total Lagrangian approach, the
equilibrium is expressed with the original undeformed state as the reference; in the
updated Lagrangian approach, the current configuration acts as the reference state.
The kinematics of deformation and the description of motion is given in Figure 4-10
6 and Table 4-1.
Previous f
t=n
∆u
Current
t=n+1
Fn
1
un + 1
un
F
Reference
2
t=0
Fn+1 = fFn
Figure 4-10 Description of Motion

3
Table 4-1 Kinematics and Stress-Strain Measures in Large Deformation
Configuration
Measures
Reference (t = 0 or n) Current (t = n + 1) 4
Coordinates X x
Deformation Tensor C (Right Cauchy-Green) b (Left Cauchy-Green)
Strain Measure E (Green-Lagrange) e (Logarithmic)
F (Deformation Gradient) 5
Stress Measure S (second Piola-Kirchhoff) σ (Cauchy)
P (first Piola-Kirchhoff)
6
Total Lagrangian Procedure
The total Lagrangian procedure can be used for linear or nonlinear materials, in
conjunction with static or dynamic analysis. Although this formulation is based on the
initial element geometry, the incremental stiffness matrices are formed to account for
previously developed stress and changes in geometry.
This method is particularly suitable for the analysis of nonlinear elastic problems (for
instance, with the Mooney or Ogden material model). The total Lagrangian approach
is also useful for problems in plasticity and creep, where moderately large rotations
but small strains occur. A case typical in problems of beam or shell bending. However,
this is only due to the approximations involved.
In the total Lagrangian approach, the equilibrium can be expressed by the principle of
1 virtual work as:
0 0
∫ S ij δE ij dV = ∫ b i δη i dV + ∫ t i δη i dA Eq. 4-1
2 V0 V0 A0
Here S ij is the symmetric second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor, E ij , is the

0 0
Green-Lagrange strain, b i is the body force in the reference configuration, t i is the
traction vector in the reference configuration, and η i is the virtual displacements.
3 Integrations are carried out in the original configuration at t = 0 . The strains are
decomposed in total strains for equilibrated configurations and the incremental
strains between t = n and t = n + 1 as:
4 E ij
n+1 n
= E ij + ∆E ij Eq. 4-2
while the incremental strains are further decomposed into linear, ∆E ij and nonlinear,
n
∆E ij parts as:
5 ∆E ij = ∆Eij + ∆E ij
n
where ∆E is the linear part of the incremental strain expressed as:
6 1 ∂∆u i ∂∆u j 1  ∂u k   ∂∆u k  ∂u k   ∂∆u k

n n
∆E = --- ------------ + ------------ + ---  ---------  ------------- +  ---------  ------------- Eq. 4-3
2 ∂X j ∂X i 2  ∂X i   ∂X j   ∂X j   ∂X i 
n
The second term in the bracket in Eq. 4-3 is the initial displacement effect. ∆E is the
nonlinear part of the incremental strain expressed as:
n 1  ∂∆u k  ∂∆u k
∆E = ---  -------------  ------------- Eq. 4-4
2  ∂X i   ∂X j 
Linearization of equilibrium of Eq. 4-1 yields:

{ K 0 + K 1 + K 2 }δu = F – R Eq. 4-5
where K 0 is the small displacement stiffness matrix defined as
0 0
( K0 )
ij
= ∫ β imn D mnpq β pqj dV
V
0
1
K 1 is the initial displacement stiffness matrix defined as
u u u 0 u u
( K1 )
ij
= ∫ { β imn D mnpq β pqj + β imn D mnpq β pqj + β imn D mnpq β pqj } dv
V
0 2
0 u
in the above equations, β imn and β imn are the constant and displacement
dependent symmetric shape function gradient matrices, respectively, and D mnpq is
the material tangent,
3
and K 2 is the initial stress stiffness matrix
( K2 )
ij
= ∫ N i, k N j, l S kl dV
V0 4
in which S kl is the second Piola-Kirchhoff stresses and N i, k is the shape function
gradient matrix.
Also, δu is the correction displacement vector. F and R are the external and internal
forces, respectively.
5
This Lagrangian formulation can be applied to problems if the undeformed
configuration is known so that integrals can be evaluated, and if the second Piola-
Kirchhoff stress is a known function of the strain. The first condition is not usually met
for fluids, because the deformation history is usually unknown. For solids, however,
6
each analysis usually starts in the stress-free undeformed state, and the integrations
can be carried out without any difficulty.
For viscoelastic fluids and elastic-plastic and viscoplastic solids, the constitutive
equations usually supply an expression for the rate of stress in terms of deformation
rate, stress, deformation, and sometimes other (internal) material parameters. The
relevant quantity for the constitutive equations is the rate of stress at a given material
point.
It, therefore, seems most obvious to differentiate the Lagrangian virtual work
equation with respect to time. The rate of virtual work is readily found as
· ∂v k ∂δη k · ·
∫ S ij δE ij + S ij -------- ------------- dV = ∫ b i δη i dV + ∫ t i δη i dA
∂X i ∂X j
Eq. 4-6
V V A
0 0 0
1
This formulation is adequate for most materials, because the rate of the second
Piola-Kirchhoff stress can be written as
· · ·
S ij = S ij ( E kl, S mn, E pq ) Eq. 4-7
2
For many materials, the stress rate is even a linear function of the strain rate
· ·
S ij = D ijkl ( S mn, E pq )E kl Eq. 4-8
3
Eq. 4-6 supplies a set of linear relations in terms of the velocity field. The velocity
field can be solved noniteratively and the displacement can be obtained by time
integration of the velocities.
4 The second Piola-Kirchhoff stress for elastic and hyperelastic materials is a function of
the Green-Lagrange strain defined below:
S ij = S ij ( E kl ) Eq. 4-9
5 If the stress is a linear function of the strain (linear elasticity)
S ij = D ijkl E kl Eq. 4-10
the resulting set of equations is still nonlinear because the strain is a nonlinear
6 function of displacement.
Updated Lagrangian Procedure

The updated Lagrange formulation takes the reference configuration at t = n + 1 .
True or Cauchy stress and an energetically conjugate strain measure, namely the true
strain, are used in the constitutive relationship.
The updated Lagrangian approach is useful in:
• analysis of shell and beam structures in which rotations are large so that the
nonlinear terms in the curvature expressions may no longer be neglected,
and
• large strain plasticity analysis, for calculations which the plastic

deformations cannot be assumed to be infinitesimal.
In general, this approach can be used to analyze structures where inelastic behavior
(for example, plasticity, viscoplasticity, or creep) causes the large deformations. The
(initial) Lagrangian coordinate frame has little physical significance in these analyses
since the inelastic deformations are, by definition, permanent. For these analyses, the
Lagrangian frame of reference is redefined at the last completed iteration of the 1
current increment.
It is instructive to derive the stiffness matrices for the updated Lagrangian
formulation starting from the virtual work principle in Eq. 4-9.
Direct linearization of the left-hand side of Eq. 4-9 yields: 2
∫ S ij ( d( δE ij ) ) dV = ∫ ∇η ik σ kj ∇∆u ij dv Eq. 4-11
V V
0 n+1
3
where ∆u and η are actual incremental and virtual displacements respectively, and σkj
is Cauchy stress tensor.
∫ dS ij δE ij dV = ∫
s s
∇ η ij L ijkl ∇ ( ∆u kl ) dv Eq. 4-12 4
V0 Vn + 1
s
∇ denotes the symmetric part of ∇, which represents the gradient operator in the
current configuration. Also, in Eq. 4-11 and Eq. 4-12, three identities are used: 5
1
σ ij = --- F im S mn F jn
J
δE ij = F mi ∇ η mn F nj
s
6
Eq. 4-13
and
1
L ijkl = --- F im F jn F kp F lq D mnpq
J
in which D mnpq represents the material moduli tensor in the reference configuration
which is convected to the current configuration, L ijk . This yields:
{ K 1 + K 2 }δu = F – R Eq. 4-14

where K 1 is the material stiffness matrix written as
( K1 )
ij
= ∫ β imn L mnpq β pqj
Vn + 1
in which β imn is the symmetric gradient operator-evaluated in the current

1 configuration and σ kl is the Cauchy stresses
and K 2 is the geometric stiffness matrix written as
( K2 )
ij
= ∫ σ kl N i, k N j, l dv
2 Vn + 1
while F and R are the external and internal forces, respectively.

Keeping in view that the reference state is the current state, a rate formulation
analogous to Eq. 4-6 can be obtained by setting:
3
∂ ∂
F ij = δ ij, δE ij = δd ij, -------- = ------- , S ij = σ ij Eq. 4-15
∂X i ∂x i
where F is the deformation tensor, and d is the rate of deformation. Hence,

4
∇ ∂v ∂δη · ··
∫ σ ij δd ij + σ ij -------k- ------------k- dv =
∂x i ∂x j ∫ b i δη i dv + ∫ t i δη i da Eq. 4-16
Vn + 1 Vn + 1 An + 1
5 in which b i and t i is the body force and surface traction, respectively, in the
current configuration
∇
In this equation, σ ij is the Truesdell rate of Cauchy stress which is essentially a Lie
6 derivative of Cauchy stress obtained as:
·
∇ –1 –1
σ ij = F in ( JF nk σ kl F ml ) F mj Eq. 4-17
The Truesdell rate of Cauchy stress is materially objective implying that if a rigid
rotation is imposed on the material, the Truesdell rate vanishes, whereas the usual
material rate does not vanish. This fact has important consequences in the large
deformation problems where large rotations are involved. The constitutive equations
can be formulated in terms of the Truesdell rate of Cauchy stress as:
∇
σ ij = L d
ijk k
Specifying the Geometric Nonlinearity Formulation

Selection of the geometric nonlinearity formulation in MSC.Nastran is made on the
MARUPDAT parameter entry.
1
References
• “MARUPDAT” on page 682 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• For selecting the geometric nonlinearity formulation in MSC.Patran, see
“Subcase Parameters” in Chapter 7. 2
Note: Depending on the type of analysis specified by all entries in the input deck,
PARAMETER,MARUPDAT will be specified automatically as 0, 1, or 2 unless
entered by the user.
More on Using Total Lagrangian 3

MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear will normally determine whether Total Lagrangian
or Updated Lagrangian is best for a particular problem. If you wish to exert more
control, the parameters discussed in this section and the next may be employed.
4
For problems (such as centrifugal or pressure load) that require follower forces, use
the LGDISP parameter. This parameter forms all distributed loads on the basis of the
current geometry.
• “LGDISP” on page 654 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide. 5

Note: Do not use MSC.Marc’s CENTROID parameter with this parameter. Always
use residual load corrections with this parameter. To input control tolerances
for large displacement analysis, use model definition option NLSTRAT.
Using only the LGSTRN, 2 parameter, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses the total 6
Lagrangian method. When the total Lagrangian method is specified, the program uses
and prints second Piola-Kirchhoff stress and Green-Lagrange strain. These measures
are suitable for analysis with large incremental rotations and large
incremental strains.
More on Using Updated Lagrangian

You can use the updated procedure with or without MSC.Nastran’s LGDISP
parameter. When you use the LGDISP parameter, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
takes into account the effect of the internal stresses by forming the initial stress
stiffness. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear also calculates the strain increment to
second order accuracy to allow large rotation increments.
1 Another option is to use the MARUPDAT parameter (with or without the LGDISP
parameter) to define a new (Lagrangian) frame of reference at the beginning of each
increment. This option is suitable for analysis of problems of large total rotation but
small strain. If analysis of large plastic strain is required, use PARAM,MRFINITE,1 in
2 addition to the PARAM, MARUPDAT parameter in which case MSC.Nastran Implicit

With MARUPDAT,1 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses Cauchy stresses and
true strains. This combination of parameters is suitable for analyses with small
incremental rotations and small incremental strains. Stress and strain components are
3 printed with respect to the current state.

The MSC.Marc,plasticity parameter with options 3 or 5 utilize the updated Lagrange
procedure for elastic-plastic analysis. The MSC.Marc,elasticity parameter with option 2
utilizes the updated Lagrange procedure for large strain elasticity (Mooney or
4 Ogden).
The combination of PARAM,MARUPDAT,1 and PARAM,MARCDILT (i.e. with
constant dilatation) or a MATEP material entry results in a complete large strain
plasticity formulation (with B-Bar method) to satisfy incompatibility using the
5 updated Lagrange procedure. The use of MATEP replaces the need of the MARCDILT
parameter. The program internally uses true (Cauchy) stress and rotation neutralized
strains. In the case of proportional straining, this method leads to logarithmic strains.
Note: For materials exhibiting large strain plasticity with volumetric changes (for
6 example, soils, powder, snow, wood) only MSC.Marc’s LARGE DISP, FINITE
and UPDATE should be used (these are created automatically for you by the
internal MSC.Marc translator in MSC.Nastran). Use of MARCDILT
parameter or MATEP will enforce the incompressibility condition and, in
such materials, yield incorrect and nonphysical behavior.
Large strain rubber elasticity can be modeled in either total Lagrange (Marc’s
ELASTICITY,1 or MSC.Nastran’s PARAM,MARCELAS,1: second Piola-Kirchhoff stress, Green
Lagrange strain) or updated Lagrange (ELASTICITY,2 (PARAM,MARCELAS,2):
Cauchy stress, Logarithmic strain) framework.
and ELASTICITY,2 parameters can be used with either displacement or

PLASTICITY,5
Herrmann elements.
Options Kinematics Formulation

param,marcplas,1 Total Lagrange Small strain, mean normal, additive
(PLASTICITY,1) decomposition of strain rates.
param,marcplas,3 Updated Lagrange Large strain, mean normal, additive
decomposition of strain rates. Equivalent
(PLASTICITY,3)
to: LARGE DISP, FINITE, UPDATE, and
1
CONSTANT DILATATION.
param,marcplas,5 Updated Lagrange Large strain, radial return multiplicative
(PLASTICITY,5) decomposition of deformation gradient.
param,marcelas,1
(ELASTICITY,1)
Total Lagrange Large strain.
2
param,marcelas,2 Updated Lagrange Large strain.
(ELASTICITY,2)
Theoretically and numerically, if formulated mathematically correct, the two 3

formulations yield exactly the same results. However, integration of constitutive
equations for certain types of material behavior (for example, plasticity) make the
implementation of the total Lagrange formulation inconvenient. If the constitutive
equations are convected back to the original configuration and proper
transformations are applied, then both formulations are equivalent. However, for
4
deformations involving excess distortions, ease of rezoning favors the updated
Lagrangian formulation. This is reflected in the fact that a rezoned mesh in the current
state is mapped back to excessively distorted mesh leading to negative Jacobian in the
total Lagrangian formulation. 5
Material Nonlinearities
In a large strain analysis, it is usually difficult to separate the kinematics from the
material description. Table 4-2 lists the characteristics of some common materials. 6
Table 4-2 Common Material Characteristics

Material Characteristics Examples Models
Composites Anisotropic: Bearings, aircraft Composite
1) layered, panels continuum elements
ds ij = C ijk dε k
21 constants Tires, glass/epoxy Rebars
2) Fiber reinforced,
1 E t
S = --- ( T CT – 1 )
2
one-dimensional strain in
fibers
Creep Strains increasing with time Metals at high ORNL
2 under constant load. temperatures,
Stresses decreasing with time polymide films
Norton
under constant deformations. Maxwell

Creep strains are
non-instantaneous.
Elastic Stress functions of Small deformation
3 instantaneous strain only.
Linear load-displacement
(below yield) for most
materials: metals, Hookes Law
relation. glass, wood
Elasto- Yield condition flow rule and Metals von Mises Isotropic
plasticity hardening rule necessary to Soils Cam -Clay
4 calculate stress, plastic strain.

Permanent deformation upon
Hill’s Anisotropic
unloading.
Hyperelastic Stress function of Rubber Mooney
instantaneous strain. Ogden
Nonlinear load-displacement Arruda Boyce
5 relation. Unloading path same
as loading.
Gent
Foam
Hypoelastic Rate form of stress-strain law Concrete
Viscoelastic Time dependence of stresses Rubber Simo Model
in elastic material under loads. Glass Narayanaswamy
6 Viscoplastic
Full recovery after unloading.
Combined plasticity and creep Metals Walker Model
phenomenon Powder Power law
Shima Model
A complete description of the material types mentioned in the table is given in

“Materials” in Chapter 10. However, some notable characteristics and procedural
considerations of some commonly encountered materials behavior are listed next.
Inaccuracies in experimental data, misinterpretation of material model parameters

and errors in user-defined material law are some common sources of error in the
analysis from the materials viewpoint. It is useful to check the material behavior by
running a small model with prescribed displacement and load boundary conditions
in uniaxial tension and shear (single element tests are not recommended).
Elasticity 1
Structures composed of elastomers, such as tires and bushings, are typically subjected
to large deformation and large strain. An elastomer is a polymer, such as rubber,
which shows a nonlinear elastic stress-strain behavior. The large strain elasticity
capability in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear deals primarily with elastomeric
materials. These materials are characterized by the form of their elastic strain energy 2
function. For a more detailed description of elastomeric material, see “Nonlinear
Elastic” in Chapter 10.
For the finite element analysis of elastomers, there are some special considerations
that do not apply for linear elastic analysis. These considerations include: 3
• Mesh Distortion
• Incompressible Behavior
• Instabilities 4
• Existence of Multiple Solutions
Mesh Distortions
When extremely large deformations occur, the element mesh should be designed so 5
that it can follow these deformations without complete degeneration of elements. For
problems involving extreme distortions, rezoning must be done starting with
MSC.Nastran version 2005. Rezoning can be used with the formulation in the updated
Lagrangian framework using conventional displacement based elements.
6
Incompressible Behavior
One of the most frequent causes of problems analyzing elastomers is the
incompressible material behavior. Lagrangian multipliers (pressure variables) are
used to apply the incompressibility constraint. The result is that the volume is kept
constant in a generalized sense, over an element.
Both the total, as well as updated Lagrange formulations, are implemented with
appropriate constraint ratios for lower- and higher-order elements in 2-D and 3-D. For
many practical analysis, the LBB (Ladyszhenskaya-Babuska-Brezzi) condition does
not have to be satisfied in the strictest sense; for example, four node quadrilateral
based on Herrmann principle.
For elements that satisfy the LBB condition, error estimates of the following form can
1 be established
h h min { k, + 1 }
u – u 1 + p – p 0 = O( h ) Eq. 4-18
where k and are the orders of displacements and pressure interpolations,

2 respectively. If K = min { k, + 1 } , the rate of convergence is said to be optimal,
and elements satisfying the LBB condition will not lock.
The large strain elasticity formulation may also be used with conventional plane
stress, membrane, and shell elements. Because of the plane stress conditions, the
3 incompressibility constraint can be satisfied without the use of Lagrange multipliers.
Instabilities
Under some circumstances, materials can become unstable. This instability can be real
4 or can be due to the mathematical formulation used in the calculations.

Instability can also result from the approximate satisfaction of incompressibility
constraints. If the number of Lagrangian multipliers is insufficient, local volume
changes can occur. Under some circumstances, these volume changes can be
associated with a decrease in total energy. This type of instability usually occurs only
5 if there is a large tensile hydrostatic stress. Similarly, overconstraints give rise to mesh
locking and inordinate increase in total energy under large compressive stresses.
Existence of Multiple Solutions

6 It is possible that more than one stable solution exists (due to nonlinearity) for a given
set of boundary conditions. An example of such multiple solutions is a hollow
hemisphere with zero prescribed loads. Two equilibrium solutions exist: the
undeformed stress-free state and the inverted self-equilibrating state. An example of
these solutions is shown in Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-12. If the equilibrium solution
remains stable, no problems should occur; however, if the equilibrium becomes
unstable at some point in the analysis, problems can occur.
x 1
Figure 4-11 Rubber Hemisphere
y 4
x
Figure 4-12 Inverted Rubber Hemisphere 5

When incompressible material is being modeled, the basic linearized incremental
procedure is used in conjunction with mixed variational principles similar in form to
the Herrmann incompressible elastic formulation. These formulations are
incorporated in plane strain, axisymmetric, generalized plane strain, and three-
6
dimensional elements. These mixed elements may be used in combination with other
elements in the library (suitable tying may be necessary) and with each other. Where
different materials are joined, the pressure variable at the corner nodes must be
uncoupled to allow for mean pressure discontinuity. Tying must be used to couple the
displacements only.
Plasticity
In recent years there has been a tremendous growth in the analysis of metal forming
problems by the finite element method. Although an Eularian flow-type approach has
been used for steady-state and transient problems, the updated Lagrangian
procedure, pioneered by McMeeking and Rice, is most suitable for analysis of large
strain plasticity problems. The main reasons for this are: (a) its ability to trace free
1 boundaries, and (b) the flexibility of taking elasticity and history effects into account.
Also, residual stresses can be accurately calculated.
The large strain plasticity capability in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to
analyze problems of large-strain, elastic-plastic material behavior. These problems
2 can include manufacturing processes such as forging, upsetting, extension or deep
drawing, and/or large deformation of structures that occur during plastic collapse.
The analysis involves both material, geometric and boundary nonlinearities.
In addition to the options required for plasticity analysis, the PARAM,LGSTRN
3 and/or PARAM, MRTABLS1 parameters are needed for large strain plasticity
analysis.
In performing finite deformation elastic-plastic analysis, there are some special
considerations which do not apply for linear elastic analysis. These considerations
4 include:
• Choice of Finite Element Types

• Nearly Incompressible Behavior
• Treatment of Boundary Conditions
5
• Severe Mesh Distortion
• Instabilities
6 Choice of Finite Element Types

Accurate calculation of large strain plasticity problems depends on the selection of
adequate finite element types. In addition to the usual criteria for selection, two
aspects need to be given special consideration: the element types selected need
to be insensitive to (strong) distortion; for plane strain, axisymmetric, and three-
dimensional problems, the element mesh must be able to represent nondilatational
(incompressible) deformation modes.
Nearly Incompressible Behavior

Most finite element types tend to lock during fully plastic (incompressible) material
behavior. A remedy is to introduce a modified variational principle which effectively
reduces the number of independent dilatational modes (constraints) in the mesh. This
procedure is successful for plasticity problems in the conventional “small” strain
formulation. Zienkiewicz pointed out the positive effect of reduced integration for this
type of problem and demonstrates the similarity between modified variational 1
procedures and reduced integration. MSC.Software Corporation recommends the use
of lower-order elements, invoking the constant dilatation option with certain
exceptions such as 4-node tetras. The lower-order elements, which use reduced
integration and hourglass control, also behave well for nearly incompressible
materials. 2
Treatment of Boundary Conditions
In many large strain plasticity problems, specifically in the analysis of manufacturing
processes, the material slides with or without friction over curved surfaces. This
results in a severely nonlinear boundary condition. The MSC.Nastran Implicit
3
Nonlinear gap-friction element and CONTACT option can model such sliding
boundary conditions.
Severe Mesh Distortion 4

Because the mesh is attached to the deforming material, severe distortion of the
element mesh often occurs, which leads to a degeneration of the results in many
problems. To avoid this degeneration, generate a new finite element mesh for the
problem and then transfer the current deformation state to the new finite element
mesh.
5
Instabilities
Elastic-plastic structures are sometimes unstable due to necking phenomena.
·
Consider a rod of a rigid-plastic incompressible workhardening material. With ε the 6
current true uniaxial strain rate and h the current workhardening, the rate of true
·
uniaxial stress σ is equal to
· ·
σ = Hε Eq. 4-19
The applied force is equal to F = σA , where A is the current area of the rod. The
rate of the force is therefore equal to
· · ·
F = σA + σA Eq. 4-20
On the other hand, conservation of volume requires that
· ·
Aε + A = 0 Eq. 4-21
1 Hence, the force rate can be calculated as
· ·
F = ( H – σ )Aε Eq. 4-22
2 Instability clearly occurs if σ > H . For applied loads (as opposed to applied boundary
conditions), the stiffness matrix becomes singular (nonpositive definite).
For the large strain plasticity option, the workhardening slope for plasticity is the rate
of true stress versus the true plastic strain rate. The workhardening curve must,
3 therefore, be entered as the true stress versus the logarithmic plastic strain in a
uniaxial tension test.
With the updated Lagrangian option, you cannot use the anisotropic plasticity
formulation, but you can use anisotropic elastic properties.
4
Computational Procedures for Elastic-Plastic Analysis
For more information on computational procedures, please see the MSC.Marc
Reference manual, Volume A page 5-38.
5
Creep
Creep is a time-dependent inelastic behavior that can occur at any stress level, either
below or above the yield stress of a material. Creep is an important factor at elevated
6 temperatures. In many cases, creep is also accompanied by plasticity, which occurs
above the yield stress of the material.
Creep behavior is based on a von Mises creep potential with isotropic behavior
described by the equivalent creep law:
· cr cr
ε = f ( σ ,ε ,T ,t )
The material behavior is therefore described by:

cr · cr ∂σ
∆ε = ε --------
′
∂σ
∂σ
--------
′
where ∂σ is the outward normal to the current von Mises stress surface and is the
equivalent creep strain rate.
There are two numerical procedures used in implementing creep behavior. The
default is an explicit procedure in which the above relationship is implemented in the
1
program by an initial strain technique. In other words, a pseudo-load vector due to the
creep strain increment is added to the right-hand side of the stiffness equation.
T cr
K∆u = ∆P + ∫β D∆ε dv 2
V
where K is the stiffness matrix, and ∆u and ∆P are incremental displacement and
incremental nodal force vectors, respectively. The integral:
T cr
3
∫ β D∆ε dv
V
is the pseudo-load vector due to the creep strain increment in which β is the strain
displacement relation and D is the stress-strain relation. When plasticity is also 4
specified through a suitably defined yield criterion and yield stress inMSC.Nastran,
the plasticity is treated implicitly while the creep is treated explicitly.
As an alternative, an implicit creep procedure can be requested. In this case, the
inelastic strain rate has an influence on the stiffness matrix. Using this technique, 5
significantly larger steps in strain space can be used. This option is only to be used for
isotropic materials with the creep strain rate defined by a creep constant. Power law
expressions are always to be used for the effective stress with the coefficient provided
through the input data or user subroutines.
6
Creep Buckling
MSC.Nastran also predicts the creep time to buckling due to stress redistribution
under given load or repeated cyclic load. The buckling option solves the following
equation for the first eigenvalue
( K + λK G )φ = 0 Eq. 4-23
The geometric stiffness matrix, K G , is a function of the increments of stress and

displacement. These increments are calculated during the last creep time step
increment. To determine the creep time to buckle, perform a buckle step after a
converged creep increment. Note that the incremental time must be scaled by the
calculated eigenvalue, and added to the total (current) time to get an estimate as to
when buckling occurs.
Viscoelasticity
In a certain class of problems, structural materials exhibit viscoelastic behavior. Two
1 examples of these problems are quenching of glass structures and time-dependent
deformation of polymeric materials. The viscoelastic material retains linearity
between load and deformation; however, this linear relationship depends on time.
Consequently, the current state of deformation must be determined from the entire
history of loading. Different models consisting of elastic elements (spring) and viscous
2 elements (dashpot) can be used to simulate the viscoelastic material behavior
described in “Materials” in Chapter 10. A special class of temperature dependence
known as the Thermo-Rheologically Simple behavior (TRS) is also applicable to a
variety of thermal viscoelastic problems. Both the equation of state and the hereditary
3 integral approaches can be used for viscoelastic analysis.
To model the thermo-rheologically simple material behavior, MSC.Marc’s SHIFT
FUNCTION model definition option (MSC.Nastran’s MATTVE) can be used to choose
the Williams-Landel-Ferry equation or the power series expression or
4 Narayanaswamy model.
In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, two options are available for small strain
viscoelastic analysis. The first option uses the equation of state approach and
represents a Kelvin model. The second option is based on the hereditary integral
5 approach and allows the selection of a generalized Maxwell model. The thermo-
rheologically simple behavior is also available in the second option for thermal
viscoelastic analysis. The Viscoelastic section in Chapter 10 discusses these models in
detail. MSC.Marc’s automatic time stepping schemes AUTO CREEP (triggered from
MSC.Nastran using PARAM,MAUTCREP,1) and AUTO TIME (triggered from
6 MSC.Nastran using PARAM,MAUTTIME,1) can be used in a viscoelastic analysis for
first and second options, respectively.
The first option for viscoelastic analysis uses the Kelvin model. To activate the
generalized Kelvin model in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, use MSC.Marc’s VISCO
ELAS (triggered by MSC.Nastran PARAM,MVISELAS,1) or MSC.Marc’s CREEP
parameter (triggered by MSC.Nastran PARAM,MCREEP). To input the matrices [A]
and [B] for the Kelvin strain rate computations, use the user subroutine CRPVIS
(available starting in MSC.Nastran version 2005). To input creep time period and the tolerance
control for the maximum strain in an increment, use MSC.Marc’s history definition
option AUTO CREEP (MSC.Nastran PARAM,MAUTCREP,1).
The Simo model for large strain viscoelasticity can be used in conjunction with the
damage and hyperelastic Mooney or Ogden material model. The large strain
viscoelastic material behavior can be simulated by incorporating MSC.Marc’s model
definition option VISCELMOON or VISCELOGDEN (MSC.Nastran’s MATVE).
Viscoelasticity for hyperelastic materials is available only in the total Lagrangian
framework.
Nonlinear structural relaxation behavior of materials can be modeled by the 1
Narayanaswamy model which accounts for memory effect. This model allows
simulation of evolution of physical properties of glass subjected to complex time
temperature histories. The thermal expansion behavior for the Narayanaswamy
model is controlled via MSC.Marc’s model definition option VISCEL EXP
(MSC.Nastran’s MATVE). 2
Viscoplasticity
There are two procedures in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear for viscoplastic
analysis: explicit and implicit. A brief description of each procedure follows: 3
Explicit Method
The elasto-viscoplasticity model in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is a modified
creep model to which a plastic element is added. The plastic element is inactive when 4
the stress is less than the yield stress of the material. You can use the elasto-
viscoplasticity model to solve time-dependent plasticity and creep as well as plasticity
problems with a nonassociated flow law.
The CREEP option in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has been modified to enable 5
solving problems with viscoplasticity. The method is modified to allow solving
elastic-plastic problems with nonassociated flow rules which result in nonsymmetric
stress-strain relations if the tangent modulus method is used.
The requirements for solving the viscoplastic problem are: 6
Marc’s CREEP parameter (MSC.Nastran’s PARAM, MCREEP,1) and creep controls
Load incrementation immediately followed by a series of creep increments specified
by MSC.Marc’s AUTO CREEP (MSC.Nastran’s PARAM,MAUTCREP,1)
Use of user subroutine CRPLAW and/or user subroutine NASSOC (starting in MSC.Nastran
version 2005).
The following load incrementation procedure enables you to solve a viscoplastic

problem:
1. Apply an elastic load increment that exceeds the steady-state yield stress.
2. Relieve the high yield stresses by turning on MSC.Marc’s AUTO CREEP option
(MSC.Nastran’s PARAM,MAUTCREP,1).
You may repeat steps 1 and 2 as many times as necessary to achieve the required
load history.
The viscoplastic approach converts an iterative elastic-plastic method to one where a
1 fraction of the initial force vector is applied at each increment with the time step
controls. The success of the method depends on the proper use of the automatic creep
time step controls. This means that it is necessary to select an initial time step that will
satisfy the tolerances placed on the allowable stress change.
2 The initial time step ∆t =

allowable stress change x 0.7
Maximum viscoplastic strain rate x Young’s modulus
The allowable stress change is specified in the creep controls. The most highly stressed
element usually yields the maximum strain rate. It is also important to select a total
time that gives sufficient number of increments to work off the effects of the initial
3 force vector. A total time of 30 times the estimated ∆t is usually sufficient.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear does not distinguish between viscoplastic and creep
strains. A user subroutine NASSOC allows you to specify a nonassociated flow rule for
use with the equivalent creep strains (viscoplastic) that are calculated by subroutine
4 CRPLAW (available starting in MSC.Nastran version 2005). A flag is set in the CREEP parameter
in order to use the viscoplastic option with a nonassociated flow rule.
The viscoplasticity feature can be used to implement very general constitutive
relations with the aid of user subroutines ZERO and YIE (stating in MSC.Nastran version
5 2005).
Since the viscoplasticity model in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is a modified creep

model, you should familiarize yourself with the creep analysis procedure (see “Creep,
Viscoplastic, and Viscoelastic Behavior” on page 125 of this chapter).
6
Implicit Method
A general viscoplastic material law can be implemented through user subroutine
UVSCPL (starting in MSC.Nastran version 2005). When using this method, you are
responsible for defining the inelastic strain increment and the current stress.
Nonlinear Boundary Conditions

There are three types of problems associated with nonlinear boundary conditions:
contact, nonlinear support, and nonlinear loading. The contact problem might be
solved through the use of special gap elements or MSC.Nastran’s BCONTACT Case
Control specification (MSC.Marc’s CONTACT option). Nonlinear support might

involve nonlinear springs and/or foundations. Sometimes nonlinearities due to rigid
links that become activated or deactivated during an analysis can be modeled through
adaptive linear constraints. Nonlinear loading is present if the loading system is
nonconservative, as is the case with follower forces or frictional slip effects.
Discontinuities are inherent in the nature of many of these nonlinearities, making the
solution by means of incremental linear approximations difficult. Some of the most 1
severe nonlinearities in mechanics are introduced by nonlinear boundary conditions.
It is, therefore, very important to be aware of potential problem areas and to have a
good understanding of the underlying principles. This awareness and understanding
enables you to validate numerical answers and to take alternative approaches if an
initial attempt fails. 2
Contact Problems
Contact problems are commonly encountered in physical systems. Some examples
of contact problems are the interface between the metal workpiece and the die in 3
metal forming processes, pipe whip in piping systems, and crash simulation in
automobile designs.
Contact problems are characterized by two important phenomena: gap opening and
closing and friction. As shown in Figure 4-13, the gap describes the contact (gap 4
closed) and separation (gap open) conditions of two objects (structures). Friction
influences the interface relations of the objects after they are in contact. The gap
condition is dependent on the movement (displacement) of the objects, and friction is
dependent on the contact force as well as the coefficient of (Coulomb) friction at
contact surfaces. The analysis involving gap and friction must be carried out
5
incrementally. Iterations can also be required in each (load/time) increment to
stabilize the gap-friction behavior.
6
B
A n
Figure 4-13 Normal Gap Between Potentially Contacting Bodies

Two options are available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear for the simulation of a
contact problem. A detailed description of these options (gap-friction element and the
CONTACT option) is given in “Contact” in Chapter 12.
Nonlinear Support
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides two options for the modeling of support
1 conditions: springs and elastic foundations. In a nonlinear problem, the spring
stiffness and the equivalent spring stiffness of the elastic foundation can be modified
through a user subroutine. In the nonlinear spring option, the incremental force in the
spring is
2 ∆F = K ( ∆u 2 – ∆u 1 ) Eq. 4-24
where K is the spring stiffness, ∆u 2 is the displacement increment of the degree of

freedom at the second end of the spring, and ∆u 1 is the displacement increment of the
degree of freedom at the first end of the spring.
3 Use MSC.Nastran’s CELAS Bulk Data entry for the input of spring data. Starting in
version 2005, user subroutine USPRNG may be used to specify the value of K based on
the amount of previous deformation for nonlinear springs. In dynamic analysis, the
SPRINGS option can also be used to define a dashpot.
4 In the elastic nonlinear MSC.Marc’s FOUNDATION option (MSC.Nastran’s CELAS to
ground), the elements in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear can be specified as being
supported on a frictionless (nonlinear) foundation. The foundation supports the
structure with an increment force per unit area given by
5 ∆P n = K ( u n )∆u n Eq. 4-25
where K is the equivalent spring stiffness of the foundation (per unit surface area),
and ∆u n is the incremental displacement of the surface at a point in the same direction
6 as ∆P n .
To input nonlinear foundation data, use the FOUNDATION model definition option.
To specify the value of K for the nonlinear equivalent spring stiffness based on the
amount of previous deformation of the foundation, use the user subroutine USPRNG
in version 2005 and subsequent versions.
Nonlinear Loading
When the structure is deformed, the directions and the areas of the surface loads are
changed. For most deformed structures, such changes are so small that the effect on
the equilibrium equation can be ignored. But for some structures such as flexible shell
structure with large pressure loads, the effects on the results can be quite significant
so that the surface load effects have to be included in the finite element equations.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear forms both pressure stiffness and pressure terms
1
based on current deformed configuration with MSC.Nastran’s PARAM,LGDISP
(MSC.Marc’s FOLLOW FOR parameter). MSC.Marc’s CENTROID parameter should not
be included due to the use of the residual load correction.
2
6
4.3 Overview of Analysis Types

A large class of stress analysis problems can be solved with MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600). A fundamental division of stress problems is into static and
dynamic response, the distinction being whether or not inertia effects are significant.
SOL 600 allows complete flexibility in making this distinction, so that the same
analysis may contain several static and dynamic phases. Thus, a static preload might
1 be applied, and then the linear or nonlinear dynamic response computed, (as in the
case of vibrations of a component of a rotating machine, or the response of a flexible
offshore system which is initially moved to an equilibrium position subject to
buoyancy and steady current loads, then is excited by wave loading).
2 Static. Nonlinear static analysis requires the solution of nonlinear equilibrium
equations. Many problems involve history dependent response, so that the solution is
usually obtained as a series of increments, with iteration within each increment to
obtain equilibrium. For most cases, the automatic incrementation provided by
3 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is preferred, although direct user control is also
provided for those cases where the user has experience with a particular problem.
Static analysis procedures frequently involve post buckling behavior where the load-
displacement response shows a negative stiffness, and the structure must release
4 strain energy to remain in equilibrium.
Buckling. Eigenvalue buckling estimates are obtained. Classical eigenvalue buckling

analysis (e.g., “Euler” buckling) is often used to estimate the critical (buckling) load of
“stiff” structures. “Stiff” structures are those that carry their design loads primarily by
5 axial or membrane action, rather than by bending action. Their response usually
involves very little deformation prior to buckling, although nonlinear effects can be
accounted for by preceding the buckling calculations with a nonlinear static analysis.
Normal Modes. This solution type uses eigenvalue techniques to extract the
6 frequencies of the current system. The stiffness determined at the end of the previous
step is used as the basis for the extraction, so that small vibrations of a preloaded
structure can be modeled.
Transient Dynamic. This solution type is used when the transient dynamic
response, which includes inertial effects, is being studied. Because all of the equations
of motion of the system must be integrated through time, direct integration methods
(which can be used for both linear and nonlinear problems) are generally significantly
more expensive than modal methods (which can only be used for linear problems).
Overview of Analysis Types 123
For most cases, the automatic incrementation provided is preferred, although direct
user control is also provided for those cases where the user has experience with a
particular problem.
Creep. This analysis procedure performs a transient, static, stress/displacement

analysis. It is especially provided for the analysis of materials which are described by
the MATVP material form.
1
Viscoelastic (Time Domain). This is especially provided for the time domain
analysis of materials which are described by the MATVE material options. The
dissipative part of the material behavior is defined through a Prony series
representation of the normalized shear and bulk relaxation moduli.
2
Contact. This type of problem can be solved by either nonlinear static or nonlinear
transient dynamic solution procedures and simultaneous tracks the movement of
multiple geometric bodies to detect contact and then uses appropriate boundary
conditions to simulate the friction between surfaces. A robust numerical procedure is
required to simulate these complex physical problems.
3
6
4.4 Static Analysis

Static stress analysis is used when inertia effects can be neglected. The problem may
still have a real time scale, for example when the material has a viscoplastic response,
such as rate dependent yield. The analysis may be linear or nonlinear. Nonlinearity
may arise from large displacement effects, material nonlinearity and boundary
nonlinearity (such as contact and friction).
1
Linear static analysis involves the specification of load cases and appropriate
boundary conditions. Solutions may be combined in a postprocessing mode.
Nonlinear static analysis requires the solution of nonlinear equilibrium equations, for
2 which the program uses Full Newton-Raphson, Modified Newton-Raphson, Newton-
Raphson with Strain Correction, or the Secant method. Many problems involve
history dependent response, so that the solution is usually obtained as a series of
increments, with iteration within each increment to obtain equilibrium. Increments
must sometimes be kept small (in the sense that rotation and strain increments must
3 be small) to assure correct modeling of history dependent effects, but most commonly
the choice of increment size is a matter of computational efficiency - if the increments
are too large, more iteration will be required. Each solution method has a finite radius
of convergence, which means that too large an increment can prevent any solution
4 from being obtained because the initial state is too far away from the equilibrium state
that is being sought - it is outside the radius of convergence. Thus, there is an
algorithmic restriction on the increment size. For most cases, the automatic
incrementation scheme is preferred, because it will select increment sizes based on
these considerations. Direct user control of increment size is also provided because
5 there are cases when the user has considerable experience with his particular problem
and can therefore select a more economic approach.
References
6 For directions on setting up a Static analysis using MSC.Patran, see “Specifying the
Analysis Type for a Subcase” and “Specifying Static Subcase Parameters” in
Chapter 7
Post-Buckling
Geometrically nonlinear static problems frequently involve buckling or collapse
behavior, where the load-displacement response shows a negative stiffness, and the
structure must release strain energy to remain in equilibrium. Several approaches are
possible in such cases. One is to treat the buckling response dynamically, thus actually
modeling the kinetic response with inertia effects included as the structure snaps. This
is easily accomplished by using a transient dynamic procedure to include inertial
Static Analysis 125
effects when the solution goes unstable. In some simple cases, displacement control
can provide a solution, even when the conjugate load (the reaction force) is decreasing
as the displacement increases. More generally, static equilibrium states during the
unstable phase of the response can be found by using an arc-length method. This
method is for cases where the loading is proportional - that is, where the load
magnitudes are governed by a single scalar parameter. The method obtains
equilibrium solutions by controlling the path length along the load-displacement
curve within each increment (rather than controlling the load or displacement
1
increment), so that the load magnitude becomes an unknown of the system.
The method can provide solutions even in cases of complex, unstable response; the
Example Problems manual includes some demonstration cases.
2
Creep, Viscoplastic, and Viscoelastic Behavior
Time dependent material response in static analysis may involve creep and swelling
(generally occurring over fairly long time periods), or rate dependent yield (which is
often important in fairly rapid processes, such as metal working problems). For rate 3
dependent yield, the usual static procedure is used and an appropriate time scale
must be introduced so that MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear will treat the
viscoplasticity correctly. The backward difference operator is used to integrate the
plastic strains. Creep and swelling problems, as well as hereditary viscoelasticity 4
models, are analyzed by the CREEP procedure (which is specified by including a non-
zero time interval on the NLPARM entry). Nonlinear creep problems are often solved
efficiently by forward difference integration of the inelastic strains (the “initial strain”
method), because the numerical stability limit of this operator is usually sufficiently
large to allow the solution to be developed in a small number of time increments. 5
Unless geometric nonlinearity is also requested, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
always starts such problems with this method, and monitors the stability limit
automatically. If the stability limit is overly restrictive of the time increment size,
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear switches to the backward difference operator, which
is unconditionally stable and so places no limit on the time increment. Linear
6
viscoelasticity models are integrated with a simple, implicit, unconditionally stable
operator. Automatic time stepping in such cases is governed by an accuracy tolerance
parameter specified by the user. This limits the maximum inelastic strain rate change
allowed over an increment. Such problems are generally rather straightforward
nonlinear analyses.
4.5 Body Approach

Body Approach enables you to position rigid bodies to just touch deformable bodies
before beginning a subsequent Load Step. No analysis is actually performed during a
Body Approach step.It is used commonly in multi-forming simulations where bodies
are brought just into contact before the analysis begins.
1 Body positioning can be synchronized or not, meaning that if Synchronized is ON,

then as soon as one rigid body contacts, all others stop at that point also. Otherwise all
rigid bodies move until they come into contact. The SOL 600 option, APPROACH and
SYNCHRONIZE implement these concepts.
2 References
For directions on setting up a Body Approach analysis using MSC.Patran, see
“Specifying the Analysis Type for a Subcase” and “Specifying Body Approach
Subcase Parameters” in Chapter 7.
3
6
Buckling Analysis 127
4.6 Buckling Analysis

Buckling analysis allows you to determine at what load the structure will collapse.
You can detect the buckling of a structure when the structure’s stiffness matrix
approaches a singular value. You can extract the eigenvalue in a linear analyses to
obtain the linear buckling load.You can also perform eigenvalue analysis for buckling
load in a nonlinear problem based on the incremental stiffness matrices.
1
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) solves elastic instability problems using
the bifurcation approach. Bifurcation buckling analysis predicts the load at which the
structure becomes unstable, and it predicts the shape that the structure will tend to
have after the onset of instability. It does not make any statement about whether
buckling is coincident with overall structural failure. Some structures, including flat 2
plates, retain finite positive stiffness in the post-buckled range; others, such as thin
cylinders under external pressure, do not. In general, bifurcation buckling calculates
critical loads which are unconservative (i.e., higher than the loads at which the
structure actually becomes elastically unstable).
3
Eigenvalue Buckling Prediction
The approach to buckling prediction with MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is based
on the development of a linear perturbation of the structure’s stiffness about an
equilibrium solution point, which may be the initial equilibrium under no load, or a
4
preloaded state. At any time a structure’s total elastic stiffness is
[ K ] 0 + [ K ]p Eq. 4-26
5
where [K]0 is the stiffness caused by the material stiffness, and [ K ] p
is the initial
stress and load stiffness caused by non-zero loading. For a “stiff” elastic system, [ K ] 0
is almost constant, and the variation of [ K ] p is proportional to the load variation.
During the BUCKLING step there may be a non-zero “dead” load, P, and there must 6
be a linear perturbation load, Q, specified in the BIFURCATION BUCKLING step. We
wish to estimate what multiple of Q, combined with P, which causes instability. Since
the response is assumed to be “stiff” and elastic, and therefore closely proportional to
load, the stiffness at P + λQ. is, to a good approximation, ( [ K ] 0 + [ K ] p + λ [ K ] q ) ,
where [ K ] q is the initial stress and load stiffness caused by Q. Thus, the buckling load
estimate is provided by the eigenproblem.
( [ K ] 0 + [ K ]p + λ [ K ] q ) { φ } = { 0 } Eq. 4-27
The eigenvalue, λ, is a multiplier of the applied load which added to the preload
provides the critical load estimate: the predicted collapse load is P + λQ. φ is the
collapse mode.
If no boundary conditions are given in the BIFURCATION BUCKLING step, the
boundary conditions of the state at the start of the buckling investigation (that is, of
the previous nonlinear step) are used for the buckling modes as well as for the
1 perturbation loading. Since boundary conditions within any linear perturbation step
apply only locally within the step, if BIFURCATION BUCKLING steps follow one
another, boundary conditions for the buckling modes must be repeated within each of
the BIFURCATION BUCKLING steps except in steps where they are the same as those
belonging to the state at the start of the buckling investigation.
2 If boundary conditions are specified in the BIFURCATION BUCKLING step, the
complete set of boundary conditions must be given, since MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear assumes complete definition of such an option in any linear perturbation
analysis.
3 Several modes can be extracted simultaneously. This is often useful when the
structure has different buckling modes for which the critical loads have about the
same magnitude, so that the designer must consider the possibility of collapse in any
of these modes. The collapse modes may be plotted with MSC.Patran.
4
6
Buckling Analysis 129
Bifurcation Approach
To illustrate the bifurcation approach, consider Eq. 4-3, which shows a flat plate
loaded by uniaxial edge compression. Using linear static analysis, we can find the
so-called “primary equilibrium path” of the structure, which is always a straight line
(denoted A in Figure 4-3). As shown, increasing the loads will produce no
out-of-plane deflection.
1
P
Y
Z
X
2
P
92-171
3
P
A
C 4
Pcrit
B
5
UZ
Figure 4-14 Load vs. Deflection Paths for Central Deflection of a Flat 6
Square Plate Subjected to Uniaxial Edge Compression
A = Primary equilibrium path, determined by linear elastic static analysis.

B = Secondary equilibrium path, determined by bifurcation buckling
analysis.
C = Actual load deflection path, considering initial imperfections and
geometrical nonlinear effects.
Pcrit = Elastic buckling load.
Eigenvalue Extraction Methods

MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses either the inverse power sweep or the Lanczos
method to extract eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Both of these methods are described
in the following section, see “Eigenvalue Analysis” on page 133.
References
1 For directions on setting up a Buckling analysis, see “Specifying the Analysis Type
for a Subcase” and “Specifying Buckling Subcase Parameters” in Chapter 7.
6
Normal Modes 131
4.7 Normal Modes

The usual first step in performing a dynamic analysis is determining the natural
frequencies and mode shapes of the structure with damping neglected. Eigenvalue
analysis is used to determine these basic dynamic characteristics. The results of an
eigenvalue analysis indicate the frequencies and shapes at which a structure naturally
tends to vibrate. These results characterize the basic dynamic behavior of the structure
and are an indication of how the structure will respond to dynamic loading.
1
The natural frequencies of a structure are the frequencies at which the structure
naturally tends to vibrate if it is subjected to a disturbance. For example, the strings of
a piano are each tuned to vibrate at a specific frequency. The deformed shape of the
structure at a specific natural frequency of vibration is termed its normal mode of 2
vibration. Each mode shape is associated with a specific natural frequency.
Natural frequencies and mode shapes are functions of the structural properties and
boundary conditions. A cantilever beam has a set of natural frequencies and
associated mode shapes (Figure 4-15). If the structural properties change, the natural 3
frequencies change, but the mode shapes may not necessarily change. For example, if
the elastic modulus of the cantilever beam is changed, the natural frequencies change
but the mode shapes remain the same. If the boundary conditions change, then the
natural frequencies and mode shapes both change. For example, if the cantilever beam
is changed so that it is pinned at both ends, the natural frequencies and mode shapes
4
change.
6
z x
1
1
y
z x
2
2
y
z x
3
3
y
z x
4 4
Figure 4-15 The First Four Mode Shapes of a Cantilever Beam
5 Modal quantities can be used to identify problem areas by indicating the more highly
stressed elements. Elements that are consistently highly stressed across many or all
modes will probably be highly stressed when dynamic loads are applied.
Modal strain energy is a useful quantity in identifying candidate elements for design
6 changes to eliminate problem frequencies. Elements with large values of strain energy
in a mode indicate the location of large elastic deformation (energy). These elements
are those which most directly affect the deformation in a mode. Therefore, changing
the properties of these elements with large strain energy should have more effect on
the natural frequencies and mode shapes than if elements with low strain energy were
changed.
SOL 600 contains two methods for eigenvalue extraction and three time integration
operators. Nonlinear effects, including material nonlinearity, geometric nonlinearity,
and boundary nonlinearity, can be incorporated.
Normal Modes 133
In addition to distributed mass, you can also attach concentrated masses associated
with each degree of freedom of the system. You can include damping in either the
modal superposition or the direct integration methods. You can also include
(nonuniform) displacement and/or velocity as an initial condition, and apply
time-dependent forces and/or displacements as boundary conditions.
Eigenvalue Analysis 1
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses either the inverse power sweep method or the
Lanczos method to extract eigenvalues and eigenvectors. The inverse power sweep
method is typically used for extracting a few modes while the Lanczos method is
optimal for a few or many modes.
In dynamic eigenvalue analysis, we find the solution to an undamped linear
2
dynamics problem:
( K – ω 2 M )φ = 0
where K is the stiffness matrix, M is the mass matrix, ω are the eigenvalues
3
(frequencies) and φ are the eigenvectors. In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, K is the
tangent stiffness matrix, which can include material and geometrically nonlinear
contributions. The mass matrix is formed from both distributed mass and point
masses. 4
Inverse Power Sweep
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear creates an initial trial vector. To obtain a new vector,
the program multiplies the initial vector by the mass matrix and the inverse 5
(factorized) stiffness matrix. This process is repeated until convergence is reached
according to either of the following criteria: single eigenvalue convergence or double
eigenvalue convergence. In single eigenvalue convergence, the program computes an
eigenvalue at each iteration. Convergence is assumed when the values of two
successive iterations are within a prescribed tolerance. In double eigenvalue
6
convergence, the program assumes that the trial vector is a linear combination of two
eigenvectors.
Using the three latest vectors, the program calculates two eigenvalues. It compares
these two values with the two values calculated in the previous step; convergence is
assumed if they are within the prescribed tolerance.
When an eigenvalue has been calculated, the program either exits from the extraction
loop (if a sufficient number of vectors has been extracted) or it creates a new trial
vector for the next calculation. If a single eigenvalue was obtained, MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear uses the double eigenvalue routine to obtain the best trial vector
for the next eigenvalue. If two eigenvalues were obtained, the program creates an
arbitrary trial vector orthogonal to the previously obtained vectors.
After MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has calculated the first eigenvalue, it
orthogonalizes the trial vector at each iteration to previously extracted vectors (using
the Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization procedure). Note that the power shift procedure
1 is available with the inverse power sweep method.
• To select the power shift, set the following parameters:

• Initial shift frequency – This is normally set to zero (unless the structure has
rigid body modes, preventing a decomposition around the zeroth
2 frequency).
• Number of modes to be extracted between each shift – A value smaller than five is
probably not economical because a shift requires a new decomposition of the
stiffness matrix.
3 • Auto shift parameter – When you decide to do a shift, the new shift point is
set to
Highest frequency2 + scalar x (highest frequency - next highest frequency)2
4 You can define the value of the scalar through the MODAL SHAPE option.
The Lanczos Method

The Lanczos algorithm converts the original eigenvalue problem into the
determination of the eigenvalues of a tri-diagonal matrix. The method can be used
5 either for the determination of all modes or for the calculation of a small number of
modes. For the latter case, the Lanczos method is the most efficient eigenvalue
extraction algorithm. A simple description of the algorithm is as follows.
Consider the eigenvalue problem:
6
–ω 2 M u + K u = 0 Eq. 4-28
Equation 4-28 can be rewritten as:
1
------- M u = M K – 1 M u Eq. 4-29
ω2
Consider the transformation:
u = Q η Eq. 4-30
Normal Modes 135
T
Substituting Equation 4-30 into Equation 4-29 and premultiplying by the matrix Q
on both sides of the equation, we have
1
------- Q T M Q η = Q T M K – 1 M Q η Eq. 4-31
ω2
The Lanczos algorithm results in a transformation matrix Q such that:
QT M Q = I Eq. 4-32
1
Q T M K – 1 MQ = T Eq. 4-33
where the matrix T is a symmetrical tri-diagonal matrix of the form:

2
α1 β2 0 0
β2 α2 β3 0
T = Eq. 4-34
0 β3 α3 βm
0 0 βm αm
3
Consequently, the original eigenvalue problem, Equation 4-29, is reduced to the
following new eigenvalue problem:
1
4
------- η = T η Eq. 4-35
ω2
The eigenvalues in Equation 4-35 can be calculated by the standard QL-method.
You can either select the number of modes to be extracted, or a range of modes to be 5
extracted. The Sturm sequence check can be used to verify that all of the required
eigenvalues have been found. In addition, you can select the lowest frequency to be
extracted to be greater than zero.
The Lanczos procedure also allows you to restart the analysis at a later time and 6
extract additional roots. It is unnecessary to recalculate previously obtained roots
using this option.
Convergence Controls
Eigenvalue extraction is controlled by:
1. The maximum number of iterations per mode in the power sweep method;
or the maximum number of iterations for all modes in the Lanczos iteration
method,
2. an eigenvalue has converged when the difference between the eigenvalues

in two consecutive sweeps divided by the eigenvalue is less than the
tolerance, and
3. the Lanczos iteration method has converged when the normalized difference
between all eigenvalues satisfies the tolerance. The maximum number of
iterations and the tolerance can be specified.
1
Modal Stresses and Reactions
After the modal shapes (and frequencies) are extracted, stresses and reactions at a
specified mode may be recovered if desired. This option can be repeated for any of the
extracted modes. The stresses are computed from the modal displacement vector φ ;
2 2
the nodal reactions are calculated from F = Kφ – ω Mφ .
Free Vibration Analysis

3 If a structure is not totally constrained in space, it is possible for the structure to
displace (move) as a rigid body or as a partial or complete mechanism. For each
possible component of rigid-body motion or mechanism, there exists one natural
frequency which is equal to zero. The zero-frequency modes are called rigid-body
modes. Rigid-body motion of all or part of a structure represents the motion of the
4 structure in a stress-free condition. Stress-free, rigid-body modes are useful in
conducting dynamic analyses of unconstrained structures, such as aircraft and
satellites. Also, rigid-body modes can be indicative of modeling errors or an
inadequate constraint set.
5 Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, SOL 600 can perform free vibration analysis to compute
the natural frequencies and associated mode shapes of linear elastic structures. The
structure is assumed to be initially unstressed. A real eigenvalue analysis is
performed, which assumes that there is no damping and that the structure is not
6 spinning (i.e., no Coriolis force).

Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, SOL 600 free vibration analysis consists of the following
steps:
1. Input. The problem geometry (nodes and elements), physical and material
properties, loads and boundary conditions are taken from the MSC.Patran
Neutral File and put into the MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, SOL 600 deck.
2. Bandwidth Minimization (Optional). The FEA nodes are renumbered for
minimum bandwidth.
Normal Modes 137
3. Element stiffness matrix and mass matrix. The element stiffness matrices and
the consistent mass matrices are computed. See “Element Library” in
Chapter 11 for a detailed description of the MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear,
SOL 600.
4. Global stiffness matrix and mass matrix assembly. Stiffness matrix and the
mass matrix are assembled. Boundary and constraint conditions are
incorporated by appropriately modifying the element stiffness and mass 1
matrices.
5. Solution of the generalized eigenvalue problem. The frequencies and mode
shape vectors are computed by solving the generalized eigenvalue problem.
Modal strain energy. The modal strain energies are computed using the mode shape 2
vectors.
References
For directions on setting up a Normal Modes analysis, see “Specifying the Analysis
Type for a Subcase” and “Specifying Normal Modes Subcase Parameters” in
3
Chapter 7.
6
4.8 Transient Dynamic Analysis

Transient response analysis is the most general method for computing forced
dynamic response. The purpose of a transient response analysis is to compute the
behavior of a structure subjected to time-varying excitation. The transient excitation is
explicitly defined in the time domain. All of the forces applied to the structure are
known at each instant in time. Forces can be in the form of applied forces and/or
1 enforced motions.
The important results obtained from a transient analysis are typically displacements,
velocities, and accelerations of grid points, and forces and stresses in elements.
2 Depending upon the structure and the nature of the loading, two different numerical
methods can be used for a transient response analysis: direct and modal. The direct
method performs a numerical integration on the complete coupled equations of
motion. The Direct method can take into account nonlinearities. The modal method is
a linear solution and utilizes the mode shapes of the structure to reduce and uncouple
3 the equations of motion (when modal or no damping is used); the solution is then
obtained through the summation of the individual modal responses. The modal
method is not available using SOL 600 - use SOL 112.
4 Direct Transient Response

Transient dynamic analysis deals with an initial-boundary value problem. In order to
solve the equations of motion of a structural system, it is important to specify proper
initial and boundary conditions. You obtain the solution to the equations of motion by
5 direct integration (for linear or nonlinear systems). In direct integration, selecting a
proper time step is very important. You can include damping in the system.
The following sections discuss the applicable aspects of transient analysis listed
below.
6 • Direct Integration
• Time Step Definition
• Initial Conditions
• Time-Dependent Boundary Conditions
• Damping
Transient Dynamic Analysis 139
Direct Integration
Direct integration is a numerical method for solving the equations of motion of a
dynamic system. It is used for both linear and nonlinear problems. In nonlinear
problems, the nonlinear effects can include geometric, material, and boundary
nonlinearities. For transient analysis, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear offers three
direct integration operators listed below.
• Newmark-beta Operator
1
• Houbolt Operator
• Fast Explicit
• Central Difference Operator 2
• Single Step Houbolt
Direct integration techniques are imprecise; this is true regardless of which technique
you use. Each technique exhibits at least one of the following problems: conditional
stability, artificial damping, and phase errors, but all can be minimized so that they 3
are negligible.
Newmark-beta Operator
This operator is probably the most popular direct integration method used in finite 4
element analysis. For linear problems, it is unconditionally stable and exhibits no
numerical damping. The Newmark-beta operator can effectively obtain solutions for
linear and nonlinear problems for a wide range of loadings. The procedure allows for
change of time step, so it can be used in problems where sudden impact makes a
reduction of time step desirable. This operator can be used with adaptive time step 5
control. Although this method is stable for linear problems, instability can develop if
nonlinearities occur. By reducing the time step and/or adding damping, you can
overcome these problems.
Houbolt Operator
6
This operator has the same unconditional stability as the Newmark-beta operator. In
addition, it has strong numerical damping characteristics, particularly for higher
frequencies. This strong damping makes the method very stable for nonlinear
problems as well. In fact, stability increases with the time step size. The drawback of
this high damping is that the solution can become inaccurate for large time steps.
Hence, the results obtained with the Houbolt operator usually have a smooth
appearance, but are not necessarily accurate. The Houbolt integration operator,
implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear as a fixed time step procedure, is
particularly useful in obtaining a rough scoping solution to the problem.
Fast Explicit
The Fast Explicit method is similar to the Central Difference method except that the
time step is calculated only at the start of the analysis and damping is neglected.
Central Difference Operators

These explicit operators are only conditionally stable. The program automatically
1 calculates the maximum allowable time step. This method is particularly useful for
analysis of shock-type phenomena. In this procedure, since the operator matrix is a
diagonal mass matrix, no inverse of operator matrix is needed. However, this fact also
implies that you cannot use this method in problems having degrees of freedom with
zero mass. This restriction precludes use of the Herrmann elements, gap-friction
2 elements, the pipe bend element, and elements that have a rotational degrees of
freedom without associated mass. The elastomer capability can be used with explicit
dynamics in an updated Lagrange framework where the pressure variables are
condensed out before going into the solver.It is suggested that for these types of
3 problems, MSC.Dytran or MSC.Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) be used instead.
Single Step Houbolt Operator

Two computational drawbacks of the Houbolt operator are the requirement of a
special starting procedure and the restriction to fixed time steps. A Single Step
4 Houbolt procedure has been presented [Ref. 1.], being unconditionally stable, second
order accurate and asymptotically annihilating. In this way, the algorithm is
computationally more convenient compared to the standard Houbolt method, and the
numerical damping for this method as implemented in SOL 600 has been significantly
5 improved over the standard Houbolt method. This algorithm is recommended for all
dynamic analyses.
Technical Background
6 Consider the equations of motion of a structural system:
a + Cv + Ku = F Eq. 4-36
where M , C , and K are mass, damping, and stiffness matrices, respectively, and a , v ,
u , and F are acceleration, velocity, displacement, and force vectors. Various direct
integration operators can be used to integrate the equations of motion to obtain the
dynamic response of the structural system. The technical background of the three
direct integration operators available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is described
below.
Newmark-beta Operator
92-183 2
The generalized form of the Newmark-beta operator is
u n + 1 = u n + ∆tv n + ( 1 ⁄ 2 – β )∆t 2 a n + β∆t 2 a n + 1 Eq. 4-37

3
v n + 1 = v n + ( 1 – γ )∆ta n + γ∆ta n + 1 Eq. 4-38
n
where superscript denotes a value at the nth time step and u , v , and a take on their
usual meanings.
4
The particular form of the dynamic equations corresponding to the trapezoidal rule
γ = 1 ⁄ 2, β = 1 ⁄ 4
results in 5
 --------
4
M + ----- C + K ∆u = F n + 1 – R + M  a n + ----- v n + Cv n
2 n 4
Eq. 4-39
 ∆t 2 ∆t   ∆t 
where the internal force R is 6

R = ∫ β T σdv Eq. 4-40
V
Equation 4-39 allows implicit solution of the system
u n + 1 = u n + ∆u Eq. 4-41
Notice that the operator matrix includes K , the tangent stiffness matrix. Hence, any
nonlinearity results in a reformulation of the operator matrix. Additionally, if the time
step changes, this matrix must be recalculated because the operator matrix also
depends on the time step. It is possible to change the values of γ and β if so desired.
Step by Step Solution Algorithm using Newmark Beta Method
1 1. Initialize:
· ··
Uo , Uo , Uo
2. Select time step size ∆t and calculate integration constants:

2 1 γ
a o = --------- ; a 1 = --------------
β∆ t ( β∆ t )
γ
a 2 = -------------- ; a 3 =  ------ – 1
1
3 ( β∆ t ) 2β
∆t γ
a 4 =  --- – 1 ; a 5 =  -----  --- – 2
1
 β  2  β 
4 3. Form effective stiffness matrix [K]*:
[K]* = [K] + a0[M] + a1[C]
4. Triangularize (reduce) [K]*:

5 5. Compute effective load vector at time t + ∆t:
· ··
R t* + ∆t = R t + ∆t + [ M ] ( a 0 U t + a 2 U t + a 3 U t )
· ··
6 + [ C ] ( a1 Ut + a4 Ut + a5 Ut )
Eq. 4-42
6. Solve for displacements at time t + ∆t:
[ K ] * U t + ∆t = R t* + ∆t
7. Compute accelerations at time t + ∆t, using:
·· · ··
U t + ∆t = a 0 ( U t + ∆t – U t ) – a 2 U t – a 3 U t
8. Compute velocities at time t + ∆t, using:

· · ·· ··
U t + ∆t = U t + ( 1 – γ )∆tU t + ( γ∆t )U t + ∆t
Repeat steps 5 through 8 for each time step.
Houbolt Operator 1
The Houbolt operator is based on the use of a cubic fitted through three previous
points and the current (unknown) in time. This results in the equations
v n + 1 =  ------ u n + 1 – 3u n + --- u n – 1 – --- u n – 2  ⁄ ∆t

11 3 1
6 2 3 
Eq. 4-43
2
and
a n + 1 = ( 2u n + 1 – 5u n + 4u n – 1 – u n – 2 ) ⁄ ∆t 2 Eq. 4-44
3
Substituting this into the equation of motion results in
 --------
2
M + --------- C + K ∆u = F n + 1 – R n + -------- ( 3u n – 4u n – 1 + u n – 2 )M +
11 1
 ∆t 2 6∆t  ∆t 2
1  7 n 3 n – 1 1 n – 2
Eq. 4-45 4
-----  --- u – --- u + --- u  C
∆t 6 2 3
This equation provides an implicit solution scheme. By solving Eq. 4-41 for ∆u , you
n+1 n+1
obtain Eq. 4-46, and so obtain v and a .
5
u n + 1 = u n + ∆u Eq. 4-46
Eq. 4-45 is based on uniform time steps – errors occur when the time step is changed.
n–1 n–2
Also, a special starting procedure is necessary since u
Eq. 4-45.
and u appear in
6
Single Step Houbolt Operator
The Single Step Houbolt operator starts with the following equilibrium equation and
expressions for the velocity and acceleration:
m1 n+1 c1 n+1 k1 n+1 m n c n k n

α Ma +α Cv +α Ku + α Ma + α Cv + α Ku =
Eq. 4-47
f1 n + 1 f n
α F +aF
n+1 n n 2 n 1 2 n+1
u = u + ∆tv + β∆t a + β ∆t a Eq. 4-48
n+1 n n 1 n+1
v = v + γ∆ta + γ ∆ta Eq. 4-49
Notice that in contrast to the Newmark and the standard Houbolt method, the
equilibrium equation also contains terms corresponding to the beginning of the
m1
1 increment. Without loss of generality, the parameter α can be set to 1. Based on
asymptotic annihilation and second order accuracy, the remaining parameters can be
shown to fulfill:
k 1 1 m k1 1
α = 0 ,β = γ , β = γ+γ , α = –1 ⁄ 2 , α = 1 ⁄ 2β ,
2 c 1 12 c1 1 12 f k
α = – ( 2β + β ) ⁄ 4β , α = ( 2β + 3β ) ⁄ 4β , α = α ,
f1 k1
α = α
3 In this way, the number of unknown parameters has been reduced to two. Based on a
1
Taylor series expansion of the displacement about the nth time step, β and β should
1 1
be related by β + β = 1 ⁄ 2 , which finally yields γ = 1 ⁄ 2(1 ⁄ 2 – γ ) .
1
According to [Ref. 1.], γ should be set to 3/2 (with γ = – 1 ⁄ 2 ) to minimize the
velocity error and to 1/2 (with γ = 0 ) to avoid velocity overshoot. The default
4 1
values in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are γ = 3 ⁄ 2 and γ = –1 ⁄ 2 ,
1
but the user can modify γ and γ if so desired.
Substitution of the velocity and acceleration into the equilibrium equation results in:
5  1 α γ
c1 1
 n+1 n
- M + ---------------------- C + K ∆u = F
 ------------------------ – Ku +
1 2 k1 1 k1
 β ∆t α β ∆tα 
m
1 n 2 n α n
------------------------- M { ∆tv + β∆t a } – --------- Ma – Eq. 4-50
6 1 2 k1
β ∆t α α
k1
α c1  n n
1
γ  2  α
c
n
--------- C  v + γ∆ta – ------------  ∆tv n + β∆ t a n   – --------- Cv
k1 1 k1
α  β ∆t   α
Central Difference Operator

The central difference operator assumes a quadratic variation in the displacement
with respect to time.
an = ( vn + 1 ⁄ 2 – vn – 1 ⁄ 2) ⁄ (∆ t ) Eq. 4-51
v n = ( u n + 1 ⁄ 2 – u n – 1 ⁄ 2 ) ⁄ ( ∆t ) Eq. 4-52
so that
a n = ( ∆u n + 1 – ∆u n ) ⁄ ( ∆t 2 ) Eq. 4-53
where
∆u n = u n – u n – 1 Eq. 4-54
1
for PARAM,MARCDYNM,4:
M M
-------- ∆u n + 1 = F n – R n + -------- ∆u n
∆t 2 ∆t 2
Eq. 4-55
2
for PARAM,MARCDYNM,5:
1
M
-------- ∆u
2
n+1 n n M n
= F – R + -------- ∆u – Cv
2
n – ---
2
Eq. 4-56 3
∆t ∆t
Since the mass matrix is diagonal, no inverse of the operator matrix is needed. Also,
since the operator is only conditionally stable, the critical time step is evaluated at the
beginning of the analysis. For PARAM,MARCDYNM, 4, the critical time step is
4
computed by a power sweep for the highest mode in the system only at the beginning
of the analysis. For PARAM,MARCDYNM, 4, no damping is included. For
PARAM,MARCDYNM, 5, an approximated method based on element geometry is
used to compute the highest eigenvalue. The critical time step is calculated for each 5
time step whenever the PARAM,MARUPDAT,1 is used in the analysis. The variable time
step can be used only for PARAM,MARCDYNM, 5. Unless there is significant
distortion in an element, the change of critical time step is not significant.
Time Step Definition

6
In a transient dynamic analysis, time step parameters are required for integration in
time. MSC.Nastran’s PARAM,MARCAUTO,-1 (MSC.Marc’s AUTO TIME) option can be
used for the Newmark-beta operator and the Single Step Houbolt operator to invoke
the adaptive time control. Enter parameters to specify the time step size and period of
time for this set of boundary conditions.
When using the Newmark-beta operator, decide which frequencies are important to
the response. The time step in this method should not exceed 10 percent of the period
of the highest relevant frequency in the structure. Otherwise, large phase errors will
occur. The phenomenon usually associated with too large a time step is strong
oscillatory accelerations. With even larger time steps, the velocities start oscillating.
With still larger steps, the displacement eventually oscillates. In nonlinear problems,
instability usually follows oscillation. When using adaptive dynamics, you should
prescribe a maximum time step.
As in the Newmark-beta operator, the time step in Houbolt integration should not
exceed 10 percent of the period of the highest frequency of interest. However, the
1 Houbolt method not only causes phase errors, it also causes strong artificial damping.
Therefore, high frequencies are damped out quickly and no obvious oscillations
occur. It is, therefore, completely up to the engineer to determine whether the time
step was adequate. The damping problem is alleviated to a large extent with the Single
Step Houbolt operator.
2 In nonlinear problems, the mode shapes and frequencies are strong functions of time
because of plasticity and large displacement effects, so that the above guidelines can
be only a coarse approximation. To obtain a more accurate estimate, repeat the
analysis with a significantly different time step (1/5 to 1/10 of the original) and
3 compare responses.
The Central Difference and Fast Explicit integration methods are only conditionally
stable; the program automatically calculates the stable time step. This step size yields
accurate results for most practical problems.
4
Initial Conditions
In a transient dynamic analysis, you can specify initial conditions such as nodal
displacements and/or nodal velocities. To enter initial conditions, use the following
5 option: TIC for specified nodal displacements, and Bulk Data nodal velocities.
Time-Dependent Boundary Conditions

Simple time-dependent load or displacement histories can be entered using either
6 time fields or different SPCs for different subcases. However, in general cases with
complex load histories, it is sometimes necessary to enter the history through a user
subroutine. Starting in version 2005, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows the use
of subroutines FORCDT and FORCEM for boundary conditions. Subroutine FORCDT
allows you to specify the time-dependent incremental point loads and incremental
displacements. Subroutine FORCEM allows you to specify the time-dependent
magnitude of the distributed load.
Damping
In a transient dynamic analysis, damping represents the dissipation of energy in the
structural system. It also retards the response of the structural system.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to enter two types of damping in a
transient dynamic analysis: discrete dampers and Rayleigh damping. Use modal
damping for the modal superposition method and Rayleigh damping for the direct
integration method.
1
For direct integration damping, you can specify the damping matrix as a linear
combination of the mass and stiffness matrices of the system. You can specify
damping coefficients on an element basis.
Stiffness damping should not be applied to either Herrmann elements or gap elements
2
because of the presence of Lagrangian multipliers.
Numerical damping is used to damp out unwanted high-frequency chatter in the
structure. If the time step is decreased (stiffness damping might cause too much
damping), use the numerical damping option to make the damping (stiffness)
3
coefficient proportional to the time step. Thus, if the time step decreases,
high-frequency response can still be accurately represented. This type of damping is
particularly useful in problems where the characteristics of the model and/or the
response change strongly during analysis (for example, problems involving opening 4
or closing gaps).
Element damping uses coefficients on the element matrices and is represented by
the equation:
n
5
  ∆t 
C = ∑  α i M i +  β i + γ i -----
π  i 
K Eq. 4-57
i = 1
where 6
C is the global damping matrix
M i is the mass matrix of ith element
K i is the stiffness matrix of the ith element
a i is the mass damping coefficient on the ith element
β i is the usual stiffness damping coefficient on the ith element
γ i is the numerical damping coefficient on the ith element
∆t is the time increment
If the same damping coefficients are used throughout the structure, Equation 4-57 is
equivalent to Rayleigh damping.
The damping on elastic foundations is the same as the damping on the element on
which the foundation is applied.
References
1 For directions on setting up a Transient Dynamic analysis, see “Specifying the
Analysis Type for a Subcase” and “Specifying Transient Dynamic Subcase
6
Creep 149
4.9 Creep
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) offers two schemes for modeling creep in
conjunction with plasticity. Creep for SOL 600 is described differently than Creep for
SOL 106. The CREEP entry used in SOL 106 will not work in SOL 600, and if entered
will cause the job to terminate with an appropriate message. Creep in SOL 600 must
be described using viscoelastic or viscoplastic materials. The creep formulations for
SOL 600 are:
1
1. Treating creep strains and plastic strains separately using an explicit
procedure (where the creep is treated explicitly) or an implicit procedure
(where both creep and plasticity are treated implicitly). These procedures are
available with standard options via data input or with user-specified options 2
via user subroutines. More details are provided below.
2. Modeling creep strains and plastic strains in a unified fashion
(viscoplasticity). Both explicit and implicit procedures are again available for
modeling unified viscoplasticity. More details are provided in the section 3
titled Viscoplasticity in this chapter. The options offered by MSC.Nastran
for modeling creep are as follows:
• Creep data can be entered directly through the MATVP Bulk Data data
entry. The form of the creep is designated with either POWER for empirical 4
creep law or TABLE for a tabular input of creep model parameters.
• An automatic time stepping scheme can be used to maximize the time step
size in the analysis.
• Eigenvalues can be extracted for the estimation of creep buckling time. In 5
addition, for explicit creep, the following additional options can be used:
• Creep behavior can be either isotropic or anisotropic.
• The Oak Ridge National Laboratory (ORNL) rules on creep can be activated.
6
Adaptive Time Control
An automatic creep option takes advantage of the diffusive characteristics of most
creep solutions. Specifically, this option controls the transient creep analysis. You
specify a period of creep time and a suggested time increment. The program
automatically selects the largest possible time increment that is consistent with the
tolerance set on stress and strain increments (see Creep Control Tolerances in this
chapter).
The algorithm is: for a given time step, a solution is obtained. The program then finds
the largest values of stress change per stress, and creep strain change per elastic strain.
It compares these values to the tolerance values, (stress change tolerance) and (strain
change tolerance), for this period.
The value is calculated as the larger of:
1 ( ∆σ ⁄ σ ) ⁄ T σ Eq. 4-58
or
cr
( ∆ε ⁄ ε el ) ⁄ T ε Eq. 4-59
2 If p > 1 , the program resets the time step as:
∆t new = 0.8∆t old ⁄ p Eq. 4-60
3 The time increment is repeated until convergence is obtained or the maximum

recycles control is exceeded. In the latter case, the run is ended.
If the first repeat does not satisfy tolerances, the possible causes are:
• excessive residual load correction
4 • strong additional nonlinearities such as creep buckling-creep collapse
• incorrect coding in user subroutine CRPLAW, VSWELL, or UVSCPL.
Appropriate action should be taken before the solution is restarted.
5 If all is well, the solution is stepped forward and the next step is begun. The time step
used in the next increment is chosen as
∆t new = ∆t old if 0.8 ≤ p < 1 Eq. 4-61

6 ∆t new = 1.25∆t old if 0.65 ≤ p < 0.8 Eq. 4-62
∆t new = 1.5∆t old if p < 0.65 Eq. 4-63
Since the time increment is adjusted to satisfy the tolerances, it is impossible to

predetermine the total number of time increments for a given total creep time.
Creep Control Tolerances

SOL 600 performs a creep analysis under constant load or displacement conditions on
the basis of a set of tolerances and controls you provide.These are as follows:
Creep 151
1. Stress change tolerance – This tolerance controls the allowable stress change
per time step during the creep solution, as a fraction of the total stress at a
point. Stress change tolerance governs the accuracy of the transient creep
response. If you need accurate tracking of the transient response, specify a
tight tolerance of 1 percent or 2 percent stress change per time step. If you
need only the steady-state solution, supply a relatively loose tolerance of 10-
20 percent. It is also possible to check the absolute rather than the relative
stress.
1
2. Creep strain increment per elastic strain – SOL 600 uses either explicit or implicit
integration of the creep rate equation. When the explicit procedure is used,
the creep strain increment per elastic strain is used to control stability. In
almost all cases, the default of 50 percent represents the stability limit, so that 2
you need not provide any entry for this value. It is also possible to check the
absolute rather than the relative strain.
3. Maximum number of recycles for satisfaction of tolerances – The automatic creep
option in SOL 600 chooses its own time step. In some cases, the program 3
recycles to choose a time step that satisfies tolerances, but recycling rarely
occurs more than once per step. Excessive recycling can be caused by
physical problems such as creep buckling, poor coding of user subroutine
CRPLAW, VSWELL, or UVSCPL or excessive residual load correction that can
occur when the creep solution begins from a state that is not in equilibrium.
4
The maximum number of recycles allows you to avoid wasting machine time
under such circumstances. If there is no satisfaction of tolerances after the
attempts at stepping forward, the program stops. The default of five recycles
is conservative in most cases. 5
4. Low stress cut-off – Low stress cut-off avoids excessive iteration and small
time steps caused by tolerance checks that are based on small (round off)
stress states. A simple example is a beam in pure bending. The stress on the
neutral axis is a very small roundoff-number, so that automatic time
stepping scheme should not base time step choices on tolerance satisfaction
6
at such points. The default of five percent of the maximum stress in the
structure is satisfactory for most cases.
5. Choice of element for tolerance checking – Creep tolerance checking occurs as a
default for all integration points in all elements. You might wish to check
tolerances in only 1 element or in up to 14 elements of your choice. Usually,
the most highly stressed element is chosen.
When you enter the tolerances and controls, the following conventions apply:
• All stress and strain measures in tolerance checks are second invariants of
the deviatoric state (that is, equivalent von Mises uniaxial values).
• You can reset all tolerances and controls upon the completion of one
automatic creep sequence.
References
1 For directions on setting up a Creep analysis, see “Specifying the Analysis Type for
a Subcase” and “Specifying Creep Subcase Parameters” in Chapter 7.
Viscoelasticity
2 In a certain class of problems, structural materials exhibit viscoelastic behavior. Two
examples of these problems are quenching of glass structures and time-dependent
deformation of polymeric materials. The viscoelastic material retains linearity
between load and deformation; however, this linear relationship depends on time.
Consequently, the current state of deformation must be determined from the entire
3 history of loading. Different models consisting of elastic elements (spring) and viscous
elements (dashpot) can be used to simulate the viscoelastic material behavior
described in Chapter 10. A special class of temperature dependence known as the
Thermo-Rheologically Simple behavior (TRS) is also applicable to a variety of thermal
4 viscoelastic problems. Both the equation of state and the hereditary integral
approaches can be used for viscoelastic analysis.
To model the thermo-rheologically simple material behavior, MSC.Nastran’s
MATTVE Bulk Data entry can be used to choose the Williams-Landel-Ferry equation
5 or the power series expression or Narayanaswamy model.
In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, two options are available for small strain
viscoelastic analysis. The first option uses the equation of state approach and
represents a Kelvin model. The second option is based on the hereditary integral
6 approach and allows the selection of a generalized Maxwell model. The thermo-
rheologically simple behavior is also available in the second option for thermal
viscoelastic analysis. The Viscoelastic section in Chapter 10 discusses these models in
detail. The automatic time stepping schemes (MSC.MARC’s AUTO CREEP) triggered
from MSC.Nastran using PARAM,MAUTCREP,1 and PARAM,MAUTTIME,1.
MSC.Marc’s AUTO TIME can be used in a viscoelastic analysis for first and second
options, respectively.
The first option for viscoelastic analysis uses the Kelvin model. To activate the
generalized Kelvin model in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, use MSC.Nastran’s
PARAM,MVISELAS,1 (MSC.Marc’s VISCO ELAS) or PARAM,MCREEP (MSC.Marc’s
CREEP parameter). To input the matrices [A] and [B] for the Kelvin strain rate
Creep 153
computations, use the user subroutine CRPVIS (available starting in MSC.Nastran version
2005). To input creep time period and the tolerance control for the maximum strain in
an increment, use MSC.Nastran’s PARAM,MAUTCREP,1 (MSC.Marc’s history
definition option AUTO CREEP).
The Simo model for large strain viscoelasticity can be used in conjunction with the
damage and hyperelastic Mooney or Ogden material model. The large strain
viscoelastic material behavior can be simulated by incorporating MSC.Nastran’s 1
MATVE (MSC.Marc’s model definition option VISCELMOON or VISCELOGDEN).
Viscoelasticity for hyperelastic materials is available only in the total Lagrangian
framework.
Nonlinear structural relaxation behavior of materials can be modeled by the
Narayanaswamy model which accounts for memory effect. This model allows
2
simulation of evolution of physical properties of glass subjected to complex time
temperature histories. The thermal expansion behavior for the Narayanaswamy
model is controlled via MATVE (MSC.Marc’s model definition option VISCEL EXP).
3
6
4.10 Rigid-Plastic Flow (Available in MSC.Nastran 2005)

The rigid-plastic flow analysis is an approach to large deformation analysis which can
be used for metal forming problems. Two formulations are available: an Eulerian
(steady state) and Lagrangian (transient) approach. The effects of elasticity are not
included. If these effects are important, this option should not be used.
1 In the steady state approach, the velocity field (and stress field) is obtained as the
solution of a steady-state flow analysis. The time period is considered as 1.0 and,
hence, the velocity is equal to the deformation. In the transient formulation, the
incremental displacement is calculated.
2 MSC.Nastran’s PARAM,MRPFLOW (MSC.Marc’s R-P FLOW parameter) invokes the

rigid-plastic procedure. This procedure needs to enforce the incompressibility
condition, which is inherent to the strictly plastic type of material response being
considered.
3 Incompressibility can be imposed in three ways:

1. by means of Lagrange multipliers. Such procedure requires Herrmann
elements which have a pressure variable as the Lagrange multiplier.
2. by means of penalty functions. This procedure uses regular solid elements,
4 and adds penalty terms to any volumetric strain rate that develops. The
constant dilatation formulation will be used automatically (a nonzero value
in the second field of MSC.Marc’s GEOMETRY model definition option will be
created by the internal MSC.Nastran translator). The penalty factor can be
treated as constant or variable through the R-P FLOW parameter. The penalty
5 value is entered through MSC.Nastran’s PARAM,MRPFLOWP value (the
MSC.Marc’s PARAMETERS option).
3. In plane stress analysis (shell and membrane elements) the incompressibility
constraint is satisfied exactly by updating the thickness. This capability is not
6 available for steady state analysis.
In R-P flow analysis, several iterations are required at any given increment, the
greatest number occurring in the first increment. Subsequent increments require
fewer iterations, since the initial iteration can make use of the solution from the
previous increment.
Due to the simplicity of the rigid-plastic formulation, it is possible to bypass stress
recovery for all iterations but the last in each increment, provided that displacement
control is used. In such cases, considerable savings in execution time are achieved. If
nodal based friction is used in a contact analysis, then a stress recovery is always
performed after each iteration.
Rigid-Plastic Flow (Available in MSC.Nastran 2005) 155
Steady State Analysis

The steady state R-P flow formulation is based on an Eulerian reference system. For
problems in which a steady-state solution is not appropriate, an alternative method is
available to update the coordinates. User subroutine UPNOD, available in MSC.Nastran
2005, is used to update the nodal coordinates at the end of a step according to the
relationship.
n
1
x in = x in – 1 + v ∆t
where n refers to the step number, vn is the nodal velocity components, and ∆t is an
arbitrary time step. ∆t is selected in such a way as to allow only a reasonable change
in mesh shape while ensuring stability with each step. 2
Updating the mesh requires judicious selection of a time step. This requires some
knowledge of the magnitude of the nodal velocities that will be encountered. The time
step should be selected such that the strain increment is never more than one percent
for any given increment. 3
The quantities under the title of ENGSTN in the printouts actually refer to the strain
rate at an element integration point. The reaction forces output by the program gives
the limit loads on the structure.
4
Transient Analysis
In the transient procedure, there is an automatic updating of the mesh at the end of
each increment. During the analysis, the updated mesh can exhibit severe distortion
and the solution might be unable to converge. Mesh rezoning can be used to overcome 5
this difficulty starting with MSC.Nastran version 2005.
Technical Background
The rigid-plastic flow capability is based on iteration for the velocity field in an 6
incompressible, non-Newtonian fluid. The normal flow condition for a nonzero strain
rate can be expressed as:
 2 σ · · ·
σ′ ij =  --- --·- ε ij = µ ( ε ) ε ij Eq. 4-64
 3 ε
where
· 2· ·
ε = --- ε ij ε ij Eq. 4-65
3
is the equivalent strain rate, σ is the yield stress (which may be rate-dependent) and
1
σ′ ij = σ ij – --- δ ij σ kk Eq. 4-66
3
gives the deviatoric stress. The effective viscosity is evaluated as:
1 2 σ
µ = --- --·-
3 ε
Eq. 4-67
·
Note that as ε → 0, µ → ∞ . A cutoff value of strain rate is used in the program to
·
avoid this difficulty. An initial value for ε is necessary to start the iterations. These
2 values can be specified in by PARAM,MRPFCUT,value and PARAM,MRPFINIT,value
Parameters respectively. The default cut-off value is 10-6, and the default initial strain rate
value is 10-4.
The value of the flow stress is dependent upon both the equivalent strain, the
3 equivalent strain rate, and the temperature. This dependence can be given through
MSC.Nastran’s PARAM,MRPFEEQ value (MSC.Marc’s WORK HARD), MSC.Nastran’s
PARAM,MRPFEDEQ value (MSC.Marc’s STRAIN RATE), and MSC.Nastran’s
PARAM,MRPFTEMP value (MSC.Marc’s TEMPERATURE EFFECTS options),
4 respectively.
6
Superplastic Flow (Available in MSC.Nastran 2005) 157
4.11 Superplastic Flow (Available in MSC.Nastran 2005)

Superplasticity is the ability of a material to undergo extensive deformation such as
strains of 1000% without necking. Superplastic behavior has been reported in
numerous metal, alloys and ceramics. Every instance of superplasticity is associated
with: (1) A fine grain size ( 1 – 10 µm ), (2) deformation temperatures > 0.4T m , and
(3) a strain-rate sensitivity factor m > 0.3 .
1
Using finite element analysis to simulate superplastic fabrication of complex parts
used in the aerospace and automotive industries requires this material behavior and
contact with friction. Furthermore, the process pressure needs to be automatically
adjusted to keep the material within a target strain rate. The simulation can be used to
predict thinning, forming time, and areas of void formation. 2
Three mechanisms have been proposed to account for the high strain-rate sensitivity
found in superplastic materials: (1) Vacancy creep, (2) creep by grain boundary
diffusion, and (3) grain boundary sliding. According to Ghosh and Hamilton, the
strain-rate sensitivity of metals arises from the viscous nature of the deformation 3
process. The viscosity is a result of the resistance offered by internal obstacles within
the material. In dislocation glide and climb processes, the obstacles are a fine
dispersion of second phase particles within the grain interior, between which the
dislocations are bent around and moved. At high homologous temperatures
( T > 0.4T m ; where T m is the melting temperature), the high diffusivities around
4
grain boundary regions can lead to grain boundary sliding. The overall rate sensitivity
of a material is then a result of the rate sensitivities of the grain boundary and the grain
interior. The more the material behaves as a viscous liquid, the greater its
superplasticity. 5
The superplastic behavior is characterized by the dependence of the flow stress upon
the strain-rate, which is usually depicted by the logarithmic relationship shown in
Figure 4-16.
As indicated in Figure 4-16, the stress-strain rate behavior of a superplastic material
6
can be divided into three regions. Values of strain-rate sensitivity, m (the slope of flow
stress versus strain-rate curve) which is a measure of resistance to localized necking,
are relatively low in both the low stress-low strain rate region I and the high stress-
high strain rate region III and superplasticity is not manifested. Rather, superplasticity
is found only in region II, a transition region in which stress increases rapidly with
increasing strain-rate. As the temperature increases and/or grain size decreases,
region II is displaced to higher strain-rates. Moreover, the maximum observed values
of m increase with similar changes in these parameters.
(a)
Region III
ln σ
Region II
1 Decreasing grain size or

Region I increasing temperature
.
ln ε
2
(b)
Decreasing grain size or
increasing temperature
d ln σ
m  = ------------·  Region I
 
d ln ε
3 Region II
Region III
.
ln ε
4
Figure 4-16 (a) Flow stress and (b) Strain-rate Sensitivity as a Function
of Strain-rate
Certainly the forming process innovations evoked will need to be carefully studied
5 and developed. Forming times are slow, and there will be a critical need for
optimizing forming pressures, stress strain-rate and deflection in sheet forming.
Based on the schematic flow stress-strain rate relationships given above, it is apparent
that high values of m are requisite for superplastic materials. Since, for a given
material and forming temperature, m , usually varies with strain-rate, it is desirable to
6 control strain-rate during forming so that optimum or at least adequate strain-rate
sensitivity is exhibited. Ductility is also dependent upon forming temperature, which
must lie within a narrow range. If forming temperatures and pressure cycle are
optimum, then unlike conventional ductile materials, superplastic materials are much
less susceptible to localized necking. Additionally, under such conditions, the flow
stress occurring during forming is much lower than the mechanical yield stress.
Thus, the superplastic materials may be viewed as exhibiting time-dependent inelastic
behavior with the yield stress as a function of time, temperature, strain-rate, total
stress and total strain. Typical materials used in commercial superplastic forming
applications include Ti-6A1-4V titanium alloy and 5083 aluminium alloy.
Superplastic Flow (Available in MSC.Nastran 2005) 159
The form of constitutive equation used to simulate superplasticity is given as:
·m
σy = ε Eq. 4-68
The form in Equation 4-68 can be recovered by using appropriate constants in the
ISOTROPIC model definition option to define power law or rate power law. Thus,
Power Law Model:

· m ·n
σ y = A ( ε o + ε ) + Bε Eq. 4-69
1
m·n
Rate Power Law Model: σ y = Aε ε + B Eq. 4-70
The superplastic forming process requires the use of MSC.Nastran’s 2

PARAM,MSPFLOW,1 (MSC.Marc’s SPFLOW parameter). The use of this parameter
automatically activates MSC.Marc’s FOLLOW FOR and PROCESSOR parameters. The
process parameters are controlled by the use of MSC.Nastran’s parameters mspflow,
mspfpre, msfpinc, mspfprev, mspfstrn, mspfecut, mspfpbig and mspfpmin
(MSC.Marc’s SUPERPLASTIC history definition option).
3
6
4.12 References
1. Chung, J. and Hulbert, G.M., “A family of single-step Houbolt time
integration algorithms for structural dynamics”, Comp. Meth. in App. Mech.
Engg., 118, 1994.
6
SECTION
Analysis Techniques
5
■ Domain Decomposition
■ RESTARTS
162 Analysis Techniques
5.1 Domain Decomposition

The Domain
Decomposition Method
(DDM) is the ability to
subdivide your model
into domains. Each
1 domain is then submitted
to a separate computer or
CPU for parallel
processing. With this
2 ability, you can analyze
large models with much
less over all compute time.
A single processor job that might take 30 hours to run, can run in half the time on two
processors, or even a quarter of the time with four processors. Jobs that take days to
3 run on a single machine can be run overnight on multiple processors that would
otherwise lay idle. With DDM, large models that were once thought impossible to
practically optimize, now can be solved.
4 Specifying Domain Decomposition

The PARAMARC Bulk Data entry controls the domain decomposition process.
Domains can now be specified by you or automatically.
5 Entry Description
PARAMARC Specifies parallel regions for domain decomposition in
nonlinear analysis when MSC.Marc is executed from
MSC.Nastran
6
References
• “PARAMARC (SOL 600)” on page 1779 of the .
Defining Domain Decomposition Parameters in MSC.Patran

form.
2. Click on Solution Type..., then click Solution Parameters...
Domain Decomposition 163
3. Select Domain Decomposition... to bring up the subform shown below.
Decomposition Method
• Automatic Automatic is recommended because the work is done 3
by MSC.Nastran.
• Manual If manual is selected, groups must be defined
previously.
Number of Domains Defines the number of domains to be created. 4
Model/Current Group This switch is not applicable to this release. By
default groups from all domains will be translated.
DDM Submittal in MSC.Patran 5

When a job is submitted using DDM, MSC.Nastran creates n+1 input files. A baseline
(master) file which has no model or history information is created called
jobname.marc.dat. The rest of the files created are 1jobname.marc.dat,
2jobname.marc.dat, etc. up to the number of domains. Each of these files contains
6
coordinate and connectivity data for its domain only. Any options that reference
element or node numbers must be contained in that domain only. Otherwise the input
files are identical. A DDM job is submitted by MSC.Patran to MSC.Nastran in the
same way a non-DDM is submitted.
DDM Results in MSC.Patran

There are multiple results (post) files from a DDM run just as there are input files.
There is one for each domain by the same names with the .t16 /.t19 file extension
plus the master. If the master jobname.marc.t16/t19 file is attached, results from all
domains are automatically accessed from each domain post file. If however, you want
only results for a particular domain, you must attach that file only.
1
DDM Configuration
Please see the MSC.Marc Parallel Version for Windows NT / UNIX Installation and
User Notes for proper configuration. MSC.Marc Parallel must be configured properly
2 in order for DDM to work properly from MSC.Patran or MSC.Nastran. If you have
trouble, please check the following:
On Windows machines:
1. Make sure PaTENT MPI is installed and running as a service.
3 2. Make sure you have a valid license of PaTENT MPI. The license file is
generally found under
<install_dir>\marc2001\patentmpi\admin\license.dat. Contact MSC if
this license has expired.
4 3. When using a cluster of Windows machines you must have all the input files
in a shared directory when you submit the job. The MSC.Marc installation on
the master host must be in a shared directory also unless all machines have
their own installation of MSC.Marc, and then they must be referenced in the
5 hostfile.
4. If you are submitting from a Windows machine to a UNIX machine, make

sure that you have a valid .rhosts file in your home directory. Place the
name of the Windows machine and the remote machine you are submitting
6 to in the .rhosts file. The name must appear exactly as is when you do a
“top” command on the UNIX machine when you have a telnet session from
your Windows machine active. If you cannot do an “rsh” or an “rlogin” from
your Windows machine to the UNIX machine then there is something wrong
with your remote access as set up by the .rhosts file. Check with a system
administrator.
On UNIX:
1. You must be able to “rlogin” to all referenced machines in the hostfile
without supplying a password. If you cannot, check that your .rhosts file
has the name of all the machines in it. Check with a system administrator if
you need help.
Domain Decomposition 165
Only homogeneous clusters of machines are truly supported. They must all be
running the same MPI service or daemons. For example a cluster of 64 bit HP
machines must all use the HP MPI; a cluster of 32 bit HP machines can use either HP
MPI or MPICH, but not a mixture; heterogeneous clusters should work if they all use
MPICH; UNIX and Windows clusters are not supported.
6
5.2 RESTARTS
A restart capability is available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600). Any
analysis can be saved from any point for a possible restart. A new static load case or a
buckling analysis can be solved by restarting from the original static analysis.
1 Specifying Restarts and Parameters

The RESTART Bulk Data entry controls a restart for SOL 600.
Entry Description
2 RESTART Specifies writing or reading of restart data for Nonlinear

Analysis when MSC.Marc is executed from MSC.Nastran.
References
3 • “RESTART (SOL 600)” on page 1960 of the MSC.Natran Quick Reference

Guide.
Specifying a Restart in MSC.Patran
4 1. Click the Analysis Application button to bring up Analysis Application

form.
2. On the Analysis form, set the Action>Object>Method combination to
Analyze>Restart>Full Run.
5 3. Click on Restart Parameters... to bring up the subform shown below.
6
RESTARTS 167
6
6
SECTION
Modeling
6
■ Coordinate Systems
■ Nodes
■ Elements
■ Modeling in MSC.Patran
168 Modeling
6.1 Coordinate Systems

The basic coordinate system in MSC.Nastran Nonlinear is a right-handed, rectangular
Cartesian system. Your may choose other systems locally for input, for output of
nodal variables (displacements, velocities, etc.) and point loads or boundary condition
specification, and for material options. In general, all coordinate systems are assumed
to be right-handed. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear output is provided in the
1 “Global” Coordinate System. The Global Coordinate System is defined by field 7 of
each GRID entry and therefore may refer to a rotated rectangular or cylindrical
coordinate system. If field 7 is blank or zero, the output is in the Basic Coordinate
System (which is rectangular). MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear does not support
2 output in spherical coordinate systems, however input may be specified in spherical
coordinate systems.
Nodal Coordinate Systems

3 If the Coordinate ID is nonzero, it may refer to a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical
local coordinate frame.
Note the following points regarding nodal coordinate systems:
1. Displacement vectors and unbalanced force vectors are computed and
4 written to the results file in the global coordinate system.
2. Boundary conditions and nodal forces are applied in the global coordinate
system.
3. Coupling equations and multipoint constraint (MPC) equation, including
5 the MPC equations that result from rigid links, relate displacement
components in the global coordinate system.
4. Rigid link elements will produce erroneous results if a local coordinate
system is defined at either end of the element.
6 5. For 2D models (i.e., models whose elements have only UX and UY
degrees-of-freedom), the Z-axis of the nodal coordinate system must
coincide with the Z-axis of the basic coordinate system.
Element Coordinate Systems

There is a rectangular coordinate system associated with each element in a
MSC.Nastran SOL 600 analysis. The default coordinate system and the options
available for modifying it, depend on the element type and, in some cases, on the
material model used. Descriptions are given in “Element Library” in Chapter 11 for
each element type.
Coordinate Systems 169
If the element is homogeneous and either isotropic or orthotropic, the components of

stress and strain are computed and passed to the results file in the element coordinate
system.
If the element is homogeneous and orthotropic, the directions of orthotropy coincide
with the element coordinate system.
For laminated elements each layer has its own coordinate system. The reference line
for defining layer orientations is the X-axis of the element coordinate system. Material
1
properties are entered, and stresses and strains are computed in the layer coordinate
systems for all layers of laminated elements.
Depending on the element type and material model, the default element coordinate
system can be overridden by referring to a nonzero Coordinate ID when meshing. 2
Note: When used to define an element coordinate system, the Coordinate ID can reference
only a rectangular coordinate system.
3
Defining Material Axes Orientations
With MSC.Nastran’s THETA and MCID fields on the CQUAD4, CTRIA3, etc.
elements (MSC.Marc’s ORIENTATION option) you specify the orientation of the material
axes of symmetry (relationship between the element coordinate system and the global
coordinate system, or the 0o ply angle line, if composite) in one of four different ways:
4
1. as a specific angle offset from an element edge,
2. as a specific angle offset from the line created by two intersecting planes,
3. as a particular coordinate system specified by user-supplied unit vectors, or 5
4. as specified by user subroutine ORIENT. This is accomplished by the
specification of an orientation type, an orientation angle, or one or two user-
defined vectors (available starting in version 2005).
6
Defining Material Axes in MSC.Patran
The orientation of the material axes are defined in MSC.Patran using the Element
Properties application.
1. Click the Properties application icon to access the Element Properties
application.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to create a CQUADi or CTRIAi
element.
3. Click Input Properties... and enter the material axes orientation information.
170 Modeling
There are three ways to assign the material orientation: (1) reference a
coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a
vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle
offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of
the THETA or MCID field on the CQUADi or CTRIAi entry. This scalar value
can either be a constant value in degrees, a vector, or a reference to an
1 existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
6
Nodes 171
6.2 Nodes
Model geometry is defined in MSC.Nastran with grid points. A grid point is a point
on or in the structural continuum which is used to define a finite element. A simple
model may have only a handful of grid points; a complex model may have many tens
of thousands. The structure’s grid points displace with the loaded structure. Each grid
point of the structural model has six possible components of displacement: three
translations (in the x-, y-, or z-directions) and three rotations (about the x-, y-, or z-
1
axes). These components of displacement are called degrees of freedom (DOFs).
Degrees-of-Freedom. The degrees-of-freedom in MSC.Nastran Nonlinear are

always referred to as follows:
2
1 x-displacement.
2 y-displacement.
3 z-displacement.
4 Rotation about the x-axis.
3
5 Rotation about the y-axis.
6 Rotation about the z-axis.
MSC.Nastran Nonlinear only activates those degrees-of-freedom needed at a node.

4
Thus, some of the degrees-of-freedom listed above may not be used at all nodes in a
model, because each element type only uses those degrees-of-freedom which are
relevant. For example, two-dimensional solid (continuum) stress/displacement
elements only use degrees-of-freedom 1 and 2. The degrees-of-freedom actually used 5
at any node are thus the envelope of those variables needed in each element that uses
the node.
6
172 Modeling
6.3 Elements
Once the geometry (grid points) of the structural model has been established, the grid
points are used to define the finite elements.
MSC.Nastran has an extensive library of finite elements covering a wide range of
physical behavior. Some of these elements and their names are shown in figure below.
1 The C in front of each element name stands for “connection.”
• Point Element (not a finite element, but can be included in the finite element
model)
2 CMASS1 (Scalar mass connection)

CONM1 (Concentrated mass)
• Spring Elements (they behave like simple extensional or rotational springs)
3 CELAS2
• Line Elements (they behave like rods, bars, or beams)
CROD, CBAR, CBEAM

4 • Surface Elements (they behave like membranes or thin plates)
5 CTRIA3 CQUAD4
• Solid Elements (they behave like bricks or thick plates)

6
CPENTA CTETRA
CHEXA
• Rigid Bar (infinitely stiff without causing numerical difficulties in the

mathematical model)
RBE2
Elements 173
Structural elements are defined on Bulk Data connection entries that identify the grid
points to which the element is connected. The mnemonics for all such entries have a
prefix of the letter “C”, followed by an indication of the type of element, such as CBAR
and CROD. The order of the grid point identification defines the positive direction of
the axis of a one-dimensional element and the positive surface of a plate element. The
connection entries include additional orientation information when required. Some
elements allow for offsets between its connecting grid points and the reference plane
of the element. The coordinate systems associated with element offsets are defined in
1
terms of the grid point coordinate systems. For most elements, each connection entry
references a property definition entry. If many elements have the same properties, this
system of referencing eliminates a large number of duplicate entries.
Details for each element type are described in “Element Library” in Chapter 11. 2
6
174 Modeling
6.4 Modeling in MSC.Patran

In MSC.Patran, geometric models are the foundation on which most finite element
models are built. Geometric curves, surfaces, or solids provide the base for creating
nodes, elements, and loads and boundary conditions; the geometric model also serves
as the structure to which material properties, as well as element properties, may be
assigned even before any mesh is actually generated.
1
Creating Geometry in MSC.Patran
Model geometry may be constructed in MSC.Patran, accessed directly from a CAD
application, or imported in specially formatted translator files. Whatever the source of
2 the geometry, a single geometric model will be maintained throughout all geometric
and finite element operations. Geometric entities, even if obtained from external files,
retain their original mathematical representation without any approximations or
substitutions.
3 Accessing the Geometry Application
In MSC.Patran you can create, modify, and delete points, curves, surfaces, and solids.
MSC.Patran assigns a default color to the display of all geometric entities.
4 Pick the Geometry icon in the MSC.Patran Main Form to access the Geometry
application.
5 The Geometry form controls all processes in the Geometry application. The top
portion of the form contains three keywords, Action, Object, and Method; these
remain the same throughout all activities. The rest of the entries will vary depending
on the requirements posed by the specified action, object, and method.
6
Modeling in MSC.Patran 175
Action Names the operation that will be performed; for

example Create, Edit, or Delete.
Object Identifies the geometric entity upon which the action is
performed, for example, Solid. In this case, if the Action
is Create, then the command requests that a solid be
created.
1
Method Specifies the procedure used to perform the action.
Taking the above example one step further, if the
Method is Surface, a solid will be created by one of the
techniques that utilize surfaces. 2
There are hundreds of action, object, method combinations available for creating
geometric entities in MSC.Patran. For complete descriptions on creating geometry
models, see the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling.
3
Utilizing External Geometry (CAD) Files
MSC.Patran can make use of geometry created in databases outside of MSC.Patran by
either accessing geometric data directly from one of several CAD systems, or importing
geometry using special files. 4
Geometry access, performed through the unique Direct Geometry Access (DGA)
feature, does not require any translation. MSC.Patran accesses the original geometry
and uses the geometric definitions of all entities.
5
On the other hand, when geometry is imported, MSC.Patran first evaluates the
mathematical definition of entities in their originating CAD system, and then
formulates the information to be appropriate for MSC.Patran operations.
Imported geometry comes to MSC.Patran via IGES, Express Neutral files, or 6
MSC.Patran Neutral files.
IGES (Initial Graphic Exchange Specification) is an ANSI standard formatted file that
makes it possible to exchange data among most commercial CAD systems. Express
Neutral files are intermediate files created during a Unigraphics or CV CAD model
access. MSC.Patran Neutral files are specially formatted for the purpose of providing
a means of importing and exporting model data.
176 Modeling
Geometry received into the database, whether through direct access or import, is
treated as if it had been built in MSC.Patran; meshing, load and boundary condition
assignments, element and material properties definitions are all performed as if on
MSC.Patran’s own “native” geometry.
Creating Finite Element Meshes in MSC.Patran

1 Finite elements themselves are defined by both their topology (i.e., their shape) and
their properties. For example, the elements used to create a mesh for a surface may be
composed of quadrilaterals or triangles. Similarly, one element may be a steel plate
modeling structural effects such as displacement and rotation, while another may
represent an air mass in an acoustic analysis.MSC.Patran provides numerous ways to
2 create a finite element mesh.
At this stage of using MSC.Patran, where you are creating a finite element mesh using
the Finite Elements application form, elements are defined purely in terms of their
topology. Other properties such as materials, thickness and behavior types are then
3 defined for these elements in subsequent applications, and discussed in later chapters
of this guide.
The most rudimentary method of creating a finite element mesh is to manually
generate individual nodes, and then to create individual elements from previously
4 defined nodes. Individual nodes can be either be generated from the geometry model
or directly created using node creation tools that bypass the need for point definitions.
A finite element model created manually supports the entire MSC.Patran element
library and where applicable, MSC.Patran automatically generates midedge, midface
5 and midbody nodes.
MSC.Patran contains many capabilities to help you manually create the right kind of
finite element mesh for your model, and capabilities that automate the process of
finite element creation. MSC.Patran provides the following capabilities for finite
6 element modeling (FEM):
• Mesh seeding tools to control specific mesh densities in specific areas of your
geometry.
• Several highly automated techniques for mesh generation.
• Equivalencing capabilities for joining meshes in adjacent regions.
• Tools to verify the quality and accuracy of your finite element model.
• Capabilities for direct input and editing of finite element data.
Modeling in MSC.Patran 177
Automatic Meshing Tools

There are four basic mesh generation techniques available in MSC.Patran: IsoMesh,
Paver Mesh, Auto TetMesh, and 2-1/2D Meshing. Selecting the right technique for a
particular model must be based on geometry, model topology, analysis objectives,
and engineering judgment.
Isomesh . Creates a traditional mapped mesh on regularly shaped geometry via 1

simple subdivision. This method creates Quad and Tria elements on surfaces and
brick elements on solids. The resulting mesh supports all element configurations in
MSC.Patran.
Paver. The Paver is an automated surface meshing technique that you can use with
any arbitrary surface region, including trimmed surfaces, composite surfaces, and
2
irregular surface regions. Unlike the IsoMesh approach, the Paver technique creates a
mesh by first subdividing the surface boundaries into mesh points, and then operates
on these boundaries to construct interior elements
3
TetMesh. Arbitrary solid mesher generates tetrahedral elements within MSC.Patran
solids defined by an arbitrary number of faces or volumes formed by collection of
triangular element shells. This method is based on MSC plastering technology.
2-1/2D Mesher . Transforms a planar 2D mesh to produce a 3D mesh of solid 4

elements, using sweep and extrude operations.
Accessing the Finite Element Application

All of MSC.Patran’s finite element modeling capabilities are available by selecting the 5
Finite Element button on the main form.
6
Like the Geometry Application, the top portion of the Finite Element form contains
three keywords, Action, Object, and Method; these remain the same throughout all
activities. Finite Element (FE) Meshing, Node and Element Editing, Nodal
Equivalencing, ID Optimization, Model Verification, FE Show, Modify and Delete,
and ID Renumber, are all accessible by setting the Action/Object/Method
combination on the Finite Elements form.
For complete descriptions on creating geometry models, see the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling.
178 Modeling
6
SECTION
Setting Up, Monitoring, and
7 Debugging the Analysis
■ Solution Type
■ Analysis Procedures
■ Translation Parameters
■ Solution Parameters
■ Subcases
■ Subcase Parameters
■ Execution Procedure for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear from the

Command Line
■ Monitoring the Analysis
■ Debugging the Analysis

180 Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
7.1 Solution Type

MSC.Nastran can simulate many different types of structural response. In general an
analysis type can be either static or dynamic. In a static analysis, loads and boundary
conditions are applied to a model and the response is assumed to remain the constant
over time. In dynamic analysis the response changes over time. In MSC.Nastran, both
static and dynamic analysis may simulate linear response or nonlinear response. SOL
7 600 incorporates the formulations and functionality to simulate nonlinear static and
dynamic structural responses. The specific procedure MSC.Nastran will run is
specified on the Executive Control Statement by the ID entry. SOL 600 represents
multiple types of analysis procedures, any of which can be specified by the ID value
2 on the SOL 600 Executive Control Statements.
Specifying the Solution Type

MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) is designated with the following Executive
3 Control Statement in the MSC.Nastran Bulk Data file, where the ID entry indicates
which analysis procedure is to be run.
Entry Description
4 SOL 600, ID Creates MSC.Marc input and optionally executes MSC.Marc

from inside MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600).
References
5 • “SOL 600,ID” on page 144 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Defining the Solution Type in MSC.Patran

Prior to selecting a Solution Type, check to see that under Analysis Preferences the
6 Analysis Code is set to MSC.Nastran, and the Analysis Type is set to Structural.
To set the Solution Type:
1. Click on the Analysis Application button.

2. On the Analysis Application form, click Solution Type... and select Implicit
Nonlinear from the list of available Solution Types.
References
• “Analyze - Setting Up a File for Analysis” on page 9 of the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 5: Analysis Application.
Analysis Procedures 181
7.2 Analysis Procedures

The subcase is the MSC.Nastran mechanism for associating loads and boundary
conditions, output requests, and various other parameters to be used during part of a
complete run. Each subcase can be designated with one of the analysis types listed
below. For each analysis type, you will define the Solution Parameters and Output
Requests; these collectively constitute the Analysis Procedures.
7
In MSC.Nastran, Case Control options provide the loads and constraints, and load
incrementation method, and controls the program after the initial elastic analysis.
Case Control options also include blocks which allow changes in the initial model
specifications. Case Control options can also specify print-out and postprocessing
options.Each set of load sets must be begin with a SUBCASE command and be 2
terminated by another SUBCASE or a BEGIN BULK command. If there is only one
load case, the SUBCASE entry is not required. The SUBCASE option requests that the
program perform another increment or series of increments. The input format for
these options is described in MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
3
Analysis Types
Analysis Types for subcases in SOL 600 include the following:
4
Type Description
Linear Static Static stress analysis is used when inertia effects can be
neglected. During a linear static step, the model’s response is
defined by the linear elastic stiffness at the base state, the state of 5
deformation and stress at the beginning of the step. Contact
conditions cannot change during the step - they remain as they
are defined in the base state.
Nonlinear
Static
Nonlinear static analysis requires the solution of nonlinear
equilibrium equations, for which MSC.Nastran Implicit
6
Nonlinear uses Newton’s method. Many problems involve
history dependent response, so that the solution is usually
obtained as a series of increments, with iteration within each
increment to obtain equilibrium. For most cases, the automatic
incrementation provided by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is
preferred, although direct user control is also provided for those
cases where the user has experience with a particular problem.
Type Description
Normal Modes This solution type uses eigenvalue techniques to extract the
frequencies of the current system, The stiffness determined at
the end of the previous step is used as the basis for the
extraction, so that small vibrations of a preloaded structure can
be modeled.
7 Transient This solution procedure integrates all of the equations of motion
Dynamic through time. For linear systems, the dynamic method, using the
Single-Step Hubolt operator, is unconditionally stable, meaning
there is no mathematical limit on the size of the time increment
2 that can be used to integrate a linear system. However, the time
step or the maximum allowable error parameter must be small
enough to ensure an accurate solution.
Nonlinear This solution type is used when nonlinear dynamic response is
3 Transient
Dynamic
being studied. For most cases, the automatic incrementation
provided is preferred, although direct user control is also
provided for those cases where the user has experience with a
particular problem.
4 Buckling Eigenvalue buckling estimates are obtained. Classical eigenvalue

buckling analysis (e.g., “Euler” buckling) is often used to
estimate the critical (buckling) load of “stiff” structures. “Stiff”
structures are those that carry their design loads primarily by
axial or membrane action, rather than by bending action. Their
5 response usually involves very little deformation prior to
buckling.
Creep This analysis procedure performs a transient, static,
stress/displacement analysis. It is especially provided for the
6 analysis of materials which are described by the CREEP material
form.
Analysis Procedures 183
Type Description
Viscoelastic This is especially provided for the time domain analysis of
(Time Domain) materials which are described by the VISCOELASTIC, TIME
material forms. The dissipative part of the material behavior is
defined through a Prony series representation of the normalized
shear and bulk relaxation moduli, either specified directly on the
VISCOELASTIC, TIME material forms, determined from user 7
input creep test data, or determined from user input relaxation
test data.
Body Body Approach enables you to position rigid bodies to just touch
Approach deformable bodies before beginning a subsequent Load Step. No 2
analysis is actually performed during a Body Approach step.It is
used commonly in multi-forming simulations where bodies are
brought just into contact before the analysis begins.
Specifying the Analysis Type for a Subcase

3
The Analysis Type is designated by specifying an ID as part of the Executive Control
Statement in the MSC.Nastran Bulk Data file.
4
Entry Description
SOL 600, ID Creates MSC.Marc input and optionally executes MSC.Marc
from inside MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600).
5
The following Solution Sequences are available with SOL 600.
Table 7-1 Solution Sequences
SOL
Number
SOL Name Description 6
101 SESTATIC Statics
103 SEMODES Normal Modes
105 SEBUCKL Buckling
106 NLSTATIC Nonlinear or Linear Statics
109 SEDTRAN Direct Transient Response
129 NLTRAN Nonlinear or Linear Transient Response
References
• “SOL 600,ID” on page 144 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Defining Analysis Type for a Subcase in MSC.Patran

To define the Analysis Type for a subcase:
7 1. Click on the Analysis Application button to bring up the Analysis

Application form.
2. Click Solution Type... and click on the Implicit Nonlinear toggle.
Note: There are two ways to set up SOL 600 analysis jobs in MSC.Patran.
2 The first is to select Implicit Nonlinear as the Solution Type. This
option gives you access to all of the various analysis capabilities and
numerical controls available through SOL 600 and non-SOL 600. To
use this second option, simply set up your analysis the same way you
would a non-SOL 600 job and click on the SOL 600 Run toggle on the
3 Solution Parameters form.
3. Click Subcases... and select an analysis type from the Analysis Type pull-
down menu.
4 References
• “Solution Types” on page 207 of the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference
Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis.
6
Translation Parameters 185
7.3 Translation Parameters

Translation parameters define file formats, numerical tolerances, processing options,
numbering offsets, and include files.
Specifying the Translation Parameters

There are numerous translation parameters for SOL 600. Most of these parameters 7
start with the letters M, MR or MARC and follow the format MXXXX, MRXXXX, or
MARCXXX.
Translation parameters are also specified as part of the Bulk Data entries and
conveyed through include files.
2
References
• “Parameter Descriptions” on page 602 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference
Guide.
• “Format of Bulk Data Entries” on page 853 of the MSC.Nastran Quick 3
Reference Guide.
• “INCLUDE” on page 89 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Defining Translation Parameters in MSC.Patran 4

To set translation parameters:
1. Click on the Analysis Application button to bring up the Analysis
Application form. 5
6
2. On the Analysis Application form, click Translation Parameters...
6
Translation Parameters 187
Data Output Defines the type of data output.

• XDB Buffer Size For the XDB results file, defines the buffer size used for
accessing results.
Tolerances • Division - prevents divide by zero errors.
• Numerical - determines if two real values are equal. 7
• Writing determines if a value is approximately zero
when generating a Bulk Data entry field.
Bulk Data Format • Sorted Bulk Data -
• Card Format -
2
• Grid Precision Digits - Specifies where to round off a
grid point coordinate before it’s written out to the
bdf file. For example if this value is specified as 2 the
number 1.3398 will be written out as 1.34.
3
Node Coordinates Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating
the grid coordinates.
Number of Tasks Represents the number of processors to be used to run an
analysis. It is assumed that the environment is configured
4
for distributed parallel processing.
Numbering Options... Subform used to indicate offsets for all IDS to be
automatically assigned during translation.
5
Bulk Data Include File... Prompts you for the filename of the include file.
References
• “Translation Parameters” on page 202 of the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran
Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis.
6
7.4 Solution Parameters

Solution parameters control a range of functions in the SOL 600 analysis. Functions
such as selecting the solver type, establishing a restart, specifying domain
decomposition are all part of the solution parameters.
7 Specifying Solution Parameters

Solution Parameters are designated in the Parameters portion of the MSC.Nastran
Input file with the following entries.
Entry Description
2
INCLUDE Inserts an external file into the input file. The INCLUDE
statement may appear anywhere within the input data file.
NLPARM Selects the parameters used for nonlinear static analysis.
3 TSTEPNL Selects integration and output time steps for a nonlinear
dynamic analysis.
NLSTRAT Defines strategy parameters for nonlinear structural analysis.
NLAUTO Defines parameters for automatic load/time stepping.
4
References
• “Parameter Descriptions” on page 602 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference
Guide.
5 • “Format of Bulk Data Entries” on page 853 of the MSC.Nastran Quick
Reference Guide.
• “INCLUDE” on page 89 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
6 Defining Solution Parameters in MSC.Patran
To set solution parameters:
Application form.
Solution Parameters 189
2. On the Analysis Application form, click Solution Type..., and select Implicit
Nonlinear. Then click Solution Parameters...
Solver Options Specifies the solver to be used in numerically inverting 4

the system of linear equilibrium equations.
Contact Parameters Defines options for detecting and handling contact.
Direct Text Input This subform is used to directly enter entries in the File
Management, Executive Control, Case Control, and Bulk 5
Data sections of the MSC.Nastran input file.
Restart Parameters Includes a Restart option in the MSC.Nastran input file.
Advanced Job Control Sets alternate versions of the solver and alternate formats
for the results file.
6
Domain Decomposition Designates that domain decomposition be done
manually, semi-automatically, or automatically.
References
• For more information on Solver Options, see “Numerical Methods in
Solving Equations” on page 54 of the MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL
600).
• For more information on Contact parameters, see “Contact Parameters

Subform” on page 241 of the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide,
Volume 1: Structural Analysis.
• For more information on Restart Parameters, see “Restart Parameters
Subform” on page 246 of the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference Guide,
Volume 1: Structural Analysis.
7 • For more information on Domain Decomposition, see “Domain
Decomposition” on page 248 of the MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran Preference
Guide, Volume 1: Structural Analysis.
6
Subcases 191
7.5 Subcases
Creating multiple subcases allows you to efficiently analyze multiple load cases in one
run. Each subcase is a collection of loads and boundary conditions, output requests,
and other parameters. For nonlinear analysis runs the starting point of each subcase is
the ending point of the previous subcase.
Specifying Subcases
7
Each subcase is designated with the following Case Control Command.
Entry Description
2
SUBCASE Delimits and identifies a subcase.
References
• “SUBCASE” on page 435 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide. 3
Defining Subcases in MSC.Patran
To define a subcase:
1. Click on the Analysis Application button to bring up the Analysis 4
Application form.
6
2. From the Analysis Application form click Subcases...
Subcase Name Specifies a name for a new subcase.

Available Load Cases Selects one or more available load cases to be applied
to the new subcase.
Subcases 193
Subcase Options
• Subcase Parameters Controls load increment and iteration parameters for
the subcase. Also defines the nonlinear effects for the
subcase. See “Subcase Parameters” on page 194.
• Output Requests Defines the nodal and element results quantities and
also determines the frequency of results reporting. See
“Output Requests” in Chapter 8.
7
• Direct Text Input This subform is used to directly enter entries in the
File Management, Executive Control, Case Control,
and Bulk Data sections of the MSC.Nastran input file.
• Select Superelements Defines which superelements are to be included in the
2
subcase.
• Select Explicit MPCs Selects explicit MPCs to be included in the subcase.
6
7.6 Subcase Parameters

The subcase parameters represent the settings in MSC.Nastran Case Control and Bulk
Data Section that take effect within a subcase and do not affect the analysis in other
subcases. Subcase parameters are dependent on the type of analysis being performed.
The set of subcase parameters applicable for each analysis type are described in the
following sections. For more information, see “Solution Methods and Strategies in
7 Nonlinear Analysis” in Chapter 3 of the MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600).
Specifying Static Subcase Parameters

For static nonlinear analysis the subcase parameters control the iteration process and
2 the load incrementation.
Entry Description
NLPARM Nonlinear Static Analysis Parameter Selection.
3 NLPCI Defines a set of parameters for the arc-length incremental
solution strategies in nonlinear static analysis.
NLAUTO Defines parameters for automatic load/time stepping used in
4 SOL 600.
NLSTRAT Defines strategy parameters for nonlinear structural analysis
used in SOL 600.
5 References
• “NLPARM” on page 355 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “NLPCI” on page 1497 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “NLAUTO” on page 1486 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
6 • “NLSTRAT” on page 1502 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Defining Static Subcase Parameters in MSC.Patran

form. Click on Solution Type and check to see that Implicit Nonlinear is the
selected Solution Type, then click OK.
2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Static from the Analysis
Type pull-down menu.
Subcase Parameters 195
3. Click Subcase Parameters...
4
Linearity Prescribes the nonlinear effects for the subcase.
Nonlinear Solution
Parameters 5
• Nonlinear Geometric Defines the type of geometric or material nonlinearity
Effects to be included in the subcase.
• Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements.

Load Increment Params... Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or
6
adapted in each iteration and the method by which
adaptive load increments will be determined.
Iteration Parameters... Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed
to solve the equilibrium problem at each load
increment.
Contact Table... Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of

contact bodies in the analysis.
Active/Deactive Elements... Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for
the subcase.
6
Specifying Normal Modes Subcase Parameters

For normal modes nonlinear analysis the subcase parameters control the eigenvalue
extraction techniques and the range of frequencies to be targeted for extraction.
Entry Description
EIGR Defines data needed to perform real eigenvalue analysis. 7
EIGRL Defines data needed to perform real eigenvalue (vibration or
buckling) analysis with the Lanczos method.
References
• “EIGR” on page 1344 of the .
2
• “EIGRL” on page 1349 of the .
Defining Normal Modes Subcase Parameters in MSC.Patran 3

2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Normal Modes from the 4
Analysis Type pull-down menu.
6
4
Extraction Method Defines the method to use to extract the real
eigenvalues.
5 Lancozs Parameters
• Number of Modes Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be
located.
• Lowest/Highest Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of
6 Frequency frequencies to be examined.
Sequence Checking Requests that Sturm sequence checking be performed on
the extracted eigenvalues.
Specifying Buckling Subcase Parameters

For nonlinear buckling analysis the subcase parameters control the eigenvalue
extraction techniques and the range of frequencies to be targeted for extraction.
A METHOD command is specified in the desired subcase and selects an EIGB, or
EIGRL Bulk Data entry.
The linear buckling load analysis is correct when you take a very small load step in 7
increment zero, or make sure the solution has converged before buckling load analysis
(if multiple increments are taken).
In a buckling problem that involves material nonlinearity (for example, plasticity),

the nonlinear problem must be solved incrementally. During the analysis, a failure
to converge in the iteration process or nonpositive definite stiffness signals the
2
plastic collapse.
For extremely nonlinear problems, the EIGB option cannot produce accurate results.
In that case, use NLSTRAT options to specify an arc-length method that allows
automatic load stepping in a quasi-static fashion for both geometric large
3
displacement and material (elastic-plastic) nonlinear problems. The option can handle
elastic-plastic snap-through phenomena. Therefore, the post-buckling behavior of
structures can be analyzed.
The eig option must be specified with the OUTR option on SOL 600 Executive Control
4
statement if op2, xdb, pch, or .f06 options are specified and MSC.Marc performs
natural frequency or buckling eigenvalue analysis. The reason it must be provided on
the SOL entry is to enable MSC.Nastran to create DMAP on the fly which include the
LAMA data block. If the eig option is omitted, eigenvectors will be present in the 5
MSC.Nastran output but no eigenvalues will be available.
Entry Description
METHOD Selects the real eigenvalue extraction parameters.
6
EIGB Defines data needed to perform buckling analysis.
EIGRL Defines data needed to perform real eigenvalue (vibration or
buckling) analysis with the Lanczos method.
MARCRBAL This parameter is used for eigenvalue analysis where natural
frequencies or buckling modes need to be calculated using the
deformed geometry from a nonlinear analysis.
References
• “eig” on page 149 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “METHOD” on page 330 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “EIGB” on page 1334 of the .
• “EIGRL” on page 1349 of the .
7 • “MARCRBAL” on page 672 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Defining Buckling Subcase Parameters in MSC.Patran

2 form. Click on Solution Type and check to see that Implicit Nonlinear is the
2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Buckling from the
3 3. Click Subcase Parameters...
6 Extraction Method Defines the method to use to extract the real

eigenvalues.
Lancozs Parameters
• Max # of Modes Indicates the maximum number of eigenvalues to be
located.
• Max # of Modes Indicates the maximum number of positive eigenvalues
w/Pos. Eigenvalues to be located.
Specifying Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters

For transient dynamic nonlinear analysis the subcase parameters control the iteration
process and the load incrementation.
Entry Description
TSTEPNL Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis Parameter Selection. 7
NLAUTO Parameters for automatic load/time stepping.
NLSTRAT Strategy Parameters for nonlinear structural analysis.
References 2
• “TSTEPNL” on page 462 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “NLAUTO” on page 1486 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
3
Defining Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters in MSC.Patran
selected Solution Type, then click OK. 4
2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Transient Dynamic from
the Analysis Type pull-down menu.
6
4 Linearity Prescribes the nonlinear effects for the subcase.

Nonlinear Solution
Parameters
5 • Nonlinear Geometric
Effects
Defines the type of geometric or material nonlinearity
to be included in the subcase.

Load Increment Params... Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or
6 adapted in each iteration and the method by which
adaptive load increments will be determined.
Iteration Parameters... Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed
to solve the equilibrium problem at each load
increment.

Active/Deactive Elements... Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for
the subcase. Note that this option uses the equivalent
of direct text input (MARCIN option) and is not
explicitly supported by SOL 600.
7
6
Specifying Creep Subcase Parameters

The creep analysis option is activated in MSC.Nastran through the CREEP Bulk Data
entry. The creep time period and control tolerance information are input through the
MARCAUTO=1 parameter. This option can be used repeatedly to define a new creep
time period and new tolerances. These tolerances are defined in the section on Creep
Control Tolerances. Alternatively, a fixed time step can also be specified through the
7 MARCAUTO parameter. In this case, no additional tolerances are checked for
controlling the time step.
Creep analysis is often carried out in several runs using the RESTART Bulk Data entry.
Save restart files for continued analysis. The RESTART entry allows you to reset the
2 parameters defined in MARCAUTO upon restart.
Entry Description
NLPARM Nonlinear Static Analysis Parameter Selection.
3 MATVP Defines creep characteristics based on experimental data or known
empirical creep law.
MARCAUTO Determines which MSC.Marc’s increment option is used.
4 RESTART Specifies writing or reading of restart data for Nonlinear Analysis

when MSC.Marc is executed from MSC.Nastran.
References
• “MATVP (SOL 600)” on page 1673 of the .
5 • “NLPARM” on page 1490 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “MARCAUTO” on page 657 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “RESTART (SOL 600)” on page 1960 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference
6 Guide.
Defining Creep Subcase Parameters in MSC.Patran

2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Creep from the Analysis
Type pull-down menu.
3. Click Subcase Parameters...:
Creep Solution Parameters

• Procedure Selects Implicit or Explicit Creep method.
• Nonlinear Geometric Defines the type of geometric or material nonlinearity

Effects to be included in the subcase.

Increment Type Defines a fixed or adaptive increment method.
• Adaptive Increment For adaptive methods, sets boundaries for
Parameters... incrementation.
Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed
7 to solve the equilibrium problem at each load
increment.
2 Active/Deactive Elements... Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for
the subcase.
6
Specifying Body Approach Subcase Parameters

For body approach analysis the subcase parameters control the iteration process and
the load incrementation.
Entry Description
BCMOVE Specifies movement of rigid surfaces. 7
References
• “BCMOVE (SOLs 600/700)” on page 965 of the .
Defining Body Approach Subcase Parameters in MSC.Patran 2

2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Body Approach from the
3
Body Approach Parameters

• Total Time Places a time step option in the Load Step.
• Synchronized If ON, specifies that when the first rigid body comes
into contact, the rest stop moving.
6
Execution Procedure for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear from the 209
Command Line
7.7 Execution Procedure for MSC.Nastran Implicit

Nonlinear from the Command Line
After the generation of the input file is complete, it is submitted for execution as a
batch process (MSC.Nastran is not an interactive program). Once the input file has
been submitted, you have no additional interaction with MSC.Nastran until the job is
complete except that you can terminate the job prior to completion if it becomes
necessary and monitor several keys files such as, .f04, .sts, .log, etc.
7
MSC.Nastran is executed with a command called nastran. (Your system manager may
assign a different name to the command.) The nastran command permits the
specification of keywords used to request options affecting MSC.Nastran job
execution. The format of the nastran command is: 2
nastran input_data_file [keyword1 = value1 keyword2 = value2 ...]
where input_data_file is the name of the file containing the input data and
keywordi=valuei is one or more optional keyword assignment arguments. For
example, to run an a job using the data file example1.dat, enter the following
3
command:
nastran example1
See “The nastran Command” on page 2 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
4
The details of submitting an MSC.Nastran job are specific to your computer system—
contact your computer system personnel or your MSC.Nastran 2001 Installation and
Operations Guide for further information.
Note: Because MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is a new product, and since certain 5
features are available in MSC.Nastran that are not available in MSC.Marc and
visa versa, restrictions and limitations are imposed on the initial version 2004.
Please refer to the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Manual Executive Control
Section SOL 600 entry for the current list.
6
Using MSC.Patran to Execute MSC.Nastran

The Analysis Application controls the execution of MSC.Nastran.
4
When the Action is set to Analyze, the Method is set to Full Run, and the Apply button
is selected from the Analysis form, a jobname.bdf file is created which contains the
analysis model, and the P3TRANS.INI script is spawned by MSC.Patran. This script
5 controls the analysis process outside and independent of MSC.Patran.

When the analysis is successfully completed, one or more output file is produced.
These output files can be directly imported or attached into the MSC.Patran database
for postprocessing by setting the Action menu to Access Results.
6 How to Tell When the Analysis is Done

If you submit the job from the MSC.Nastran icon (i.e., outside MSC.Patran), as long as
the parent window the job was run from is active, the analysis is still running. If you
submit the job from within MSC.Patran and use -stdout when you execute
MSC.Patran, you can look in the MSC.Patran parent window and it will tell you when
it submits the Nastran job, and also when the Nastran job is completed. Of course you
can always use the Analysis Manager. Once the job is complete look in the parent
window to see what files were generated.
Execution Procedure for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear from the 211
Command Line
How to Tell if the Analysis Ran Successfully

Look in the working directory and you will see the typical jobname.f06, jobname.f04,
jobname.log. If these files are there, you successfully submitted the Nastran job. If you
submitted a job with SOL 600, xxx as the executive command, there will also be some
jobname.marc.xxx files in the subdirectory. These are the files from the Marc run. To
see if the run was successful, open jobname.marc.sts and look for the number at the
bottom. 3004 means the run was successful. 7
If there are no jobname.marc.xxx files, check to make sure you can submit Marc jobs
successfully. At the end of the jobname.f06 file Nastran will tell you what command
it used to submit the Marc job. Take this command to a command prompt and enter it
to see why the Marc job wasn’t submitted. If you can go to a command window and
type in “run_marc jid-jobname“ and it finds the Marc executable and runs the
2
jobname.dat Marc input file, you can just use PATH=2 on the SOL 600 command line.
6
7.8 Monitoring the Analysis

The nastran command permits the specification of keywords used to request options
affecting MSC.Nastran job execution. The format of the nastran command is:
nastran input_data_file [keyword1 = value1 keyword2 = value2 ...]
where input_data_file is the name of the file containing the input data and
7 keywordi=valuei is one or more optional keyword assignment arguments.
Use the keyword xmonast to monitor a MSC.Nastran job as described below.
2 xmonast xmonast={yes|no|kill Default: No

Indicates if XMONAST is to be run to monitor the MSC.Nastran job. If
“xmonast=yes” is specified, XMONAST will be automatically started;
you must manually exit XMONAST when the MSC.Nastran job has
3 completed. If “xmonast=kill” is specified, XMONAST will start and will
automatically exit when the MSC.Nastran job has completed.
Example: nastran example xmon=kill
This example runs the XMONITOR utility while the MSC.Nastran job is
4 running. Once the job completes, the XMONITOR program is
automatically terminated.
For more information, see “The nastran Command” on page 2 of the MSC.Nastran
Quick Reference Guide.
5 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides a status file (jobname.marc.sts) that can be
queried periodically to see how the analysis is progressing and if the job is completed.
The file will report the information relating to the progress of the analysis, with
warning and informative messages.
6 The file review is especially important when manual or automatic time stepping
procedures are being used to step through an analysis procedure. One line is written
after each successful increment. An example file output is shown below.
Monitoring the Analysis 213
Figure 7-1 information Summary of Job: nas.cant_bmsm.marc
7
The first column shows the procedural step, while the second column shows the
increment number. Note that not every increment size is equal, as can be seen in the
“TimeStep of the INC” column. For this example, the third increment size is larger
than the first two increments, which means that the procedure is satisfied that
equilibrium is being satisfied and that it has increased the time step size to take
2
advantage of the better convergence characteristics. The third column (“cycle# of the
Inc) indicates the number of Newton Raphson iterations made during this increment.
The next three columns show the increment information, while the next six columns
show the numbers for the total analysis. 3
Sepa means number of contact separations, cut refers to the number of time step size
cutbacks, and split refers to the number of increment splits due to contact penetration.
If the increment size becomes small, and there are a number of increments of this size,
the analysis has probably “stalled”, indicating that convergence is becoming very
4
difficult to attain for the problem. A review of the model is indicated.
6
Using MSC.Patran to Monitor the Analysis

Once a MSC.Nastran job has been submitted from MSC.Patran, you can monitor the
progress of the analysis from the Analysis Application (starting in MSC.Patran
2004r2) by setting the Action to Monitor. The Monitor option allows you to view
various files created by the analysis and view the progress of a currently running job.
6
Monitoring the Analysis 215
Editing a MSC.Nastran Input File

There may be instances when you want to directly edit the MSC.Nastran Bulk Data
file. Some experienced MSC.Nastran users may want to add options directly to
specific Parameters and Bulk Data entries. MSC.Patran provides direct access to the
Bulk Data file as follows.
To edit an existing Bulk Data File:
7
1. Click on the Analysis Application icon to bring up the Analysis Application
form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Analyze>Existing
Deck>Full Run.
2
3. Click Edit Input File...
MSC.Patran automatically looks for an existing deck name that matches the
current database name. and displays the existing deck.
3
6
7.9 Debugging the Analysis

MSC.Nastran generates a substantial amount of information concerning the problem
being executed. The .f04 file provides information on the sequence of modules being
executed and the time required by each of the modules; the .log file contains system
messages.
7 MSC.Nastran may terminate as a result of errors detected by the operating system or

by the program. If the DIAG 44 is set (see the diag keyword (p. 253) and the
MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide), MSC.Nastran will produce a dump of several
key internal tables when most of these errors occur. Before the dump occurs, there
may be a fatal message written to the .f06 file. The general format of this message is
2 ***SYSTEM FATAL ERROR 4276, subroutine-name ERROR CODE n
This message is issued whenever an interrupt occurs that MSC.Nastran is unable to
satisfactorily process. The specific reasons for the interrupt are usually printed in the
.f06 and/or .log file.
3
Resolving Convergence Problems
There are three major steps in getting a complete solution.
4 1. get the model input debugged (see section titled “Exit 13 Errors”).
2. establish initial equilibrium (see section titled “Exit 2004 Errors”).
3. getting the analysis to run to completion.
5
Step 1: De-Bugging the Model Input
How to Tell if the Analysis Ran Successfully
6 Look in the working directory and you will see the typical jobname.f06, jobname.f04,
jobname.log. If these files are there, you successfully submitted the Nastran job. If you
submitted a job with SOL 600, xxx as the executive command, there will also be some
jobname.marc.xxx files in the subdirectory. These are the files from the Marc run. To
see if the run was successful, open jobname.marc.sts and look for the number at the
bottom. 3004 means the run was successful.
If there are no jobname.marc.xxx files, check to make sure you can submit Marc jobs
successfully. At the end of the jobname.f06 file Nastran will tell you what command
it used to submit the Marc job. Take this command to a command prompt and enter it
Debugging the Analysis 217
to see why the Marc job wasn’t submitted. If you can go to a command window and
type in “run_marc jid-jobname“ and it finds the Marc executable and runs the
jobname.dat Marc input file, you can just use PATH=2.
To Debug a Failed Analysis

First, check the .sts, .f04, .f06, or .out files for licensing, disk access or format errors. The
number a the bottom of the jobname.marc.sts is the Marc Exit Number. Exit 13 means
there was a format error in the Marc input. Exit 2004 generally means you have
7
unconstrained d.o.f.’s or rigid body modes. 3002 means the analysis got part way
through and then stopped. The compete Marc Exit message is given at the end of the
jobname.marc.out file, which may also be in jobname.f06 depending on the value of
COPYR. 2
If you get an Exit 13 check your input, make sure everything you need is in the
Nastran input deck. Check for elements, grids, contact body creation, etc. An easy way
to debug these type of problems is to read the jobname.marc.dat file (the Marc input
file Nastran created) in to Mentat or Patran (an empty db with preference set to Marc) 3
and see what is missing. Often you will see that some elements are missing, or that the
contact bodies were not created as you would expect them. For more information see
Figure 7-2.
6
Submit job
Nastran job submit
from windows
Wait until process w/Pause=YES, ck
finishes. error msg
no
7 Do Is Ck Marc submit card,
Does .sts no .f06, .f04, .log yes there a Fatal no find in .f06 and type in
files exist? Error Message a cmd window to see
file exist?
in .f06, .f04, wht Marc job was not
.log? submitted.
2 yes
yes
ck .sts for fix-it - typical Nastran
Exit # debug strategy
3 Do you
Is get Nastran Successful completion -
yes yes
Exit #=3004? requested formatted go on to postprocess
output, such
as .xdb?
4 no
no
look in ck T160P2.exe run, on windows
jobname.marc.out for make sure it is in search path.
Exit # and message.
5 No converged
increments, likely
unconstrained rigid
Is Is Is
no no yes body motion exists: a.)
Exit #=13? Exit #=3002? Exit #=2004? do modal to ID them, b.)
Ck equivalencing of
6 yes Some convergence

modal integrity, c.) add
constraints or weak
yes springs, d.) see section
increments exist, on convergence
postprocess them & look problems.
Follow instructions in exit msg; if its for possible causes of
a formatting error ck Marc, Volc, or stability loss, such as
read the jobname.marc.dat file into contact changes. Ck
Patran’s Marc pref (or Mentat) and δ max , you may be
compare this model w/original. The encountering buckling
problem may be displayed when modes. Do a buckling
the file is read in. solution to see or try an
arc-length method.
Figure 7-2 Flowchart to Debugging a SOL 600 Run

Step 2: Establishing Initial Equilibrium

If you get an Exit 2004 it means that the model was unable to reach equilibrium for the
loads and constraints applied in the initial subcase. Options include:
• adding more constraints (or equivalently soft sprints) to ground the model.
• run a modal analysis to identify unconstrained rigid body modes.
Step 3: Getting the Analysis to Run to Completion

7
The first thing to check at this point is: “Has the solution gone as far as it can,” i.e.
maybe you already have the complete solution. Sometimes nonlinear loading causes
structures to buckle which may take your analysis into the post-buckled region.
Depending on the type of buckling, you may be simply trying to drive your analysis 2
farther into the post-buckling range which may not give you the information you are
after. For example, if you load a frame structure with a load that exceeds the critical
buckling load and the analysis is simply working to drive the structure further into a
plastic hinge.
3
Things to Do to Fix Non-Convergence
❏ Check the .sts, .log, and .out files for Exit 13 format error messages.
❏ If using fixed load incrementation try using a smaller time step, or use the
automatic cutback feature, or use adaptive time-stepping. 4
❏ Try running an eigenvalue buckling solution to see if you’ve passed a
critical buckling load.
❏ If using Contact set the Contact Tolerance Bias to 0.9, particularly if doing
shell contact (done by default in SOL 600). 5
❏ Turn on Quasi-Static inertial damping or Non-Positive Definite to eliminate
un-constrained rigid body motions (done by default in SOL 600).
❏ Try running an eignevalue modal solution to identify unconstrained rigid
body modes. 6
❏ Try using an arc-length method - you may be encountering local buckling.
❏ Look at any available results of converged increments.
❏ If doing contact try a different contact tolerance value.
❏ Isolate Non-linearities and add them one at a time.
❏ Making Sure Appropriate Non-linearities are Included.
❏ Check Material Stability – Make sure the entire strain range is covered by
the material data.
For complex models involving multiple forms of nonlinear behavior the “tried and
true” approach (particularly if you are new to this type of problem) is to start with a
linear model and add non-linearities one at a time. Alternatively, remove the non-
linearities one at a time until it runs. This approach helps you determine which type
of non-linearity is causing the convergence problem. If you have contact, remove it
and let the bodies “pass through” one another or replace the contact condition with an
7 equivalent displacement constraint. If you have nonlinear materials replace them with
simple elastic ones. Add the non-linearities back one at a time, making sure the
behavior is reasonable and correct. Look at reaction forces and displacements of any
converged increments to make sure they are of the expected magnitude.
If you run the analysis and it doesn’t run at all, or ends before completing, you will get
2 an error message in the .OUT or .LOG file that will give you an indication of what the
problem is. Do a text search on the word “error” in the .OUT file. The first thing to
check is to make sure you were able to get a license to run the job. Licensing problems
are one of the most common reasons for a run to fail. If you are sure you have a license
3 and submit the job correctly you should get a .OUT file that will end with an Exit #
preceded by a description of why the run stopped. Common Exit #’s are: Exit 3004 –
means success, i.e. the job ran to completion and did everything you asked it to. Exit
13 – means you have a syntax error in the input file. You should check the input syntax
of the line the error message points to, but it is likely that the actual error was in the
4 input block PRIOR to where the message points. Exit 2004 – typically means non-
convergence due to rigid body motions. See recommendations for Equilibrium. Exit
3002 – this means the analysis ran into convergence problems part way through and
did not complete. Any Exit Message of 3000 or higher means there are converged
5 increments. Plot the converged increments to see what is going on. See Technical
Application Note 4575 or Appendix A of Volume C: Program Input for a more
complete list with suggested “fixes.”
Things to consider if your model doesn’t converge:

6 1. Equilibrium - Make sure your model has LBC’s and contact conditions that
will ensure force equilibrium at EVERY increment/iteration and for ALL
rigid-body modes (typically there are 6). When in doubt eliminate this as the
source of non-convergence by intentionally over-constraining the model (or
adding soft springs) and then removing constraints one at a time until you
figure out the unconstrained rigid body mode. One area that is sometimes
overlooked regarding equilibrium is that of the rigid body control. If you
don’t specify adequate control information (e.g. you forget to add the zero
that fixes the rigid body rotation value) you may have convergence
problems.
2. LBC’s - When LBC’s are removed, the forces/pressures (and the reaction
forces due to displacement constraints) are removed gradually over the
subsequent step. The forces and pressures are always removed gradually,
but the reaction forces of displacement constraints may be are removed
suddenly at the beginning of the subsequent step. This sudden change in
loading can cause convergence problems.
3. Stability and Collapse - Non-convergence will occur when a structural 7
instability (i.e. buckling) mode is encountered. Buckling can occur either
locally (in highly stressed area where the stability of individual elements is
exceeded – adaptive re-meshing will help this) or globally when the critical
buckling load of any part of the model is exceeded. You may want to do a
linear buckling analysis to determine the load that would buckle the least- 2
stable part of the structure. If you suspect that you are approaching the post-
buckled region here are some other things to try: a) try using Quasi-static
inertial damping (turn this on under Analysis – Step Create – Solution
Parameters) or one of the Arc-length methods. This will help get through the
unstable region if doing a snap-through buckling problem, and may help get
3
you past one or two elements of local buckling, but probably not more than
that.) try a finer mesh (smaller elements have shorter length and so higher
Pcr);
4. Materials - Make sure that the material coefficient values are realistic and 4
that the models will support the stresses and loads developed in the model.
For example if you hang a 1000 lb. weight from a perfectly plastic wire with
a 0.001 in**2 cross section and a 20 ksi yield stress, the resulting 100 ksi stress
cannot be supported by the (20 ksi yield stress) material and the run will not 5
converge. Comparable behavior in bending is referred to as a “plastic hinge.”
Units mis-matches will often result in this type of problem (note that this
only occurs in non-linear analyses). For example, let’s say you are modeling
a cantilever beam and using a perfectly plastic material model and a
“follower force” tip load, and you mistakenly add an extra zero to the tip 6
load. A plastic hinge will develop with the beam “winding up” like a spring
and the analysis continuing to run until it runs out of increments (which may
take a long time). If you suspect this type of problem first run the problem
with a small fraction of the load to see if it will converge. If you are using an
orthotropic or hyperelastic material it is possible to select combinations of
material properties that will result in a non-positive definite material
coefficient matrix. Normally the analysis code will warn you if you violate
this requirement.
5. Contact - If there is a problem with “chattering” (a condition where a

particular node jumps into and out of contact thus preventing the increment
from converging), you can go to Translation Parameters – Contact Control
Parameters – Separation and set the Chattering toggle to “Suppress”. The
parameters which have the biggest effect on contact behavior are “Contact
Distance Tolerance”, D (see Fig. 1), “Bias Factor,” B (see Fig. 2) -) and
7 “Separation Force.” The default uses D = 1/20 the of the element edge length.
You can find the specific value in the.OUT file and try a larger or smaller
value, whichever you feel is most appropriate. The default on the bias value
is 0, if having problems with contact one of the first things to try is to over-
ride this value on the Analysis – Translation Parameters – Contact Detection
2 – Contact Parameters form with 0.9. Another option would be to increase the
separation force (which defaults to 0) to prevent chattering. When
considering contact problems look for places (such as corners and other
discontinuities) where one contact surface may “slip” off.
3 Standard Steps to Resolving Convergence Problems:

If your model doesn’t run, or stops pre-maturely: FIRST, READ THE MESSAGES IN
The .sts, .f06, .log and .out files. Common causes of the run to fail include:
1. un-constrained rigid body modes.
4 2. you're in the post-buckled region.
3. problems resolving contact.
4. some part of the model/material is "over-constrained" such that the given
5 displacement solution doesn’t change when the load is increased (i.e.
individual elements are buckling locally), this type of non-unique solution
can prevent convergence.
After trying the obvious things talk to other experienced users about possible reasons
6 your run isn’t working. In one case a user was using the standard element formulation
with Nu = 0.5 and hex/27 elements and his model wouldn’t converge even though
there were no obvious problems. For this case using the constant volume formulation
should provide a unique solution and allow convergence, unless Nu = 0.5 causes
numerical problems. In that case you should use the Herrmann element (which also
requires using the constant volume formulation) and which should take care of the
numerical problems as well as the non-unique solution problem. If these options don’t
work you could try using reduced integration, which may solve both problems at
once, but may have problems with energy-free or "spurious" deformation modes (also
called "hour-glassing"), although the analysis has built-in hour glass stabilization.
Also, try quasi-static inertial damping or an arc-length methods.
Here are some other things to try:

a. try a finer mesh;
b. modify the material model: if its simple elastic-perfectly plastic with
large plastic strains try using constant volume Herrmann elements, if
using a hyper-elastic material model try lowering Nu from 0.5 to
maybe 0.49 or so (or lower if you have to); make sure its based on test
data that includes the type of behavior you are trying to model (i.e. if
your test data is from a uni-axial tensile test and you are modeling a
7
pressurized cylinder, which is a bi-axial stress state, try analyzing a
simple bi-axial sheet to see if your hyper-elastic material model will
successfully handle bi-axial stress states; if not you may have to
include some bi-axial test data (hyper-elastic models based on test data
should include at least 2 "modes," although the program has a new 2
Arruda-Boyce model which is supposed to be accurate with only one
mode of experimental data);
c. simplify - if the model you are running is a 3D cylinder made of solid
elements, run a 2D axi-symmetric test case to check out the mesh
refinement and material model. If not in the post-buckled region try: 1)
3
look at deformed shape to see if it looks reasonable. Remember that
static equilibrium must be maintained at every step; 2) check reaction
forces to see if the load path is reasonable; 3) look for highly distorted
elements, both visually and in the .out file - if you find any you may
need to go back and refine your mesh in that area to keep those 4
elements well-behaved, i.e. converging, or use adaptive re-meshing.
Although distorted elements will normally just give you bad results
but not necessarily prevent convergence. Typically linear elements (i.e.
quad/4 instead of quad/8) do better in analyses where severe
distortion is expected. 4) if using contact elements you may be able to 5
ease convergence problems by simplifying the contact interaction: a)
look at the .sts file for the # of increment splits and # of separations to
see if contact is the problem; b) set bias to 0.9, increase (or decrease) the
contact tolerance distance, suppress chattering; c) modify the contact
table to eliminate suspected trouble areas (at least as a diagnostic 6
measure); d) look for areas where contact bodies may be “sliding off. 5)
PAY ATTENTION TO THE MESSAGES IN THE .STS, .LOG, .f06 AND
.OUT FILES, they may tell you why the model was not translated or
convergence was not reached and the analysis terminated. 6) if non-
convergence relates to inelastic behavior of the material, such as in a
plasticity analysis, make sure there are no "plastic hinges" formed,
where static equilibrium cannot be achieved because the material is not
strong enough, in this case all the iterations go to deforming the body
around the plastic region and static equilibrium may never be reached.
7) when doing a hyperelastic material analysis the material model may
be unpredictable since the coefficients are generally quite unintuitive.
The run may not converge simply because the material model, while it
may look reasonable, may actually be inherently unstable (things like
negative energy behavior, etc.) 8) make sure you aren't stuck at a
stability bifurcation point, (i.e. at a buckling mode), what may be
happening is that there are 2 valid (post-buckling in this case)
equilibrium paths and the code flips back and forth between them
preventing convergence; the way to get past this is to make the
7 problem dynamic and use the inertia of the body to "select" the
appropriate equilibrium path.
Again, the “tried and true” method is to start with a linear model and add non-
linearities one at a time, or remove nonlinearities.
2 Consider changing the Contact Distance Tolerance. If you run into contact-related
convergence problems this is one of the first things to try.
Standard Exit Messages

3 Please refer to the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide and the MSC.Nastran Reference
Manual for exit codes and numbers.
Using MSC.Patran to Debug an Analysis

4 There are many error or warning messages that may be generated by the MSC.Patran
MSC.Nastran Interface. The following table outlines some of these.
Message Description
5 Unable to open a new message If MSC.Patran tries to open a message file and
file " ". Translation messages cannot, it will write messages to Standard
will be written to standard Output. On most systems, messages are
output. written to standard output and never to a
separate message file.
6 Unable to open the specified The OUTPUT2 file was not found. Check the
OUTPUT2 file " ". OUTPUT2 file specification in the translation
control file.
The specified OUTPUT2 file The OUTPUT2 file is not in standard binary
" " is not in standard binary format. Check the OUTPUT2 file specification
format and cannot be in the translation control file.
translated.
Message Description
Group " " does not exist in the The name of a nonexistent group was specified
database. Model data will not in the translator control file. No model data
be translated. will be translated from the OUTPUT2 file.
Needed file specification The MSC.Patran control file must be specified
missing! The full name of the
job file must be specified as the
as the first on-line argument to the translator. 7
first command-line argument
to this program.
Unable to open the specified If MSC.Patran cannot communicate directly to
database " ". Writing the the specified database. It will write the results 2
OUTPUT2 information to the and/or model data to a PCL session file.
PCL command file " ".
Unable to open either the The naspat3 translator is unable to open any
specified database " ", or a output file. Check file specification and 3
PCL command file, " ". directory protection.
Unable to open the NASTRAN MSC.Patran was unable to open a file to where
input file " ". the input file information will be written.
Unable to open the specified The forward MSC.Patran MSC.Nastran 4
database, " " . translator was unable to open the specified
MSC.Patran database.
Alter file of the name " " The OUTPUT2 DMAP alter file, for this type of
could not be found. No analysis, could not be found. Correct the 5
OUPUT2 alter will be written search path to include the necessary directory
to the NASTRAN input file. if you want the alter files to be written to the
input file.
No property regions are Elements referenced by an element property 6
defined in the database. No region in the MSC.Patran database will not get
elements or element properties translated by the forward MSC.Patran
can be translated. MSC.Nastran translator. If no element regions
are defined, no elements will be translated.
6
SECTION
Output from the Analysis
8
■ Overview
■ Output Requests
■ MSC.Marc Results Quantities
■ MSC.Nastran Results Quantities

228 Output from the Analysis
8.1 Overview
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) produces stress and strain results that may
differ from those results available with SOL 106 and 129. A detailed discussion of the
stress and strain measures for SOL 600 is given “Stress and Strain Measures for
Nonlinear Analysis” in Chapter 2.
1 At present, new datablock definitions have not been created in MSC.Nastran to

handle new types of nonlinear output. Therefore, it is suggested that the MSC.Marc
t16 or t19 file be used to evaluate results. The result quantities included in the t16/t19
files are controlled using the MARCOUT Bulk Data entry. For a complete description,
see “MARCOUT (SOL 600)” on page 1470 of the . MSC.Patran can be used to
8 postprocess nearly all types of output selected by the MARCOUT entry. In general, if
the t16 file is saved and brought into MSC.Patran, the types of stresses and strains will
be labeled correctly and you can easily choose which quantities to plot.
The more basic types of output (displacements, velocities, accelerations, Cauchy stress
3 tensor and one type of strain tensor) can be translated back to standard MSC.Nastran
op2, xdb, punch and even f06 files using the OUTR option on the SOL 600 Executive
Control statement. For a complete description, see “SOL 600,ID” on page 144 of the
MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide. If the stresses and strains are brought back into the
4 MSC.Nastran files (op2, xdb, f06 or pch), only one type of stress and strain will be
available for version 2004. Generally the Cauchy Stress tensor will be available along
with a user selection of one of the following strains: plastic, total or elastic in the strain
measure selected for the analysis. The type of stress-strain pair brought back into the
Nastran results files is specified using PARAM, MARCEKND.
5
6
Output Requests 229
8.2 Output Requests

Output requests are made in the Case Control section of the MSC.Nastran Input file.
Case Control commands are organized into three categories:
1. Output Control - defines how and where the output is delivered.
2. Sets/Grouping of Output - prescribes the set of geometrical or FEM entities
for which results are to be returned. 1
3. Actual Result Quantities - identifies the individual result quantities to be
returned.
Specifying Output Requests 8

For a complete list of the output requests available via the Case Control commands,
see “Case Control Command Summary” on page 179 of the MSC.Nastran Quick
Reference Guide.
3
Making Output Requests in MSC.Patran
The Output Requests form is used to request results from the MSC.Nastran analysis
for use in postprocessing (post tape) and verification (output file).
1. Click on the Analysis Application button to bring up the Analysis 4
Application form.
6
2. On the Analysis Application form, select Subcases... and choose Output

Requests... from the Subcase Options section.
4
Results (POST) File Options
• Increments between Defines the number of increments between writing results to
the MSC.Nastran results file after the first increment of the
Writing Results
5 analysis. The default is one (1) for every increment.
• Select Nodal Results... Brings up a subform for selecting nodal results
• Select Element Results... Brings up a subform for selecting elemental results.
6 Although printed output requests can be different from Subcase to Subcase, there are
certain aspects of these requests that can only be written once. For those aspects of
output requests that must remain constant regardless of the Load Step, that
information is extracted from the first Subcase in the Subcase Selection form.
Output Requests 231
Select Nodal Results

This subform controls which nodal result quantities are returned from the MSC.Marc
analysis.
Available Result Types Lists all of the available result types for the analysis.
The numbers in parentheses are the MSC.Marc 6
POST code numbers.
Selected Result Types Shows the set of result types that have been selected
to be returned in the analysis.
The following table shows the post codes that may be selected for a SOL 600 structural
nonlinear analysis.
Nodal Result Postcode Default(?)

DISPLACEMENT 1 YES
1 ROTATION 2 YES
EXTERNAL FORCE 3 no
EXTERNAL MOMENT 4 no
REACTION FORCE 5 YES

8 REACTION MOMENT 6 no
PORE PRESSURE 23 no
VELOCITY 28 no
3 ROTATIONAL VELOCITY 29 no
ACCELERATION 30 no
ROTATIONAL 31 no
ACCELERATION
4 MODAL MASS 32 no
ROTATION MODAL MASS 33 no
CONTACT NORMAL 34 no
5 STRESS
CONTACT NORMAL 35 YES
FORCE
FRICTION STRESS 36 no
6 FRICTION FORCE 37 YES
CONTACT STATUS 38 no
CONTACT TOUCHED 39 YES

BODY
HERRMANN VARIABLE 40 no
POST CODE, No. -11 -11 thru -16 no
POST CODE, No. -22 -21 thru -23 no
POST CODE, No. -31 -31 no

Output Requests 233
Nodal Result Postcode Default(?)

Note: The POST CODE (<0) are for user-defined quantities via user subroutine
UPSTNO. 1
Element Output Requests
This subform controls which element result quantities are returned from the
MSC.Marc analysis.
8
6
Available Result Types Lists all of the available result types for the analysis.
The numbers in parentheses are the MSC.Marc
POST code numbers.
Selected Result Types Shows the set of result types that have been selected
1 to be returned in the analysis.
Element X-section Results Defines the number of layer points to use through the cross
section of homogeneous shells, plates and beams. This
number must be odd if not a composite.
Note: If no elemental results are selected and no nodal results are selected, no POST
8 option is written.
The following table shows the post codes that may be selected for a SOL 600 structural
nonlinear analysis.
3 Elemental Result Postcode Solutions Default(?)

STRAIN, TOTAL 301 nonlinear only YES
COMPONENTS
4 STRAIN, TOTAL
COMPONENTS
461 nonlinear only no
(defined system)
STRAIN, ELASTIC 401 any YES
COMPONENTS
5 STRAIN, ELASTIC 421 any no
COMPONENTS
(global system)
STRAIN, ELASTIC 127 any no
6 EQUIVALENT
STRAIN, PLASTIC 321 nonlinear only YES
COMPONENTS
STRAIN, PLASTIC 431 nonlinear only no
COMPONENTS
(global system)
EQUIVALENT
Output Requests 235
Elemental Result Postcode Solutions Default(?)

EQUIVALENT
(from rate)
STRAIN, CRACKING 381 nonlinear only no
COMPONENTS
STRAIN, CREEP 331 creep only no
1
COMPONENTS
COMPONENTS
(global system) 8
EQUIVALENT
EQUIVALENT
(from rate)
3
STRAIN, THERMAL 371 any no
STRAIN, THICKNESS 49 any no
STRAIN, VELOCITY 451 nonlinear only no 4

STRESS, COMPONENTS 311 any no
STRESS, COMPONENTS 391 an no

(defined system)
5
STRESS, COMPONENTS 411 any no
(global system)
STRESS, EQUIVALENT 59 nonlinear only no
YIELD
6
STRESS, EQUIVALENT 17 any YES
MISES
STRESS, MEAN NORMAL 18 any YES
STRESS, INTERLAMINAR 108 any no

SHEAR No. 1
STRESS, INTERLAMINAR 109 any no
SHEAR No. 2
STRESS, INTERLAMINAR 501,511 any no
COMPONENTS

STRESS, CAUCHY 341 nonlinear only no
COMPONENTS
STRESS, CAUCHY 47 nonlinear only YES
EQUIVALENT
1 STRESS, HARMONIC
COMPONENTS
351 (real)
361(imag)
harmonic only no
STRESS, REBAR 471 any no

UNDEFORMED
STRESS, REBAR 481 any no
8 DEFORMED
FORCES, ELEMENT 264-269 any no
BIMOMENT 270 any no
3 STRAIN RATE, PLASTIC 28 nonlinear only no
STRAIN RATE, EQUIVALENT 175 any no

VISCOPLASTIC
STATE VARIABLE, SECOND 29 any no
4 STATE VARIABLE, THIRD 39 any no
TEMPERATURE, ELEMENT 9 any no

TOTAL
5 TEMPERATURE, ELEMENT
INCREMENTAL
10 any no
STRAIN ENERGY DENSITY, 48 nonlinear only YES

TOTAL
6 STRAIN ENERGY DENSITY,

ELASTIC
58 any no
STRAIN ENERGY DENSITY, 68 nonlinear only no

PLASTIC
THICKNESS, ELEMENT 20 any no
VOLUME, ELEMENT 78 any no
VOLUME, VOID FRACTION 177 any no
GRAIN SIZE 79 any no
FAILURE, INDEX No. 1-7 91-103 any no

Output Requests 237

DENSITY, RELATIVE 179 any no
POST CODE, No. 19 19 any no
POST CODE, No. 38 38 any no
POST CODE, No. -11 -11 thru -16 any no

1
POST CODE, No. -21 -21 thru -23 any no
POST CODE, No. -31 -31 any no
POST CODE, No. -41 -41 any no
POST CODE, No. -51 -51 any no 8
6
8.3 MSC.Marc Results Quantities

The following table indicates all the possible result quantities which can be loaded
into the MSC.Patran database from the t16 file. The Primary and Secondary Labels are
items selected from the postprocessing menus. The Type indicates whether the results
are Scalar, Vector, or Tensor. These types will determine which postprocessing
techniques will be available in order to view the results quantity. Postcodes indicates
1 which MSC.Marc element postcodes (selected automatically or by Nastran bulk data
card MARCOUT) the data comes from. The Description gives a brief discussion about
the results quantity. The Output Request forms use the actual primary and secondary
labels which will appear in the results. For example, if “Strain, Elastic” is selected on
8 the Element Output Requests form, the “Strain, Elastic” is created for postprocessing.
Primary Label SecondaryLabel Type Postcodes Description

Displacement Translation Vector 1 (nodal) Translational displacements at
3 nodes from a structural
analysis.
Displacement Rotation Vector 2 (nodal) Rotational displacements at
nodes from a structural
4 analysis.
Velocity Translation Vector 28 (nodal) Translational velocities at nodes
from a dynamic analysis.
Velocity Rotation Vector 29 (nodal) Rotational velocities at nodes.
5 Acceleration Translation Vector 30 (nodal) Translational accelerations at
nodes from a dynamic analysis.
Acceleration Rotation Vector 31 (nodal) Rotational accelerations at
nodes from a dynamic analysis.
6 Force Nodal External Vector 3 (nodal) Forces applied to the model in a
Applied structural analysis.
Force Nodal Reaction Vector 5 (nodal) Reaction forces at boundary
conditions from a structural
analysis.
Moment Nodal External Vector 4 (nodal) Moments applied to the model
Applied in a structural analysis.
MSC.Marc Results Quantities 239

Moment Nodal Reaction Vector 6 (nodal) Reaction moments at boundary
conditions from a structural
analysis.
Modal Mass Translation Vector 32 (nodal) Translational modal masses
from modal extractions. 1
Modal Mass Rotation Vector 33 (nodal) Rotational modal masses from
modal extractions.
Temperature Nodal Scalar 14 (nodal) Temperature at nodes from a
thermal analysis.
8
Velocity Fluid Vector 7 (nodal) Fluid Velocity
6

Flux Nodal Scalar 15 (nodal) Heat Flux applied to the model
in a thermal analysis.
Pressure Fluid Scalar 8 (nodal) Fluid Pressure
Force External Fluid Vector 9 (nodal) External Fluid Force
1 Force Reaction Fluid Vector 10 (nodal) Reaction Fluid Force
Pressure Sound Scalar 11 (nodal) Sound Pressure
Source External Sound Scalar 12 (nodal) External Sound Source
8 Source Reaction Sound Scalar 13 (nodal) Reaction Sound Source

Flux Nodal Reaction Scalar 16 (nodal) Nodal Reaction Flux
Potential Electric Scalar 17 (nodal) Electric Potential
Charge External Electric Scalar 18 (nodal) External Electric Charge
3 Charge Reaction Scalar 19 (nodal) Reaction Electric Charge
Electric
Potential Magnetic Scalar 20 (nodal) Magnetic Potential
4 Current External Electric Scalar 21 (nodal) External Electric Current
Current Reaction Scalar 22 (nodal) Reaction Electric Current
Electric
Pressure Pore Scalar 23 (nodal) Pore Pressure
5 Flux External Mass Scalar 24 (nodal) External Mass Flux
Flux Reaction Mass Scalar 25 (nodal) Reaction Mass Flux
Pressure Bearing Scalar 26 (nodal) Bearing Pressure
6 Force Bearing Scalar 27 (nodal) Bearing Force
Stress Contact Normal Vector 34 (nodal) Contact Normal Stress
Force Contact Normal Vector 35 (nodal) Contact Normal Force
Stress Friction Vector 36 (nodal) Friction Stress
Force Friction Vector 37 (nodal) Friction Force
Contact Status Scalar 38 (nodal) Contact Status
Contact Touched Body Scalar 39 (nodal) Touched Body Contact
Variable Herrmann Scalar 40 (nodal) Herrmann Variable

Post Code No. -11 through Tensor -11 thru -16, User defined nodal quantities
-16 (nodal) via user subroutine UPSTNO.
Post Code No. -21 through Vector -21 thru -23, User defined nodal quantities
-23 (nodal) via user subroutine UPSTNO.
Post Code No. -31 Scalar -31, (nodal) User defined nodal quantities 1
via user subroutine UPSTNO.
Post Code No. -41 Scalar -41, (nodal) User defined nodal quantities
Post Code No. -51 Scalar -51, (nodal) User defined nodal quantities 8
Strain Cracking Tensor 81-86 or 381 Cracking strain from a
nonlinear structural analysis.
Strain Creep Tensor 31-36 or 331 Creep strain from a nonlinear 3
structural analysis.
Strain Creep Scalar 37 Equivalent creep strain from a
Equivalent nonlinear structural analysis.
Strain Creep Scalar 8 Equivalent creep strain
4
Equivalent determined from rate from a
(from rate) nonlinear structural analysis.
Strain Elastic Tensor 121-126 or Elastic strain from a structural
401 analysis. 5
Strain Elastic Scalar 127 Equivalent elastic strain from a
Equivalent structural analysis.
Strain Plastic Tensor 21-26 or 321 Plastic strain from a nonlinear
6
Strain Plastic Scalar 27 Equivalent plastic strain from a
Equivalent nonlinear structural analysis.
Strain Plastic Scalar 7 Equivalent plastic strain
Equivalent determined from rate from a
(from rate) nonlinear structural analysis.
Strain Plastic Scalar 28 Equivalent plastic strain rate
Equivalent Rate from a nonlinear structural
analysis.

Strain Thermal Tensor 71-76 or 371 Thermal strain from a structural
analysis.
Strain Thickness Scalar 49 Thickness strain from a
1 Strain Total Tensor 1-6 or 301 Total strain from a structural
analysis.
Temperature Element Scalar 9 Element temperature from a
thermal or structural analysis.
8 Temperature Element Vector 181-183 Element temperature gradient
Gradient from a thermal analysis.
Temperature Element Scalar 10 Incremental element
Incremental temperature from a thermal or
3 structural analysis.
Stress Tensor 11-16 or 311 Stress from a structural
analysis.
Stress Cauchy Tensor 41-46 or 341 Cauchy stress from a nonlinear
4 structural analysis.
Stress Cauchy Scalar 47 Equivalent Cauchy stress from
Equivalent a nonlinear structural analysis.
Mises
5 Stress Equivalent Scalar 17 Equivalent (von mises) stress
Mises from a structural analysis.
Stress Hydrostatic Scalar 18 Hydrostatic stress from a
6 Stress Interlaminar Scalar 108 Interlaminar shear in one
Shear No. 1 direction from a structural
analysis.
Stress Interlaminar Scalar 109 Interlaminar shear in two
Shear No. 2 direction from a structural
analysis.

Energy Elastic Scalar 48 Elastic strain energy density
Density from a structural analysis.
Energy Plastic Scalar 58 Plastic strain energy density
Density from a nonlinear structural
analysis. 1
Energy Total Scalar 68 Total strain energy density from
Density a structural analysis.
Flux Element Vector 184-186 Element heat flux from a
thermal analysis.
8
State Variable Second Scalar 29 Second state variable from a
nonlinear thermal or structural
analysis.
State Variable Third Scalar 39 Third state variable from a 3
nonlinear thermal or structural
analysis.
Failure Index No. 1 Scalar 91 Failure index one from a
structural analysis. 4
Failure Index No. 2 Scalar 92 Failure index two from a
Failure Index No. 3 Scalar 93 Failure index three from a
Failure Index No. 4 Scalar 94 Failure index four from a
Failure Index No. 5 Scalar 95 Failure index five from a
Failure Index No. 6 Scalar 96 Failure index six from a
Failure Index No. 7 Scalar 97 Failure index seven from a
Thickness Scalar 20 Element thickness from a
thermal or structural analysis.
Volume Scalar 78 Element Volume from a thermal
or structural analysis.
In addition to these standard results quantities, several Global Variable results can be
created. Global Variables are results quantities where one value is representative of
the entire model. The following table defines the Global Variables which may be
created.
Global Variable Label Type Description

1 Increment Scalar Increment of the analysis.
Time Scalar Time of the analysis.
Buckling Mode Scalar Buckling mode number.
8 Critical Load Factor Scalar Critical load factor for buckling analysis.
Dynamic Mode Scalar Dynamic mode number from modal extraction.
Frequency (radians/time) Scalar Frequency in radians per unit time for modal
extraction.
3
Using MSC.Patran to Postprocess Results Quantities
Application form.
4 2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Access Results>Attach
t16/t19>Results Entities.
6
After selecting a t16 or t19 file, you will need to specify the translation parameters.
6
8.4 MSC.Nastran Results Quantities

If you wish to return result quantities from MSC.Marc back to MSC.Nastran you may
include the OUTR option on the SOL 600 Executive Control statement.
Entry Description
1 OUTR Specifies that MSC.Marc output results be converted to various
types of MSC.Nastran formats
References
• “SOL 600,ID” on page 144 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
8
Using MSC.Patran to Postprocess MSC.Nastran Results
Quantities
Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Access Results>Attach
XBD>Results Entities or Access Results>Read Output2>Results Entities.
6
MSC.Nastran Results Quantities 247
After selecting an XDB or op2 file, you will need to specify the translation parameters.
5
Tolerances
• Division Prevent division by zero errors.
• Numerical Compares real values for equality.
Additional Results to be Imported

6
• Rotational Nodal Results Indicates whether Rotational Nodal Results are
skipped or included in translation.
• Stress/Strain Invariants Indicates whether Stress/Strain Invariants are
• Principal Directions Indicates whether Principal Directions are

• Element Results Positions If an element has results at both the centroid and
at the nodes, this filter indicates which results
are to be included in the translation.
6
SECTION
Assigned Conditions
9
■ Constraints
■ Loads and Boundary Conditions
■ Initial Conditions
250 Assigned Conditions
9.1 Constraints
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to input kinematic constraints through
various options that include:
• Boundary Conditions (prescribed nodal values)

• Multi-Point Constraints (Rigid elements such as RBE1, RBE2, RBE3, RBAR,
1 etc.)
• Support Conditions
Boundary Conditions
2 Boundary conditions, in terms of fixed displacements at nodes, define one type of
kinematic constraint for a structural analysis. Loads and boundary conditions are
addressed in the following section of this chapter, please see (p. 267).
9 Multi-Point Constraints
MPCs are special element types which define a rigorous behavior between several
specified nodes. The following table lists the MPC types which are supported for
MSC .Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
4
MPC Types
• Explicit • RBE1
5 • Rigid (Fixed) • RBE2
• Cyclic Symmetry • RBE3
• Sliding Surface • RROD
6 • RBAR • RTRPLT
Constraints 251
Specifying Explicit MPCs

Explicit MPC’s may be created between a dependent degree of freedom and one or
more independent degrees of freedom. The dependent term consists of a node ID and
a degree of freedom, while an independent term consists of a coefficient, a node ID,
and a degree of freedom. An unlimited number of independent terms can be
specified, while only one dependent term can be specified. The constant term is not
allowed in MSC.Nastran. 1
Entry Description
MPC Defines a multipoint constraint equation.
2
References
• “MPC” on page 1481 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Defining Explicit MPCs in MSC.Patran 9

To define an Explicit MPC:
1. Click on the FE Application icon located on the Main form to bring up the
Finite Elements Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>Explicit.
4
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the explicit constraints.
6
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the fields for G1 and C1 on the MPC
entry. Only one node and DOF combination may be defined
for any given explicit MPC. The A1 field on the MPC entry
1 is automatically set to -1.0.
Independent Terms Independent terms define the Gi, Ci, and Ai fields on the
MPC entry, where i is greater than one. As many coefficient,
node, and DOF combinations as desired may be defined.
2 Specifying Rigid MPCs

Rigid MPC’s may be created between one independent node and one or more
dependent nodes in which all six structural degrees of freedom are rigidly attached to
each other. An unlimited number of dependent terms can be specified, while only one
9 independent term can be specified. Each term consists of a single node. There is no
constant term for this MPC type.:
Entry Description
4 RBE2 Defines a rigid body with independent degrees-of-freedom that
are specified at a single grid point and with dependent degrees-
of-freedom that are specified at an arbitrary number of grid
points.
5
References
• “RBE2” on page 1947 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
6 Defining Rigid MPCs in MSC.Patran

To define a Rigid MPC:
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>Rigid (Fixed).
Constraints 253
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the rigid constraints.
9
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the GMi fields on the RBE2 entry.
As many nodes as desired may be selected as dependent
4
terms.
Independent Terms Independent terms define the GN field on the RBE2 entry.
Only one node may be selected.
5
Entry Description
Shell Nodes Dependent terms define the ESi fields on the RSSCON entry. 6
One dependent node must be selected for every two
independent terms.
Solid Nodes ndependent terms define the EA and EB field on the
RSSCON entry. Two independent terms are required.
Specifying Cyclic Symmetry MPCs

Describes cyclic symmetry boundary conditions for a segment of the model. In a
solution sequence that is not explicitly cyclic symmetric, such as “SOL 600,” MPC and
SPC cards are created. Be careful, for this option automatically alters the analysis
coordinate references of the nodes involved. This could erroneously change the
meaning of previously applied load and boundary conditions, as well as element
1 properties.
Entry Description
2 SPC Defines a set of single-point constraints and enforced motion
(enforced displacements in static analysis and enforced
displacements, velocities or acceleration in dynamic analysis).
9 References
• “SPC” on page 2042 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
4 Defining Cyclic Symmetry MPCs in MSC.Patran

To define aCyclic Symmetry MPC:
5 Finite Elements Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>Cyclic
Symmetry.
6
Constraints 255
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the cyclic symmetry constraints.
9
Entry Description
Dependent Region Specifies the dependent nodes on the cyclic boundaries. The
same number of unique nodes must be specified in both
4
dependent and independent regions. A node can be referenced
in both the dependent and independents regions only if it lies
on the axis of symmetry.
Independent Region Specifies the independent nodes on the cyclic boundaries. The
5
same number of unique nodes must be specified in both
dependent and independent regions. A node can be referenced
in both the dependent and independents regions only if it lies
on the axis of symmetry. 6
Specifying Sliding Surface MPCs

Describes the boundary conditions of sliding surfaces, such as pipe sleeves. These
boundary conditions are written as explicit MPCs. Be careful, for this option
automatically redefines the analysis coordinate references of all affected nodes. This
could erroneously alter the meaning of previously applied load and boundary
conditions, as well as element properties.
1
Entry Description
2 References
Defining Sliding Surface MPCs in MSC.Patran

9 To define a Sliding Surface MPC:
4 2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>Sliding

Surface.
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the sliding surface constraints.
6
Constraints 257
Entry Description
Dependent Region Specifies the dependent nodes on the sliding surface. The same
number of unique nodes must be specified in both regions.
Independent Region Specifies the independent nodes on the sliding surface. The
same number of unique nodes must be specified in both 1
regions.
Specifying RBAR MPCs

Creates an RBAR element, which defines a rigid bar between two nodes. Up to two 2
dependent and two independent terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node
and a list of degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the two dependent terms must
be the same as the nodes specified in the two independent terms. Any combination of
the degrees of freedom of the two nodes can be specified as independent as long as the
total number of independent degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is no constant
9
term for this MPC type.
Entry Description
RBAR Defines a rigid bar with six degrees-of-freedom at each end.
4
References
• “RBAR” on page 1940 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
5
Defining RBAR MPCs in MSC.Patran
To define a RBAR MPC:
1. Click on the FE Application icon located on the Main form to bring up the 6
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>RBAR.
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the RBAR constraints.
9
Entry Description
4 Dependent Terms Either one or two nodes may be defined as having dependent
terms. The Nodes define the GA and GB fields on the RBAR
entry. The DOFs define the CMA and CMB fields.
Independent Terms Either one or two nodes may be defined as having
5 independent terms.The Nodes define the GA and GB fields on
the RBAR entry.The DOFs define the CNA and CNB fields.
Specifying RBE1 MPCs

6 Creates an RBE1 element, which defines a rigid body connected to an arbitrary
number of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified. Each
term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. Any number of independent
terms can be specified as long as the total number of degrees of freedom specified in
Constraints 259
all of the independent terms adds up to six. Since at least one degree of freedom must
be specified for each term there is no way the user can create more that six
independent terms. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
Entry Description
RBE1 Defines a rigid body connected to an arbitrary number of grid
points. 1
References
2
Defining RBE1 MPCs in MSC.Patran
To define a RBE1 MPC:
Finite Elements Application form. 9
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>RBE1.
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the RBE1 constraints.
6
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the GMi and CMi fields on the RBE1
entry. An unlimited number of nodes and DOFs may be
defined here.
1 Independent Terms Independent terms define the GNi and CNi fields on the RBE1
entry. The total number of Node/DOF pairs defined must
equal 6, and be capable of representing any general rigid body
motion.
2 Specifying RBE2 MPCs

Creates an RBE2 element, which defines a rigid body between an arbitrary number of
nodes. Although the user can only specify one dependent term, an arbitrary number
of nodes can be associated to this term. The user is also prompted to associate a list of
9 degrees of freedom to this term. A single independent term can be specified, which
consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
Entry Description
4 RBE2 Defines a rigid body with independent degrees-of-freedom that
are specified at a single grid point and with dependent degrees-
of-freedom that are specified at an arbitrary number of grid
points.
5
References
6 Defining RBE2 MPCs in MSC.Patran

Constraints 261
9
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the GMi and CM fields on the RBE2
entry. As many nodes as desired may be selected as
dependent terms. 4
Independent Terms Independent terms define the GN field on the RBE2 entry.
Only one node may be selected.
Specifying RBE3 MPCs 5

Creates an RBE3 element, which defines the motion of a reference node as the
weighted average of the motions of a set of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent
terms can be specified, each term consisting of a node and a list of degrees of freedom.
The first dependent term is used to define the reference node. The other dependent 6
terms define additional node/degrees of freedom, which are added to the m-set. An
arbitrary number of independent terms can also be specified. Each independent term
consists of a constant coefficient (weighting factor), a node, and a list of degrees of
freedom. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
Entry Description
RBE3 Defines the motion at a reference grid point as the weighted
average of the motions at a set of other grid points.
References
Defining RBE3 MPCs in MSC.Patran

1 1. Click on the FE Application icon located on the Main form to bring up the
Entry Description
6 Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the GMi and CMi fields on the RBE3
entry. The first dependent term will be treated as the
reference node, REFGRID and REFC. The rest of the
dependent terms become the GMi and CMi components.
Independent Terms Independent terms define the Gi, j, Ci, and WTi fields on the
RBE3 entry.
Constraints 263
Specifying RROD MPCs

Creates an RROD element, which defines a pinned rod between two nodes that is rigid
in extension. One dependent term is specified, which consists of a node and a single
translational degree of freedom. One independent term is specified, which consists of
a single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
Entry Description
1
RROD Defines a pin-ended element that is rigid in translation.
References
• “RROD” on page 1982 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide. 2
Defining RROD MPCs in MSC.Patran
To define a RROD MPC:
9
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>RROD.
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the RROD constraints. 4
6
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the GB and CMB on the RROD entry.
Only one translational DOF may be referenced for this entry.
Independent Terms Independent terms define the GA field on the RROD entry.
1 The CMA field is left blank.
Specifying RTRPLT MPCs

Creates an RTRPLT element, which defines a rigid triangular plate between three
2 nodes. Up to three dependent and three independent terms can be specified. Each
term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the
three dependent terms must be the same as the nodes specified in the three
independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of the three nodes can
be specified as independent as long as the total number of independent degrees of
9 freedom adds up to six. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
Entry Description
4 RTRPLT Defines a rigid triangular plate.
References
• “RTRPLT” on page 1992 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
5 Defining RTRPLT MPCs in MSC.Patran
To define a RTRPLT MPC:
6 Finite Elements Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>RTRPLT.
Constraints 265
3. Click on Define Terms... to define the RTRPLT constraints.
9
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Dependent terms define the GA, GB, GC, CMA, CMB, and
CMC fields of the RTRPLT entry.
4
Independent Terms The total number of nodes referenced in both the dependent
terms and the independent terms must equal three. There must
be exactly six independent degrees of freedom, and they must
be capable of describing rigid body motion. Defines the GA,
5
GB, GC, CNA, CNB, and CNC fields of the RTRPLT entry.
6
Support Conditions
In static analysis by the displacement method, the rigid body modes must be
restrained in order to remove the singularity of the stiffness matrix. The required
constraints may be supplied with single point constraints, multipoint constraints, or
free body supports. If free body supports are used, the rigid body characteristics will
be calculated and a check will be made on the sufficiency of the supports.
1 Free-body supports are defined with a SUPORT or SUPORT1 entry. In the case of
problems using conical shell elements, the SUPAX entry is used. Free-body supports
must be defined in the global coordinate system. The SUPORT1 entry must be selected
by the SUPORT1 Case Control command.
2 For more information on Support Conditions, see “Rigid Body Supports” on
page 331 of the MSC.Nastran Reference Guide.
6
Loads and Boundary Conditions 267
9.2 Loads and Boundary Conditions

The loads for the analysis can be either Static or Time Dependent (dynamic). Time
dependency is introduced either through the inclusion of a time dependent field
multiplier, or through use of initial condition options (e.g., initial displacements).
When defining loads on a model it is important to define the following terms and
concepts. 1
Load Sets
A Loads/BC set is comprised of a collection of data (which may include fields) that
are associated with both an analysis type and geometric and/or FEM entities. A typical
example are displacements associated with nodes in a structural analysis.
2
Load Cases
A load case contains all the loads and boundary conditions used within a single
analysis step. For example, one load case may represent the loads and BC for each time
9
point in a time-dependent nonlinear analysis. Multiple load cases can be applied to
the same model for linear analysis to examine how the model reacts to different
loading conditions. Load cases are central to the ability to perform complex analyses
on an individual model. For nonlinear analysis multiple loadcase runs are used to 4
define the load history on the model. The ending point of the last subcase is the
starting point of the next subcase.
Load Steps 5
A Load Step (or analysis step) is defined by associating a load case, an analysis
procedure, output requests, and any associated parameters that guide the solution
path for the chosen analysis procedure. Whereas a load case is a collection of loads and
boundary conditions for a particular Load Step, a Load Step is a collection of relevant
analysis parameters including the associated load case.
6
The load for a subcase is often subdivided into the number of increments specified for
the subcase. The solution strategy in nonlinear analysis is to apply the loads in an
incremental fashion until the desired load level is reached.
Load Types
The static loads in nonlinear analysis consist of concentrated loads, distributed loads,
and thermal loads. Most of the relevant loads data applicable to the linear static
analysis are also applicable to nonlinear static analysis. Transient loads define the
loadings as functions of time and the location. They can be a load applied at a
particular degree-of-freedom, pressure over the surface area, or the body force
simulating an acceleration.
The following types of loads are available for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Table 9-1 Bulk Data Entries for Loads

1
Loads
FORCEi Defines concentrated load at grid point.
LSEQ Defines static load sets for dynamic analysis.
2 MOMENTi Defines moment at a grid point.
NOLINi Defines nonlinear transient load.
PLOAD Defines pressure loads on CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CHEXA,
CPENTA, and CTETRA. Should not be used for hyperelastic
9 plane elements CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUAD, CTRIA3, and
CTRIA6 or for hyperelastic CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA with
midside nodes.
PLOAD2 Defines pressure loads on shell elements, CQUAD4 and
4 CTRIA3. Not available for hyperelastic elements.
PLOAD4 Defines pressure loads on surfaces of CHEXA, CPENTA,
CTETRA, CTRIA3 and CQUAD4 elements. Not available for
hyperelastic plane elements CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUAD,
5 CTRIA3, and CTRIA6.
PLOADX1 Defines pressure loads on axisymmetric elements CQUADX
and CTRIAX.
RFORCE Defines load due to centrifugal force field.
6 TEMP Defines temperature at grid points.
TEMPPi Defines temperature field for surface elements.
TEMPRB Defines temperature field for line elements.
TIC Specifies initial values for displacement and velocity.
TLOADi Defines loads as a function of time.
References
• “FORCE” on page 1373 of the .
• “LSEQ” on page 1466 of the .

• “MOMENT” on page 1475 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “NOLIN1” on page 1513 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “PLOAD” on page 1862 of the .
• “RFORCE” on page 1964 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “TEMP” on page 2103 of the . 1
• “TIC” on page 2120 of the .
• “TLOAD1” on page 2125 of the .
2
6
Using MSC.Patran to Apply Loads and Boundary

Conditions
The Loads and Boundary Conditions application controls which loads and
boundaries and contact information will be created in the MSC.Nastran input file.
1
The Loads and Boundary Conditions application in MSC.Patran provides the ability
to apply a variety of static and dynamic loads and boundary conditions including
2 contact surfaces to finite element models. Loads/BCs may be associated with
geometric entities as well as FEM entities. When associated with geometric entities,
they can be transferred to finite elements created on the geometry. Loads and
boundary conditions are intended to be created in multiple single purpose groups
9 referred to as load sets. These sets are grouped into load cases in the Load Cases
application.
One of the most elegant features in MSC.Patran is its ability to create fields that
describes the variation of loads and boundary conditions. The way in which Loads
4 and BCs vary may be defined spatially, by previous analysis results, based on time, or
associated with material properties.
Sets can be visually displayed on the screen by markers which show the location, type,
magnitude, and direction of the applied loads or boundary condition. Only the static
5 portion of a dynamic Loads/BCs set is reflected in the marker display. Sets can also
be displayed as tables.
A powerful capability is the display of any set scalar data directly on the model as a
fringe plot. For display purposes, data are treated as “results,” with full user control
6 over the spectrum, method, shading, etc. Data display is scalar, but the data can be
pressures, vector component magnitudes, and vector resultant magnitudes. Fringe
plots can only be displayed on finite elements. Fringes of a dynamic Loads/BCs set
may be displayed at user-specified times.
Creating Load Cases

The Load Cases application enables you to combine a large number of individual
loads and boundary condition (LBCs) sets into a single coherent case for application
to the model. Each load case you create has a unique user-selected descriptive name
as well as an associated descriptive statement. Load case information is permanently
stored in the database (unless deleted). You can modify it at any time
Even if you do not create any load cases, your load and boundary conditions will still
be placed into a default current load case, named “default.” If you create a special load
case and make it the current load case, then all subsequent LBCs will be placed in that
load case as long as it is current.
1
Static Load Cases
Load cases in which none of the constituent loads or boundary conditions sets has a
time varying component are called static load cases. Loads and boundary conditions 2
that will make up a static load case are generated using the Input Data subform. For
static load cases, this subform will vary according to the type of load being created,
but its general format remains constant.
6
Time-Dependent Load Cases

Load cases in which one or more of the loads and boundary conditions sets has a time
varying component are called time-dependent, or dynamic load cases Loads and
boundary conditions that will make up a time-dependent load case are also generated
using the Input Data subform. For time-dependent load cases, this subform
incorporates time dependency data fields.
1
For more information, see “Overview of the Loads and Boundary Conditions
Application” on page 6 of the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional
Assignments
Displacement LBCs
Boundary conditions can be used to specify the value of the displacements at nodes.
To create a boundary condition for displacement, you need to specify the node
number, the degree of freedom(s), and the magnitude of the displacement.
Displacements can be imposed directly on nodes using SPC1 and SPCD Bulk Data
entries. All non blank entries will cause an SPC1 entry to be created. If the specified
value is not 0.0, an SCPD entry will also be created to define the non zero enforced
1
displacement or rotation.
References
• “SPC1” on page 2043 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide. 2
• “SPCD” on page 2047 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Zero or nonzero displacements can also be applied across elements in a uniform or
variable fashion. The primary use of this boundary condition is to apply constraints to
solid elements. 9
MSC.Patran LBC Application Input Data
Displacement boundary conditions are generated in MSC.Patran using the following
Object/Type combinations on the LBC Application form. 4
Object Type Dimension Bulk Data Entries
Displacement Nodal SPC1, SPCD
Element Uniform 2D/3D SPC1, SPCD
5
Element Variable
Entry Description 6
Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the enforced translational displacement values.
These are in model length units.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the enforced rotational displacement values.

These are in radians.
References
• “Loads and Boundary Conditions Form” on page 18 of the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Force LBCs
Concentrated forces and moments can be applied directly to nodes with the ability to
define the direction as well as the magnitude.
Forces and moments are specified with FORCEi and MOMENTi Bulk Data entries,
where:
1
Entry Description
FORCE Defines a static concentrated force/moment at a grid point by
MOMENT specifying the magnitude and direction.
2 FORCE1 Defines a static concentrated force/moment at a grid point

MOMENT1 where the direction of the force/moment is defined to be
parallel to a vector between two defined grid points.
FORCE2 Defines a static concentrated force/moment at a grid point
9 MOMENT2 where the direction of the force/moment is parallel to the cross
product of vectors from G1 to G2 and G3 to G4.
References
4 • “FORCE” on page 1373 of the .
• “FORCE1” on page 1374 of the .
• “FORCE2” on page 1376 of the .
5 MSC.Patran LBC Application Input Data

Forces and moments are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type
combination on the LBC Application form.
6 Object Type Dimension Bulk Data Entries

Force Nodal FORCEi, MOMENTi
Entry Description
Force (F1,F2,F3) Defines the applied forces in the translation degrees of
freedom. This defines the N vector and the F magnitude on
the FORCE entry.
Moment (M1,M2,M3) Defines the applied moments in the rotational degrees of
freedom. This defines the N vector and the M magnitude on
the MOMENT entry.
1
References
Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. 2
6
Pressure LBCs
Pressure loads can be applied to edges or surfaces of 2D and 3D elements. Several Bulk
Data entries are used to apply pressure loading depending on the element topology.
Entry Description
1 PLOAD Defines pressure loads on CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CHEXA,

CPENTA, and CTETRA. Should not be used for hyperelastic
plane elements CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUAD, CTRIA3, and
CTRIA6 or for hyperelastic CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA with
midside nodes.
2 PLOAD2 Defines pressure loads on shell elements, CQUAD4 and
CTRIA3.
PLOAD4 Defines pressure loads on surfaces of CHEXA, CPENTA,
CTETRA, CTRIA3 and CQUAD4 elements.
9 PLOADX1 Defines pressure loads on axisymmetric elements CQUADX
and CTRIAX.
These pressures are applied to 2D and 3D elements only. Pressures for 1D elements
4 are applied using the “Total Load LBCs” on page 290 object.
References
• “PLOAD” on page 1862 of the .
5 • “PLOAD2” on page 1869 of the .
• “PLOAD4” on page 1871 of the .
• “PLOADX1” on page 1875 of the .
6 MSC.Patran LBC Application Input Data
Pressures are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type combination
on the LBC Application form.
1. Uniform Pressure Loads on 2D Elements

Pressure Element Uniform 2D PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or
FORCE
1
Entry Description
Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements
using a PLOAD4 entry. The negative of this value defines
the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. These values are all equal for a
given element, producing a uniform pressure field across 2
that face.
Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements
using a PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through
P4 values.These values are all equal for a given element, 9
producing a uniform pressure field across that face.
Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1
through P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on
that entry is defined as zero. For other 2D elements, this will 4
be interpreted as a load per unit length (i.e. independent of
thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads
(FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be
evaluated at the middle of the application region.
5
2. Uniform Pressure Loads on 3D Elements

Pressure Element Uniform 3D PLOAD4
6
Entry Description
Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a
PLOAD4 entry. This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If
a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated once at the
center of the applied region.
3. Variable Pressure Loads on 2D Elements

Pressure Element Variable 2D PLOAD4, PLOADX1,
FORCE
1
Entry Description
Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements
using a PLOAD4 entry. The negative of this value defines
the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it
2 will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values.
Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements
using a PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through
P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated
9 separately for the P1 through P4 values.
Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1
through P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on
that entry is defined as zero. For other 2D elements, this will
4 be interpreted as a load per unit length (e.g., independent of
thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads
(FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be
evaluated independently at each node.
5 4. Variable Pressure Loads on 3D Elements
6 Pressure Element Variable 3D PLOAD4
Entry Description
Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a
PLOAD4 entry. This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If
a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for
each of the P1 through P4 values.
References
Temperature LBCs
Temperatures can be defined directly at nodes or temperature fields can be defined
across element surfaces.
Temperatures are specified with TEMP, TEMPPi, or TEMPRB Bulk Data entries,
where:
1
Entry Description
TEMP Defines temperature at grid points.
2
TEMPPi Defines temperature field for surface elements.
TEMPRB Defines temperature field for line elements.
References 9
• “TEMP” on page 2103 of the .
• “TEMPP1” on page 2111 of the .
• “TEMPRB” on page 2115 of the .
4
Temperatures are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type
combinations on the LBC Application form.
5
6
1. Grid Point Temperatures

Temperature Nodal 0D TEMP
1 Entry Description
Temperature Defines the T fields on the TEMP entry.
2. Uniform Temperature Fields on 1D Elements

Temperature Element Uniform 1D TEMPRB
9 Entry Description
Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPRB entry.
The temperature value is used for both the TA and TB
fields. The T1a, T1b, T2a, and T2b fields are all defined as
4 0.0.
3. Uniform Temperature Fields on 2D Elements

Temperature Element Uniform 2D TEMPP1
Entry Description
6 Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPP1 entry.
The temperature value is used for the T field. The gradient
through the thickness is defined to be 0.0.
4. Variable Temperature Fields on 1D Elements

Temperature Element Variable 1D TEMPRB
Entry Description
Centroid Temp Defines a variable temperature file using a TEMPRB entry.
A field reference will be evaluated at either end of the
element to define the TA and TB fields.
Axis-1 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 1 direction. A field
reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to
define the T1a and T1b fields.
1
Axis-2 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 2 direction. A field
reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to
define the T2a and T2b fields.
2
5. Variable Temperature Fields on 2D Elements

Temperature Element Variable 2D TEMPP1 9
Entry Description
Top Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the top surface of a shell
element. The top and bottom values are used to compute the
4
average and gradient values on the TEMPP1 entry.
Bot Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the bottom surface of a shell
element. The top and bottom values are used to compute the
average and gradient values on the TEMPP1 entry.
5
6. Uniform and Variable Temperature Fields on 3D Elements
Object Type Dimension Bulk Data Entries 6

Temperature Element Uniform 3D TEMP
Element Variable
Entry Description
Temperature Defines the temperature or temperature distribution in the element.
References
Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments
6
Inertial Loads LBCs

Inertial loads can be applied to the entire model using the GRAV or RFORCE Bulk
Data entries.
Entry Description
GRAV Defines acceleration vectors for gravity or other acceleration 1
loading.
RFORCE Defines load due to centrifugal force field.
References
• “GRAV” on page 1442 of the .
2
• “RFORCE” on page 1964 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
MSC.Patran LBC Application Input Data 9

Inertial loads are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type
Object Type Dimension Bulk Data Entries 4

Inertial Load Element Uniform Entire Model GRAV or RFORCE
Entry Description
Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Defines the N vector and the G magnitude value on the
5
GRAV entry.
Rot Velocity Defines the R vector and the A magnitude value on the
(w1,w2,w3) RFORCE entry.
6
Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3) Defines the R vector and the RACC magnitude value on the
RFORCE entry.
The acceleration and velocity vectors are defined with respect to the input analysis
coordinate frame. The origin of the rotational vectors is the origin of the analysis
coordinate frame. Note that rotational velocity and rotational acceleration cannot be
defined together in the same set.In generating the GRAV and RFORCE entries, the
interface produces one GRAV and/or RFORCE entry image for each MSC.Patran
load set.
References
6
Velocity LBCs
Velocities can be defined for transient analysis using the TLOAD entry.:
Entry Description
TLOAD Defines a time-dependent dynamic load or enforced motion
1
References

Velocities are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type combination
2
on the LBC Application form.

9
Velocity Nodal TLOAD
Entry Description
Trans Veloc (v1,v2,v3) Defines the velocity values for the translational 4
degrees-of-freedom.
Rot Veloc (w1, w2, w3) Defines the velocity values for the rotational
degrees-of-freedom.
5
References
6
Acceleration LBCs
Accelerations can be defined for transient response analysis using the TLOAD entry.:
Entry Description
TLOAD Defines a time-dependent dynamic load or enforced motion
1
References

2 Accelerations are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type

Acceleration Nodal TLOAD
Entry Description
4 Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Defines the acceleration values for the translational
degrees-of-freedom.
Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3) Defines the acceleration values for the rotational
degrees-of-freedom.
5
References
6
Distributed Load LBCs

Distributed forces and moments can be applied in a uniform or variable fashion to 1D
and 2D elements. Several Bulk Data entries are used to apply distributed loading
depending on the element topology.
Entry Description
1
PLOAD Defines a uniform static pressure load on a triangular or quadrilateral
surface comprised of surface elements and/or the faces of solid
elements.
PLOAD1 Defines concentrated, uniformly distributed, or linearly distributed
applied loads to the CBAR or CBEAM elements at user-chosen points 2
along the axis. For the CBEND element, only distributed loads over an
entire length may be defined
PLOAD2 Defines a uniform static pressure load applied to CQUAD4, CSHEAR,
or CTRIA3 two-dimensional elements. 9
PLOAD4 Defines a pressure load on a face of a CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA,
CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, or CQUADR
element.
PLOADX1 Defines surface traction to be used with the CQUADX, CTRIAX, and
4
CTRIAX6 axisymmetric element.
References
• “PLOAD” on page 1862 of the . 5
• “PLOAD4” on page 1871 of the . 6
• “PLOADX1” on page 1875 of the .

Distributed loads are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type
combinations on the LBC Application form.
1. Uniform and Variable Loads on 1D Elements

Defines distributed force or moment loading along beam elements using
MSC .Nastran PLOAD1 entries. The coordinate system in which the load is applied is
defined by the beam axis and the Bar Orientation element property. The Bar
Orientation must be defined before this Distributed Load can be created. If the Bar
Orientation is subsequently changed, the Distributed Load must be updated manually
1 if necessary

Distributed Load Element Uniform 1D PLOAD1
2 Element Variable
Entry Description
Distributed Load Defines the FXE, FYE, and FZE fields on three PLOAD1
9 (f1,f2,f3) entries.
Distributed Moment Defines the MXE, MYE, and MZE fields on three PLOAD1
(m1,m2,m3) entries.
4 For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to
define a linear load variation.
2. Uniform and Variable Loads on 2D Elements

5 Defines a distributed force or moment load along the edges of 2D elements. The
coordinate system for the load is defined by the surface or element edge and normal.
The x direction is along the edge. Positive x is determined by the element corner node
connectivity. See “The MSC.Patran Element Library” on page 317 of the MSC.Patran
6 Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling. For example, if the element is a
CQUAD4, with node connectivity of 1, 2, 3, 4. The positive x directions for each edge
would be from nodes 1 to 2, 2 to 3, 3 to 4, and 4 to 1. The z direction is normal to the
surface or element. Positive z is in the direction of the element normal. The y direction
is normal to x and z. Positive y is determined by the cross product of the z and x axes
and always points into the element. The MSC.Nastran entries generated, depend on
the element type.

Distributed Load Element Uniform 2D PLOAD, PLOAD2,
Element Variable PLOAD4, PLOADX1 1
Entry Description
Edge Distributed Load For axisymmetric solid elements (CTRIAX6), the PA, PB,
(f1,f2,f3) and THETA fields on the PLOADX1 entry are defined. For
2
other 2D elements, the input vector is interpreted as load
per unit length and converted into equivalent nodal loads
(FORCE entries).
Edge Distributed For 2D shell elements, the input vector is interpreted as
9
Moment (m1,m2,m3) moment per unit length and converted into equivalent
nodal moments (MOMENT entries).
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to 4
define a linear load variation.
References
5
6
Total Load LBCs

The total load capability is not available directly in MSC.Nastran, but is a convenient
way to have MSC.Patran distribute a force load uniformly over an application area
without having to calculate the number of nodes or application area. The total force
load is defined for the application region, but equivalent uniform pressures are
written to the Bulk Data. The equivalent pressure value is are found by dividing the
1 total load value by the area of the application region. In the first release the loads may
only be defined in Coord 0.
Entry Description
2 PLOAD4 Defines a pressure load on a face of a CHEXA, CPENTA,
CTETRA, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, or
CQUADR element.
PLOADX1 Defines surface traction to be used with the CQUADX,
9 CTRIAX, and CTRIAX6 axisymmetric element.
References
4 • “PLOADX1” on page 1875 of the .

Total Loads are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type
5 combination on the LBC Application form
Note: Currently only 1D element types are supported with this Object even though
the form allows for other types.

Total Load Element Uniform 1D PLOAD4
Entry Description
Load <F1 F2 F3> Defines the total load component values to element
nodes.
Analysis Coordinate Frame Defines the coordinate frame for the distributed
load. Only Coord 0 is supported in the first release.
References
6
Contact LBCs
A complete description of Contact loads and boundary conditions is given in
“Specifying Contact Body Entries” in Chapter 12.
Note: Slideline contact is not supported by SOL 600, thus you must use equivalent 1,
1 2, or 3D deformable-deformable contact.
References
2 Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
6
Initial Conditions 293
9.3 Initial Conditions

Initial conditions provides various ways of initializing the state variables throughout
the model.
Initial Displacement LBCs

Creates a set of TIC Bulk Data entries. 1
Entry Description
TIC Defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural
transient analysis. Both displacement and velocity values may be 2
specified at independent degrees-of-freedom.
References
• “TIC” on page 2120 of the . 9
Initial Displacements are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type
4
Object Type Bulk Data Entries
Initial Displacement Nodal TIC
5
Entry Description
Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the initial translational displacement values.
These are in model length units.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the initial rotational displacement values.
6
These are in radians.
References
“Loads and Boundary Conditions Form” on page 18 of the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments
Initial Velocity LBCs

Creates a set of TIC Bulk Data entries.
Entry Description
TIC Defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural
1 transient analysis. Both displacement and velocity values may be
specified at independent degrees-of-freedom.
References
• “TIC” on page 2120 of the .
2
Initial velocities are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type
9
Initial Velocity Nodal TIC
4
Entry Description
Trans Veloc (v1,v2,v3) Defines the V0 fields for translational degrees of freedom
on the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for
5 each non blank entry.
Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3) Defines the V0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on
the TIC entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each
non blank entry.
6
References
Initial Conditions 295
Initial Temperature LBCs

Creates a set of TEMPD Bulk Data entries.
Entry Description
TEMPD Defines a temperature value for all grid points of the structural model
that have not been given a temperature on a TEMP entry. 1
References
• “TEMPD” on page 2108 of the .
MSC.Patran LBC Application Input Data 2

Initial temperatures are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type

9
Initial Temperature Nodal TEMPD
Entry Description 4
Initial Temperature Defines the initial temperature (the T0 value of thermal
expansion given by α ( T final – T 0 ) ) for the selected
application region.
5
Spatial Fields When specifying real values in the Input Data entries,
spatial fields can be referenced. All defined spatial fields
currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is
placed in the Input Data entry and a spatial field is
selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will 6
be entered in the Input Data entry.
References
6
SECTION
Materials
10
■ Overview
■ Linear Elastic
■ Nonlinear Elastic
■ Inelastic
■ Failure and Damage Models
■ Creep
■ Composite
■ Gasket
■ Material Damping
■ Experimental Data Fitting

298 Materials
10.1 Overview
A wide variety of materials are encountered in stress analysis problems, and for any
one of these materials a range of constitutive models is available to describe the
material’s behavior. We can broadly classify the materials of interest as those which
exhibit almost purely elastic response, possibly with some energy dissipation during
rapid loading by viscoelastic response (the elastomers, such as rubber or solid
1 propellant); materials that yield, and exhibit considerable ductility beyond yield (such
as mild steel and other commonly used metals, ice at low strain rates, and clay);
materials that flow by rearrangement of particles which interact generally through
some dominantly frictional mechanism (such as sand); and brittle materials (rock,
2 concrete, ceramics).
Table 10-1 Common Material Characteristics
3 Composites Anisotropic:
(MATi, MATORT, 1) Layered, ds
Bearings, aircraft panels Composite continuum
elements
ij = C ijkl dε kl
PCOMP) Tires, glass/epoxy
21 Constants Ribbers
2)Fiber
10 Reinforced,
E t
S = --- ( T CT – 1 )
2
One dimensional strain in fibers
Creep Strains increasing with time Metals at high ORNL

5 (MATYP) under constant load. Stresses
decreasing with time under
temperatures, polymide
films, semiconductor
Norton
constant deformations. Creep materials Maxwell

strains are non-instantaneous.
Elastic Stress functions of Small deformation (below Hookes Law

6 (MATi, MATORT) instantaneous strain only.
Linear load-displacement
yield) for most materials:
metals, glass, wood
relation.
Elastoplasticity Yield condition flow rule and Metals von Mises Isotropic
(MATEP) hardening rule necessary to Soils Cam -Clay
calculate stress, plastic strain.
Permanent deformation upon Hill’s Anisotropic
unloading.
Overview 299

Hyperelastic Stress function of instantaneous Rubber Mooney
(MATHE) strain. Nonlinear load- Ogden
displacement relation.
Unloading path same as Arruda-Boyce
loading. Gent
Hypoelastic Rate form of stress-strain law Concrete Buyukozturk

1
Viscoelastic Time dependence of stresses in Rubber, Simo Model
(MATVE) elastic material under loads. Glass, industrial Narayanaswamy
Full recovery after unloading.
plastics 2
Viscoplastic Combined plasticity and creep Metals Power law
(MATVP) phenomenon Powder Shima Model
3
Constitutive Models
A single material may contain multiple constitutive models. Each constitutive model
characterizes distinct ranges of the material’s response. The constitutive models in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear contain a range of linear and nonlinear material
10
models that can address or approximate the material response of most commonly
encountered materials. The constitutive models in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear can be accessed by any of the solid or structural elements. The models are
assessed independently at each “constitutive calculation point” (i.e., the numerical 5
integration points in the elements). Thus, the constitutive models are concerned only
with a single calculation point. The element then provides an estimate of the kinematic
solution to the problem at the point under consideration.
Constitutive Models in MSC.Patran

6
In MSC.Patran, the constitutive model to be used is defined by the Constitutive
Model Status. MSC.Patran uses all active constitutive models when the analysis is
submitted. Redundant or unneeded constitutive models should be rendered inactive.
Existing constitutive models of an existing material appear in either the active or
inactive listbox depending on their active/inactive status. Selection of a model from
one listbox will add it to the other one. If you do not wish for a constitutive model to
be translated into the MSC.Nastran input file, place it in the inactive list box
To view or change the constitutive model status:
300 Materials
1. Click on the Materials Application icon located on the Main form to bring
up the Materials Application form.
2. Select Change Material Status...
10
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear Material Entries
The following material bulk data entries are available only in SOL 600. Each of these
options are overviewed in the sections of this chapter and detailed in the “Bulk Data
5 Entries” in Chapter 8 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide. All standard
MSC.Nastran materials are also available in SOL 600.
Bulk Data Entry Description
6 MATEP Specifies elasto-plastic material properties to be used for large

deformation analysis in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL
600) only.
--MATTEP Specifies temperature-dependent elasto-plastic material
properties to be used for static, quasi static or transient
dynamic analysis in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL
600) only.
MATF Specifies failure model properties for linear elastic materials to
be used for static, quasi static or transient dynamic analysis in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
Overview 301
Bulk Data Entry Description

MATG Specifies gasket material properties to be used in MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
--MATTG Specifies gasket material property temperature variation to be
used in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
MATHE Specifies hyperelastic (rubber-like) material properties for 1
nonlinear (large strain and large rotation) analysis in
--MATTHE Specifies temperature-dependent properties of hyperelastic
(rubber-like) materials (elastomers) for nonlinear (large strain
and large rotation) analysis in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
2
(SOL 600) only. This material model is not available in the
initial release of MSC.Nastran 2003.
MATED Specifies damage model properties for hyperelastic materials
to be used for static, quasi static or transient dynamic analysis
3
in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
MATORT Specifies elastic orthotropic material properties for 3-
dimensional and plane strain behavior for linear and nonlinear
analyses in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only. 10
--MATTORT Specifies temperature-dependent properties of elastic
orthotropic materials for linear and nonlinear analyses used in
MATVE Specifies isotropic visco-elastic material properties to be used
5
for quasi-static or dynamic analysis in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
--MATTVE Specifies temperature-dependent visco-elastic material
properties in terms of Thermo-Rheologically Simple behavior
6
to be used for quasi-static or transient dynamic analysis in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only. This material
model is not available in the initial MSC.Nastran 2003
release.
MATVP Specifies viscoplastic or creep material properties to be used for
quasi-static analysis in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL
600) only.
302 Materials
The following sections describe how to model material behavior in MSC.Nastran

Implicit Nonlinear. Modeling material behavior consists of both specifying the
constitutive models used to describe the material behavior and defining the actual
material data necessary to represent the material. Directional dependency can be
included for materials other than isotropic materials. Data for the materials can be
entered into MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear either directly through the input file or
1 by user subroutines, or material models may be defined in the MSC.Patran Materials
Application. Each section of this chapter discusses various options for organizing
material data for input. Each section also discusses the constitutive (stress-strain)
relation and graphic representation of the models and includes recommendations and
cautions concerning the use of the models.
2
10
6
Linear Elastic 303
10.2 Linear Elastic

MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is capable of handling problems with any
combination of isotropic, othrotropic, or anisotropic linear elastic material behavior.
The linear elastic model is the model most commonly used to represent engineering
materials. This model, which has a linear relationship between stresses and strains, is
represented by Hooke’s Law. Figure 10-1 shows that stress is proportional to strain in 1
a uniaxial tension test. The ratio of stress to strain is the familiar definition of modulus
of elasticity (Young’s modulus) of the material.
E (modulus of elasticity) = (axial stress)/(axial strain) Eq. 10-1

2
3
Stress
10
E
5
Strain
Figure 10-1 Uniaxial Stress-Strain Relation of Linear Elastic Material
Experiments show that axial elongation is always accompanied by lateral contraction 6

of the bar. The ratio for a linear elastic material is:
v = (lateral contraction)/(axial elongation) Eq. 10-2
This is known as Poisson’s ratio. Similarly, the shear modulus (modulus of rigidity) is
defined as:
G (shear modulus) = (shear stress)/(shear strain) Eq. 10-3
A Poisson’s ratio of 0.5, which would be appropriate for an incompressible material,

can be used for the following elements: Herrmann, plane stress, shell, truss, or beam.
A Poisson’s ratio which is close (but not equal) to 0.5 can be used for constant dilation
304 Materials
elements and reduced integration elements in situations which do not include other
severe kinematic constraints. Using a Poisson’s ratio close to 0.5 for all other elements
usually leads to behavior that is too stiff. A Poisson’s ratio of 0.5 can also be used with
the updated Lagrangian formulation in the multiplicative decomposition framework
using the standard displacement elements. In these elements, the treatment for
incompressibility is transparent.
1 Isotropic Materials
Most linear elastic materials are assumed to be isotropic (their elastic properties are
the same in all directions). For an isotropic material, every plane is a plane of
symmetry and every direction is an axis of symmetry. It can be shown that for an
2 isotropic material:
G = E ⁄ (2(1 + v)) Eq. 10-4
The shear modulus G can be easily calculated if the modulus of elasticity E and
3 Poisson’s ratio v are known.
Specifying Isotropic Material Entries

Isotropic material models are designated with the MAT1 Bulk Data entry in the
10 MSC.Nastran Input File
Entry Description
MAT1 Defines the material properties for linear isotropic materials.
5
References
• “MAT1” on page 1475 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
6 MSC.Patran Materials Application Input Data

To define an isotropic material in MSC.Patran:
1. From the Materials Application form, set the Action>Object>Method
combination to Create>Isotropic>Manual Input.
2. Click Input Properties...
Linear Elastic 305
Isotropic linear elastic material models require the following material data via the
Input Options subform on the Materials Application form.
Isotropic-Linear Elastic Description

Elastic Modulus Defines the elastic modulus. This property is generally
required. May vary with temperature via a defined
material field. 1
Poisson’s Ratio Defines the Poisson’s ratio. This property is generally
required. May vary with temperature via a defined
material field.
Density Defines the mass density. This property is optional.
2
Coefficient of Thermal Defines the coefficient of thermal expansion. This
Expansion property is optional. May vary with temperature via a
defined material field.
Reference Temperature Defines the stress free temperature. This property is 3
optional. When defining temperature dependent
properties, this is the reference temperature from which
values will be extracted or interpolated.
The material density, used to define the mass of the structure, and the damping value
10
are used in dynamic loadings, while the expansion coefficient is used to identify the
thermal strains.
Orthotropic Materials 5
An orthotropic material has three mutually orthogonal planes of symmetry. With
respect to a coordinate system parallel to these planes, the constitutive law for this
material is given by the following more general form of Hooke’s Law:
6
ε 11 1 ⁄ ( E1 ) – ( υ 12 ) ⁄ ( E 1 ) – ( υ 13 ) ⁄ ( E 1 ) 0 0 0 σ 11
ε 22 ( – υ 12 ) ⁄ ( E 1 ) 1 ⁄ ( E2 ) ( – υ 23 ) ⁄ ( E 2 ) 0 0 0 σ 22
ε 33 ( – υ 13 ) ⁄ ( E 1 ) ( – υ 23 ) ⁄ ( E 2 ) 1 ⁄ ( E3 ) 0 0 0 σ 33
=
γ 12 0 0 0 1 ⁄ ( G 12 ) 0 0 τ 12
γ 13 0 0 0 0 1 ⁄ ( G 13 ) 0 τ 13
γ 23 0 0 0 0 0 1 ⁄ ( G 23 ) τ 23
306 Materials
3D Orthotropic
Due to symmetry of the compliance matrix, E11 ν 21 = E22 ν 12 , E22 ν 32 = E33 ν 23 , and E33
ν 13 = E11 ν 31 . Using these relations, a general orthotropic material has nine
independent constants:
E11, E22, E33, ν 12 , ν 23 , ν 31 , G12, G23, G31

1 These nine constants must be specified in constructing the material model.
Note: The inequalities E22 > ν 23 , E33, E11 > ν 12 E22, and E33 > ν 31 E11 must be
satisfied in order for the orthotropic material to be stable. This is checked by
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
2 2D Orthotropic
Orthotropic material models can be used with 2D elements, such as plane stress, plane
strain, and axisymmetric elements. For example, the orthotropic stress-strain
relationship for a plane stress element is:
3
E1 ν 21 E 1 0
1
C = --------------------------------- ν 12 E 2 E2 0 Eq. 10-5
( 1 – ν 12 ν 21 )
( 1 – ν 12 ν 21 )G
10 0 0
Specifying Orthotropic Material Entries

2D and 3D othrotropic materials are characterized in MSC.Nastran using the
5 following bulk data entries.
Entry Description
MAT3 Defines the material properties for linear orthotropic materials
6 used by the CTRIAX6 element entry.
MAT2 Defines the material property for an orthotropic material for
MAT8 solids and isoparametric shell elements.
MATORT Specifies elastic orthotropic material properties for 3-

dimensional and plane strain behavior for linear and nonlinear
analyses in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only in
a more general way than MAT2 or MAT8.
Linear Elastic 307
References
• “MAT8” on page 1489of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “MATORT (SOL 600)” on page 1637 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference
Guide.
MSC.Patran Materials Application Input Data

1
To define an orthotropic material in MSC.Patran:
combination to Create>2D or 3D Orthotropic>Manual Input.
2
The required properties for orthotropic linear elastic material models vary based on
dimension, element type, and thermal dependencies. 3D orthotropic material models
require the following material data (2D requires a reduced set) via the Input 3
Properties subform on the Materials Application form.
Orthotropic-Linear Description
Elastic
Elastic Modulus 11/22/33 Defines the elastic moduli in the element’s coordinate
10
system. This is required data. May vary with
temperature via a defined material field.
Poisson’s Ratio 12/23/31 Defines the Poisson’s ratios relative to the element’s
coordinate system. This is required data. May vary with 5
Shear Modulus 12/23/31 Defines the shear moduli relative to the element’s
coordinate system. This is required data. May vary with
temperature via a defined material field. 6
Coefficient of Thermal Defines the coefficients of thermal expansion relative to
Expansion 11/22/33 the element’s coordinate system. These properties are
optional. May vary with temperature via a defined
material field.
308 Materials
Orthotropic-Linear Description
Elastic
Reference Temperature Defines the stress free temperature which is an optional
property. When defining temperature dependent
values will be extracted or interpolated.
1 Density Defines the mass density which is an optional property.
Anisotropic Materials
Anisotropic material exhibits different elastic properties in different directions. The
2 significant directions of the material are labeled as preferred directions, and it is
easiest to express the material behavior with respect to these directions.
The stress-strain relationship for an anisotropic linear elastic material can be
expressed as
3
σ ij = C ijkl ε kl Eq. 10-6
The values of C ijkl (the stress-strain relation) and the preferred directions (if
necessary) must be defined for an anisotropic material.
10
Specifying Anisotropic Material Entries
Anisotropic materials are characterized in MSC.Nastran using the following bulk data
entries.
5
Entry Description
MAT2 Defines the material properties for linear anisotropic materials
for two-dimensional elements.
6
References
Linear Elastic 309

To define anisotropic material in MSC.Patran:
combination to Create>2D or 3D Anisotropic>Manual Input.
Anisotropic linear elastic material models require the following material data via the 1
Input Properties subform on the Materials Application form.
Anisotropic-Linear Description
Elastic
Stress-Strain Matrix, Cij Defines the upper right portion of the symmetric stress-
2
strain matrix relative to the element’s coordinate system.
Coefficient of Thermal Defines the coefficients of thermal expansion relative to
Expansion the element’s coordinate system. They optional
properties. 3
Reference Temperature Defines the stress free temperature which is an optional
property. When defining temperature dependent
values will be extracted or interpolated. 10
Density Defines the mass density which is an optional property.
6
310 Materials
10.3 Nonlinear Elastic

Hypoelastic - Isotropic
The hypoelastic model is able to represent a nonlinear elastic (reversible) material
behavior. For this constitutive theory, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear assumes that
1 σ· ij = L ijkl ε· + g ij
kl
Eq. 10-7
where L is a function of the mechanical strain and g is a function of the temperature.

The stress and strains are true stresses and logarithmic strains, respectively, when
2 used in conjunction with the updated Lagrange and large displacement options.
When used in conjunction with the large displacement option only,Eq. 10-7 is
expressed as
· ·
3 S ij = L ijkl E + g ij
kl
Eq. 10-8
where E, S are the Green-Lagrangian strain and second Piola-Kirchhoff stress,

respectively.
10 This model can be used with any stress element, including Herrmann formulation
elements.
The tensors L and g may be defined by user subroutine HYPELA starting in version 2005.
In order to provide an accurate solution, L should be a tangent stiffness evaluated at
5 the beginning of the iteration. In addition, the total stress should be defined as its exact
value at the end of the increment. This allows the residual load correction to work
effectively.
In user subroutine HYPELA2, besides the functionality of HYPELA, additional
6 information is available regarding the kinematics of deformation. In particular, the
deformation gradient ( F ), rotation tensor ( R ), and the eigenvalues ( λ ) and
eigenvectors ( N ) to form the stretch tensor ( U ) are also provided. This information is
available only for the continuum elements namely: plane strain, generalized plane
strain, plane stress, axisymmetric, axisymmetric with twist, and three-dimensional
cases.
Hyperelastic - Isotropic
Hyperelastic models are specified using either the MATHP or MATHE bulk data
entries and are used to describe the behavior of materials that exhibit elastic response
up to large strains, such as rubber, solid propellant, and other elastomeric materials.
Nonlinear Elastic 311
These materials are described in terms of a “strain energy potential”, U, which defines
the strain energy stored in the material per unit of volume in the initial configuration
as a function of the strain at that point in the material.
Elastomeric materials are elastic in the classical sense. Upon unloading, the
stress-strain curve is retraced and there is no permanent deformation. Elastomeric
materials are initially isotropic. Figure 10-2 shows a typical stress-strain curve for an
elastomeric material. 1
2
σ, Stress
3
100%
ε, Strain
10
Figure 10-2 A Typical Stress-Strain Curve for an Elastomeric Material
Calculations of stresses in an elastomeric material requires an existence of a strain

energy function which is usually defined in terms of invariants or stretch ratios.
Significance and calculation of these kinematic quantities is discussed next.
5
Characteristics of Elastomeric Materials
Most solid rubberlike materials are nearly incompressible: their bulk modulus is
several orders of magnitude larger than their shear modulus. For applications where 6
the material is not highly confined, the assumption that the material is fully
incompressible is usually a good approximation. In cases where the material is highly
confined (such as in an O-ring), modeling the compressibility can be important for
obtaining accurate results. In either case, the use of “hybrid” (mixed formulation)
elements is recommended for this type of material in all but plane stress cases.
Elastomeric foams on the other hand are elastic but very compressible.
Elastomeric materials are considered to be isotropic in nature with random orientation
of the long chain molecules.
312 Materials
Strain Energy Potential and Representative Models

Calculations of stresses in an elastomeric material requires an existence of a strain
energy function which is usually defined in terms of invariants or stretch ratios.
In the rectangular block in Figure 10-3, λ 1 , λ 2 , and λ 3 are the principal stretch ratios
along the edges of the block defined by
1 λi = ( Li + ui ) ⁄ Li Eq. 10-9
2
L3 λ3L3
λ1L1 λ2L2
3 L2
Undeformed
Deformed
L1
Figure 10-3 Rectangular Rubber Block

10 In practice, the material behavior is (approximately) incompressible, leading to the
constraint equation
λ1 λ2 λ3 = 1
5 the strain invariants are defined as
2 2 2
I1 = λ + λ2 + λ3
1
2 2 2 2 2 2
I2 = λ1 λ + λ λ + λ λ Eq. 10-10
6 2 2 3 3 1
2 2 2
I3 = λ1 λ2 λ3
Depending on the choice of configurations, for example, reference (at t = 0) or

current ( t = n + 1 ), you obtain total or updated Lagrange formulations for
elasticity. The kinematic measures for the two formulations are discussed next.
Total Lagrangian Formulation

The strain measure is the Green-Lagrange strain defined as:
1
E ij = --- ( C ij – δ ij ) Eq. 10-11
2
where C ij is the right Cauchy-Green deformation tensor defined as:
C ij = F ki F kj Eq. 10-12
in which F kj is the deformation gradient (a two-point tensor) written as: 1

∂x k
F kj = -------- Eq. 10-13
∂X j
The Jacobian J is defined as: 2

1
---
2
J = λ 1 λ 2 λ 3 = ( det C ij ) Eq. 10-14
Thus, the invariants can be written as: 3

I 1 = C ii (implied sum on i)
2
( C ij C ij – ( C ii ) )
I 2 = --------------------------------------------
2 Eq. 10-15 10
1
I 3 = --- e ijk e pqr C ip C jq C kr = det ( C ij )
6
in which e ijk is the permutation tensor. Also, using spectral decomposition theorem,
5
2 A A
C ij = λA Ni Nj Eq. 10-16
2
in which the stretches λ A are the eigenvalues of the right Cauchy-Green deformation
A
tensor, C ij and the eigenvectors are N i . 6
Updated Lagrange Formulation
The strain measure is the true or logarithmic measure defined as:
1
ε ij = --- l n b ij Eq. 10-17
2
where the left Cauchy-Green or finger tensor b ij is defined as:
b ij = F ik F jk Eq. 10-18
314 Materials
Thus, using the spectral decomposition theorem, the true strains are written as:
1 A A
ε ij = --- ( ln λ A )n i n j Eq. 10-19
2
where n Ai is the eigenvectors in the current configuration. It is noted that the true
strains can also be approximated using first Padé approximation, which is a rational
1 expansion of the tensor, as:
–1
ε ij = 2 ( V ij – δ ij ) ( V ij + δ ij ) Eq. 10-20
where a polar decomposition of the deformation gradient F ij is done into the left
2 stretch tensor V ij and rotation tensor R ij as:
F ij = V ik R kj
The Jacobian J is defined as:

3 1
---
2
J = λ 1 λ 2 λ 3 = ( det b ij ) Eq. 10-21
and the invariants are now defined as:

10 I 1 = b ii
1 2
I 2 = --- ( b ij b ij – ( b ii ) ) Eq. 10-22
2
5 and
1
I 3 = --- e ijk e pqr b ip b jq b kr = det ( b ij )
6
It is noted that either Eq. 10-15 or Eq. 10-22 gives the same strain energy since it is
scalar and invariant. Also, to account for the incompressibility condition, in both
6 formulations, the strain energy is split into deviatoric and volumertic parts as:
W = W deviatoric + W volumetric Eq. 10-23
Mooney-Rivlin Model
The generalized Mooney-Rivlin model for nearly-incompressible elastomeric
materials is written as:
N N
gmr m n
W deviatoric = ∑ ∑ C mn ( I 1 – 3 ) ( I 2 – 3 ) Eq. 10-24
m = 1 n = 1
where I 1 and I 2 are the first and second deviatoric invariants.
Jamus-Green-Simpson Model
A particular form of the generalized Mooney-Rivlin model, namely the third order
deformation (tod) model, is implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL
600). This is one of the few places where the formulation for SOLs 106 and 129 may be
more appropriate because they can use up to fifth order terms. However, the Ogden
formulation (below) is usually better for large strain behavior than even the fifth order
1
Mooney-Rivlin.
tod
W devratoric = C 10 ( I 1 – 3 ) + C 01 ( I 2 – 3 ) + C 11 ( I 1 – 3 ) ( I 2 – 3 ) + C 20
( I1 – 3 )
2
3
Eq. 10-25 2
0 + C 30 ( I 1 – 3 )
tod
where W deviatoric is the deviatoric third order deformation form strain
energy function,
C 10, C 01, C 11, C 20, C 30 are material constants obtained from experimental data.
3
Simpler and popular forms of the above strain energy function are obtained as:
nh
W deviatoric = C 10 ( I 1 – 3 ) Neo-Hookean
Eq. 10-26 10
mr
W deviatoric = C 10 ( I 1 – 3 ) + C 01 ( I 2 – 3 ) Mooney-Rivlin
Ogden Model
The form of strain energy for the Ogden model in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is,
5
N
µk αk αk αk
------  λ 1 + λ 2 + λ 3 – 3
ogden
W deviatoric = ∑ αk  
Eq. 10-27
k = 1 6
αk
αk – ------ α
3 k
where λ i = J λi
are the deviatoric stretch ratios while C mn , µ k , and α k are
the material constants obtained from the curve fitting of experimental data.
The Ogden model is usually applied to slightly compressible materials. If no bulk

modulus is given, it is taken to be virtually incompressible. This model is different
from the Mooney model in several respects. The Mooney material model is with
respect to the invariants of the right or left Cauchy-Green strain tensor and implicitly
assumes that the material is incompressible. The Ogden formulation is with respect to
316 Materials
the eigenvalues of the right or left Cauchy-Green strain, and the presence of the bulk
modulus implies some compressibility. Using a two-term series results in identical
behavior as the Mooney mode if:
µ 1 = 2C 10 and α 1 = 2 and µ 2 = – 2C 01 and α2 = –2
Arruda-Boyce Model
1 In the Arruda-Boyce strain energy model, the underlying molecular structure of
elastomer is represented by an eight-chain model to simulate the non-Gaussian
behavior of individual chains in the network. The two parameters, nkΘ and N ( n is
the chain density, k is the Botzmann constant, Θ is the temperature, and N is the
2 number of statistical links of length l in the chain between chemical crosslinks)
representing initial modules and limiting chain extensibility and are related to the
molecular chain orientation thus representing the physics of network deformation.
As evident in most models describing rubber deformation, the strain energy function
3 constructed by fitting experiment data obtained from one state of deformation to
another fails to accurately describe that deformation mode. The Arruda-Boyce model
ameliorates this defect and is unique since the standard tensile test data provides
sufficient accuracy for multiple modes of deformation.
10
j
5
λ2 α 0
C1
6 i
λ3 α0
λ1α0
k
Figure 10-4 Eight Chain Network in Stretched Configuration
The model is constructed using the eight chain network as follows:

Consider a cube of dimension α 0 with an unstretched network including eight chains

of length r 0 = Nl , where the fully extended chain has an approximate length of
Nl. A chain vector from the center of the cube to a corner can be expressed as:
α0 α0 α0
C 1 = ------ λ 1 i + ------ λ 2 j + ------ λ 3 k Eq. 10-28
2 2 2
Using geometrical considerations, the chain vector length can be written as: 1
1 1⁄2
r chain = ------- Nl ( λ 12 + λ 22 + λ 32 ) Eq. 10-29
3
and
2
r chain 1 1⁄2
λ chain = -------------- = ------- ( I 1 ) Eq. 10-30
r0 3
Using statistical mechanics considerations, the work of deformation is proportional to

the entropy change on stretching the chains from the unstretched state and may be
3
written in terms of the chain length as:
r chain β
W = nkΘN  -------------- β + ln ----------------  – ΘĈ Eq. 10-31
 Nl sinh β  10
where n is the chain density and Ĉ is a constant. β is an inverse Langevin function
correctly accounts for the limiting chain extensibility and is defined as:
r chain
β = L – 1  -------------- Eq. 10-32
5
 Nl 
where Langevin is defined as:
1
ℑ ( β ) = coth β – ---
β
Eq. 10-33 6
With Eq. 10-30 through Eq. 10-33, the Arruda-Boyce model can be written
Arruda-Boyce 1 1 2 11 3
W dev = nkΘ --- ( I 1 – 3 ) + ---------- ( I 1 – 9 ) + ------------------- ( I 1 – 27 )
2 20N 1050N
2
Eq. 10-34
19 519
+ ------------------- ( I 14 – 81 ) + ------------------------- ( I 15 – 243 ) ]
3 4
7000N 673750N
318 Materials
Gent Model
Also, using the notion of limiting chain extensibility, Gent proposed the following
constitutive relation:
Gent – EI m Im
W dev = ------------- log ------------------ Eq. 10-35
6 I m – I 1*
1 where
I 1* = I 1 – 3 Eq. 10-36
2 The constant EI m is independent of molecular length and, hence, of degree of

crosslinking. The model is attractive due to its simplicity, but yet captures the main
behavior of a network of extensible molecules over the entire range of possible strains.
The volumetric part of the strain energy is for all the rubber models in MSC.Nastran
3 Implicit Nonlinear is:
1 2
9K  3 
---
W volumetric = -------  J – 1 Eq. 10-37
2  
10
when K is the bulk modulus. It can be noted that the particular form of volumetric
strain energy is chosen such that:
1. The constraint condition is satisfied for incompressible deformations only;
5 for example:

 > 0 if I 3 > 0

f ( I 3 )  = 0 if I 3 = 1
6 
Eq. 10-38
 < 0 if I 3 < 0

2. The constraint condition does not contribute to the dilatational stiffness.

This yields the constraint function as:
1
 --6- 
f ( I 3 ) = 3  I – 1 Eq. 10-39
 3 
upon substitution of Eq. 10-39 in Eq. 10-35 and taking the first variation of the
variational principle, you obtain the pressure variable as:
1
 --3- 
p = 3K  J – 1 Eq. 10-40
 
The equation has a physical significance in that for small deformations, the 1
pressure is linearly related to the volumetric strains by the bulk modulus K .
The discontinuous or continuous damage models discussed in the models section on

damage can be included with the generalized Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce,
and Gent models to simulate Mullins effect or fatigue of elastomers when using the 2
updated Lagrangian approach. In the total Lagrangian framework however, this is
available for the Ogden model only.
Foam Model
Sometimes elastomeric materials show large volumetric deformations, thereby
3
behaving strongly nonlinear. For this type of behavior, the models discussed above
are not appropriate. Instead, the foam model expressed by:
N
µn αn αn αn
N
µn βn 10
W = ∑ ------  λ 1 + λ 2 + λ 3 – 3 + ∑ ------  1 – J  Eq. 10-41
αn βn
n = 1 n = 1
should be used. In contrast to the Ogden model, the first part of the foam strain energy
function is not purely deviatoric. The material constants β n provide additional 5
flexibility to describe the material behavior also for a large amount of compressibility.
Updated Lagrange Formulation for Nonlinear Elasticity

The total Lagrange nonlinear elasticity models in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear 6
have been augmented with a formulation in an Updated Lagrange framework. Hence,
Rezoning (available in version 2005) can be used for elastomeric materials based upon
the current configuration. This is specially useful in large deformation analysis since
typically excessive element distortion in elastomeric materials can lead to premature
termination of analysis. The new formulation accommodates the generalized
Mooney-Rivlin and Ogden material models preserving the same format and strain
energy functions as the total Lagrange formulation. In addition, the Arruda-Boyce
and the Gent models are only available in the updated Lagrange framework.
320 Materials
The updated Lagrangian rubber elasticity capability can be used in conjunction with
both continuous as well as discontinuous damage models. Thermal, as well as
viscoelastic, effects can be modeled with the current formulation. While the Mooney
model can account for the temperature dependent material properties, the Ogden
model does not support the temperature dependence at this time. The singularity ratio
of the system is inversely proportional to the order of bulk modulus of the material
1 due to the condensation procedure.
A consistent linearization has been carried out to obtain the tangent modulus. The
singularity for the case of two- or three-equal stretch ratios is analytically removed by
application of L’Hospital’s rule. The current framework with an exact implementation
of the finite strain kinematics along with the split of strain energy to handle
2 compressible and nearly incompressible response is eminently suitable for
implementation of any nonlinear elastic as well as inelastic material models. In fact,
the finite deformation plasticity model based on the multiplicative decomposition,
e p
F = F FθF is implemented in the same framework.
3 To simulate elastomeric materials, incompressible element(s) are used for plane strain,
axisymmetric, and three-dimensional problems for elasticity in total Lagrangian
framework. These elements can be used with each other or in combination with other
elements. For plane stress, beam, plate or shell analysis, conventional elements can be
10 used. For updated Lagrangian elasticity, both conventional elements (as well as
Hermann elements) can be used for plane strain, axisymmetric, and three-
dimensional problems.
Experimental Determination of Hyperelastic Material Parameters

5 In order to determine the material parameters to be used, like Mooney coefficients,
Ogden moduli, relaxation times, etc., experiments must be carried out. In this section,
the laboratory tests of which data can be used to fit the material parameters will be
described. Once the test data is available the Experimental Data Fitting module in
6 MSC.Patran can be used to calculate appropriate coefficient values.
For a homogeneous material, homogeneous deformation modes suffice to
characterize the material constants. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear accepts test data
from the following deformation modes:
• Uniaxial tension and compression.

• Biaxial tension and compression.
• Planar tension and compression (also known as pure shear).
• Simple Shear
• Volumetric tension and compression
Uniaxial Test Data
1 3
1
2
2
Biaxial Test Data
1 3 3
2
10
Planar Test Data 5

1 3
2
Volumetric Test Data
1 3
2
322 Materials
Uniaxial Test
Probably the most popular test is the uniaxial test (see Figure 10-5). This test can be
used in tension as well as in compression, both for incompressible and (slightly)
compressible elastomeric materials. The shape of the specimen used in compression
will usually be less slender than the shape used in tension. Within the region indicated
by the dashed line, the state of deformation will be homogeneous, where the
1 deformation can be described by:
λ 1 = λ = 1 + e 11 , λ2 = λ3 = J⁄λ Eq. 10-42
while the corresponding engineering stresses are given by:

2 F
σ 11 = σ = ------ , σ 22 = σ 33 = 0 Eq. 10-43
A0
in which F is the applied force and A 0 is the cross sectional area of the undeformed
3 specimen in the E 2 - E 3 -plane, within the region indicated by the dashed line.
Necessary input for the curve fitting program in MSC.Patran consists of at least
engineering strain ( e 11 ) versus engineering stress ( σ 11 ) data points. In case of
(slightly) compressible materials, information about the volume changes is also
10 needed. This data can be given either in terms of the area ratio or the volume ratio. The
area ratio is defined by the current cross sectional area A over the original cross
sectional area A 0 . Similarly, the volume ratio is defined by the current volume V over
the undeformed volume V 0 . Notice that the volume ratio and the area ratio are related
by:
5
V A
------ = J = ------ ( 1 + e 11 ) Eq. 10-44
V0 A0
F F
E2
E3 E1
Figure 10-5 Uniaxial (tensile) test

If for a particular elastomeric material both a tensile and a compression test have been
performed, all the data points should be collected into one data file. The layout of a
data file containing uniaxial test data is given in the figure below. The columns may
be separated by either spaces or commas. For (nearly) incompressible material
behavior, the third column can be omitted.
Equi-Biaxial Test
The equi-biaxial tensile test outlined in Figure 10-7 can be used to obtain, within the
1
region indicated by the dashed line, a homogeneous state of deformation defined by:
2
λ 1 = λ 2 = λ = 1 + e 11 = 1 + e 22 , λ3 = J ⁄ λ Eq. 10-45
2
e 11 σ 11 A ⁄ A0 e 11 σ 11 V ⁄ V0
or
3
Figure 10-6 Layout of data file for a uniaxial test

10
F
F F
6
E2
E3 E1 F
Figure 10-7 Equi-biaxial (tensile) test

324 Materials
e 11 σ 11 t ⁄ t0 e 11 σ 11 V ⁄ V0
or
1
Figure 10-8 Layout of data file for an equi-biaxial test
or a planar shear test
with corresponding engineering stresses:

2
F
σ 11 = σ 22 = σ = ------ , σ 33 = 0 Eq. 10-46
A0
with A 0 being the original cross sectional area of the elastomeric sheet in the direction
3 perpendicular to the applied forces, which is assumed to be the same in the E 1 - E 3 -
plane and the E 2 - E 3 -plane.
10 For compressible elastomers, volumetric information is needed. For the equi-biaxial

test, this can be given in terms of a thickness ratio or, similar to the uniaxial test, a
volume ratio. The thickness ratio is defined as the current sheet thickness t over the
original sheet thickness t 0 . The relation between the thickness ratio and the volume
ratio is:
5
V t 2
------ = J = ---- ( 1 + e 11 ) Eq. 10-47
V0 t0
The layout of a data file for an equi-biaxial tensile test is given in the above figure.
6
Planar Shear Test
A state of planar shear, also sometimes called pure shear, can be obtained by clamping
and stretching an elastomeric rectangular sheet of material, as indicated in
Figure 10-9.
Except for the vicinity of the free edges and the clamps, the state of strain can be found
to be substantially uniform, according to:
J
λ 1 = λ = 1 + e 11 , λ2 = 1 , λ 3 = --- Eq. 10-48
λ
1
F F
E2
2
E3 E1
Figure 10-9 Planar shear test 3

where the known stress components are given by:
F
σ 11 = σ = ------
A0
, σ 33 = 0 Eq. 10-49 10
in which A 0 is the cross sectional area of the undeformed specimen in the E 1 - E 3 -
plane. Notice that the engineering strain e 22 is zero, but that the corresponding
engineering stress σ 22 depends on the material behavior. 5
δU = T S δλ S Eq. 10-50
∂ – 3  ∂U ∂U 
TS =
∂ λS
U = 2  λS – λS  
 
+ 
∂ I 1 ∂ I 2
Eq. 10-51 6
Simple Shear Test

A test which, compared to the above mentioned tests, leads to a more complex
kinematic description, is the simple shear test (see Figure 10-10). Upon introducing
the shear strain γ , the coordinates in the deformed configuration are given by:
x 1 = X 1 + γX 2 , x2 = X2 , x3 = X3 Eq. 10-52
which yields for the deformation gradient:

326 Materials
2F
1
E2 atan γ
E3 E1
2
Figure 10-10 Simple shear test
1 γ 0
3 F = 0 1 0 Eq. 10-53
0 0 1
Notice that et ( F ) = 1, irrespective of the value of γ , from which it can be concluded

that a simple shear test is a constant volume test.
10
Based on Eq. 10-52, Eq. 10-53 and Figure 10-10, the engineering strain tensor and the
right Cauchy-Green strain tensor can be evaluated as:
0 γ⁄2 0
5 e = γ⁄2 0 0 Eq. 10-54
0 0 0
6 1 γ 0
C = γ 1+γ
2
0 Eq. 10-55
0 0 1
According to Eq. 10-55, the principal stretch ratios follow from the principal values of
C and read:
2 2
γ γ
λ 1, 2 = 1 + ----- ± γ 1 + ----- , λ3 = 1 Eq. 10-56
2 4
2e 12 = γ σ 12
1
Figure 10-11 Layout of data file for a simple shear test
It can easily be verified that λ 1 λ 2 λ 3 = 1 , which again shows that the simple shear
test is a constant volume test. The relevant engineering stress is given by:
2
F
σ 12 = ------ Eq. 10-57
A0
with A 0 being the cross sectional area of the undeformed specimen in the E 1 - E 3 -
plane.
3
The layout of a data file containing measurements of a simple shear test is given in
Figure 10-11.
Volumetric Test
10
Although a uniaxial, equi-biaxial and planar shear test can be used to obtain
information about the volumetric behavior, for compressible materials an additional
volumetric test may be preferable. This is especially true for slightly compressible
materials, since volumetric data from other tests other than a volumetric one may 5
easily be inaccurate (because most of the deformation is deviatoric). Two commonly
used volumetric tests are outlined in Figure 10-12. In Figure 10-12a, a cylindrical
specimen is compressed in a cylindrical hole. This test can be successfully applied for
slightly compressible materials. In Figure 10-12b, a specimen is deformed by
compressing the surrounding fluid. This volumetric test can also be used for highly
6
compressible materials.
For a volumetric test, the direct true stress components are assumed to be equal to the
hydrostatic pressure p and given by:
F Eq. 10-58
T 11 = T 22 = T 33 = ------
p
A
328 Materials
F
1
E1
(b)
2 E3 E2
(a)
F
Figure 10-12 Volumetric tests

p
in which A denotes the area of the piston in the E 2 - E 3 -plane. The deformation can
3 be expressed in terms of an engineering strain e and corresponding stretch ratio λ ,
which can be determined from the measured volume change according to:
V
e = λ – 1 = 3 ------ – 1 = 3 J – 1 Eq. 10-59
10 V0
Based on λ according to Figure 10-12b, the engineering stress σ follows from:
2
σ = T 11 λ Eq. 10-60
5
Notice that only in the case of Figure 10-12b the engineering strain e and the
engineering stress σ are equal to the direct components of the engineering strain and
the engineering stress tensor.
6 The layout of the data file corresponding to a volumetric test is given in Figure 10-13.
Notice that because of Figure 10-12b, the entries of the first and the third column are
not independent.
Relaxation Test
The basic feature of a relaxation test is that the force or stress response to a prescribed
fixed displacement or deformation is measured as a function of time. A relaxation test
for a large strain elastomeric material is indicated in Figure 10-14. By measuring the
force needed for a displacement ∆u at different time intervals, the decay of the strain
energy as a function of time can be determined. For linear elastic isotropic material,
similar tests can be performed to get information about the shear modulus and/or the
e σ V ⁄ V0
1
Figure 10-13 Layout of data file for a volumetric test
∆u
2
10
Figure 10-14 Relaxation test
bulk modulus as a function of time. In order to properly measure the instantaneous
values, application of the prescribed displacement should occur sufficiently fast. It
should be noted, due to the assumption introduced in equation Eq. 10-95, that for
large strain visco-elastic materials the magnitude of (the instantaneous value of) the
5
strain energy is not important, since every energy term in the Prony series expansion
is related to the instantaneous strain energy using a scalar multiplier. The data does
not need to be equispaced in time. Usually, at the beginning of the relaxation
experiment the measurements are done at smaller time intervals than at the end of the 6
experiment.
If, for linear visco-elastic materials, instead of a relaxation test only a creep test can be
performed, the creep data must be transformed into relaxation data. Converting creep
data into relaxation data can be done using a numerical integration scheme, but is not
part of MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Hyperelastic Foam Properties

Elastomeric foams are cellular solids that have the following primary mechanical
characteristics:
330 Materials
• They can deform elastically up to large strain: up to 90% strain in

compression. In most applications, this is the dominant mode of
deformation.
• Their porosity permits very large volumetric changes. This is in contrast to
solid rubbers, which are approximately incompressible.
• Cellular solids are made up of interconnected networks of solid struts or
1 plates which form the edges and faces of cells. Foams are made up of
polyhedral cells that pack in three dimensions. The foam cells can either be
open (e.g., sponge) or closed (e.g., flotation foam). Common examples of
elastomeric foam materials are cellular polymers such as cushions, padding,
and packaging materials which utilize the excellent energy absorption
2 properties of foams - for a certain stress level, the energy absorbed by foams
is substantially greater than by ordinary stiff elastic materials.
The figure below shows a typical compressive stress-strain curve for elastomeric
foam.
3
10 Densification
STRESS
Plateau: Elastic buckling

of cell walls
5
Cell wall bending
6 STRAIN
Figure 10-15 Typical Compressive Stress-Strain Curve
Three stages can be distinguished during compression:

At small strains (< 5%) the foam deforms in a linear elastic manner, due to cell wall
bending.
This is followed by a plateau of deformation at almost constant stress, caused by the
elastic buckling of the columns or plates which make up the cell edges or walls. In
closed cells, the enclosed gas pressure and membrane stretching increase the level and
slope of the plateau.
Finally, a region of densification occurs, where the cell walls crush together, resulting
in a rapid increase of compressive stress. Ultimate compressive nominal strains of 0.7
to 0.9 are typical.
The tensile deformation mechanisms for small strains are similar to the compression
mechanisms but differ for large strains. The figure shows a typical tensile stress-strain
curve.
1
2
STRESS
Cell wall
alignment
3
Cell wall bending
STRAIN
10
Figure 10-16 Typical Tensile Stress-Strain Curve
There are two stages during tension:

At small strains the foam deforms in a linear, elastic manner, due to cell wall bending,
5
similar to that in compression.
The cell walls rotate and align, resulting in rising stiffness. The walls are substantially
aligned at a tensile strain of about 1/3. Further stretching results in increased axial
strains in the walls.
6
At small strains for both compression and tension, the average experimentally
observed Poisson's ratio, ν, of foams is 1/3. At larger strains it is commonly observed
that Poisson's ratio is effectively zero during compression - the buckling of the cell
walls does not result in any significant lateral deformation. However, during tension,
ν is nonzero, which is a result of the alignment and stretching of the cell walls.
The manufacture of foams often results in cells with different principal dimensions.
This shape anisotropy results in different loading responses in different directions.
However, the FOAM model does not take this kind of initial anisotropy into account.
332 Materials
Determination of Foam Material Parameters

The response of the material is defined by the parameters in the strain energy
function, U, so that it is necessary to determine these parameters to use the foam
model. MSC.Patran contains a capability for obtaining the µi, αi and βi for the foam
model with up to six terms (N=6) directly from test data. It is usually best to obtain
data from several experiments involving different kinds of deformation, over the
1 range of strains of interest in the actual application, and to use all of these data to
determine the parameters.
Since the properties of foam materials can vary significantly from one batch to
another, all of the experiments should be performed on specimens taken from the
2 same batch of material or to use MSC.Stocastics in combination with SOL 600.
Uniaxial, Equibiaxial and Planar Deformations

The deformation modes are characterized in terms of the principal stretches, λi, and
the volume ratio, J. The elastomeric foams are not incompressible, so that J = λ1λ2λ3 !=
3 1. The transverse stretches, λ2 and/or λ3, are independently specified in the test data
either as individual values from the measured lateral deformations or through the
definition of an effective Poisson’s ratio.
Uniaxial mode: λ1=λU, λ2=λ3, J=λUλ22
10 Equibiaxial mode: λ1=λ2=λB, J=λB2λ3
Planar mode: λ1=λP, λ2=1, J=λPλ3
The three deformation modes above use a single form of the nominal stress-stretch
5 relation,
N
∂U 2 µi  αi –α β 
i i
TL =
∂ λL
= -------
λL ∑ -----  λ L – J
αi 


Eq. 10-61
6 i = 1
where TL is the nominal stress and LL is the stretch in the direction of loading. Because
of the compressible behavior, the planar mode does not result in a state of pure shear.
In fact, if the effective Poisson’s ratio is zero, planar deformation is identical to
uniaxial deformation.
Simple Shear Deformation

Simple shear is described by the deformation gradient
1 γ 0
F = 0 1 0 Eq. 10-62
0 0 1
where γ is the shear strain. For this deformation, J=det F =1. A schematic illustration
of simple shear deformation is shown in Figure 10-17.
1
2F 2
E2 atan γ
3
E3 E1
Figure 4.1 Simple shear test
10
Figure 10-17 Simple Shear Test
The nominal shear stress TS is:
∂U
2 
 2γ
N
µi  αi 
 5
TS =
∂γ
= ∑  ---------------------------------------
2 2
∑ -----
αi  j
 λ – 1 

Eq. 10-63
 
j = 1  2  λ j – 1 – γ i = 1 
where λj= are the principal stretches in the plane of shearing, related to the shear 6
strain, γ, by:
2 2
γ γ
λ 1, 2 = 1 + ----- ± γ 1 + ----- Eq. 10-64
2 4
The stretch in the direction perpendicular to the shear plane is L3=1. The transverse
(tensile) stress, TT, developed during simple shear deformation due to the Poynting
effect, is
334 Materials
2
2  2  λ j – 1 N
µi  αi 
∂U    
TT =
∂ε
= ∑  ----------------------------------------------
4 2 2 ∑ ----
-  λ – 1 
αi  j 
Eq. 10-65
2λ
j = 1 j – λ ( γ + 2 )
j i = 1 
1 Volumetric Deformation
The volumetric deformation mode consists of all principal stretches being equal,
λ1=λ2=λ3=λV, J=λV3.
The pressure-volumetric ratio relation is

2
α
 ------i
N 
µ –α β 
∂U 2 i 3 i i
–p = = --- ∑ -----  J – J  Eq. 10-66
∂J J αi  
3 i = 1  
A volumetric compression test is illustrated Figure 10-34.
10
F
5 F
6 E1
(b)
(a)
F
E3 E2
Figure 10-18 Volumetric Compression Test Setup
The pressure exerted on the foam specimen is the hydrostatic pressure of the fluid and
the decrease in the specimen volume is equal to the additional fluid entering the
pressure chamber. The specimen is sealed against fluid penetration.
Difference in Compression and Tension Deformation

For small strains (< 5%), foams behave similarly for both compression and tension.
However, we have seen that at large strains, the deformation mechanisms differ for
compression (buckling and crushing) and tension (alignment and stretching).
Accurate modeling with the FOAM option therefore requires that the experimental
data used to define the material parameters correspond to the dominant deformation
modes of the actual problem being analyzed. 1
If compression dominates in the problem, the pertinent tests are:
• Uniaxial compression.
• Simple shear.
• Planar compression (if Poisson’s ratio ν =/ 0).
2
• Volumetric compression (if Poisson’s ratio ν =/ 0).
If tension dominates, the pertinent tests are:
• Uniaxial tension.
3
• Simple shear.
• Biaxial tension (if Poisson’s ratio ν =/ 0).
• Planar tension (if Poisson’s ratio ν =/ 0). 10
Lateral strain data can also be used to define the compressibility of the foam.
Measurement of the lateral strains may make other tests redundant, e.g., providing
lateral strains for a uniaxial test eliminates the need for a volumetric test. The foam
model may not accurately fit Poisson's ratio if it varies significantly between 5
compression and tension.
Experimental Data Fitting
Least Squares Fit 6

The equations derived above for TU, TB, and TS, with the assumption of material
incompressibility, allow the material parameters Cij and µi, αi to be determined from
the experimentally measured stress-strain relationships in the uniaxial, equibiaxial,
and planar loading tests. A least squares fit, which minimizes the relative error in
stress, is used for this purpose. The equation for TS alone will not determine the
constants uniquely. The planar test data input must be augmented by either or both of
the other two types of test data to determine the material parameters.
336 Materials
The Ogden potential is linear in the coefficients µi but strongly nonlinear in terms of
the exponents αi, thus necessitating use of a nonlinear least squares procedure. For the
nominal stress-nominal strain data pairs, the error measure, E, is minimized by E =
sum(i=1to n)(1-Tith/Titest2), where Titest is a stress value from the test data and Tith
comes from one of the nominal stress expressions derived above.
The foam parameters µi, αi, βi are determined from the experimentally measured
1 stress-strain relationships in the various loading tests described above. A least squares
fit, which minimizes the relative error in stress, is used for this purpose.
The foam potential is linear in the coefficients µi but strongly nonlinear in terms of the
exponents αi and βi thus necessitating use of a nonlinear least squares procedure. For
2 the n nominal stress-nominal strain data pairs, the error measure E is minimized by E
= sum(i=1to n)(1-Tith/Titest2, where Titest is a stress value from the test data and Tith
comes from one of the nominal stress expressions derived above. Minimizing the
relative error in stress implies that the error in slope (modulus) is minimized;
minimization of the absolute error would decrease the error at larger strains, at the
3 expense of the accuracy at small strains.
Alternative Method for Determination of Constants for Moderate Strains

Since the polynomial form with N=1 is very commonly used for cases where the
10 nominal strain is not too large, an alternative method of finding the material constants,
assuming incompressibility, is to use the uniaxial test data as follows. The nominal
strain in the direction of loading in the uniaxial test is εU=λU-1. Expanding the
equation for TB in terms of εU, using the Mooney-Rivlin form, and neglecting terms of
higher than second-order in εU, gives
5
TU=6εU(C10+C01 -(C10+2C01)εU).
This is a parabola: the slope of this curve at the origin (the effective Young’s modulus
at zero strain) is 6(C10+C01); this slope, together with the second-order term -
6 6(C10+2C01)εU2, defines the constants C10 and C01.
If compressibility should be modeled, then, under pure pressure loading, the

compressible model with N=1 gives, to first-order in the volumetric strain εV=3ε11,
p=-(2 / D1)εV,
so that, at small nominal strains, the bulk modulus is defined as:
K=(2 / D1)
Hyperelastic Models in MSC.Nastran

Various options are provided for defining the material properties. The first (available
in both MSC.Patran and MSC.Nastran) is to give the parameters of the polynomial
form N, C ij and D i , or the parameters of the Ogden form N, µ i, α i and D i as
functions of the temperature. The second (currently available only in MSC.Patran for
2004, but in both programs for 2005) is to give the value of N, and give experimental
stress-data for up to four simple tests: uniaxial, equilibrium, planar and, if the material 1
is compressible for volumetric compression test. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear will
then compute the C ij or [ µ i, α i ] and the D i . This method is available for N = 1 and
N=2 for the polynomial form and up to N = 6 for the Ogden form, and does not allow
the properties to be temperature dependent.
In either case, you should be careful about defining the C ij or [ µ i, α i ] : especially

2
when N > 1, the behavior at higher strains is strongly sensitive to the values of the C ij
or [ µ i, α i ] , and unstable material behavior may result if these values are not correctly
defined. When some of the coefficients are strongly negative, instability at higher
strain levels is likely to occur. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear performs a check on 3
the ability of the material for six different forms of loading -uniaxial tension and
compression, equibiaxial tension and compression and planar tension and
compression. If instability is uncovered for nominal strains between -0.9 and 9.0, a
warning message is issued and the stability limit(s) are printed. 10
Because the properties of rubber-like materials can vary significantly from one sample
to another, it is important that test data are taken from experiments on the same
sample (or samples cut from the same sheet), regardless whether the C ij or
[ µ i, α i ] are computed by the user or by the built-in method. 5
This material option can be used by itself, or can be combined with viscoelasticity to
define time dependent hyperelastic behavior. It cannot be combined with other
material options such as plasticity or creep. It may be used with the pure displacement
formulation elements or with the “hybrid” (mixed formulation) elements. Because
elastomeric materials are usually almost completely incompressible, fully integrated
6
pure displacement method elements are not recommended for use with this material,
except for plane stress cases. If fully or selectively reduced integration displacement
method elements are used with the almost incompressible form of this material model
in anything except plane stress analysis, a penalty method is used to impose the
incompressibility constraint. This can sometimes lead to numerical difficulties, and
the fully or selectively reduced integrated “hybrid” formulation elements are
therefore recommended.
338 Materials
Specifying Hyperelastic Material Entries

Nonlinear hyperelastic materials are characterized in MSC.Nastran using the
following Bulk Data entries.
Entry Description
1 MATHP Specifies material properties for use in fully nonlinear (i.e.,

large strain and large rotation) hyperelastic analysis of
rubber-like materials (elastomers).
MATHE Specifies hyperelastic (rubber-like) material properties for
nonlinear (large strain and large rotation) analysis in (SOL 600)
2 only.
References
• “MATHP” on page 1634 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
3 • “MATHE (SOL 600)” on page 1625 of the .
10 To define a hyperelastic material in MSC.Patran:

2. Click Input Properties..., and select Hyperelastic from the Constitutive
5 Model pull-down menu.
3. Select Test Data or Coefficients as the Data Type.
4. From the Strain Energy Potential pull-down menu, select a model and enter
properties as described below.
6 Hyperelastic material models require the following material data via the Input
Mooney-Rivlin and Jamus-Green-Simpson
Hyperelastic -Mooney/ Description

Jamus
Strain Energy Function, Strain energy densities as a function of the strain
C10, C01, C11, C20, C30 invariants in the material. May vary with temperature
via a defined material field. This option consolidates
several of the MSC.Marc hyperelastic material models.
1
Density Defines the mass density which is an optional property.
Coefficient of Thermal Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal
Expansion expansion. This property is optional. May vary with
2
Bulk Modulus Defines the Bulk Modulus.
Reference Temperature Defines the reference temperature for the thermal
expansion coefficient. 3
Ogden
Hyperelastic-Ogden Description
Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.
10
Density Defines the material mass density.
temperature via a defined material field
5
expansion coefficient.
Modulus k µ k in the Ogden equation. 6
Exponent k α k in the Ogden equation.
340 Materials
Foam
Hyperelastic-Foam Description
Density Defines the material mass density.
1 temperature via a defined material field
Modulus n u n in the Foam equation.
2 Deviatoric Exponent n α n in the Foam equation.
Volumetric Exponent n β n in the Foam equation.
3 Arruda-Boyce
Hyperelastic-Arruda- Description
Boyce
10 NKT Chain density times Boltzmann constant times
temperature.
Chain Length Average chemical chain cross length.
5 Density This defines the material mass density.
6 temperature via a defined material field
Gent
Hyperelastic-Gent Description
Tensile Modulus Defines standard tension modulus (E).
I 1* Maximum 1st *
Defines I 1 = I 1 – 3 .
Invariant
Hyperelastic-Gent Description
Density This defines the material mass density.
Coefficient of Thermal Defines the coefficient of thermal expansion.
Expansion
1
10
6
342 Materials
Viscoelastic
The material models discussed in previous sections are considered to be time
independent. However, rubber materials often show a rate-dependent behavior and
can be modeled as viscoelastic materials. Viscoelasticity can be applied:
• to determine the current state of deformation based on the entire time history
1 of loading.
• to characterize small strain and large strain problems.
• with other material options for linear elastic response (small strain) and
hyperelastic response (large strain).
2 • to include temperature dependencies.

• for isotropic, anisotropic, and incompressible materials.
Small Strain Viscoelasticity

3 In the stress relaxation form, the constitutive relation can be written as a hereditary
integral formulation
t
dε kl ( τ )
10 σ ij ( t ) = ∫ G ijkl ( t – τ ) ------------------
dτ
- dτ + G ijkl ( t )ε kl ( 0 ) Eq. 10-67
0
The functions G ijkl are called stress relaxation functions. They represent the
response to a unit applied strain and have characteristic relaxation times associated
with them. The relaxation functions for materials with a fading memory can be
5 expressed in terms of Prony or exponential series.
N
∞ n n
G ijkl ( t ) = G ijkl + ∑ G ijkl exp ( – t ⁄ λ ) Eq. 10-68
6 n = 1
n n
in which G ijkl is a tensor of amplitudes and λ is a positive time constant
(relaxation time). In the current implementation, it is assumed that the time constant
∞
is isotropic. In Eq. 10-68, G ijkl represents the long term modulus of the material.
The short term moduli (describing the instantaneous elastic effect) are then given by
N
0 ∞ n
G ijkl = G ijkl ( 0 ) = G ijkl + ∑ G ijkl Eq. 10-69
n = 1
The stress can now be considered as the summation of the stresses in a generalized
Maxwell model (Figure 10-19)
N
∞
∑
n
σ ij ( t ) = σ ij ( t ) + σ ij ( t ) Eq. 10-70
n = 1
where 1
∞ ∞
σ ij = G ijkl ε kl ( t ) Eq. 10-71
t
n dε kl ( τ )
n
σ ij = G
n
∫ ijkl exp [ – ( t – τ ) ⁄ λ ] ------------------- dτ
dτ
Eq. 10-72 2
0
η1 η2 ηi
3
ε
q1 q2 qi
ηE E1
E2 Ei
E0
10
τi = ηi/Ei
Figure 10-19 The Generalized Maxwell or Stress Relaxation Form

5
For integration of the constitutive equation, the total time interval is subdivided into
a number of subintervals ( t m – 1, t m ) with time-step h = t m – t m – 1 . A
recursive relation can now be derived expressing the stress increment in terms of the
values of the internal stresses σ ijn at the start of the interval. With the assumption that
the strain varies linearly during the time interval h, we obtain the increment stress- 6
strain relation as
N N
∞ n n n
∑ ∑
n
∆σ ij ( t m ) = G ijkl + β ( h )G ijkl ∆ε kl – α ( h )σ ij ( t m – h ) Eq. 10-73
n = 1 n = 1
where
n
α n ( h ) = 1 – exp ( – h ⁄ λ ) Eq. 10-74
344 Materials
and
n n n
β ( h ) = α ( h )λ ⁄ h Eq. 10-75
In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, the incremental equation for the total stress is
expressed in terms of the short term moduli (See Eq. 10-69).
1 0
N
n n
N
n n
∆σ ij ( t m ) = G ijkl – ∑ {1 – β ( h ) }G ijkl ∆ε kl ( t m ) – ∑ α ( h )σ ij ( t m – h )
n = 1 n = 1
Eq. 10-76
2 Note that the set of equations given by Eq. 10-76 can directly be used for both
anisotropic and isotropic materials.
Isotropic Viscoelastic Material

For an isotropic viscoelastic material, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear assumes that
3 the deviatoric and volumetric behavior are fully uncoupled and that the behavior can
be described by a time dependent shear and bulk modules. The bulk moduli is
generally assumed to be time independent; however, this is an unnecessary restriction
of the general theory.
10 Both the shear and bulk moduli can be expressed in a series
N
∞ n n
G(t ) = G + ∑ G exp ( – t ⁄ λ d ) Eq. 10-77
5 n = 1
N
∞ n n
K( t) = K + ∑ K exp ( – t ⁄ λ v ) Eq. 10-78
n = 1
6 with short term values given by
N
G0 = G∞ + ∑ Gn Eq. 10-79
n = 1
N
K0 = K∞ + ∑ Kn Eq. 10-80
n = 1
Let the deviatoric and volumetric component matrices π d and π v be given by

4 ⁄ 3 –2 ⁄ 3 –2 ⁄ 3 0 0 0
–2 ⁄ 3 4 ⁄ 3 –2 ⁄ 3 0 0 0
πd = –2 ⁄ 3 –2 ⁄ 3 4 ⁄ 3 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1
1
1 1 1 0 0 0 2
1 1 1 0 0 0
πv = 1 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 3
0 0 0 0 0 0
The increment set of equations is then given by

10
N
 d 
 0 n n
∆σ ( t m ) =  G – ∑ [ 1 – β d ( h ) ]G π d ∆ε ( t m )
 
 n = 1 
5
N
 v  Eq. 10-81
 0 n n
 K – ∑ [ 1 – β v ( h ) ]K π v ∆ε ( t m )
 
 n = 1  6
Nd Nv
n n n n
– ∑ α d ( h )σ d ( t m – h ) – ∑ α v ( h )σ v ( t m – h )
n = 1 n = 1
and
n n n n n
∆σ d ( t m ) = β d ( h )G π d ∆ε ( t m ) – α d ( h )σ d ( t m – h )
n n n n n Eq. 10-82
∆σ v ( t m ) = β v ( h )K π v ∆ε ( t m ) – α v ( h )σ v ( t m – h )
346 Materials
Note that the deviatoric and volumetric response are fully decoupled.
Note that the algorithm is exact for linear variations of the strain during the increment.
The algorithm is implicit; hence, for each change in time-step, a new assembly of the
stiffness matrix is required.
Anisotropic Viscoelastic Material

1 Eq. 10-76 can be used for the analysis of anisotropic viscoelastic materials.
Also, a complete set of moduli (21 components) can be specified in the HOOKVI user
subroutine (starting in version 2005).
Referencing a local coordinate system or use of the ORIENT user subroutine (version
2 2005) can be used to define a preferred orientation both for the short time moduli
0 n
G ijkl and the amplitude functions G ijkl .
Incompressible Isotropic Viscoelastic Materials

3 Incompressible elements in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allow the analysis of
incompressible and nearly incompressible materials in plane strain, axisymmetric and
three-dimensional problems. The incompressibility of the element is simulated
through the use of an perturbed Lagrangian variational principle based on the
Herrmann formulation.
10
The constitutive equation for a material with no time dependence in the volumetric
behavior can be expressed as
 
5  0
N
n n  1
∆σ ij ( t m ) = 2  G ijkl – ∑ [ 1 – β ( h ) ] G ijkl  ∆ε kl ( t m ) – --- ∆ε pp ( t m )δ kl
  3
 n = 1  Eq. 10-83
N
n n 1
6 – ∑ α ( h ) ( σ′ij ) ( t m ) + --- σ kk δ ij
3
n = 1
0
∆σ pp ( t m ) = 3K ∆ε pp ( t m ) Eq. 10-84
The hydrostatic pressure term is used as an independent variable in the variational

principle. The Herrmann pressure variable is now defined in the same way as in the
formulation for time independent elastic materials.
σ pp
H = --------------------------------- Eq. 10-85
2G 0 ( 1 + ν 0 )
The constitutive Eq. 10-83 and Eq. 10-84 can then be rewritten
N
e n
∆σ ij ( t m ) = 2G ( ∆ε ij + ν∗ Hδ ij ) – ∑ α n ( h ) ( σ′ ij ) ( t m – h ) Eq. 10-86
n = 1
where
1
N
Ge = G0 – ∑ [ 1 – β n ( h )G n ] Eq. 10-87
n = 1
0
G ( 1 + ν ) – G ( 1 – 2ν )
0 e 0 2
ν∗ = ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Eq. 10-88
e
3G
Large Strain Viscoelasticity 3

For an elastomeric time independent material, the constitutive equation is expressed
in terms of an energy function W . For a large strain viscoelastic material, Simo
generalized the small strain viscoelasticity material behavior to a large strain
viscoelastic material. The energy functional then becomes 10
N N
n 0 n n n
ψ ( E ij Q ij ) = ψ ( E ij ) – ∑ Q ij E ij + ∑ ψ I ( Q ij ) Eq. 10-89
n = 1 n = 1
n
5
where E ij are the components of the Green-Lagrange strain tensor, internal Q ij
0
variables and ψ the elastic strain energy density for instantaneous deformations. In
0
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, it is assumed that ψ = W , meaning that the
energy density for instantaneous deformations is given by the third order James
Green and Simpson form or the Ogden form.
6
The components of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress then follow from
N
∂ψ ∂ψ 0 n
S ij = ---------- = ---------- –
∂E ij ∂E ij ∑ Q ij Eq. 10-90
n = 1
The energy function can also be written in terms of the long term moduli resulting in
n
a different set of internal variables T ij
348 Materials
N
n n
ψ ( E ij, T ij ) = ψ∞( E ij ) + ∑ T ij E ij Eq. 10-91
n = 1
∞
where ψ is the elastic strain energy for long term deformations. Using this energy
definition, the stresses are obtained from
1 N
∂ψ ∞ ( E ) n
S ij = --------------------- +
∂E ij ∑ T ij Eq. 10-92
n = 1
Observing the similarity with the equations for small strain viscoelasticity the internal
2 variables can be obtained from a convolution expression
n ·n n
∫0 S ij ( τ )exp [ – ( t – τ ) ⁄ λ
t
T ij = ]dτ Eq. 10-93
3 n
where S ij are internal stresses obtained from energy functions.
n ∂ψ n
S ij = ---------- Eq. 10-94
∂E ij
10 Let the total strain energy be expressed as a Prony series expansion
N
∞
ψ = ψ + ∑ ψ n exp ( – t ⁄ λ n ) Eq. 10-95
5 n = 1
If, in the energy function, each term in the series expansion has a similar form,
Eq. 10-95 can be rewritten
N
6 ψ = ψ∞ + ∑ δ n ψ 0 exp ( – t ⁄ λ n ) Eq. 10-96
n = 1
n
where δ is a scalar multiplier for the energy function based on the short term values.
The stress-strain relation is now given by
N
∞ n
S ij ( t ) = S ij ( t ) + ∑ T ij ( t ) Eq. 10-97
n = 1
 N 
∂ψ ∞ ∂ψ 0
S ij = ----------- = 1 – ∑ δ n ----------
 Eq. 10-98
∂E ij   ∂E
 n = 1 
ij
t
n n 0 n
T ij = ∫δ S ij ( t )exp [ – ( t – τ ) ⁄ λ ]dτ Eq. 10-99
0 1
Analogue to the derivation for small strain viscoelasticity, a recursive relation can be
derived expressing the stress increment in terms of values of the internal stresses at
the start of the increment.
The equations are reformulated in terms of the short time values of the energy 2
function
 N 
∆S ij ( t m ) = 1 – ∑ 1 – β n ( h ) δ n { S ij ( t m ) – S ij ( t m – h ) }
 0 0

 n = 1


3
Eq. 10-100
N
n
– ∑ α n S ij ( t m – h )
n = 1 10
0 n n
∆S ij ( t m ) = β n ( h )δ n [ S ij ( t m ) – S ij ( t m – h ) ] – α n ( h )S ij ( t m – h ) Eq. 10-101
It is assumed that the viscoelastic behavior in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear acts

only on the deviatoric behavior. The incompressible behavior is taken into account 5
using special Herrmann elements.
Time History Analysis

The viscoelastic material retains linearity between load and deformation; however, 6
this linear relationship depends on time. Consequently, the current state of
deformation must be determined from the entire history of loading.
For time history analysis, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear assumes that the material
is defined by the Prony series expansion of the relaxation modulus:
t
– -------
N G
P τi
GR ( t ) = G + ∑ Gi e Eq. 10-102
i = 1
350 Materials
where G is again the long term shear modulus, and N, GPi and τGi, i=1,2,..., N, are
material constants.
For convenience, we rewrite this as
–t
 N  ------- 
G
 P  τi  
1 GR ( t ) = G0  1 – ∑ gi  1 – e  
  
Eq. 10-103
 i = 1  
  
where:
2 N
P
G0 = G + ∑ Gi Eq. 10-104
i = 1
3 is the instantaneous shear modulus, and
P
P Gi
gi = ------- Eq. 10-105
G0
10 The effect of temperature, θ, on the material behavior is introduced through the

dependence of the elastic modulus, G, on temperature, and through a reduced time
concept:
t
5  
τ = G γ + ∫ g ( ξ ( t ) – ξ ( s ) )γ ( s )ds
 ·
Eq. 10-106
 
 0 
where G=G(θ), and xi(t) is the reduced time, defined by

6 t
ds
ξ(t) = ∫ -------------------
A(θ(s) )
- Eq. 10-107
0
where A(θ(t)) is the shift function at time t. Often the shift function is approximated
by the Williams Landell Ferry (WLF) form:
C1 ( θ – θ0 )
log ( A ) = – ------------------------------------ Eq. 10-108
C2 + ( θ – θ0 )
where C1, C2 and θ0 are constants (θ0 is the “glassy transition” temperature).
The shear behavior of the material is thus modeled as:
cr
τ = G0 ( γ – γ ) Eq. 10-109
where
( ξ( t) – ξ )
N

t 
–
s
------------------------------
G 
1
P τ 
= ∑ gi ∫  1 – e  γ· ( s )ds
cr i
γ Eq. 10-110
 
i = 1 0  

 
2
is the “creep” strain: the difference between the total mechanical strain and the
instantaneous elastic strain (the stress divided by the instantaneous elastic modulus).
During time history analysis with this model, γcr is available as the creep strain output.
The generalization of the above behavior to multi-dimensional stress states is natural. 3

For isotropic materials, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides definition of the
behavior as independent viscoelastic definitions for the shear (deviatoric) response
and for the volumetric response. In many cases, the volumetric response is assumed
to be purely elastic, with viscous effects only associated with deviatoric straining. 10
In the generalization to large deformations (finite rotations and strains), linear
viscoelasticity is assumed in the sense that the dimensionless stress relaxation is
independent of the stress magnitude. The Prony series expansion produces the
following modeling of shear behavior 5
N
cr
τ = τ0 – ∑ τi Eq. 10-111
i = 1
where
6
 ξ( s) 
– ------------
P  G 
cr gi t  τ i –1 
τ i = SYM ------- ∫  1 – e F t ( t – s ) ⋅ τ 0 ( t – s ) ⋅ F t ( t – s )ds Eq. 10-112
G 0 
τi
 
 
The τicr are interpreted as state variables which control the stress relaxation.
352 Materials
The volumetric response is scalar and, except when viscoelasticity is used with the
foam model, can be defined independently of the shear response:
–ξ ( s )
---------------
NP K
k i t τi
p = p 0 – ∑ ------- ∫ e p 0 ( t – s )ds Eq. 10-113
K 0
τ
1 i = 1 i
If the instantaneous behavior is used for foam, the deviatoric and volumetric
constitutive behavior are coupled, so it is necessary to use the same relaxation data for
both behaviors.
2 Viscoelastic material definition for time history analysis is accomplished by giving the
instantaneous elastic moduli (such as G0 above) as in statics, or by defining
instantaneous large deformation behavior for hyperelastic or foam and the ratios that
define the Prony series representation of the time dependent behavior (the gPi above)
3 with the viscoelastic options.
Viscoelastic Models in MSC.Nastran

MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has two models that represent viscoelastic materials.
10 The first can be defined as a Kelvin-Voigt model. The latter is a general hereditary
integral approach.
Kelvin-Voigt Model
The Kelvin model allows the rate of change of the inelastic strain to be a function of
5 the total stress and previous strain.
The Kelvin material behavior (viscoelasticity) is modeled by assuming an additional
k
creep strain ε , governed by
ij
6 d
----- ε ijk = A ijkl σ′kl – B ijkl ε kl
k
Eq. 10-114
dt
where A and B may be defined in the user subroutine CRPVIS (starting in version
2004) and the total strain is
ε ij = ε ije + ε ijp + ε ijc + ε ijk + ε th

ij
Eq. 10-115
ε th
ij = thermal strain components
Eq. 10-116
ε ije = elastic strain components (instantaneous response) Eq. 10-117

ε ijp = plastic strain components Eq. 10-118
ε ijc = creep strains defined via the CRPLAW and VSWELL user Eq. 10-119
subroutines (starting in version 2005)
ε ijk = Kelvin model strain components as defined above Eq. 10-120

1
The CRPVIS user subroutine is called at each integration point of each element when
the Kelvin model is used.
Use the NLPARM option and set a non-zero time increment to define the time step and
to set the tolerance control for the maximum strain in any increment. 2
This option allows Maxwell models to be included in series with the Kelvin model.
Hereditary Integral Model

The stress-strain equations in viscoelasticity are not only dependent on the current 3
stress and strain state (as represented in the Kelvin model), but also on the entire
history of development of these states. This constitutive behavior is most readily
expressed in terms of hereditary or Duhamel integrals. These integrals are formed by
considering the stress or strain build-up at successive times. Two equivalent integral
forms exist: the stress relaxation form and the creep function form. In MSC.Nastran
10
Implicit Nonlinear, the stress relaxation form is used.
The viscoelasticity option in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear can be used for both the
small strain and large strain Mooney or Ogden material (total Lagrange formulation)
stress-relaxation problems. A description of these models is as follows:
5
Using Viscoelasticity with other Material Models
At this time, the large strain viscoelastic model is only available using the total
Lagrange procedure. For the Ogden model, both deviatoric and dilatational relaxation
6
behavior is allowed. Viscoelasticity can be modeled with Arruda-Boyce and Gent
models
Experimental Determination of Viscoelastic Material Parameters

The free energy function versus time data being used for large strain viscoelasticity
can be generated by fitting experimental data provided the following two tests are
done:
354 Materials
1. Standard quasi-static tests (tensile, planar-shear, simple-shear, equi-biaxial

0
tension, volumertic) to determine the elastomer free energy W constants.
2. Standard relaxation tests to obtain stress versus time.
Temperature Dependence of Viscoelastic Materials

The rate processes in many viscoelastic materials is known to be highly sensitive to
1 temperature changes. Such temperature-dependent properties cannot be neglected in
the presence of any appreciable temperature variation. For example, there is a large
class of polymers which are adequately represented by linear viscoelastic laws at
uniform temperature. These polymers exhibit an approximate translational shift of all
2 the characteristic response functions with a change of temperature, along a

logarithmic time axis. This shift occurs without a change of shape. These temperature-
sensitive viscoelastic materials are characterized as Thermo-Rheologically Simple.
A “reduced” or “pseudo” time can be defined for the materials of this type and for a
3 given temperature field. This new parameter is a function of both time and space
variables. The viscoelastic law has the same form as one at constant temperature in
real time. If the shifted time is used, however, the transformed viscoelastic
equilibrium and compatibility equations are not equivalent to the corresponding
elastic equations.
10 In the case where the temperature varies with time, the extended constitutive law
implies a nonlinear dependence of the instantaneous stress state at each material point
of the body upon the entire local temperature history. In other words, the functionals
are linear in the strains but nonlinear in the temperature.
5 The time scale of experimental data is extended for Thermo-Rheologically Simple
materials. All characteristic functions of the material must obey the same property.
The shift function is a basic property of the material and must be determined
experimentally. As a consequence of the shifting of the mechanical properties data
6 parallel to the time axis, the values of the zero and infinite frequency complex moduli
do not change due to shifting. Hence, elastic materials with temperature-dependent
characteristics neither belong to nor are consistent with the above hypothesis for the
class of Thermo-Rheologically Simple viscoelastic solids.
In addition to the Thermo-Rheologically Simple material behavior variations of initial

0
stress-strain moduli G ijkl , the temperature of the other mechanical properties
(coefficient of thermal expansion, etc.) due to changes in temperature can be specified.
Note, however, that only the instantaneous moduli are effected. Hence, the long term
moduli given by
N
∞ 0 n
G ijkl = G ijkl ( t ) – ∑ G ijkl Eq. 10-121
n = 1
can easily become negative if the temperature effects are not defined properly.
Time-Temperature-Transformation
1
Certain materials, such as carbon steel, exhibit a change in mechanical or thermal
properties when quenched or air cooled from a sufficiently high temperature. At any
stage during the cooling process, these properties are dependent on both the current
temperature and the previous thermal history. The properties are influenced by the
internal microstructure of the material, which in turn depends on the rate at which the 2
temperature changes. Only in instances where the temperature is changed very
gradually does the material respond in equilibrium, where properties are simply a
function of the current temperature. In addition, during the cooling process certain
solid-solid phase transformations can occur. These transformations represent another
form of change in the material microstructure which can influence the mechanical or
3
thermal properties. These transformations can be accompanied by changes in volume.
The occurrence of phase change is also dependent on the rate of cooling of the
material. This relationship is shown in a typical cooling diagram (see Figure 10-20).
The curves A, B, and C in Figure 10-20 represent the temperature history of a structure
10
that has been subjected to a different cooling rate. It is obvious that the structural
material experiences phase changes at different times and temperatures, depending
on the rate of cooling. Under cooling rate A, the material changes from phase 1 to
phase 4 directly. The material undergoes three phase changes (phase 1 to phase 2 to 5
phase 3 to phase 4) for both cooling rates B and C. However, the phase changes take
place at different times and temperatures.
The Time-Temperature-Transformation option allows you to account for the
time-temperature-transformation interrelationships of certain materials during 6
quenching or casting analyses.
In a transient heat transfer analysis, the thermal properties which can be defined as a
function of time and temperature are the thermal conductivity and the specific heat
per unit reference mass. Here, the effects of latent heat or phase transformation can be
included through the definition of the specific heat.
356 Materials
In a thermal stress analysis, the mechanical properties which can be defined as a

function of time and temperature are the Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, yield
stress, workhardening slope, and coefficient of thermal expansion. The effects of
volumetric change due to phase transformation can be included through the
definition of the coefficient of thermal expansion.
1 A
T1 T1
B C
T4 Line of Phase Change –

Change in Volume
2
Temperature (T)
T5
3
T3 T3
10
T2 T2
5 t1 t2 Time (t)
Figure 10-20 Simplified Cooling Transformation Diagram
Test data must be available in a tabular form for each property of each material group.
6 For a given cooling rate, the value of a property must be known at discrete points over
a range of temperatures. There can be several sets of these discrete points
corresponding to measurements at several different cooling rates. The cooling tests
must be of a specific type known as Newton Cooling; that is, the temperature change
in the material is controlled such that
T ( t ) = A exp ( – at ) + B Eq. 10-122
In addition, a minimum and a maximum temperature that bracket the range over
which the Time-Temp option is meant to apply must also be given.
For the simulation of the cooling rate effect in finite element analysis, material
properties of a structure can be assumed as a function of two variables: time and
temperature. Two-dimensional interpolation schemes are used for the interpolation
of properties.
Interpolation is based on making the time variable discrete. Stress analysis is carried
out incrementally at discrete time stations and material properties are assumed to
vary piecewise linearly with temperature at any given time. These temperature- 1
dependent material properties are updated at each increment in the analysis. For
illustration, at time t 1 , the material is characterized by the phase 1 and phase 4
behaviors at temperature ranges T 1 to T 3 , and T 3 to T 2 , respectively (see
Figure 10-20). Similarly, at time t 2 , the material behavior must be characterized by all
four phases, each in a different temperature range (that is, phase 1, T 1 to T 4 ; phase 2, 2
T 4 to T 5 ; phase 3, T 5 to T 3 ; phase 4, T 3 to T 2 ). The selection of an interpolation
scheme is generally dependent on the form of the experimental data. A linear
interpolation procedure can be effectively used where the properties are expressed as
a tabulated function of time and temperature. 3
During time-temperature-transformation, the change in volume in a stress analysis is
assumed to take place in a temperature range ∆T . The change in volume is also
assumed to be uniform in space, such that the effect of the volume change can be
represented by a modification of the coefficient of thermal expansion. For a triangular
distribution of α ( T ) in the temperature range ∆T , the value of the modified
10
coefficient of thermal expansion is
2
α m = ------- [ 3 1 + φ – 1 ] Eq. 10-123
∆T 5
where φ is the change in volume. A schematic of the modified α ( T ) is shown in
Figure 10-21.
6
358 Materials
∆T
Coefficient of thermal Expansion (α)
Temperature (T)
2
αm
Figure 10-21 Modified Coefficient of Thermal Expansion for Short-Time

3 Change in Volume
Specifying Viscoelastic Material Entries

The viscoelastic MATVE and MATTVE material options are provided for cases where
10 dissipative losses caused by “viscous” (internal friction) effects in materials must be
modeled. For time domain analysis, this option is used with an elastic model to define
classical linear, small strain, viscoelastic behavior, or with hyperelastic or foam
models to define finite linear, large deformation, viscoelastic behavior. As described
5 in the previous section, viscoelastic relaxation data can be fit using the experimental
data fitting (EDF) capability available in MSC.Patran. See “Experimental Data
Fitting” on page 437.
Entry Description
6
MATVE Specifies isotropic visco-elastic material properties to be used
for quasi-static or dynamic analysis in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
MATTVE Specifies temperature-dependent visco-elastic material
properties in terms of Thermo-Rheologically Simple behavior
to be used for quasi-static or transient dynamic analysis in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only. This material
model is not available in the initial MSC.Nastran 2004
release.
References
• “MATVE (SOL 600)” on page 1668 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference
Guide.
• “MATTVE (SOL 600)” on page 1665 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference
Guide.
MSC.Patran Materials Application Input Data 1

The MATVE option for specifying Viscoelastic material behavior is not supported in
MSC.Patran 2004, but will likely be added in the next major release. To define a
viscoelastic material in MSC.Patran:
1. From the Materials Application form, set the Action>Object>Method 2
2. Click Input Properties..., and select Viscoelastic from the Constitutive
Model pull-down menu.
This input data creates the viscoelastic options. All inputs must have the same number
3
of time points (at the same times) in the referenced fields. The following equations
may be useful when creating the Prony series for the bulk and shear
moduli: K = E ⁄ ( 3 ( 1 – 2v ) ) G = E ⁄ ( 2( 1 + v))
Viscoelastic material models require the following material data via the Input
10
Isotropic Description
Shear Constant If a material field of time vs. value is supplied, will create 5
a VISCELPROP option. This is valid when MAT1/MATS1
are used.
Energy Function Defines the duration effect on the hyperelastic model as
Multiplier a multiplier to the strain energy density function. This is 6
valid when a Hyperelastic constitutive model for Neo-
Hookean, Mooney-Rivlin, Jamus-Green-Simpson,
Arruda-Boyce, or Gent is present.
Deviatoric Multiplier If a material field of time vs. value is supplied, will create
a viscoelastic Ogden option. This is valid when a
Hyperelastic constitutive model of Ogden is present.
Dilatational Multiplier Creates a dilatational multiplier.
360 Materials
Solid Coeff. of Thermal Creates coefficient of thermal expansion for solids.
Exp
Liquid Coeff of Thermal Creates coefficient of thermal expansion for liquids.
Exp
1
Orthotropic Description
Young’s Modulus, Defines the duration effects on the elastic moduli. This
2 E11/E22/E33 information is optional. This is only valid when an
elastic and/or plastic constitutive model is present.
Poissons Ratio 12/23/31 Defines the duration effects on the Poisson’s ratios. This
information is optional.
3 Shear Modulus Defines the duration effects on the shear moduli. This
G12/G23/G31 information is optional.
Solid Coeff of Thermal Same as for Isotropic
10 Exp
Liquid Coeff of Thermal Same as for Isotropic
Exp
6
Inelastic 361
10.4 Inelastic
Most materials of engineering interest initially respond elastically. Elastic behavior
means that the deformation is fully recoverable, so that, when the load is removed, the
specimen returns to its original shape. If the load exceeds some limit (the “yield
load”), the deformation is no longer fully recoverable. Some parts of the deformation
will remain when the load is removed as, for example, when a paper clip is bent too
much, or when a billet of metal is rolled or forged in a manufacturing process.
1
Plasticity theories model the material’s mechanical response as it undergoes such
nonrecoverable deformation in a ductile fashion. The theories have been developed
most intensively for metals, but they are applied to soils, concrete, rock, ice, and so on.
These materials behave in very different ways (for example, even large values of pure
hydrostatic pressure cause very little inelastic deformation in metals, but quite small
2
hydrostatic pressure may cause a significant, non-recoverable volume change in a soil
sample), but the fundamental concepts of plasticity theories are sufficiently general
that models based on these concepts have been successfully developed for a wide
range of materials. A number of these plasticity modes are available in the 3
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear material library.
In nonlinear material behavior, the material parameters depend on the state of stress.
Up to the proportional limit, i.e., the point at which linearity in material behavior
ceases, the linear elastic formulation for the behavior can be used. Beyond that point, 10
and especially after the onset of yield, nonlinear formulations are required. In general,
two ingredients are required to ascertain material behavior:
1. an initial yield criterion to determine the state of stress at which yielding is
considered to begin 5
2. mathematical rules to explain the post-yielding behavior.
There are two major theories of plastic behavior that address these criterion
differently. In the first, called deformation theory, the plastic strains are uniquely
defined by the state of stress. The second theory, called flow or incremental theory, 6
expresses the increments of plastic strain (irrecoverable strains) as functions of the
current stress, the strain increments, and the stress increments. Incremental theory is
more general and can be adapted in its particulars to fit a variety of material
behaviors. The plasticity models in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are
“incremental” theories, in which the mechanical strain rate is decomposed into an
elastic part and a plastic (inelastic) part through various assumed flow rules.
The incremental plasticity models are formulated in terms of:
362 Materials
• a yield surface, which generalizes the concept of “yield load” into a test
function which can be used to determine if the material will respond purely
elastically at a particular state of stress, temperature, etc.;
• a flow rule that defines the inelastic deformation that must occur if the
material point is no longer responding purely elastically;
• and some evolution laws that define the hardening - the way in which the
1 yield and/or flow definitions change as inelastic deformation occurs.
The models also need an elasticity definition, to deal with the recoverable part of the
strain models divide into those that are rate-dependent and those that are rate -
independent.
2 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear includes the following models of inelastic behavior.
• Metal Plasticity (von Mises or Hill)

• ORNL (Oak Ridge National Laboratory) - characterizes creep behavior and
3 cyclic loading effects on stainless steel materials.
• Porous Metal Plasticity (Gurson) - includes effects of hydrostatic pressure
and failure processes in ductile materials.
• Pressure-Dependent models - models the behavior of granular (soil and
10 rock) materials or polymers, in which the yield behavior depends on the
equivalent pressure stress.
• Linear Mohr-Coulomb
• Parabolic Morh-Coulomb
5 • Buyukozturk Concrete
• Generalized Plasticity
6 Yield Conditions
The yield stress of a material is a measured stress level that separates the elastic and
inelastic behavior of the material. The magnitude of the yield stress is generally
obtained from a uniaxial test. However, the stresses in a structure are usually
multiaxial. A measurement of yielding for the multiaxial state of stress is called the
yield condition. Depending on how the multiaxial state of stress is represented, there
can be many forms of yield conditions. For example, the yield condition can be
dependent on all stress components, on shear components only, or on hydrostatic
stress. A number of yield conditions are available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear,
and are discussed in this section.
Inelastic 363
Metal Plasticity
The von Mises yield surface is widely used for plasticity in isotropic metals. It is
assumed that the yield and plastic flow describe isotropic metals at low temperatures
where creep effects can be ignored. Anisotropic metals and composite materials, can
be treated by extensions of von Mises yield function, as described in Hill’s yield
function.
1
von Mises
The success of the von Mises criterion is due to the continuous nature of the function
that defines this criterion and its agreement with observed behavior for the commonly
encountered ductile materials. The von Mises criterion states that yield occurs when
the effective (or equivalent) stress (σ) equals the yield stress (σy) as measured in a 2
uniaxial test. Figure 10-22 shows the von Mises yield surface in two-dimensional and
three-dimensional stress space.
σ2 σ′3 3
Yield
Surface
Yield
Surface
Elastic
σ1
Region
10
Elastic
Region
σ′1 σ′2
(a) Two-dimensional Stress Space (b) π-Plane 5

Figure 10-22 von Mises Yield Surface
For an isotropic material

6
σ = [ ( σ1 – σ2 ) 2 + ( σ2 – σ3 ) 2 + ( σ3 – σ1 ) 2 ] 1 ⁄ 2 ⁄ 2 Eq. 10-124
where σ1, σ2, and σ3 are the principal Cauchy stresses.
σ can also be expressed in terms of nonprincipal Cauchy stresses.
2
( σ = [ ( σ x – σ y ) 2 + ( σ y – σ z ) 2 + ( σ z – σ x ) 2 + 6 ( τ xy 2
+ τ yz 2
+ τ zx ) ]1 ⁄ 2 ) ⁄ 2
Eq. 10-125
The yield condition can also be expressed in terms of the deviatoric stresses as:
364 Materials
3
σ = --- σ′ σ′ Eq. 10-126
2 ij ij
where σ′ is the deviatoric Cauchy stress expressed as

ij
1
σ′ = σ ij – --- σ kk δ ij Eq. 10-127
ij 3
1 For isotropic material, the von Mises yield condition is the default condition in
Hill’s Yield Function

2 Hill’s yield surface has been widely used both as a yield surface and as a failure
surface for anisotropic and composite materials. Hill’s yield function is a
generalization of von Mises as expressed below.
Eq. 10-128
3 σ xx 2
 --------
σ yy 2
 +  --------
σ zz 2
 +  -------
-
 Fx   Fy   Fz 
 1 1 1
–  ------ + ------ – ------ σ xx σ yy
10 F 2
x
2
Fy Fz 
2
 1 1 1
–  ------ – ------ + ------ σ xx σ zz
2 2 2
F Fy Fz 
5 x
 1 1 1
–  – -----2- + -----2- + -----2- σ yy σ zz
 F Fy Fz 
x
6  τ xy 
2
 τ yz 
2
 τ zx 
2
+  -------- +  -------- +  -------- = 1
 F xy  F yz  F zx
Note the following points about Hill’s surface:
1. It degenerates into von Mises surface when all three direct yield stresses are
equal
(Fx = Fy = Fz) and all three shear yield stresses are equal.
2. It is invariant with respect to hydrostatic stress, as is von Mises.
Fx/ 3 Fxy ( Fyz Fzx Fx/ 3) = = =
Inelastic 365
3. Hill's surface, unlike von Mises, is not always an ellipsoid in stress space.
When it is not an ellipsoid, it is not appropriate for use as a yield function
(since it does not have an inside and an outside, thereby dividing stress space
into elastic and plastic regions).
Mohr-Coulomb Material (Hydrostatic Stress Dependence)

MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear includes options for elastic-plastic behavior based 1
on a yield surface that exhibits hydrostatic stress dependence. Such behavior is
observed in a wide class of soil and rock-like materials. These materials are generally
classified as Mohr-Coulomb materials (generalized von Mises materials). Ice is also
thought to be a Mohr-Coulomb material. The generalized Mohr-Coulomb model
developed by Drucker and Prager is implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit 2
Nonlinear. There are two types of Mohr-Coulomb materials: linear and parabolic.
Each is discussed on the following pages.
Linear Mohr-Coulomb Material

3
The deviatoric yield function, as shown in Figure 10-22, is assumed to be a linear
function of the hydrostatic stress.
σ
f = αJ 1 + J 21 ⁄ 2 – ------- = 0 Eq. 10-129
3 10
where
J 1 = σ ii Eq. 10-130
5
1
J 2 = --- σ′ σ′ Eq. 10-131
2 ij ij
The constants α and σ can be related to c and φ by

6
σ 3α
c = ------------------------------------------------ ; ------------------------------------ = sin φ Eq. 10-132
1⁄2 ( 1 – 3α 2 ) 1 ⁄ 2
[ 3 ( 1 – 12α 2 ) ]
where c is the cohesion and φ is the angle of friction.

366 Materials
Yield Envelope
R
1 c φ
σ
2
σx + σy
2
3 Figure 10-23 Yield Envelope of Plane Strain (Linear Mohr-Coulomb

Material)
10 Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb Material

The hydrostatic dependence is generalized to give a yield envelope which is parabolic
in the case of plane strain (see Figure 10-23).
f = ( 3J 2 + 3βσJ 1 ) 1 ⁄ 2 – σ = 0 Eq. 10-133

5
α
2 α
= 3  c – ------
2 2 β = ---------------------------------------------- Eq. 10-134
σ -
6  3 ( 3 ( 3c – α 2 ) ) 1 ⁄ 2
2
where c is the cohesion.

Inelastic 367
R c
σ
1
2
σx + σy c2
2 α
Figure 10-24 Resultant Yield Condition of Plane Strain (Parabolic

Mohr-Coulomb Material
3
Buyukozturk Criterion (Hydrostatic Stress Dependence)
The Buyukozturk concrete plasticity model is a particular form of the generalized
Drucker-Prager plasticity model, which is developed specifically for plane stress cases
10
by Buyukozturk. This yield criterion, which originally has been proposed as a failure
criterion, has the general form:
2
f = β 3σJ 1 + γJ 1 + 3J 2 – σ
2
Eq. 10-135 5
The Buyukozturk criterion reduces to the parabolic Mohr-Coulomb criterion if.
γ = 0
6
Oak Ridge National Laboratory Options
Oak Ridge National Laboratory (ORNL) has performed a large number of creep tests
on stainless and other alloy steels. It has also set certain rules that characterize creep
behavior for application in the nuclear structures. A summary of the ORNL rules on
creep is discussed in MSC.Marc Volume A, Theory and User Information. In
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, the ORNL options are based on the definitions of
ORNL-TM- 3602 [1] for stainless steels and ORNL recommendations [2] for 2 1/4 Cr-
1 Mo steel.
368 Materials
The initial yield stress should be used for the initial inelastic loading calculations for
both the stainless steels and 2 1/4 Cr-1 Mo steel. The 10th-cycle yield stress should be
used for the hardened material. The 100th-cycle yield stress must be used in the
following circumstances:
1. To accommodate cyclic softening of 2 1/4 Cr-1 Mo steel after many
load cycles.
1 2. After a long period of high temperature exposure.
3. After the occurrence of creep strain.
Work Hardening Rules

2 The work-hardening rule defines the way the yield surface changes with plastic
straining. A material is said to be “perfectly plastic” if, upon the stress state touching
the yield surface, an infinitesimal increase in stress causes an arbitrarily large plastic
strain. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear models all materials as work hardening, and
3 treats perfectly plastic materials as a special case. Because the tangent stiffness method
is used, no difficulties arise in setting the work hardening slope equal to zero. Besides
perfect plasticity, two possibilities are provided: isotropic hardening and kinematic
hardening.
10 The isotropic workhardening rule assumes that the center of the yield surface remains
stationary in the stress space, but that the size (radius) of the yield surface expands,
due to workhardening. This type of hardening is appropriate when the straining is the
same in all directions.
5 For many materials, the isotropic workhardening model is inaccurate if unloading

occurs (as in cyclic loading problems). For these problems, the kinematic hardening
model or the combined hardening model represents the material better.
6 Isotropic Hardening Kinematic Hardening

Hardened
Original
Inelastic 369
Isotropic Hardening
The isotropic workhardening rule assumes that the center of the yield surface remains
stationary in the stress space, but that the size (radius) of the yield surface expands,
due to workhardening. The change of the von Mises yield surface is plotted in
Figure 10-25b.
A review of the load path of a uniaxial test that involves both the loading and
unloading of a specimen will assist in describing the isotropic workhardening rule.
1
The specimen is first loaded from stress free (point 0) to initial yield at point 1, as
shown in Figure 10-25a. It is then continuously loaded to point 2. Then, unloading
from 2 to 3 following the elastic slope E (Young’s modulus) and then elastic reloading
from 3 to 2 takes place. Finally, the specimen is plastically loaded again from 2 to 4 and
elastically unloaded from 4 to 5. Reverse plastic loading occurs between 5 and 6.
2
It is obvious that the stress at 1 is equal to the initial yield stress σ y and stresses at
points 2 and 4 are larger than σ y , due to workhardening. During unloading, the stress
state can remain elastic (for example, point 3), or it can reach a subsequent (reversed)
yield point (for example, point 5). The isotropic workhardening rule states that the
3
reverse yield occurs at current stress level in the reversed direction. Let σ 4 be the
stress level at point 4. Then, the reverse yield can only take place at a stress level of
– σ 4 (point 5).
For many materials, the isotropic workhardening model is inaccurate if unloading
10
occurs (as in cyclic loading problems). For these problems, the kinematic hardening
model or the combined hardening model represents the material better.
6
370 Materials
σ
4
2
1
σy
E
E +σ4
E
1 0
3
−σ4
2
5
6
(a) Loading Path
3 σ′3
10 5 6
0
3
5 2
1
4
σ′1 σ′2
6
(b) von Mises Yield Surface
Figure 10-25 Schematic of Isotropic Hardening Rule (Uniaxial Test)

Inelastic 371
Kinematic Hardening
Under the kinematic hardening rule, the von Mises yield surface does not change in
size or shape, but the center of the yield surface can move in stress space.
Figure 10-25d illustrates this condition. Ziegler’s law is used to define the translation
of the yield surface in the stress space.
The loading path of a uniaxial test is shown in Figure 10-25c. The specimen is loaded
in the following order: from stress free (point 0) to initial yield (point 1), 2 (loading), 3
1
(unloading), 2 (reloading), 4 (loading), 5 and 6 (unloading). As in isotropic hardening,
stress at 1 is equal to the initial yield stress σ y , and stresses at 2 and 4 are higher than
σ y , due to workhardening. Point 3 is elastic, and reverse yield takes place at point 5.
Under the kinematic hardening rule, the reverse yield occurs at the level of
σ 5 = ( σ 4 – 2σ y ) , rather than at the stress level of – σ 4 . Similarly, if the specimen
2
is loaded to a higher stress level σ 7 (point 7), and then unloaded to the subsequent
yield point 8, the stress at point 8 is σ 8 = ( σ 7 – 2σ y ) . If the specimen is unloaded
from a (tensile) stress state (such as point 4 and 7), the reverse yield can occur at a
stress state in either the reverse (point 5) or the same (point 8) direction. 3
For many materials, the kinematic hardening model gives a better representation of
loading/unloading behavior than the isotropic hardening model. For cyclic loading,
however, the kinematic hardening model can represent neither cyclic hardening nor
cyclic softening. 10
Combined Hardening
Figure 10-26 shows a material with highly nonlinear hardening. Here, the initial
hardening is assumed to be almost entirely isotropic, but after some plastic straining, 5
the elastic range attains an essentially constant value (that is, pure kinematic
hardening). The basic assumption of the combined hardening model is that such
behavior is reasonably approximated by a classical constant kinematic hardening
constraint, with the superposition of initial isotropic hardening. The isotropic
hardening rate eventually decays to zero as a function of the equivalent plastic strain
6
measured by
2·p ·p 1 ⁄ 2
∫  --3- ε·· ij ε ij
·p ·p
ε = ∫ε dt = dt Eq. 10-136
This implies a constant shift of the center of the elastic domain, with a growth of elastic
domain around this center until pure kinematic hardening is attained. In this model,
there is a variable proportion between the isotropic and kinematic contributions that
p
depends on the extent of plastic deformation (as measured by ε ).
372 Materials
Experimental Determination of Work Hardening Slope

In a uniaxial test, the workhardening slope is defined as the slope of the stress-plastic
strain curve. The workhardening slope relates the incremental stress to incremental
plastic strain in the inelastic region and dictates the conditions of subsequent yielding.
A number of workhardening rules (isotropic, kinematic, and combined) are available
in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. A description of these workhardening rules is
1 given below. The uniaxial stress-plastic strain curve can be represented by a piecewise
linear function or through the user subroutine WKSLP (starting with MSC.Nastran
version 2005).
2 Stress
∆σ3
∆σ2
∆σ1
3
σ
10 E E E E
Strain
p p p
∆ε1 ∆ε 2 ∆ε 3
5 Figure 10-26 Workhardening Slopes
Slope Breakpoint
∆σ 1
---------p- 0.0
6 ∆ε1
∆σ 2 p
---------p- ∆ε1
∆ε 2
∆σ 3 p p
---------p- ∆ε1 + ∆ε 2
∆ε
You enter a table of yield stress, plastic strain points.
Note: The data points should be based on a plot of the stress versus plastic strain for
a tensile test. The elastic strain components should not be included.
Inelastic 373
The yield stress and the workhardening data must be compatible with the procedure
used in the analysis. For small strain analyses, the engineering stress and engineering
strain are appropriate. If only PARAM,LGDISP is used, the yield stress should be entered
as the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress, and the workhard data be given with respect to
plastic Green-Lagrange strains. If PARAM,LGDISP,1 or 2 are used, the yield stress must
be defined as a true or Cauchy stress, and the workhardening data with respect to
logarithmic plastic strains. Engineering stress and strain may be defined and Bulk
Data parameter MRTABLS1 used to provide the program with rules to convert to the
1
proper stress and strain measures. See “MRTABLS1” on page 700 of the MSC.Nastran
Quick Reference Guide.
Flow Rules 2
Yield stress and workhardening rules are two experimentally related phenomena that
characterize plastic material behavior. The flow rule is also essential in establishing
the incremental stress-strain relations for plastic material. The flow rule describes the
p
differential changes in the plastic strain components dε as a function of the current
stress state. So long as a material point is elastic, Hooke’s law provides a relationship
3
between total stress and strain. After a material becomes plastic, however, there is no
longer a unique relationship between total stress and strain. The problem then is
usually solved incrementally, following the exact loading path.
For points which are plastic, a flow rule is used to relate increments of stress to plastic
10
strain. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses an associated flow rule, which prescribes
that increments of plastic strain are computed as a constant times the gradient of the
yield function.
In other words, considering the yield function as a surface in stress space, the plastic
5
strain increment is a vector in the direction of the outward normal to the surface at the
point where it is touched by the stresses on the loading path.
The equation representing this is: 6
∂F
dε ijp = λ ---------- Eq. 10-137
∂σ ij
where λ is a constant. Writing the six equations explicitly:

374 Materials
∂F
p = -----------
dε xx -
∂σ xx
∂F
p = -----------
dε yy -
∂σ yy
∂F
p = -----------
dε zz
∂σ zz
1 p ∂F
Eq. 10-138
dε xy = -----------
∂τ xy
∂F
p = ----------
dε yz -
∂τ yz
2 ∂F
p = ----------
dε zx -
∂τ xz
These stress vs. plastic strain equations are analogous to the stress vs. total strain
3 equations of elasticity, where elastic strains can be computed as the gradient of a strain
energy potential function, namely;
∂U
dε ij = ---------- Eq. 10-139
∂σ ij
10 Thus, the yield function F plays the role of a plastic potential. If a theory of plasticity
uses something other than the yield function as a plastic potential, a so-called
nonassociated flow rule results. Nonassociated flow rules are not programmed in
5 For the von Mises and modified Hill yield functions programmed in MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear, the derivatives in the yield function are obtained simply by
differentiating with respect to individual components of stress. For example, for the
modified Hill function, we have:
6
Inelastic 375
2σ xx σ yy σ zz
p = λ -----------
dε xx - – ------------ – ------------
Fx 2 Fx Fy Fx Fz
σ xx 2σ yy σ zz
p = λ – ------------
dε yy + ------------ – ------------
Fx Fy F y2 Fy Fz
1
σ xx σ yy 2σ zz
p = λ – -----------
dε zz - – ------------ + -----------
Fx Fz Fy Fz F z2
σ xy 2
p
dε xy = λ ---------
F xy 2
σ xz 3
2 = λ --------
dε yz -
F yz2
σ yz
p = λ --------
dε zx
F zx2
- 10
Eq. 10-140
The constant in these flow rule equations is evaluated automatically by MSC.Nastran

Implicit Nonlinear on the basis of material stability during plastic flow (i.e., by the
requirement that the stress state remain on the yield surface during plastic straining). 5
The Prandtl-Reuss representation of the flow rule is available in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear. In conjunction with the von Mises yield function, this can be represented
as:
6
p ∂σ
dε ij = dε p ------------ Eq. 10-141
∂σ ij′
where dε p and σ are equivalent plastic strain increment and equivalent

stress, respectively.
The significance of this representation is illustrated in Figure 10-27. This figure
illustrates the “stress-space” for the two-dimensional case. The solid curve gives
the yield surface (locus of all stress states causing yield) as defined by the
von Mises criterion.
376 Materials
Equation 10-141 expresses the condition that the direction of inelastic straining is
normal to the yield surface. This condition is called either the normality condition or
the associated flow rule.
If the von Mises yield surface is used, then the normal is equal to the deviatoric stress.
σ2
1
dεp p
dε2
dε1p
2
σ1
Yield Surface
3
Figure 10-27 Yield Surface and Normality Criterion 2-D Stress Space
10
Rate Dependent Yield
Strain rate effects cause the structural response of a body to change because they
influence the material properties of the body. These material changes lead to an
5 instantaneous change in the strength of the material. Strain rate effects become more
pronounced for temperatures greater than half the melting temperature ( T m ), but are
sometimes present even at room temperature. The following discussion explains the
effect of strain rate on the size of the yield surface.
6 Using the von Mises yield condition and normality rule, we obtain an expression for
the stress rate of the form
· · ·· p
σ ij = L ijkl ε kl + r ij ε
For elastic-plastic response
∂σ ∂σ
L ijkl = C ijkl –  C ijmn -------------- ------------ C pqkl ⁄ D Eq. 10-142
 ∂σ mn ∂σ pq 
and
Inelastic 377
∂σ 2 ∂σ
r ij = C ijmn -------------- --- σ -------- ⁄ D Eq. 10-143
∂σ mn 3 ·p
∂ε
where
4 ∂σ ∂σ ∂σ
D = --- σ 2 --------- + ---------- C ijkl ----------- Eq. 10-144
9 ∂ε p ∂σ ij ∂σ kl 1
As strain rates increase, many materials show an increase in yield strength. The model
provided in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear for this purpose is
· σ P
ε = D  ------ – 1 for α ≥ σ 0
 σ0 
Eq. 10-145 2
where:
· pl
ε
= the uniaxial equivalent plastic strain rate 3
= the effective yield stress at a non-zero strain rate
σ
= the static yield stress (which may depend on the equivalent
pl
σ0 ( ε , T ) pl
plastic strain, ε , via isotropic hardening, or on the
10
temperature, T .
= are material parameters that may be functions of temperature.
D ( T ), p ( T )
D and p are defined on the input forms. This model is effective
in both static and dynamic procedures.
5
Yield stress variation with strain rate is given using one of three options:
1. A. The breakpoints and slopes for a piecewise linear approximation to the
yield stress strain rate curve are given. The strain rate breakpoints should be
6
in ascending order, or
2. C. The Cowper and Symonds model is used. The yield behavior is assumed
to be completely determined by one stress-strain curve and a scale factor
depending on the strain rate.
Note: if multiple material models are used, they must all be expressed as piecewise
linear, or as Cowper and Symonds model.
378 Materials
Perfectly Plastic
A material is said to be “perfectly plastic” if, upon the stress state touching the yield
surface, an infinitesimal increase in stress causes an arbitrarily large plastic strain. The
uniaxial stress-strain diagram for a perfectly plastic material is shown in Eq. 10-26.
Some materials, such as mild steel, behave in a manner which is close to perfectly
plastic.
1 σxx
2 YS
3 ∋ xx
92-180
Figure 10-28 Perfectly Plastic Material Stress-Strain Relationship

10
Rigid Plastic
The rigid-plastic flow analysis is an approach to large deformation analysis which can
be used for metal forming problems. Two formulations are available: an Eulerian
5 (steady state) and Lagrangian (transient) approach. The effects of elasticity are not
included. If these effects are important, this option should not be used. In the steady
state approach, the velocity field (and stress field) is obtained as the solution of a
steady-state flow analysis. The time period is considered as 1.0 and, hence, the velocity
6 is equal to the deformation. In the transient formulation, the incremental displacement
is calculated. The MSC.Marc R-P FLOW parameter invokes the rigid-plastic procedure.
Note: Some hand editing of the MSC.Marc input deck may be needed to do rigid-
plastic flow analysis in early releases of SOL 600.
This procedure needs to enforce the incompressibility condition, which is inherent to

the strictly plastic type of material response being considered. Incompressibility can
be imposed in three ways:
1. By means of Lagrange multipliers. Such procedure requires Herrmann

elements which have a pressure variable as the Lagrange multiplier.
Inelastic 379
2. By means of penalty functions. This procedure uses regular solid elements,

and adds penalty terms to any volumetric strain rate that develops. It is
highly recommended that the constant dilatation formulation be used.
Penalty factor can be treated as constant or variable through the R-P FLOW
parameter.
3. In plane stress analysis (shell and membrane elements), the
incompressibility constraint is satisfied exactly by updating the thickness. 1
This capability is not available for steady state analysis. In R-P flow analysis,
several iterations are required at any given increment, the greatest number
occurring in the first increment. Subsequent increments require fewer
iterations, since the initial iteration can make use of the solution from the
previous increment. Due to the simplicity of the rigid-plastic formulation, it 2
is possible to bypass stress recovery for all iterations but the last in each
increment, provided that displacement control is used. In such cases,
considerable savings in execution time are achieved. If nodal based friction
is used in a contact analysis, then a stress recovery is always performed after
each iteration.
3
Experimental Stress-Strain Curves
Metals 10
In uniaxial tension tests of most metals (and many other materials), the following
phenomena can be observed. If the stress in the specimen is below the yield stress of
the material, the material behaves elastically and the stress in the specimen is
proportional to the strain. If the stress in the specimen is greater than the yield stress, 5
the material no longer exhibits elastic behavior, and the stress-strain relationship
becomes nonlinear. Figure 10-29 shows a typical uniaxial stress-strain curve. Both the
elastic and inelastic regions are indicated.
6
380 Materials
Stress Inelastic
Region
1 Yield
Stress
Strain
Elastic Region
2 Note: Stress and strain are total quantities.
Figure 10-29 Typical Uniaxial Stress-Strain Curve (Uniaxial Test)
Within the elastic region, the stress-strain relationship is unique. As illustrated in
3 Figure 10-30, if the stress in the specimen is increased (loading) from zero (point 0) to
σ 1 (point 1), and then decreased (unloading) to zero, the strain in the specimen is also
increased from zero to ε 1 , and then returned to zero. The elastic strain is completely
recovered upon the release of stress in the specimen.
10 The loading-unloading situation in the inelastic region is different from the elastic
behavior. If the specimen is loaded beyond yield to point 2, where the stress in the
specimen is σ 2 and the total strain is ε 2 , upon release of the stress in the specimen the
e p
elastic strain, ε , is completely recovered. However, the inelastic (plastic) strain, ε 2 ,
2
remains in the specimen. Figure 10-30 illustrates this relationship. Similarly, if the
5 specimen is loaded to point 3 and then unloaded to zero stress state, the plastic strain
p p p
ε 3 remains in the specimen. It is obvious that ε is not equal to ε . We can conclude
2 3
that in the inelastic region:
• Plastic strain permanently remains in the specimen upon removal of stress.

6 • The amount of plastic strain remaining in the specimen is dependent upon
the stress level at which the unloading starts (path-dependent behavior).
The uniaxial stress-strain curve is usually plotted for total quantities (total stress
versus total strain). The total stress-strain curve shown in Figure 10-29 can be
replotted as a total stress versus plastic strain curve, as shown in Figure 10-31. The
slope of the total stress versus plastic strain curve is defined as the workhardening
slope (H) of the material. The workhardening slope is a function of plastic strain.
Inelastic 381
Total Strain = Strain and Elastic Strain

Stress
σ3 3
σ2
2
∆ε 3
p 1
Yield Stress σy
σ1 1
2
0 Strain
ε1 ε2 ε3
ε
p
ε 2e ε2 = ε2 + ε2
p e
3
2 p e
ε3 = ε3 + ε3
p
ε εe
3 3
10
Figure 10-30 Schematic of Simple Loading - Unloading (Uniaxial Test)
6
382 Materials
Total Stress
σ θ
1 Plastic Strain
εp
H = tan θ (Workhardening Slope)
= dσ/dεp
Figure 10-31 Definition of Workhardening Slope (Uniaxial Test)

2 The stress-strain curve shown in Figure 10-29 is directly plotted from experimental
data. It can be simplified for the purpose of numerical modeling. A few simplifications
are shown in Figure 10-32 and are listed below:
3 1. Bilinear representation – constant workhardening slope.

2. Elastic perfectly-plastic material – no workhardening.
3. Perfectly-plastic material – no workhardening and no elastic response.
4. Piecewise linear representation – multiple constant workhardening slopes.
10 5. Strain-softening material – negative workhardening slope.
In addition to elastic material constants (Young’s modulus and Poisson’s ratio), it is
essential to include yield stress and workhardening slopes when dealing with
5 inelastic (plastic) material behavior. These quantities can vary with parameters such
as temperature and strain rate. Since the yield stress is generally measured from
uniaxial tests, and the stresses in real structures are usually multiaxial, the yield
condition of a multiaxial stress state must be considered. The conditions of subsequent
yield (workhardening rules) must also be studied.
6
Inelastic 383
σ σ
ε ε
(1) Bilinear Representation (2) Elastic-Perfectly Plastic
σ σ
1
ε ε
(3) Perfectly Plastic (4) Piecewise Linear Representation
σ 2
ε
(5) Strain Softening
3
Figure 10-32 Simplified Stress-Strain Curves (Uniaxial Test)
Geological Materials
Data for geological materials are most commonly available from triaxial compression 10
testing. In such a test, the specimen is confined by pressure and an additional
compression stress is superposed in one direction. Thus, the principal stresses are all
negative, with 0 ≥ σ1 = σ2 ≥ σ 3 .
-σ3 -σ1 5
σ1=σ2>σ3 σ1>σ2=σ3 6
−σ1 −σ2 −σ2 −σ3
Figure 10-33 Triaxial Compression and Tension

384 Materials
The values of the stress invariants in a uniaxial compression experiment are:

p=-{1/3}(2σ1+σ3)
q=σ1-σ3
r3=-(σ1-σ3)3
1 so that t=q=σ1-σ3
The triaxial results may thus be plotted in the t-p plane shown above. Fitting the best
straight line through the results then provides β and d.
Triaxial tension data are also needed to define K. Under triaxial tension, the specimen
2 is again confined by pressure, then the pressure in one direction is reduced. In this
case, the principal stresses are σ1 ≥ σ 2 = σ 3 .
The stress invariants are now:
p=-{1/3}(σ1+2σ3),
3 q=σ1-σ3,
r3=(σ1-σ3)3,
so that t={q/K}={1/K}(σ1-σ3)
10 K may thus be found by plotting these test results as q versus p and again fitting the
best straight line. The triaxial compression and tension lines must intercept the p-axis
at the same point, and the ratio of values of q for triaxial tension and compression at
the same value of p then gives K as shown in Figure 10-34.
5
Best fit to triaxial
q compression data
6 Best fit to triaxial

tension data
hc ht
d
β
p
Figure 10-34 Triaxial Compression and Tension Data

Inelastic 385
Matching Mohr-Coulomb Parameters

Sometimes, experimental data are not directly available. Instead, the user is provided
with the friction angle and cohesion values for the Mohr-Coulomb model. We,
therefore, need to calculate values for the parameters of the Drucker-Prager model to
provide a reasonable match to the Mohr-Coulomb parameters. 1
The Mohr-Coulomb failure model is based on plotting Mohr’s circle for states of stress
at failure in the plane of the maximum and minimum principal stresses. The failure
line is the best straight line that touches these Mohr’s circles.
The Mohr-Coulomb model is thus 2
s+σmsinϕ-c cosϕ=0,
where s={1/2}(σ1-σ3)
is half of the difference between the maximum and minimum principal stresses (and 3
is, therefore, the maximum shear stress), and
σm={1/2}(σ1+σ3)
is the average of the maximum and minimum principal stresses.

10
We see that the Mohr-Coulomb model assumes that failure is independent of the
value of the intermediate principal stress. The Drucker-Prager model does not. The
failure of typical geotechnical materials generally includes some small dependence on
the intermediate principal stress.
5
Matching Triaxial Test Response
One approach to matching Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-Prager model parameters is
to make the two models provide the same failure definition in triaxial compression
and tension. For this purpose, we can rewrite the Mohr-Coulomb model in terms of 6
principal stresses.
σ 1 – σ 3 + ( σ 1 + σ 3 ) sin ( φ ) – 2c cos φ = 0 Eq. 10-146
Using the results above (for the stress invariants p, q, and r), in triaxial compression
and tension, allows the Drucker-Prager model to be written for triaxial compression as
1
1 – --- tan β
tan β 3 0
σ 1 – σ 3 + --------------------------------- ( σ 1 + σ 3 ) + --------------------------- σ c = 0 Eq. 10-147
 2 + 1--- tan β 1
1 + --- tan β
 3  6
386 Materials
and, for triaxial tension, as
1
1 – --- tan β
tan β 3 0
σ 1 – σ 3 + ------------------------------- ( σ 1 + σ 3 ) + --------------------------- σ c = 0 Eq. 10-148
 ---- – --- tan β
2 1 1 1
---- – --- tan β
K 3  K 6
1 We wish to make the equations for triaxial compression and triaxial compression
identical to the general Mohr-Coulomb equation for all values of (σ1,σ3).
Comparing the equations for triaxial compression and triaxial compression requires
that:
2 1 1 1
1 + --- tan β = ---- – --- tan β Eq. 10-149
6 K 6
so that
3 1
K = --------------------------- Eq. 10-150
1
1 + --- tan β
3
Comparing the coefficients of (σ1+σ3) in the equation for triaxial compression and that
10 for triaxial tension provides:
6 sin φ
tan β ---------------------- Eq. 10-151
3 – sin φ
5 and hence, from the derived equation for K:
3 – sin φ
K = ------------------------ Eq. 10-152
3 + sin Φ
Finally, comparing the last terms in the general expression for the Mohr-Coulomb
6 model and the equation for triaxial compression and using the expression for tanβ
provides:
0 2c cos Φ
σ c = ------------------------ Eq. 10-153
1 – sin Φ
The expression for tanβ, K, and this last expression and thus provide Drucker-Prager
parameters that match the Mohr-Coulomb model in triaxial compression and tension.
The value of K in the Drucker-Prager model is restricted to K ≥ 0.778 for the yield
surface to remain convex. Rewriting the expression for K as:
Inelastic 387
sin Φ = 3  --------------
1–K
Eq. 10-154
 1 + k
shows that this implies φ ≤ 22° . Many real materials have a larger Mohr-Coulomb
friction angle than this value. In such circumstances, one approach is to choose
K=0.778 and then to use the expression for tan β to define β and the expression for
0 0
σc to define σc , ignoring the expression for K. This matches the models for triaxial
compression only, while providing the closest approximation that the model can
1
provide to failure being independent of the intermediate principal stress. If ϕ is
significantly larger than 22°, this approach may provide a poor Drucker-Prager match
of the Mohr-Coulomb parameters. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses K=1 by
default.
2
Matching Plane Strain Response
Plane strain problems are often encountered in geotechnical analysis: examples are
long tunnels, footings, and embankments. For this reason, the constitutive model
parameters are often matched to provide the same flow and failure response in plane 3
strain.
The Drucker-Prager flow potential defines the plastic strain increment as:
pl

∂
 10
= dε  ---------------------------- ( t – p tan ψ )
pl 1
dε Eq. 10-155
 1 ∂σ 
 1 – --- tan ψ 
3
pl
where dε is the equivalent plastic strain increment.
5
Since we only wish to match the behavior in one plane we can assume K=1, which
implies that t=q. Then:
pl pl  
∂ ∂p 6
= dε  ----------------------------  q – tan ψ 
1
dε Eq. 10-156
 1  ∂σ ∂ σ
 1 – --- tan ψ
3
Writing this expression in terms of principal stresses provides:
pl pl  
-  ------ ( 2σ 1 – σ 2 – σ 3 ) + --- tan ψ
1 1 1
Eq. 10-157
 ---------------------------
dε 1 = dε
1 2q 3
 1 – --- tan ψ
3
pl pl
with similar expressions for dε 2 and dε 3 .
388 Materials
pl
Assume plane strain in the 1-direction. Then, at limit load, we must have dε 1 =0.
From the above expression, this provides the constraint:
1 1
------ ( 2σ 1 – σ 2 – σ 3 ) + --- tan ψ = 0 Eq. 10-158
2q 3
so that:
1 1 1
σ 1 = --- ( σ 2 + σ 3 ) – --- tan ψq Eq. 10-159
2 3
Using this constraint, we can rewrite q and p in terms of the principal stresses in the
plane of deformation,
2
3 3
q = ----------------------------------------- ( σ 2 – σ 3 ) Eq. 10-160
2
2 9 – ( tan ψ )
3 and
1 tan ψ
p = – --- ( σ 2 + σ 3 ) + ------------------------------------------------- ( σ 2 – σ 3 ) Eq. 10-161
2 2
2 3 ( 9 – ( tan ψ ) )
10
With these expressions, the Drucker-Prager yield surface can be written in terms of σ2
and σ3 as
9 – tan β tan ψ 1
------------------------------------------------- ( σ 2 – σ 3 ) + --- tan β ( σ 2 + σ 3 ) – d = 0 Eq. 10-162
5 2 3 ( 9 – ( tan ψ ) )
2 2
The Mohr-Coulomb yield surface in the (2,3) plane is:
6 σ 2 – σ 3 + sin ϕ ( σ 2 + σ 3 ) – 2c cos ϕ = 0 Eq. 10-163
By comparison,
2
tan β 3 ( 9 – ( tan ψ ) )
sin ϕ = ------------------------------------------------------------ Eq. 10-164
9 – tan β tan ψ
2
3 ( 9 – ( tan ψ ) )
c cos ϕ = ---------------------------------------------- d Eq. 10-165
9 – tan β tan ψ
Inelastic 389
Now consider the two extreme cases of flow definition: associated flow, ψ=β, and
nondilatant flow, when ψ=0.
Assuming associated flow, the last two equations provide:
3 sin ϕ
tan β = ---------------------------------------- Eq. 10-166
1 2
1 + --- ( sin ϕ )
3 1
and
d 3 cos ϕ
--- = ---------------------------------------- Eq. 10-167
c 1
1 + --- ( sin ϕ )
3
2 2
d
while for nondilatant flow they give tan β = 3 sin ϕ and --- = ϕ cos ϕ
0
c 3
In either case, σ c is immediately available as:
0 1
σ c = -------------------------- d Eq. 10-168
1
1 – -- tan β
3 10
The difference between these two approaches increases with the friction angle but, for
typical friction angles, the results are not very different, as illustrated in the table
below.
Mohr-Coulomb
5
Friction Angle, Associated Flow Nondilatant Flow
Φ
Drucker-Prager d/c Drucker-Prager d/c
friction angle, β friction angle, β
6
10 ° 16.7 ° 1.70 16.7 ° 1.70
20 ° 30.2 ° 1.60 30.6 ° 1.63
30 ° 39.8 ° 1.44 40.9 ° 1.50
40 ° 46.2 ° 1.24 48.1 ° 1.33
50 ° 50.5 ° 1.02 53.0 ° 1.11
Plane strain matching of Drucker-Prager and Mohr-Coulomb models.

390 Materials
As strain rates increase, many materials show an increase in yield strength. This effect
often becomes important when the strain rates are in the range of -0.1 to 1 per second,
and can be very important if the strain rates are in the range of 10 to 100 per second,
as commonly occurs in high energy dynamic events or in manufacturing processes.
Temperature-Dependent Behavior
1 This section discusses the effects of temperature-dependent plasticity on the
constitutive relation.
The following constitutive relations for thermo-plasticity were developed by Naghdi.
Temperature effects are discussed using the isotropic hardening model and the von
2 Mises yield condition.
The stress rate can be expressed in the form
· · ·
σ ij = L ijkl ε kl + h ij T Eq. 10-169
3 For elastic-plastic behavior, the moduli L ijkl are
∂σ ∂σ
L ijkl = C ijkl –  C ijmn -------------- ------------ C pqkl ⁄ D Eq. 10-170
 ∂σ mn ∂σ pq 
10
and for purely elastic response
L ijkl = C ijkl Eq. 10-171
5 The term that relates the stress increment to the increment of temperature for
elastic-plastic behavior is
∂σ 2 ∂σ
h ij = X ij – C ijkl α kl –  C ijkl -----------  σ pq X pq – --- σ -------  ⁄ D Eq. 10-172
 ∂σ kl  3 ∂T 
6
and for purely elastic response
H ij = X ij – C ijkl α kl Eq. 10-173
where
4 ∂σ ∂σ ∂σ
D = --- σ 2 --------- + ---------- C ijkl ----------- Eq. 10-174
9 ∂ε p ∂σ ij ∂σ kl
and
Inelastic 391
∂C ijkl
X ij = --------------- ε e Eq. 10-175
∂T kl
and α kl are the coefficients of thermal expansion.
Specifying Elastoplastic Material Entries

Each of the elastoplastic models described in this section can be selected with the 1
MATEP bulk data entry.
Entry Description
MATEP Specifies elasto-plastic material properties to be used for large 2
deformation analysis.
MATTEP Specifies temperature-dependent elasto-plastic material
properties to be used for static, quasi static or transient dynamic
analysis. 3
References
• “MATEP (SOL 600)” on page 1605 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “MATTEP (SOL 600)” on page 1657 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference 10
Guide.

To define an inelastic material in MSC.Patran: 5
combination to Create>Isotropic-or-Orthotropic-or-Anisotropic>Manual
Input.
2. Click Input Properties..., and select Elastoplastic from the Constitutive 6
The required properties for describing elasticplastic behavior vary based on material
type, dimension, type of nonlinear data input, hardening rule, yield criteria, strain rate
method, and thermal dependencies.
392 Materials
The table below shows the various input options and criteria available to you for
defining elastoplastic behavior.
Elastoplastic Model Summary

Constitutive Nonlinear Data Hardening Strain Rate
Yield Criteria
Model Input Rule Method
1 ❏ Plastic ❏ Stress/Strain ❏ Isotropic ❏ von Mises ❏ Piecewise
Curve ❏ Kinematic ❏ Tresca Linear
❏ Combined ❏ Mohr- ❏ Cowper-

Coulomb Symonds
2 ❏ Drucker-
Prager
❏ Parabolic
Mohr-
3 Coulomb
❏ Buyukozturk
Concrete
10 ❏ Oak Ridge
National Lab
❏ 2-1/4 Cr-Mo
ORNL
5 ❏ Reversed
Plasticity
ORNL
❏ Full Alpha
6 Reset ORNL
❏ Generalized
Plasticity
❏ Hardening ❏ Isotropic ❏ von Mises ❏ None
Slope ❏ Kinematic ❏ Tresca
❏ Combined ❏ Mohr-
Coulomb
❏ Drucker-
Prager
Inelastic 393
Elastoplastic Model Summary

Constitutive Hardening Strain Rate
Type Yield Criteria
Model Rule Method
❏ Plastic(Cont.) ❏ Perfectly ❏ None ❏ von Mises ❏ Piecewise
Plastic ❏ Linear Mohr- Linear
Coulomb ❏ Cowper- 1
❏ Parabolic Symonds
Mohr-
Coulomb
❏ Buyukozturk
Concrete
2
❏ Oak Ridge
National Lab
❏ 2-1/4 Cr-Mo
ORNL
3
❏ Reversed
Plasticity
ORNL
10
❏ Full Alpha
Reset ORNL
❏ Generalized
Plasticity 5
❏ Rigid-Plastic ❏ Power Law
(Isotropic only) ❏ Rate Power Law
❏ Johnson-Cook
❏ Kumar
6
❏ Piecewise ❏ None ❏ Piecewise
Linear Linear
❏ Cowper-
Symonds
394 Materials
Nonlinear Data Input

The type of nonlinear data input you choose to use to define elastoplastic material
behavior determines the input data required for the Input Properties subform on the
Materials Application form.
• Stress/Strain Curve - All stress-strain curves are input as piecewise linear.

The allowable number of linear segments is 100. In the MSC.Patran 2004
1 release MSC.Patran transfers the stress-strain curve input on the material
property field directly to the TABLES1 entry. MSC.Nastran 2004 requires the
equivalent stress vs. total equivalent strain (including 0,0 origin) curve.
The number of linear segments used to define the stress-strain curve may be
2 different from one material to another. The same strain breakpoints need
not be used for all of the different material’s stress-strain curves. It is
recommended to define the stress-strain curves throughout the range of
strains which the analysis is likely to predict. If the analysis predicts a
plastic strain greater than the last point defined by the user, MSC.Nastran
3 Implicit Nonlinear continues the analysis after shifting the last strain
breakpoint on that curve to match the predicted value, thereby changing
(reducing) the work hardening slope for the last segment of the curve.
• Hardening Slope - The hardening slope and the yield point are required with
10 this Nonlinear Data Input option.
• Perfectly Plastic - Perfect plasticity is described by simply specifying the
yeild point.
• Rigid Plastic - A rigid plastic material is described by defining Coefficient A
5 and B, and Exponenets M and N.
6
Inelastic 395
The tables below provide descriptions for the input data for each of the four types of
nonlinear input.
Isotropic - Stress/Strain Curve or Perfectly Plastic:

All Yield Functions
Property Name Description
Stress /Strain Curve Defines the Cauchy stress vs. logrithmic strain (also 1
called equivalent tensile stress versus total equivalent
or strain) by reference to a tabular field. The field is selected
Yield Stress from the Field Definition list. The field is created using
the Fields application. See “Fields Create (Spatial,
Tabular Input)” on page 148 of the MSC.Patran Reference 2
Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. For Perfectly
Plastic models, only a Yield Stress needs to be entered.
Can also be strain rate dependent if Strain Rate Method
is Piecewise Linear. Accepts field of yield stress vs. 3
strain rate.
10th Cycle Yield Stress vs. When set to ORNL, accepts field of 10th cycle yield
Plastic Strain stress vs. plastic strain. Can be temperature dependent
also. For Perfectly Plastic models, only a 10th Cycle
Yield Stress needs to be entered.
10
or
10th Cycle Yield Stress
Coefficient C Visible if Strain Rate Method is Cowper-Symonds.
Inverse Exponent P Visible if Strain Rate Method is Cowper-Symonds. 5
Alpha For Perfectly Plastic models, when set to Linear Mohr-
Coulomb, defines the slope of the yield surface in square
root J2 versus J1 space. This property is required.
Beta When set to Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb, defines the beta
6
parameter in the equation that defines the parabolic
yield surface in square root J2 versus J1 space. This
property is required.
Note: 2 1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL, Reversed Plasticity ORNL, Full Alpha Reset ORNL are
the same as Oak Ridge National Labs. Generalized Plasticity is the same as
Von Mises.
Note: Perfectly Plastic is identical to Stress/Strain except that no hardening rules
apply.
396 Materials
Anisotropic/Orthotropic - Stress/Strain Curve or Perfectly Plastic:

All Yield Functions
Description
Stress vs. Strain Same as description for Isotropic Elastic-Plastic. If Strain
1 or Rate Method is Piecewise Linear, accepts field of yield
Tensile Yield Stress stress vs. strain rate.
Or defines an isotropic yield stress. It is a required
property when the plasticity type is Perfectly Plastic.
2 Stress 11/22/33 Yield

Ratios
Defines the ratios of direct yield stresses to the isotropic
yield stress in the element’s coordinate system.
Stress 12/23/31 Yield Defines the ratios of shear yield stresses to the isotropic
Ratios shear yield stress (yield divided by square root three) in
3 the element’s coordinate system.
Note: Perfectly Plastic is identical to Elastic-Plastic except that no hardening rules

apply. Stress vs Plastic Strain is replaced with Yield Stress data only as is
10th Cycle Yield vs. Strain replaced with 10th Cycle Yield Stress data. Thus
10 no tabular data is necessary.
Hardening Slope - Nonlinear Data Input
Isotropic/Anisotropic/Orthotropic - Hardening Slope

5 Property Name Description
Hardening Slope Slope of the stress-strain curve once yielding has started.
Yield Point Defines the stress level at which plastic strain begins to
develop.
6
Internal Friction Angle When yield function is set to Mohr-Coulomb or Drucker-
Prager this gives the parameter describing the effect of
hydrostatic pressure on the yield stress.
Failure and Damage Models 397
10.5 Failure and Damage Models

One of the nonlinear features of a material's behavior is failure. When a certain
criterion (failure criterion) is met, the material fails and no longer sustains its loading
and breaks. In a finite-element method, this means that the element, where the
material reaches the failure limit, cannot carry any stresses anymore. The stress tensor
is effectively zero. The element is flagged for failure, and, essentially, is no longer part
of the structure.
1
Failure criteria can be defined for a range of materials and element types. The failure
models are referenced from the material definition entries.
Isotropic/Orthotropic/Anisotropic Failure Models 2

For isotropic, 2D orthotropic, and 2D anisotropic materials, you can implement one of
five failure models in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600). Failure models are
based on maximum stress criteria, maximum strain criteria, or one of three composite
stress/strain failure theories. 3
Failure Model Applicable Material Type
Maximum Stress Isotropic, 2D Orthotropic, 2D Anisotropic
Maximum Strain 2D Orthotropic 10
Hill Isotropic, 2D Orthotropic (stress or strain based), 2D
Anisotropic
Hoffman Isotropic, 2D Orthotropic (stress or strain based), 2D
Anisotropic 5
Tsai-Wu Isotropic, 2D Orthotropic (stress or strain based), 2D
Anisotropic
Maximum Stress Criterion

6
At each integration point, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates six quantities:
σ 1
- ⁄F σ1 > 0
 -----
if
X
t
1. Eq. 10-176
–σ
------ ⁄ F
1
if σ1 < 0
 X c
398 Materials
 σ 2
 ------ ⁄ F if σ2 > 0
2.  Yt 
Eq. 10-177
 σ 2
 – ------ ⁄ F if σ2 < 0
 Yc
1  σ 3
 ------ ⁄ F if σ3 > 0
3.  Zt 
Eq. 10-178
 σ 3
 – ------ ⁄ F if σ3 < 0
 Z c
2
 σ 12 
- ⁄F
4. -------- Eq. 10-179
 S 12 
3
 σ 23 
5. --------  ⁄F Eq. 10-180
 S 23 
10  σ 31 
6. --------  ⁄F Eq. 10-181
 S 31 
where
5 F is the failure index (F =1.0).
X t, X c are the maximum allowable stresses in the 1-direction in tension and

compression.
6 Y t, Y c are maximum allowable stresses in the 2-direction in tension
and compression.
Z t, Z c are maximum allowed stresses in the 3-direction in tension

and compression.
S 12 maximum allowable in-plane shear stress.
S 23 maximum allowable 23 shear stress.
S 31 maximum allowable 31 shear stress.

Maximum Strain Failure Criterion

At each integration point, calculates six quantities:
 ε1 
 ------- ⁄ F if ε1 > 0
 e 1t
1.
 ε1 
 – -------- ⁄ F if ε1 < 0 1
 e 1c
 ε2 
 ------- ⁄ F if ε2 > 0
 e 2t
2.
 ε2 
2
 – -------- ⁄ F if ε2 < 0
 e 2c
 ε3 
 ------- ⁄ F
 e 3t
if ε3 > 0 3
3.
 ε3 
 – -------- ⁄ F if ε3 < 0
 e 3c
 γ 12 
10
4.  --------  ⁄ F Eq. 10-182
 g 12 
 γ 23 
5. 

--------  ⁄ F
g 23 
Eq. 10-183 5
 γ 31 
6.  --------  ⁄ F Eq. 10-184
 g 31 
6
where
F is the failure index (F=1.0).
e 1t, e 1care the maximum allowable strains in the 1 direction in tension and
compression.
compression.
400 Materials
compression.
g 12 is the maximum allowable shear strain in the 12 plane.
g 23 is the maximum allowable shear strain in the 23 plane.
1 g 31 is the maximum allowable shear strain in the 31 plane.
Hill Failure Criterion

Assumptions:
2 • Orthotropic materials only
• Incompressibility during plastic deformation
• Tensile and compressive behavior are identical
3 At each integration point, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates:
σ 12 σ 22 σ 32
------ + ------ + ------ –  ------ + ------ – ------ σ 1 σ 2 –  ------ + ------ – ------ σ 1 σ 3
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2  2 2 2  2 2 2
X Y Z X Y Z X Z Y
10 Eq. 10-185
σ 122 σ 132 σ 232
–  ------ + ------ – ------ σ 2 σ 3 + --------- + --------- + ---------
1 1 1
⁄F
 2 2 2 S 122 S 132 S 232
Y Z X
5 For plane stress condition, it becomes

2 2 2
 σ 1 σ 1 σ 2 σ 2 σ 12 
- + ------ + --------- ⁄ F
 ------2 – ------------ Eq. 10-186
X X2 Y 2 S 12 2

6 where
X is the maximum allowable stress in the 1 direction
Y is the maximum allowable stress in the 2 direction
Z is the maximum allowable stress in the 3 direction
S 12, S 23, S 31, Fare as before

Hoffman Failure Criterion

Note: Hoffman criterion is essentially Hill criterion modified to allow unequal
maximum allowable stresses in tension and compression.
At each integration point, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates:
2 2 2
( σ2 – σ3 ) + C2 ( σ3 – σ1 ) + C3 ( σ1 – σ2 ) + C4 σ1 + C5 σ2
Eq. 10-187 1
+ C 6 σ 3 + C 7 σ 23
2 + C σ2 + C σ2 ] ⁄ F
8 13 9 12
with
C 1 = ---  ----------- + ----------- – ------------

1 1 1 1 2
2  Z t Z c Y t Y c X t X c
C 2 = ---  ------------ + ----------- – -----------

1 1 1 1

2 t c X X Z Z
t c Y t Yc

3
C 3 = ---  ------------ + ----------- – -----------
1 1 1 1
2  X t X c Y t Y c Z t Z c
1 1
C 4 = ----- – ------
Xt Xc
10
1 1
C 5 = ----- – -----
Yt Yc
1 1
C 6 = ----- – -----
Zt Zc
5
1
C 7 = --------
2
S 23
1
C 8 = --------
S 132 6
1
C 9 = --------
2
S 12
For plane stress condition, it becomes
2 2 2
 1 σ1 σ2 σ 12 σ 1 σ 2 
- – ------ σ 1 +  ----- – ----- σ 2 + ------------ + ----------- + --------- – -------------  ⁄ F
1 1 1
  ----   Y t Y c Xt Xc Yt Yc S 2
Eq. 10-188
 Xt Xc 12
Xt Xc 
where: , X c, Y t, Y c, Z t, Z c, S 12, S 23, S 31, are as before.

402 Materials
1
Note: For small ratios of, for example, ----
X
- , the Hoffman criteria can become
negative due to the presence of the lineart terms.
Tsai-Wu Failure Criterion

Tsai-Wu is a tensor polynomial failure criterion. At each integration point,
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates:
1
σ 12 σ 22 σ 32
 ----
1
- – ------ σ 1 +  ----- – ----- σ 2 +  ----- – ----- σ 3 + ------------ + ----------- + -----------
1 1 1 1 1
 X t X c  Y t Y c  Z t Z c Xt Xc Yt Yc Zt Zc
Eq. 10-189
τ 122 τ 232 τ 132
2 + --------
S 122
+ --------
S 232
+ --------
S 132
+ 2F 12 σ 1 σ 2 + 2F 23 σ 2 σ 3 + 2F 13 σ 1 σ 3 ] ⁄ F
where , X c, Y t, Y c, Z t, Z c, S 12, S 23, S 31, are as before.
3 F 12 Interactive strength constant for the 12 plane
F 23 Interactive strength constant for the 23 plane
F 13 Interactive strength constant for the 31 plane

10
For plane stress condition, it becomes
2 2 2
 1 σ1 σ2 σ 12 
----- – ------ σ 1 +  ------ – ----- σ 2 + ------------ + ----------- + --------- + 2F 12 σ 1 σ 2  ⁄ F
1 1 1
X   
Eq. 10-190
5  t Xc Y2 Yc Xt Xc Yt Yc S 12 
Note: In order for the Tsai-Wu failure surface to be closed,
1
2 < ----------- 1 1 1 1 1
F 12 - • ----------- 2 < ----------
F 23 - • ----------- 2 < -----------
F 31 - • -----------
6 Xt Xc Yt Yc Yt Yc Zt Zc Xt Xc Zt Zc
See Wu, R.Y. and Stachurski, 2, “Evaluation of the Normal Stress Interaction
Parameter in the Tensor Polynomial Strength Theory for Anisotropic
Materials”, Journal of Composite Materials, Vol. 18, Sept. 1984, pp. 456-463.
Interlaminar Shear for Thick Shell and Beam Elements

Calculation of interlaminar shear stress (a parabolic distribution through the
thickness direction) for thick shells and beams are available. These interlaminar shears
are printed in the local coordinate system above and below each layer selected for
printing. These values are also available for postprocessing. PARAM,MRTSHEAR,1
must be used for activating the parabolic shear distribution calculations.
In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, the distribution of transverse shear strains

1
through the thickness for thick shell and beam elements was assumed to be constant.
From basic strength of materials and the equilibrium of a beam cross section, it is
known that the actual distribution is more parabolic in nature. As an additional
option, the formulations for certain beam and shell elements have been modified to
include a parabolic distribution of transverse shear strain. The formulation is exact for
2
MSC.Marc beam element 45, but is approximate for MSC.Marc thick shell elements 22,
75, and 140. Nevertheless, the approximation is expected to give improved results
from the previous constant shear distribution. Furthermore, interlaminar shear
stresses for composite beams and shells can now be easily calculated. 3
1 2
With the assumption that the stresses in the V and V direction are uncoupled, the
equilibrium condition through the thickness is given by
∂τ ( z ) ∂σ ( z )
-------------- + --------------- = 0 Eq. 10-191 10
∂z ∂x
where σ ( z ) is the layer axial stress; τ ( t ) is the layer shear stress. From beam theory,
we have
∂M
5
V + -------- = 0 Eq. 10-192
∂x
where M is the section bending moment and V is the shear force. Assuming that
σ ( z ) = f ( z )M Eq. 10-193
6
by taking the derivative of Eq. 10-193 with respect to x, substituting the result into
Eq. 10-191, using Eq. 10-192 and integrating, we obtain
τ(z ) = ∫ f ( z )dz • V Eq. 10-194

z
The function f ( z ) is given from beam theory as

404 Materials
E0 ( z )
f ( z ) = -------------- ( z – z ) Eq. 10-195
EI
where E 0 ( z ) is the layer initial Young’s modulus, z is the location of the neutral axis
and EI is the section bending moment of inertia. Eq. 10-195 and Eq. 10-193
express the usual bending relation
1 Mz
σ ( z ) = – ------- Eq. 10-196
I
except that these two equations are written so that the z = 0 axis is not necessarily
the neutral axis of bending. With respect to this axis, membrane and bending action
2 is, in general, coupled. Note that
∫ z E ( z )dz
z
z = ----------------------- Eq. 10-197
3 ∫ E ( z )dz
z
and stress τ ( z ) = 0 at the top and bottom surface of the shell.
10 Interlaminar Stresses for Continuum Composite Elements

In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, the interlaminar shear and normal stresses are
calculated by averaging the stresses in the stacked two layers. The stresses are
transformed into a component tangent to the interface and a component normal to the
interface. The two components, considered as shear stress and normal stress,
5 respectively, are printed out in the output file.
Progressive Composite Failure

A model has been put into MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear to allow the progressive
6 failure of certain types of composite materials. The aspects of this model are defined
below:
1. Failure occurs when any one of the failure criteria is satisfied.
2. The behavior up to the failure point is linear elastic.
3. Upon failure, the material moduli for orthotropic materials at the integration
points are changed such that all of the moduli have the lowest moduli
entered.
4. Upon failure, for isotropic materials, the failed moduli are taken as 10% of
the original moduli.
5. If there is only one modulus, such as in a beam or truss problem, the failed
modulus is taken as 10% of the original one.
6. There is no healing of the material.
Specifying the Failure Criteria

Any of the failure models described above can be selected with the MATF Bulk Data
entry. 1
Entry Description
MATF Specifies failure model properties for linear elastic materials to
be used for static, quasi static or transient dynamic analysis in 2
References
• “MATF (SOL 600)” on page 1617 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide. 3
Defining Failure Models in MSC.Patran
To define a Failure Model in MSC.Patran:
10
combination to one of the following:
• Create>Isotropic>Manual Input
• Create>2D Orthotropic>Manual Input 5
• Create>2D Anisotropic>Manual Input
2. Click on Input Properties.... , and choose Failure from the Constitutive
6
406 Materials
3. If the failure model applies to a 2D orthotropic material, you can select Stress
or Strain from the Failure Limit pull-down menu.
10
6 Isotropic Material Input Data

Isotropic materials require the following failure model data via the Input Options
subform on the Materials Application form.
Failure Theory : Hill, Hoffman, Tsai-Wu, Maximum Stress

Tension Stress Limit Defines the tension stress (or strain) limits in the
element’s coordinate system.

Compression Stress Limit Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in the
element’s coordinate system. Absolute values are used.
Shear Stress Limit Defines the shear stress (or strain) limits.
1
2D Orthotropic Material Input Data
2D orthotropic materials require the following failure model data via the Input
Options subform on the Materials Application form.
Failure Theory : Hill, Hoffman, Tsai-Wu, Maximum Stress, Maximum Strain 2

Tension Stress (Strain) Defines the tension stress (or strain) limits in
Limit 11 direction 1 of the element’s coordinate system.
Tension Stress (Strain) Defines the tension stress (or strain) limits in
3
Compression Stress (Strain) Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in
Absolute values are used. 10
Compression Stress (Strain) Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in
Absolute values are used.
Shear Stress (Strain) Limit Defines the shear stress (or strain) limits.
5
Interaction Term Defines the stress interaction parameter.
2D Anisotropic Material Input Data

6
2D anisotropic materials require the following failure model data via the Input
Options subform on the Materials Application form.

Tension Stress Limit Defines the tension stress (or strain) limits in the
element’s coordinate system.
408 Materials

Compression Stress Limit Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in the
element’s coordinate system. Absolute values are used.
Shear Stress Limit Defines the shear stress (or strain) limits.
1
Hyperelastic Damage Models
In many structural applications, the finite element method is used to predict failure.
This is often performed by comparing the calculated solution to some failure criteria,
2 or by using classical fracture mechanics.
Ductile Metals
In ductile materials given the appropriate loading conditions, voids will form in the
3 material, grow, then coalesce, leading to crack formation and potentially, failure.
Experimental studies have shown that these processes are strongly influenced by
hydrostatic stress. Gurson studied microscopic voids in materials and derived a set of
modified constitutive equations for elastic-plastic materials. Tvergaard and
Needleman modified the model with respect to the behavior for small void volume
10 fractions and for void coalescence.
In the modified Gurson model, the amount of damage is indicated with a scalar
parameter called the void volume fraction f. The yield criterion for the macroscopic
assembly of voids and matrix material is given by:
5
σ 2  q 2 σ kk
F =  ------ + 2q 1 f∗ cosh  --------------- – [ 1 + ( q 1 f∗ ) 2 ] = 0 Eq. 10-198
σ   2σ 
y y
6 as seen in Figure 10-35.

The parameter q 1 was introduced by Tvergaard to improve the Gurson model at
small values of the void volume fraction. For solids with periodically spaced voids,
numerical studies [10] showed that the values of q 1 = 1.5 and q 2 = 1 were
quite accurate.
The evolution of damage as measured by the void volume fraction is due to void
nucleation and growth. Void nucleation occurs by debonding of second phase
particles. The strain for nucleation depends on the particle sizes. Assuming a normal
distribution of particle sizes, the nucleation of voids is itself modeled as a normal
distribution in the strains, if nucleation is strain controlled. If void nucleation is
assumed to be stress controlled in the matrix, a normal distribution is assumed in the

stresses. The original Gurson model predicts that ultimate failure occurs when the
void volume fraction f, reaches unity. This is too high a value and, hence, the void
volume fraction f is replaced by the modified void volume fraction f∗ in the
yield function.
The parameter f∗ is introduced to model the rapid decrease in load carrying
capacity if void coalescence occurs. 1
f∗ = f if f ≤ fc
 f u* – f c Eq. 10-199
f∗ = f c +  ---------------- ( f – f c ) if f > fc
 f F – f c
2
where fc is the critical void volume fraction, and f F is the void volume at failure, and
f u* = 1 ⁄ q 1 . A safe choice for f F would be a value greater than ( 1 ⁄ q 1 ) namely,
f F = 1.1 ⁄ q 1 . Hence, you can control the void volume fraction, f F , at which the
solid loses all stress carrying capability. 3
Numerical studies show that plasticity starts to localize between voids at void volume
fractions as low as 0.1 to 0.2. You can control the void volume fraction f c , beyond
which void-void interaction is modeled by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. Based on
the classical studies, a value of f c = 0.2 can be chosen. 10
The existing value of the void volume fraction changes due to the growth of existing
voids and due to the nucleation of new voids.
· · ·
f = f growth + f nucleation Eq. 10-200 5
The growth of voids can be determined based upon compressibility of the matrix
material surrounding the void.
· ·p
f growth = ( 1 – f ) ε kk Eq. 10-201 6
410 Materials
σ
e
⁄ σ
M
1.0
f* = 0
1 0.5 f* ⁄ f * = 0.01
u
0.1
0.3
0.6
0.9
0
0 1 2 3 4σ
kk
⁄ 3σ
M
2
Figure 10-35 Plot of Yield Surfaces in Gurson Model
As mentioned earlier, the nucleation of new voids can be defined as either strain or
3 stress controlled. Both follow a normal distribution about a mean value.
In the case of strain controlled nucleation, this is given by
1  ε m – ε n · p
· fN p 2
10 S  εm
f nucleation = -------------- exp – --- --------------------
S 2π 2
Eq. 10-202
where f N is the volume fraction of void forming particles, ε n the mean strain for
void nucleation and S the standard deviation.
5 In the case of stress controlled nucleation, the rate of nucleation is given by:
1 2
 σ + --- σ kk – σ n ·
· fN 1·
exp – --- -------------------------------------- * σ + --- σ kk
1 3
f nucleation = -------------- Eq. 10-203
S 2π 2 S  3
 
6
If the second phase particle sizes in the solid are widely varied in size, the standard
deviation would be larger than in the case when the particle sizes are more uniform.
The MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear user can also input the volume fraction of the
nucleating second phase void nucleating particles in the input deck, as the variable
fN .
A typical set of values for an engineering alloy is given by Tvergaard for strain
controlled nucleation as
ε n = 0.30 ; f N = 0.04 ; S = 0.01 Eq. 10-204

It must be remarked that the determination of the three above constants from
experiments is extremely difficult. The modeling of the debonding process must itself
be studied including the effect of differing particle sizes in a matrix. It is safe to say
that such an experimental study is not possible. The above three constants must
necessarily be obtained by intuition keeping in mind the meaning of the terms.
When the material reaches 90 percent of f F , the material is considered to be failed.
At this point, the stiffness and the stress at this element are reduced to zero. 1
Elastomers
Under repeated application of loads, elastomers undergo damage by mechanisms
involving chain breakage, multi-chain damage, micro-void formation, and micro-
structural degradation due to detachment of filler particles from the network
2
entanglement. Two types of phenomenological models namely, discontinuous and
continuous, exists to simulate the phenomenon of damage.
Discontinuous Damage 3
The discontinuous damage model simulates the “Mullins’ effect” as shown in
Figure 10-36.
10
6
Figure 10-36 Discontinuous Damage
This involves a loss of stiffness below the previously attained maximum strain. The
higher the maximum attained strain, the larger is the loss of stiffness. Upon reloading,
the uniaxial stress-strain curve remains insensitive to prior behavior at strains above
the previously attained maximum in a cyclic test. Hence, there is a progressive
stiffness loss with increasing maximum strain amplitude. Also, most of the stiffness
loss takes place in the few earliest cycles provided the maximum strain level is not
412 Materials
increased. This phenomenon is found in both filled as well as natural rubber although
the higher levels of carbon black particles increase the hysteresis and the loss of
stiffness. The free energy, W, can be written as:
0
W = K ( α, β )W Eq. 10-205
0
where W is the nominal strain energy function, and
1 0
α = max ( W ) Eq. 10-206
determines the evolution of the discontinuous damage. The reduced form of

Clausius-Duhem dissipation inequality yields the stress as:
2 0
∂W
S = 2K ( α ,β ) ----------- Eq. 10-207
∂C
Mathematically, the discontinuous damage model has a structure very similar to that
3 of strain space plasticity. Hence, if a damage surface is defined as:
Φ = W–α≤0 Eq. 10-208
The loading condition for damage can be expressed in terms of the Kuhn-Tucker
10 conditions:
· ·
Φ≤0 α≥0 αΦ = 0 Eq. 10-209
The consistent tangent can be derived as:

5 2 0 0 0
∂ W ∂K ∂W ∂W
C = 4 K --------------- + ----------- ----------- ⊗ ----------- Eq. 10-210
∂C∂C ∂W 0 ∂C ∂C
6 Continuous Damage
The continuous damage model can simulate the damage accumulation for strain
cycles for which the values of effective energy is below the maximum attained value
of the past history as shown in Figure 10-37.
Figure 10-37 Continuous Damage 2

This model can be used to simulate fatigue behavior. More realistic modeling of
fatigue would require a departure from the phenomenological approach to damage.
The evolution of continuous damage parameter is governed by the arc length of the
effective strain energy as: 3
t
∂ 0
β = ∫ ------- W ( s′ ) ds′
∂s′
Eq. 10-211
0 10
Hence, β accumulates continuously within the deformation process.
The Kachanov factor K ( α, β ) is implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
through both an additive as well as a multiplicative decomposition of these two effects
as: 5
2 2
∞ α α β β
K ( α, β ) = d + ∑ dn exp  – ------ + ∑ d n exp  – ------
ηn λn
n = 1 n = 1 6
2
∞  α + δ n β
K ( α, β ) = d + ∑ d n exp  – ---------------------
 ηn 
Eq. 10-212
n = 1
α β ∞ ∞
You specify the phenomenological parameters d n , d n , η n, λ n, d n, δ n and d . If d
is not defined, it is automatically determined such that, at zero values of α and β , the
Kachanov factor K = 1 . If, according to Equation or Equation 10-212 the value of
K exceeds 1, K is set back to 1.
414 Materials
The above damage model is available for deviatoric behavior. In addition, viscoelastic
behavior can be included. Finally, the user subroutine, UELDAM available starting in version
2005, can be used to define damage functions different from Equation 10-209 to
Equation 10-212.
The parameters required for the continuous or discontinuous damage model can be
obtained using the experimental data fitting option in Mentat.
1
Specifying Hyperelastic Damage Model Entries
The hyperelastic damage model described above can be selected with the MATHED
Bulk Data entry.
2
Entry Description
MATHED Specifies damage model properties for hyperelastic materials to
be used for static, quasi static or transient dynamic analysis in
3 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
References
• “MATHED (SOL 600)” on page 1631 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference
10 Guide.

MSC.Patran does not support this option in the current release.
5
6
Creep 415
10.6 Creep
Creep is an important factor in elevated-temperature stress analysis. In MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear, creep is represented by a Maxwell model. Creep is a time-
dependent, inelastic behavior, and can occur at any stress level (that is, either below
or above the yield stress of a material). The creep behavior can be characterized as
primary, secondary, and tertiary creep, as shown in Figure 10-38. Engineering
analysis is often limited to the primary and secondary creep regions. Tertiary creep in
1
a uniaxial specimen is usually associated with geometric instabilities, such as necking.
The major difference between the primary and secondary creep is that the creep strain
rate is much larger in the primary creep region than it is in the secondary creep region.
The creep strain rate is the slope of the creep strain-time curve. The creep strain rate is
generally dependent on stress, temperature, and time.
2
The creep data can be specified in either an exponent form or in a piecewise linear
curve.
· dε c
ε c = --------
3
Eq. 10-213
dt
Creep Strain
εC 10
Tertiary
Creep
Secondary
Creep 5
Primary
Creep
6
Time (t)
Note: Primary Creep: Fast decrease in creep strain rate

Secondary Creep: Slow decrease in creep strain rate
Tertiary Creep: Fast increase in creep strain rate
Figure 10-38 Creep Strain Versus Time (Uniaxial Test at Constant Stress
and Temperature)
Forms of Creep Material Law

There are three possible modes of input for creep constitutive data.
416 Materials
1. Express the dependence of equivalent creep strain rate on any independent

parameter through a piecewise linear relationship. The equivalent creep
strain rate is then assumed to be a piecewise linear approximation to
· dk ( t )
ε c = A • f ( σ ) • g ( ε c ) • h ( T ) • ------------- Eq. 10-214
dt
·c c
where A is a constant; ε is equivalent creep strain rate; and σ , ε , T , and t
1 are equivalent stress, equivalent creep strain, temperature and time,
respectively. The functions f , g , h , and k are piecewise linear. This
representation is shown in Figure 10-39. (Any of the functions ( f , g , h , or k )
can be set to unity by setting the number of piecewise linear slopes for that
2 relation to zero on the input data.)
2. The dependence of equivalent creep strain rate on any independent
parameter can be given directly in power law form by the appropriate
exponent. The equivalent creep strain rate is
3 ·c c n
ε = Aσ • ( ε ) • T p • ( qt q – 1 )
m
Eq. 10-215
10 This is often adequate for engineering metals at constant temperature where
Norton’s rule is a good approximation.
·c
ε = Aσ
n Eq. 10-216
5 3. Use the MATEP material to activate the ORNL (Oak Ridge National
Laboratory rules) capability of the program.
Isotropic creep behavior is based on a von Mises creep potential described by
the equivalent creep law
6 ·
ε = f ( σ, ε , T, t )
c Eq. 10-217
Creep 417
F4
F3
S3
Function F (X)
[Such as t ( σ ) , F2 S2
c
g(ε ) , h (T),
k (t)]
1
S1
F1
X1 X2 X3 X4 2
Variable X (Such as σ, εC, T, t)
(1) Slope-Break Point Data
Slope
S1
Break Point
X1
3
S2 X2
S3 X3
(2) Function-Variable Data

10
Function Variable
F1 X1
F2 X2
F3 X3
F4 X4 5
Figure 10-39 Piecewise Linear Representation of Creep Data
The material creep behavior is described by

6
· · c  ∂σ 
ε ijc = ε  ---------
- Eq. 10-218
 ∂σ ij 
During creep, the creep strain rate usually decreases. This effect is called creep
hardening and can be a function of time or creep strain. The following section
discusses the difference between these two types of hardening.
Consider a simple power law that illustrates the difference between time and strain-
hardening rules for the calculation of the creep strain rate.
418 Materials
c
ε = βt n Eq. 10-219
c
where ε is the creep strain, β and n are values obtained from experiments and t is
c
time. The creep rate can be obtained by taking the derivative ε with respect to time
c
·c dε
ε = -------- = nβt n – 1 Eq. 10-220
dt
1
However, t being greater than 0, we can compute the time t as
c 1/n
ε
t =  ----- Eq. 10-221
β
2
Substituting Equation 10-220 into Equation 10-219 we have
·c c ((n – 1) ⁄ n)
ε = nβt n – 1 = n ( β 1 ⁄ n ( ε ) ) Eq. 10-222
3
Equation 10-220 shows that the creep strain rate is a function of time (time hardening).
Equation 10-222 indicates that the creep strain rate is dependent on the creep strain
(strain hardening). The creep strain rates calculated from these two hardening rules
generally are different. The selection of a hardening rule in creep analysis must be
10 based on data obtained from experimental results. Figure 10-40 and Figure 10-41
show time and strain hardening rules in a variable state of stress. It is assumed that
the stress in a structure varies from σ 1 to σ 2 to σ 3 ; depending upon the model
chosen, different creep strain rates are calculated accordingly at points 1, 2, 3, and 4.
5 Obviously, creep strain rates obtained from the time hardening rule are quite different
from those obtained by the strain hardening rule.
εc
6 σ1
σ2
3
σ3
1
4
2
0
t
Figure 10-40 Time Hardening
Creep 419
εc
σ1
σ2
3
σ3
1
2
4
1
0
t
Figure 10-41 Strain Hardening

2
Oak Ridge National Laboratory Laws
Oak Ridge National Laboratory (ORNL) has performed a large number of creep tests
on stainless and other alloy steels. It has also set certain rules that characterize creep
3
behavior for application in the nuclear structures. A summary of the ORNL rules on
creep is discussed in MSC.Marc Volume A, Theory and User Information. The
references listed at the end of this section offer a more detailed discussion of the ORNL
rules. 10
Viscoplasticity (Explicit Formulation)
The creep (Maxwell) model can be modified to include a plastic element (as shown in
Figure 10-42). This plastic element is inactive when the stress ( σ ) is less than the yield 5
stress ( σ y ) of the material. The modified model is an elasto-viscoplasticity model and
is capable of producing some observed effects of creep and plasticity. In addition, the
viscoplastic model can be used to generate time-independent plasticity solutions
when stationary conditions are reached. At the other extreme, the viscoplastic model
can reproduce standard creep phenomena. The model allows the treatment of
6
nonassociated flow rules and strain softening which present difficulties in
conventional (tangent modulus) plasticity analyses.
It is recommended that you use the implicit formulation described in the following
paragraphs to model general viscoplastic materials.
420 Materials
ee
1
evp
2 ε
p
= ε
vp
Plastic Element
Inactive if σ < σy
Figure 10-42 Uniaxial Representation of Viscoplastic Material

3
Creep (Implicit Formulation)
This formulation, as opposed to that described in the previous section, is fully implicit.
A fully implicit formulation is unconditionally stable for any choice of time step size;
10 hence, allowing a larger time step than permissible using the explicit method.
Additionally, this is more accurate than the explicit method. The disadvantage is that
each increment may be more computationally expensive. There are two methods for
defining the inelastic strain rate. The creep model definition option can be used to
define a Maxwell creep model. The back stress must be specified through the field
5 reserved for the yield stress in the MAT1 or other material definitions. There is no creep
strain when the stress is less than the back stress. The equivalent creep strain
increment is expressed as
6 ·c m ·c n P
ε = Aσ • ( ε ) • T • qt
q–1
Eq. 10-223
and the inelastic deviatoric strain components are
3 i σ′ ij
∆ε iji = --- ∆ε ---------
2 σ
where σ′ij is the deviatoric stress at the end of the increment and σ y is the back stress.
A is a function of temperature, time, etc. An algorithmic tangent is used to form the
stiffness matrix.
Creep 421
One of three tangent matrices may be formed. The first uses an elastic tangent, which
requires more iterations, but can be computationally efficient because re-assembly
might not be required. The second uses an algorithmic tangent that provides the best
behavior for small strain power law creep. The third uses a secant (approximate)
tangent that gives the best behavior for general viscoplastic models.
Narayanaswamy Model 1
The annealing of flat glass requires that the residual stresses be of an acceptable
magnitude, while the specification for optical glass components usually includes a
homogenous refractive index. The design of heat treated processes (for example,
annealing) can be accomplished using the Narayanaswamy model. This allows you to
study the time dependence of physical properties (for example, volumes) of glass 2
subjected to a change in temperature.
For more information pertaining to the Narayanaswamy Model, see MSC.Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 7 Material Library.
3
Specifying Creep Material Entries
Each of the creep models described in this section can be selected with the MATVP
Bulk Data entry. MATVP is the only form of creep data material input supported by
SOL 600, ie.e., no other MSC.Nastran creep data formats are supported by SOL 600. 10
Entry Description
MATVP Specifies viscoplastic or creep material properties to be used for
quasi-static analysis in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL
5
600) only.
References
• “MATVP (SOL 600)” on page 1673 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference 6
Guide.

To define creep behavior in MSC.Patran:

combination to Create>Isotropic-or-Orthotropic-or-Anisotropic>Manual
Input.
422 Materials
2. Click Input Properties..., and select Creep from the Constitutive Model pull-
down menu and MATVP from the Creep Data Input pull-down menu.
Creep material models require the following MATVP material data via the Input
1 Isotropic-Anisotropic- Description
Orthotropic
Coefficient Specifies the coefficient, A.
Exponent of Temperature Defines temperature exponent.
2 Temperature vs. Creep References a material field of temperature vs. value.
Strain Overrides Exponent of Temperature if present.
Exponent of Stress Defines stress exponent
3 Creep Strain vs. Stress References a material field of stress vs. value. Overrides
Exponent of Stress if present.
Exponent of Creep Strain Defines creep strain exponent.
Strain Rate vs. Creep References a material field of strain rate vs. value.
10 Strain Overrides Exponent of Creep Strain if present.
Exponent of Time Defines time exponent.
Time vs. Creep Strain References a material field of time vs. value. Overrides
Exponent of Time if present.
5 Back Stress Defines the back stress for implicit creep
6
Composite 423
10.7 Composite
Composite materials are composed of a mixture of two or more constituents, giving
them mechanical and thermal properties which can be significantly better than those
of homogeneous metals, polymers and ceramics.
Laminate composite materials are based on layering homogeneous materials using
one of several methods. In order to define a laminate composite material, you must 1
define the homogeneous materials that form the layers, the thickness of each layer,
and the orientation angle of the layers relative to the standard coordinate axis being
used for the model. The orientation is particularly important for orthotropic and
anisotropic materials, whose properties vary in different directions. The material in
each layer may be either linear or nonlinear. Tightly bonded layers (layered materials) 2
are often stacked in the thickness direction of beam, plate, shell structures, or solids.
10
Each layer is a “ply”, and each ply

can have a different material,
5
thickness, or material orientation
(angle).
6
Figure 10-43 identifies the locations of integration points through the thickness of
beam and shell elements with and without a composite formulation.
Note that when the COMPOSITE option is used, as shown in Figure 10-43, the layer
points are positioned midway through each layer. When the COMPOSITE option is not
used, the layer points are equidistantly spaced between the top and bottom surfaces.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear performs a numerical integration through the
thickness. If the COMPOSITE option is used, the trapezoidal method is employed;
otherwise, Simpson’s rule is used.
424 Materials
*
* *
* *
1 * *
* *
Beams or Shells with Beams or Shells without
Composite Option Composite Option
Figure 10-43 Integration Points through the Thickness of Beam and Shell
2 Elements
Figure 10-44 shows the location of integration points through the thickness of
continuum elements. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear forms the element stiffness
matrix by performing numerical integration based on the standard isoparametric
3 concept.
10 * *
* *
* *
5 * *
Figure 10-44 Integration Points through the Thickness of Continuum
Elements
Specifying Composite Material Entries

6
MSC.Nastran provides a property definition specifically for performing composite
analysis. You specify the material properties and orientation for each of the layers and
MSC.Nastran produces the equivalent PSHELL and MAT2 entries for shells. This is
extended to PSOLID and MATORTH for SOL 600 only.
Entry Description
PCOMP Defines the properties of an n-ply composite material laminate.
Composite 425
References
• “PCOMP” on page 1831 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
10
6
426 Materials

The Composite forms allow existing materials to be combined to create new materials.
All of the composite materials, with the exception of the laminated composites, can be
assigned to elements like any homogeneous material through the element property
forms. For laminated composites, the section thickness is entered indirectly through
the definition of the stack, and the Homogeneous option on the Element Properties
1 form must be changed to Laminate to avoid reentry of this information.
To define a composite material in MSC.Patran:
1. From the Materials Application form, set the Action>Object combination to
Create>Composite.
2 2. Select a Method according to the type of composite model desired as
described in the following table.
Nine composite material models can be constructed using the Composite Materials
3 Application form.
Model Description
Laminate Defines a laminate having, for each ply, an arbitrary
constituent material, constant thickness, and constant
10 orientation. For more details see “Laminated Composite
Form” on page 76 of the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Rule-of-Mixtures Defines a rule of mixtures composite material for
5 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear shell and solid
elements, for more details see “Rule-of-Mixtures
Composite” on page 78 of the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
6 Halpin-Tsai Continuous Defines a Halpin-Tsai continuous fiber composite

Fiber material for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear shell and
solid elements, for more details see “Halpin-Tsai
Continuous Fiber Composite” on page 80 of the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional
Assignments.
Composite 427
Model Description
Halpin-Tsai Discontinuous Defines a Halpin-Tsai discontinuous fiber composite
Fiber material for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear shell and
Discontinuous Fiber Composite” on page 82 of the
Assignments. 1
Halpin-Tsai Continuous Defines a Halpin-Tsai continuous ribbon composite
Ribbon material for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear shell and
Continuous Ribbon Composite” on page 84 of the 2
Assignments.
Halpin-Tsai Discontinuous Defines a Halpin-Tsai discontinuous ribbon composite
Ribbon material for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear shell and
3
Discontinuous Ribbon Composite” on page 86 of the
Assignments.
Halpin-Tsai Particulate Defines a Halpin-Tsai particulate composite material for
10
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear shell and solid
elements, for more details see “Halpin-Tsai Particulate
Composite” on page 88 of the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. 5
Short Fiber (1D) Defines a (1D) short fiber composite material for
elements, for more details see “Short Fiber Composite
(1D)” on page 90 of the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, 6
Short Fiber (2D) Defines a (2D) short fiber composite material for
elements, for more details see “Short Fiber Composite
(2D)” on page 92 of the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
428 Materials
10.8 Gasket
Engine gaskets are used to seal the metal parts of the engine to prevent steam or gas
from escaping. They are complex (often multi-layer) components, usually rather thin
and typically made of several different materials of varying thickness. The gaskets are
carefully designed to have a specific behavior in the thickness direction. This is to
ensure that the joints remain sealed when the metal parts are loaded by thermal or
1 mechanical loads. The through-thickness behavior, usually expressed as a relation
between the pressure on the gasket and the closure distance of the gasket, is highly
nonlinear, often involves large plastic deformations, and is difficult to capture with a
standard material model. The alternative of modeling the gasket in detail by taking
2 every individual material into account in the finite element model of the engine is not
feasible. It requires a lot of elements which makes the model unacceptably large. Also,
determining the material properties of the individual materials might be
cumbersome.
3 The gasket material model addresses these problems by allowing gaskets to be

modeled with only one element through the thickness, while the experimentally or
analytically determined complex pressure-closure relationship in that direction can be
used directly as input for the material model. The material must be used together with
2D or 3D first-order solid composite element types or 2D axi-symmetric elements. In
10 that case, these elements consists of one layer and have only one integration point in
the thickness direction of the element.
Constitutive Model
5 The behavior in the thickness direction, the transverse shear behavior, and the
membrane behavior are fully uncoupled in the gasket material model. In subsequent
sections, these three deformation modes are discussed.
Local Coordinate System

6 The material model is most conveniently described in terms of a local coordinate
system for the integration points of the element (see Figure 10-45). For
three-dimensional elements, the first and second directions of the coordinate system
are tangential to the midsurface of the element at the integration point. The third
direction is the thickness direction of the gasket and is perpendicular to the
midsurface. For two-dimensional elements, the first direction of the coordinate system
is the direction of the midsurface at the integration point, the second direction is the
thickness direction of the gasket and is perpendicular to the midsurface, and the third
direction coincides with the global 3-direction.
Gasket 429
In a total Lagrange formulation, the orientation of the local coordinate system is

determined in the undeformed configuration and is fixed. In an updated Lagrange
formulation, the orientation is determined in the current configuration and is updated
during the analysis.
2 3
1
2
1
1
Integration Point
Midsurface
Midsurface
2
Integration Point
Figure 10-45 The Location of the Integration Points and the Local
Coordinate Systems in Two- and Three-dimensional Gasket Elements 3
Thickness Direction - Compression
In the thickness direction, the material exhibits the typical gasket behavior in
compression, as depicted in Figure 10-46. After an initial nonlinear elastic response
(section AB), the gasket starts to yield if the pressure p on the gasket exceeds the initial
10
yield pressure py0. Upon further loading, plastic deformation increases, accompanied
by (possibly nonlinear) hardening, until the gasket is fully compressed (section BD).
Unloading occurs in this stage along nonlinear elastic paths (section FG, for example).
When the gasket is fully compressed, loading and unloading occurs along a new 5
nonlinear elastic path (section CDE), while retaining the permanent deformation built
up during compression. No additional plastic deformation is developed once the
gasket is fully compressed.
The loading and unloading paths of the gasket are usually established experimentally 6
by compressing the gasket, unloading it again, and repeating this cycle a number of
times for increasing pressures. The resulting pressure-closure data can be used as
input for the material model. The user must supply the loading path and may specify
up to ten unloading paths. In addition, the initial yield pressure py0 must be given. The
loading path should consist of both the elastic part of the loading path and the
hardening part, if present. If no unloading paths are supplied or if the yield pressure
is not reached by the loading path, the gasket is assumed to be elastic. In that case,
loading and unloading occurs along the loading path.
430 Materials
The loading and unloading paths must be defined using the TABLES1 bulk data entries
and must relate the pressure on the gasket to the gasket closure. The unloading paths
specify the elastic unloading of the gasket at different amounts of plastic deformation;
the closure at zero pressure is taken as the plastic closure on the unloading path. If
unloading occurs at an amount of plastic deformation for which no path has been
specified, the unloading path is constructed automatically by linear interpolation
1 between the two nearest user supplied paths. The unloading path, supplied by the
user, with the largest amount of plastic deformation is taken as the elastic path at full
compression of the gasket.
For example, in Figure 10-46, the loading path is given by the sections AB (elastic part)
and BD (hardening part) and the initial yield pressure is the pressure at point B. The
2 (single) unloading path is curve CDE. The latter is also the elastic path at full
compression of the gasket. The amount of plastic closure on the unloading path is cp1.
The dashed curve FG is the unloading path at a certain plastic closure cp that is
constructed by interpolation from the elastic part of the loading path (section AB) and
3 the unloading path CD.
10 loading path
py1 D
py G
py0 B
Gasket Pressure p
unloading path
5
6
A F C
cp0 cp cy0 cp1 cy cy1
Gasket Closure Distance c
Figure 10-46 Pressure-closure Relation of a Gasket
The compressive behavior in the thickness direction is implemented by decomposing

the gasket closure rate into an elastic and a plastic part:
· ·e ·p
c = c +c Eq. 10-224
Gasket 431
Of these two parts, only the elastic part contributes to the pressure. The constitutive
equation is given by the following rate equation:
· ·e · ·p
p = Dc c = Dc ( c – c ) Eq. 10-225
Here, Dc is the consistent tangent to the pressure-closure curve.
Plastic deformation develops when the pressure p equals the current yield pressure py. 1
The latter is a function of the amount of plastic deformation developed so far and is
given by the hardening part of the loading path (section BD in Figure 10-46).
Initial Gap
The thickness of a gasket can vary considerably throughout the sealing region. Since 2
the gasket is modeled with only one element through the thickness, this can lead to
meshing difficulties at the boundaries between thick regions and thin regions. The
initial gap parameter can be used to solve this. The parameter basically shifts the
loading and unloading curves in the positive closure direction. As long as the closure
distance of the gasket elements is smaller than the initial gap, no pressure is built up
3
in the gasket. The sealing region can thus be modeled as a flat sheet of uniform
thickness and the initial gap parameter can be set for those regions where the gasket
is actually thinner than the elements of the finite element mesh used to model it.
10
Thickness Direction - Tension
The tensile behavior of the gasket in the thickness direction is linear elastic and is
governed by a tensile modulus Dt. The latter is defined as a pressure per unit closure
distance (that is, length). 5
Transverse Shear and Membrane Behavior
The transverse shear is defined in the 2-3 and 3-1 planes of the local coordinate system
(for three-dimensional elements) or the 1-2 plane (for two-dimensional elements). It is
linear elastic and characterized by a transverse shear modulus Gt.
6
The membrane behavior is defined in the local 1-2 plane (for three-dimensional
elements) or the local 3-1 plane (for two-dimensional elements) and is linear elastic
and isotropic. Young’s modulus Em and Poisson’s ratio νm that govern the membrane
behavior are taken from an existing material that must be defined using the MAT1 bulk
data entry. Multiple gasket material can refer to the same isotropic material for their
membrane properties (see also the GASKET model definition option in MSC.Marc
Volume C: Program Input).
432 Materials
Thermal Expansion
Since the solid composite element types currently do not have a associated heat
transfer element, gasket materials cannot be used in coupled thermo-mechanical
analysis. However, thermal expansion of the elements is supported. The thermal
expansion of the gasket material is isotropic and the thermal expansion coefficient are
taken from the isotropic material that also describes the membrane behavior.
1 Constitutive Equations
As mentioned above, the behavior in the thickness direction of the gasket is
formulated as a relation between the pressure p on the gasket and the gasket closure
distance c. In order to formulate the constitutive equations of the gasket material, this
2 relation must first be written in terms of stresses and strains. This depends heavily on
the stress and strain tensor employed in the analysis. For small strain analyses, for
example, the engineering stress and strain are used. In that case, the gasket closure
rate and the pressure rate are related to the strain rate and the stress rate by
3 · ·
c = – hε and
· ·
p = –σ Eq. 10-226
in which h is the thickness of the gasket.

The resulting constitutive equation for three-dimensional elements, expressed in the
10 local coordinate system of the integration, now reads
Em νm E
m
------------------ ------------------ 0 0 0 0
2 2 ·
· 1 – νm 1 – νm ε 11
5 σ 11
· νm E Em ·
σ 22 m ε 22
------------------ ------------------ 0 0 0 0
· 2 2 · ·p
σ 33 1 – νm 1 – νm ε 33 – ε 33
· = Eq. 10-227
0 0 C 0 0 0 ·
σ 12 γ 12
6 ·
σ 23
Em ·
0 0 0 --------------------------- 0 0 γ 23
· 2 ( 1 + νm )
·
σ 31 γ 31
0 0 0 0 Gt 0
0 0 0 0 0 Gt
in which C = hDc. For two-dimensional elements, the equation is given by

Gasket 433
Em νm E
m
· ------------------ 0 ------------------ 0 ·
σ 11 1 – νm
2
1 – νm
2 ε 11
· · ·p
σ 22 0 C 0 0 ε 22 – ε 22
· = Eq. 10-228
σ 33 νm E Em ·
m
------------------ 0 ------------------ 0 ε 33
· 2 2 ·
σ 12 1 – νm 1 – νm γ 12 1
0 0 0 Gt
For large deformations in a total Lagrange formulation, in which the Green-Lagrange

strains and the second Piola-Kirchhoff stresses are employed (as well as in an updated
Lagrange environment) in which the logarithmic strains and Cauchy stresses are 2
being used, similar but more complex relations can be derived.
Specifying Gasket Material Entries

The MATG provides specifically for modeling gasket materials. 3
Entry Description
MATG Specifies gasket material properties to be used in MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
10
MATTG Specifies gasket material property temperature variation to be
used in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
References
5
• “MATG (SOL 600)” on page 1622 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
• “MATTG (SOL 600)” on page 1659 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference
Guide.
6
MSC.Patran 2004 does not support this option, but support will likely be added in the
next major release.
434 Materials
10.9 Material Damping

MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear offers damping for direct integration methods only.
Frequency response using modal analysis methods is not part of MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear.
Damping in Direct Integration Analysis

1 In direct integration analysis, the user very often defines energy dissipation
mechanisms as part of the basic model - dashpots, inelastic material behavior, etc. In
such cases, there is usually no need to introduce additional “structural” or general
damping: it is unimportant compared to these other dissipative effects. However,
2 some models do not have such dissipation sources (an example is a linear system with
chattering contact, such as a pipeline in a seismic event). In such cases, it is usually
desirable to introduce some general low level of damping. MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear provides “Rayleigh” damping for this purpose. The user includes the two
Rayleigh damping factors, αR for mass proportional damping and βR for stiffness
3 proportional damping on the NLSTRAT Bulk Data entry. In the case of elements the
damping values must be used in conjunction with these property references. For a
linear problem, these provide a damping matrix [C] as described above:
[C]=αR[M]+βR[K].
10 Since the model may have quite general nonlinear response, the concept of “stiffness
proportional damping” must be generalized, since it is possible for the tangent
stiffness matrix to have negative eigenvalues (which would imply negative damping).
To overcome this problem, βR is interpreted as defining viscous material damping
5 which creates an additional “damping stress,” σd, proportional to the total strain rate:
el ·
σ d = βD 0 ε Eq. 10-229
6 Here D0el is the material’s initial (virgin) elastic stiffness. This damping stress is added
to the stress caused by the constitutive response at the integration point when the
dynamic equilibrium equations are formed, but it is not included in the stress output.
This allows damping to be introduced for any nonlinear case, and provides standard
Rayleigh damping for linear cases.
Since the βR factor introduces damping proportional to the strain rate, this may be
thought of as damping associated with the material itself, while the αR factor
introduces damping forces caused by the absolute velocities of the model, and so
simulates the idea of the model moving through a viscous “ether” (a permeating, still
fluid, so that any motion of any point in the model causes damping).
Material Damping 435
The αR factor is applied to all elements that have mass. The βR factor applies to all
elastic elements and to beam and shell elements. The βR factor is not applied to spring
elements. Discrete dashpot elements should be used as needed for springs.
Specifying Material Damping Entries

Parameters for material damping are input through the NLSTRAT entry.
1
Entry Description
NLSTRAT Defines transient analysis damping parameters BETA,
GAMMA, GAMMA1, GAMMA2.
NLDAMP Defines damping constants for nonlinear analysis when 2
MSC.Marc is executed from MSC.Nastran used in SOL 600 only
(Not supported in MSC.Patran 2004).
References 3
• “NLDAMP” on page 1489 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
MSC.Patran Materials Application Input Data 10

MSC.Patran 2004 does not yet support material damping specified by the NLDAMP
card, but you can specify the transient analysis damping parameters on the NLSTRAT
card under the Load Increment Parameters subform.
5
6
436 Materials
Gamma (Newmark) Mass proporional damping coefficient.
Beta (Newmark) Stiffness proportional damping coefficient.
10
6
Experimental Data Fitting 437
10.10 Experimental Data Fitting

This is a very useful tool available under the Tools pull-down menu from the main
MSC.Patran form and is available if the Analysis Preference is set to MSC.Nastran.
The tool is used to curve fit experimentally
derived, raw elastomeric material data and
fit a number of material models to the data.
1
The data can then be saved as constitutive
hyperelastic and/or viscoelastic models for
use in anMSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
or MSC.Marc analysis.
The operation of curve fitting is done in
2
three basic steps corresponding to the
actions in the Action pull-down menu.
1. Import the Raw Data - data is
read from standard ASCII files
3
and stored in MSC.Patran in the
form a field (table).
2. Select the Test Data - the fields
from the raw data are associated 10
to a test type.
3. Calculate the Properties - the
curve fit is done to the selected
test data; coefficients are calculated based on the selected material model; 5
curve fit is graphically displayed and the properties can be saved as a
constitutive model for a later analysis.
Import Raw Data 6

Importing the data is done by following these steps:
1. Enter a New Field Name - this is the name of the raw data table as it will be
stored in MSC.Patran as a material field.
2. Select the Independent Variable - this is defaulted to Strain but could be any
of Strain, Time, Frequency, Temperature, or Strain Rate.
3. Select the File and press the Apply button.
The following notes are made:

438 Materials
• You can skip any number of header lines in the raw data file by setting
the Header Lines to Skip widget.
• You may edit the raw data file after selecting it by using the Edit File...
button. The editor is Notepad on Windows platforms and vi on UNIX
platforms unless you change the environment variable P3_EDITOR to
reference a different editor. The editor must be in the user’s path or
1 the entire pathname must be referenced.
• Raw data files may have up to three columns of data. By default the
first column of data is the independent variable value. The second
column is the measured data, and the last column can be the area
reduction or volumetric data. More than three columns is not
2 accepted. If the third column is blank, the material is considered
incompressible.
• The data may be space, tab, or comma delimited.
3 • If you have cross sectional area reduction data in the third column,
you can give it an optional field name also. If you do not specify that
you have this data and a third column is detected, two fields will still
be created and a _C1 and _C2 will be appended to the given field
name.
10 • If for some reason the independent and dependent columns need to
be interchanged, you can turn this toggle on. Check your imported
fields before proceeding to ensure they are correct. This is done in the
Fields application.
5
6
• When you press the Apply button, you will be taken to the second
step. If you need to import more than one file, you will have to reset
the Action pull-down.

Import Raw Data Description
New Field The field name under which the raw data will be saved. For an 1
explanation of what the raw data files should contain, see the
description on each mode (Uniaxial, Biaxial, etc.) in the table for
Select Test Data.
Area Data If volumetric data or cross sectional area reduction data is stored
in the third column of a raw data file it will be imported
2
automatically and two field will be created, one with a _C1 and
the other with a _C1 appended to the name. Optionally, you can
give it it’s own name by turning this toggle ON.
Area Field Name If the Area Data toggle is on, you supply the name to the field of
3
volumetric or area data here.
Independent Variable This defines the independent variable. The material field created
from reading the raw data will be tagged with this independent
variable. This is simply a label and has no effect on the actual 10
curve fits.
Header Lines to Skip If any header lines in the data file are to be skipped before the raw
data is processed, you can specify this with this databox.
Select File Select a raw data file. The .dat and .csv file types are filtered by
5
default. csv files are comma separated and created by Microsoft
Excel.
Edit File Once a file has been selected you may edit it with Notepad on
Windows and vi on UNIX. The editor can be changed by setting
6
the environment variable P3_EDITOR to the editor or choice. The
editor command must be in the user’s path or the full path must
be provided as part of the P3_EDITOR environment variable.
440 Materials

Import Raw Data Description
Apply This command will import the raw data and save it as a field(s) in
the name(s) given in New Field (and/or Area Field Name)
databoxes. You will also be taken to automatically to the Select
1 Test Data action which is the next step. If you need to import
multiple raw data files, you will have to set the Action back to
Import Raw Data.
Cancel Closes the Experimental Data Fitting tool.
2 Select Test Data

Once the raw test data is imported, you
must associate with a particular test type or
mode by following these steps:
3
1. Put the cursor in the data field of
the appropriate type of test.
2. Select associated field from the
10 Select Material Test Data listbox
which should have a list of the
imported raw data fields.
3. Repeat this for each test you wish
to include in the calculations
5 (curve fit).
• Typical stress-strain data

6 for Deformation Mode
tests are referenced in the
Primary column. If you
have volumetric data,
these are entered in the
Secondary column
databoxes and are
optional.
• For Viscoelastic (time relaxation data), you must turn ON the

ViscoElastic toggle. Only viscoelastic curve fitting will be done in this
case. To return to Deformation Mode, turn this toggle OFF.
• Damage models are not yet supported.
• When you press the Apply button, you will be taken to the third step.

Select Test Data Description
Uniaxial Select the field of raw test data corresponding to each of these
Biaxial tests if they exist. You need to supply at least one. The stress-
Planar Shear strain data field is referenced in the Primary column. If you have 2
Simple Shear volumetric or area data fields, they are referenced in the
Volumetric Secondary column. If no Secondary field is supplied, the material
models are assumed incompressible.
3
For time independent elastomeric materials (uniaxial, biaxial,
planar shear, simple shear and volumetric tests) the data should
be as such in the raw data file:
eng. strain_1, eng. stress_1, volumetric data_1 10
eng. strain_2, eng. stress_2, volumetric data_2
. . .
eng. strain_n, eng. stress_n, volumetric data_n
If, for uniaxial, biaxial or planar shear data, the third column is
5
left empty, the material is assumed to be incompressible.
6
442 Materials

Viscoelastic Turn this toggle ON if you wish to do a data fit on viscoelastic
relaxation data.
For visco-elastic material behavior (shear relaxation, bulk
1 relaxation and energy relaxation tests) the data should be as such
in the raw data file:
time_1, value_1 (shear modulus, bulk modulus or strain
energy)
2 energy)
time_2, value_2 (shear modulus, bulk modulus or strain
. . .
time_n, value_n (shear modulus, bulk modulus or strain
3 energy)
10
6

Damage Not yet supported. Turn this toggle ON if you wish to do a data
fit on damage models. For continuous damage (resulting from a
constant strain amplitude test) the data in the raw input file
should be: 1
cycle_1, str_energy_d_1
cycle_2, str_energy_d_2
. .
cycle_n, str_energy_d_n 2
In addition, before fitting the data, the free energy (which is the
strain energy density corresponding to the undamaged state) is
required. Notice that the data points should not include the range
of cycles at which damage did not start to evaluate. 3
For discontinuous damage (resulting from an increasing strain
amplitude test):
str_energy_d_1, 10
strain_energy_d_1/str_energy_d_1_undamaged
str_energy_d_2,
strain_energy_d_2/str_energy_d_2_undamaged
. . .
5
str_energy_d_n,
strain_energy_d_n/str_energy_d_n_undamaged
Notice that the data points should not include the range of cycles
at which damage did not start to evaluate.
6
Viscoelastic/Damage In this field, select the Viscoelastic or Damage raw test data field.
Select Material Test From this listbox you select the field corresponding to the
Data Deformation Mode or the Viscoelastic/Damage data.
Apply Once the test data is associated to the respective modes, the
Apply button will take you to the Calculate Properties action.
444 Materials
Calculate Properties Experimental Data Fitting

Once test data has been associated to a
test type or mode, the curve fit is done
by following these steps:
1. Select the material Model you
1 wish to do a curve fit for. The
available models will depend
on the test data selected in the
previous step. Hyperelastic
models will be available for
2 deformation mode test data.
Viscoelastic models will be
available for relaxation test
data.
3 2. In general you will leave Use

Test Data to All for
hyperelastic models. If
however you only want the
curve fit to use one of the
10 deformation modes, you may
set it here.
3. Press the Compute button.
The coefficient values will be
5 displayed in the Coefficients
spreadsheet.
4. To visually see the curve fit,
press the Plot button.
6 You may repeat the above four
steps for as many material
models as you wish to curve fit.
5. Select an existing material or type in a New Material Name and press the
Apply button to save the material model as either a Hyperelastic or
Viscoelastic constitutive model for use in a subsequent analysis.
• The plots are appended to the existing XY Window until you press the
Unpost Plot button. You can turn the Append function ON/OFF
under the Plot Parameters... form.
• By default, all the deformation modes are plotted along with the raw
data even if raw data has not been supplied for those mode. This is
very important. These additional modes are predicted for you. You
should always know your model’s response to each mode of
deformation due to the different types of stress states. For example, a
rule of thumb for natural rubber and some other elastomers is that the
tensile tension biaxial response should be about 1.5 to 2.5 times the
uniaxial tension response.
1
• You can turn ON/OFF these additional modes or any of the curves
under the Plot Parameters button as well as change the appearance of
plot. More control and formatting of the plot can be done under the
XY Plot application on the MSC.Patran application switch on the 2
main form.
• Viscoelastic constitutive models are useless without a Hyperelastic
constitutive model also. Be sure your model has both defined under
the same material name if you use viscoelastic properties. 3
• You may actually change the coefficient values in the Coefficients
spread sheet if you wish to see the effect they have on the curve fit.
Select one of the cells with the coefficient you wish to change, then
type in a new coefficient value in the Coefficient Value data box and 10
press the Return or Enter key. Then press the Plot button again. If you
press the Apply button, the new values will be saved in the supplied
material name.
• For viscoelastic relaxation data, the Number of Terms used in the
data fit should, as a rule of thumb, be as many as there are decades of
5
data.
• A number of optional parameters are available to message the data
and control the curve fitting. See the table below for more detailed
descriptions.
6
446 Materials
The following tables more fully describes each widget in the Experimental Data
Fitting tool:
Calculate Properties Description

Model:Neo-Hookean* This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using
the Neo-Hookean strain energy function W, which is given by:
1 W = C10*(I1 - 3)
where I1 is the first invariant of the right Cauchy-Green strain
tensor and C10 is the material parameter to be determined. For
this model, a volumetric test can not be supplied. The user may
enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly
2 incompressible material behavior is assumed.
Model:Mooney(2)* This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using
the two term Mooney-Rivlin strain energy function W, which is
given by:
3 W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3)
where I1 and I2 are the first and second invariant of the right
Cauchy-Green strain tensor and C10 and C01 are the material
parameters to be determined. For this model, a volumetric test
10 can not be supplied. The user may enter a bulk modulus. If no
bulk modulus is given, nearly incompressible material behavior is
assumed.
Model:Mooney(3)* This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using
5 the three term Mooney-Rivlin strain energy function W, which is
given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3) + C11*(I1 - 3)*(I2 - 3)
6 Cauchy-Green strain tensor and C10, C01 and C11 are the
material parameters to be determined. For this model, a
volumetric test can not be supplied. The user may enter a bulk
modulus. If no bulk modulus is given nearly incompressible
material behavior is assumed.

Model:Signiorini* This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using
the Signiorini strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3) + C20*(I1 - 3)^2
Cauchy-Green strain tensor and C10, C01 and C20 are the
1
modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly incompressible
Model:2nd Order This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using 2
Invariant* the second order invariant strain energy function W, which is
given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3) + C11*(I1 - 3)*(I2 - 3) +
C20*(I1 - 3)^2
3
Cauchy-Green strain tensor and C10, C01, C11 and C20 are the
modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly incompressible 10
Model:3rd Order This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using
Deform* the third order deformation strain energy function W, which is
given by: 5
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3)+ C11*(I1 - 3)*(I2 - 3) +
C20*(I1 - 3)^2 + C30*(I1 - 3)^3
Cauchy-Green strain tensor and C10, C01, C11, C20 and C30 are 6
the material parameters to be determined. For this model, a
modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly incompressible
Note: The data input for all of these options has been consolidated under the Jamus-Green-
Simpson option of the MSC.Patran Materials-Input-Data-Hyperelastic form.
448 Materials

Model:Yeoh This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using
the Yeoh strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C20*(I1 - 3)^2 + C30*(I1 - 3)^3
where I1 is the first invariant of the right Cauchy-Green strain
1 tensor and C10, C20 and C30 are the material parameters to be
determined. For this model, a volumetric test can not be supplied.
The user may enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given,
nearly incompressible material behavior is assumed.
10
6

Model:Ogden This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using
the Ogden strain energy function W, which is given by:
N
W = sum {(mu_n/alpha_n)*(J^(-alpha_n/3))*(lam1âlpha_n +
n=1 lam2âlpha_n + lam2âlpha_n - 3)} +
4.5*K*(J^(1/3) - 1)^2
1
where lam1, lam2 and lam3 are the principal stretch ratios, J is the
determinant of the deformation gradient, N is the number of
terms and mu_n, alpha_n and K are the material parameters to be
determined. The maximum number of terms is 10, but it is 2
recommended to use no more terms than necessary to get a
sufficiently good fit. This model can be used for incompressible as
well as for slightly compressible elastic materials. Compressibility
is included based on a constant bulk modulus. In case of
compressibility, volumetric information is needed, preferably
3
using a volumetric test, but volumetric data can also be included
for uniaxial, biaxial and planar shear tests. In order to perform a
plausible extrapolation for the compressible Ogden model,
dilatational information is needed beyond the data set. This is 10
achieved using linear extrapolation based on the two start and/or
end points of the measured data. This linear extrapolation may
restrict the validity of the response outside the range of the
measured data. For dual mode plotting (except for simple shear),
dilatational information is needed for the compressible Ogden
5
model. For a volumetric test, this readily follows from the strain,
but for uniaxial, biaxial and planar shear tests this must be
calculated. This calculation is based on the requirement that the
stress in perpendicular direction must be zero. If the fitted 6
coefficients do not fulfil this requirement, zero stresses are
returned for such a dual mode.
Note: Note that Ogden hyperelastic coefficients are different in

MSC.Marc and MSC.Nastran. For information on
experimental data fitting for the MSC.Nastran MATHP
and MATHE entries, see “Experimental Data Fitting” on
page 335.
450 Materials

Model:Foam This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using
the foam strain energy function W, which is given by:
N
W = sum {(mu_n/alpha_n)*(lam1âlpha_n + lam2âlpha_n +
1 lam2âlpha_n - 3)
n=1 +(mu_n/beta_n)*(1 - J^beta_n)}
where lam1, lam2 and lam3 are the principal stretch ratios, J is the
determinant of the deformation gradient, N is the number of
2 terms and mu_n, alpha_n and beta_n are the material parameters
to be determined. The maximum number of terms is 10, but it is
recommended to use no more terms than necessary to get a
sufficiently good fit. This model should be used for highly
compressible elastic materials. Except for the simple shear test,
3 volumetric information must be available. In order to perform a
plausible extrapolation for the foam model, dilatational
information is needed beyond the data set. This is achieved using
linear extrapolation based on the two start and/or end points of
10 the measured data. This linear extrapolation may restrict the
validity of the response outside the range of the measured data.
For dual mode plotting (except for simple shear), dilatational
information is needed for the foam model. For a volumetric test,
this readily follows from the strain, but for uniaxial, biaxial and
5 planar shear tests this must be calculated. This calculation is
based on the requirement that the stress in perpendicular
direction must be zero. If the fitted coefficients do not fulfil this
requirement, zero stresses are returned for such a dual mode.
6

Model:Arruda-Boyce Elastomer Free Energy Function; Number of coefficients 1
Ref: "A Three-Dimensional Constitutive Model For the Large

Stretch Behavior of Rubber Elastic Materials"
by: Ellen M. Arruda and Mary C. Boyce 1
J.Mech.Phys.Solids Vol.41, No.2, pp.389-412
Parameter: N -- The number of mers in a typical polymer chain -

Specified by the user. 2
Coefficient: n,k,T -- Determined by the fitter
3
n : Number of Polymer chains per unit volume
k : Boltzmann constant
T : Temperature
10
For this model, the calculation of the Bulk Modulus is not
required. A volumetric test need not be supplied.
6
452 Materials

Model:Gent Elastomer Free Energy Function; Number of coefficients 2
Ref: "A new constitutive relation for rubber"

by: A.N. Gent
1 Rubber Chemistry and Technology,
Vol.79, pp.59-61, 1996
2 Coefficient: E, I_m -- Determined by the fitter
E : small strain tensile modulus

I_m : maximum value for the first
3 invariant of deformation (I1)
WARNING: This phenomenological model is designed to exhibit
10 finite extensibility of polymer chains and forces the stresses and

tangent to assymptote to infinity as I1 approaches Im. It is
conceivable that during the solution stage, a set of trial
displacements is evaluated such that I1 > Im. In which case, the
convergence ratios can be expected to oscillate, or even worse, the
5 solution may not converge at all. Therefor, if Im < 4, it is
recommended that loads be applied in very small increments.
For this model, the calculation of the Bulk Modulus is not

6 required and a volumetric test need not be supplied.

Model:Visco Shear This command is used if experimental shear relaxation data must
Relax be fitted using the following Prony series expansion for the shear
modulus G:
N
G(t) = G_infinity + sum{G_n*exp(-t/tau_n)}
1
n=1
where t is the time, N is the number of terms and G_infinity, G_n

and tau_n are material parameters to be determined. The data
points provided by the user must give the value of the shear
modulus at different time stations, which do not need to be equi- 2
spaced.
Model:Visco Bulk This command is used if experimental bulk relaxation data must
Relax be fitted using the following Prony series expansion for the bulk
modulus K: 3
N
K(t) = K_infinity + sum{K_n*exp(-t/tau_n)}
n=1
where t is the time, N is the number of terms and K_infinity, K_n

10
and tau_n are material parameters to be determined. The data
points provided by the user must give the value of the bulk
modulus at different time stations, which do not need to be equi-
spaced. 5
Model:Visco Energy This command is used if experimental strain energy relaxation
Relax data must be fitted using the following Prony series expansion for
the strain energy W:
N 6
W(t) = W_infinity + sum{delta_n*W0*exp(-t/tau_n)}
n=1
where t is the time, N is the number of terms, W0 is the

instantaneous strain energy and W_infinity, delta_n and tau_n
are material parameters to be determined. The data points
provided by the user must give the value of the strain energy at
different time stations, which do not need to be equi-spaced.
Model:Cont. Damage Not yet supported.
454 Materials

Model:Disc. Damage Not yet supported.
Compute This command starts the data fitting program with the selected
data. After fitting, the measured and fitted curves can be
displayed and the corresponding material model coefficients and
1 the least squares error are reported. For the Mooney-Rivlin,
Ogden, Foam, Arruda-Boyce and Gent models, the response in
the modes for which no data is measured, is predicted. Notice
that if volumetric data is relevant in order to predict a uniaxial,
biaxial or planar shear mode, this is calculated using the
2 constraint of a zero stress component in a direction perpendicular
to the direction of the measured stress component. If this
calculation fails, the predicted mode will contain zero stresses.
3 If the data set contains a large number of entries, or if the model is

highly non-linear and/or contains many coefficients, then the
fitting procedure may take some time.
10 Since the curve fitting procedure does not use weighting factors
per data point, it might be useful to have many data points near
regions where an accurate response is desired.
Coefficient Value This option allows the user to manually enter the coefficients of
5 the material model and updates the response curves. You must
select the coefficient to be modified from the spread sheet and
then enter the value by pressing the Return or Enter key after
putting in the new coefficient. Notice that, although no fit is
performed, at least one set of test data must be selected. This
6 feature is available for the Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Foam, Arruda-
Boyce and Gent material models.
Plot This plots the current curve fit. The raw data and the calculated
curve fits for the supplied experimental data and the other
predicted modes are plotted.
Unpost Plot This clears the plot of all curves. By default additional data fit
curves are appended the XY Window.

New Material Name If a new name is supplied here and this material name does not
yet exist, it will be created with the appropriate constitutive
models when the Apply button is pressed.
Select Material If you want the hyperelastic or viscoelastic data to be saved into
an existing material set, select it from this listbox. 1
Apply This command copies the computed material model coefficients
into a material model: it either creates a new one as indicated by
the New Material Name or changes an existing one as selected
from Select Material.
2

Optional Parameters Description 3
Uniaxial Test: A/Ao Volumetric data of a uniaxial test can be given as: the ratio of the
V/Vo current cross sectional area and the original cross sectional area
(A/A0) or: the ratio of the current volume and the original
volume (V/V0). By default, the volumetric data is expected to be 10
in terms of A/A0. If the actual data is in terms of V/V0, use this
switch to change the type of input. Not all material models need
this information and therefore these widgets may appear
dimmed.
Biaxial Test: t/to V/Vo Volumetric data of an equibiaxial test can be given as: the ratio of
5
the current thickness and the original thickness (t/t0) or: the ratio
of the current volume and the original volume (V/V0). By
default, the volumetric data is expected to be in terms of t/t0. If
the actual data is in terms of V/V0, use this switch to change the 6
type of input. Not all material models need this information and
therefore these widgets may appear dimmed.
Planar Shear t/to V/Vo Volumetric data of a planar shear test can be given as: the ratio of
the current thickness and the original thickness (t/t0) or: the ratio
of the current volume and the original volume (V/V0) If the
actual data is in terms of V/V0, use this switch to change the type
of input. Not all material models need this information and
therefore these widgets may appear dimmed.
456 Materials

Optional Parameters Description
Mathematical Checks This command activates mathematical checks for Ogden and
Foam materials and causes the data fitter to discard the
coefficients when one of the mathematical conditions on them is
1 not satisfied. These conditions are considered to be very strict and
at times no set of coefficients may be found, or the fit may be very
poor.
Positive Coefficients Since curve fitting is a mathematical operation, the fitted material
model coefficients may be physically non-realistic. This command
2 forces the fitting procedure to return coefficients which are all
positive. The quality of the fit may be worse than that without this
restriction. For example Ogden coefficients come in pairs. If each
pair of modulus and exponent have the same sign, stability is
3 guaranteed. If one is positive and the other negative, the material
might be unstable. Thus you must visually determine the stability
range of the model.
Extrapolate For Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Foam, Arruda-Boyce and Gent
10 models, this command gives the possibility to get the response of
the material outside the range of measurements. This might be
important if the deformations of the structure to be analyzed
exceed those of the experiments. One needs to set the new left and
right bounds up to which the extrapolation will be performed.
5 Notice that when volumetric information is provided, outside the
range of measurements the volumetric data is calculated based on
linear extrapolation using the two closest measured data points.
Error The least squares error to be minimized during data fitting can be
6 based on absolute or relative errors:
Err_Abs = sum {[data_measured(i) - data_calculated(i)]^2}
i
Err_Rel = sum {[1 -data_calculated(i)/data_measured(i)]^2}
i
This command can be used to switch between relative (default)

and absolute errors.

Optional Parameters Description
Error Limit During curve fitting, an optimal set of material coefficients is
searched for using the Downhill Simplex method. If the least
squares error corresponding to a set of material coefficients is
larger than the error limit, a new minimum will be searched for,
unless the maximum number of iterations has been reached. This
1
command sets the error limit. If, upon fitting, the reported error is
larger than the error limit, searching for a new minimum has been
terminated due to reaching the maximum number of iterations.
Number of Iterations At times, the data fitter may arrive at coefficients which 2
correspond to a minimum in the objective function, not fulfilling
the least squares error limit. This command defines how many
attempts the program will make to exit the minimum. The
maximum number of iterations is 500. 3
Convergence The data fitter uses the Downhill Simplex method to find a (local)
Tolerance minimum. This method uses several sets of material coefficients
and calculates the corresponding objective functions. Based on
the values of the objective functions, the sets of material
coefficients are modified. This process is terminated when:
10
2*abs{(fh-fl)/(abs(fh)+abs(fl))} < convergence tolerance
in which fh is the highest and fl is the lowest objective function

found so far. The process is also terminated after 2000 trials if the
convergence tolerance has not been reached. This command sets
5
the convergence tolerance.
Use Fictive Coefficient For Foam models, toggle this value to ON in order to use the
fictive Poisson's ratio to create volumetric information.
6
Fictive Coefficient Supply the fictive Poisson’s ratio here.
OK Closes the Optional Parameters form.
458 Materials

Plot Parameters Description
Append Curves If this toggle is ON, curves keep accumulating on the XY Window.
If it is OFF, the curves are cleared each time a new data fit is done
and plotted.
1 X-Axis Options You can plot the curves in linear or log scales.
Y-Axis Options
Deformation Modes If any of these toggles is OFF, that particular deformation mode
will be removed from the XY Window.
2 OK Closes the Plot Parameters form.
Note: The plotting and deleting of plots in this utility tool is fairly self contained and
little, if any, need to use the XY Plot application is necessary. If however, you
find it necessary to use the XY Plot application and post/unpost curves, the
3 naming convention is as such:
Raw Data Curve Name = R_"mode type"_"field id"_"color"_"marker type
Data Fit Curve Name = "model"_"mode type"_"field id"_"color"_"line type

10 where:
mode type (string) = "U" : Uniaxial
"B" : Biaxial
"P": Planar Shear
5 "S" : Simple Shear
"V": Volumetric
"C" : VisCoelastic
model (string)= "N" : Neo-Hookean
6 "M2" : Mooney 2
"M3" : Mooney 3
"S" : Signiorini
"2O" : Second Order Invariant
"3O" : Third Order Deformation
"Y" : Yeoh
"O#": Ogden # where # is the number of terms, e.g., O2
"F#" : Foam # where # is the number of terms, e.g., F3
"B" : Boyce
"G" : Gent
"CD" : Continuous damage
"DD" : Discontinuous Damange

"SV" : Shear Relaxation Visco
"BV" : Bulk Relaxation Visco
"EV": Energy Relaxation Visco
10
6
460 Materials
10
6
SECTION
Element Library
11
■ Overview
■ Element Selection
■ Global Element Controls
■ Mass Elements, Springs, Dampers, and Bush Elements
■ Gap Elements
■ Line Elements
■ Membranes, Panels, and Shells
■ Solid Elements
462 Element Library
11.1 Overview
The heart of a finite element program lies in its element library which allows you to
model a structure for analysis. MSC.Nastran has a very comprehensive element
library which lets you model 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D structures. This section gives some basic
definitions of the element types available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. Please
note, these elements differ from those used in other portions of MSC.Nastran.
1
Element Types
Each element has five definitive characteristics that determine its behavior:
2 • Class
• Number of Nodes
• Interpolation
• Degrees of Freedom
3 • Integration Method
Class
4 The type of geometric domain that an element represents determines the class of the
element. Listed below are the classes of elements in the MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear element library.
• Beam Elements - is a 3-D bar with axial, bending, and torsional stiffness.
11 • Shell Elements - is a curved, thin or thick structure with membrane/bending
capabilities.
• Plate Elements - is a flat thin structure carrying in-plane and out-of-plane
loads.
6 • Continuum Elements
• Plane stress is a thin plate with in-plane stresses only. All normal and
shear stresses associated with the out-of-plane direction are assumed
to be zero. (All plane strain elements lie in the global x-y plane.)
• Generalized plane strain is the same as plane strain except that the
normal z-strain can be a prescribed constant or function of x and y.
• Axisymmetric elements are describe in 2D, but represent a full 3D
structure where the geometry and loading are both axisymmetric.
Overview 463
• 3-D solid is a solid structure with only translational degrees of

freedom for each node (linear or quadratic interpolation functions).
• Truss Elements- is a 3-D rod with axial stiffness only (no bending).
• Membrane Elements -is a thin sheet with in-plane stiffness only (no bending
resistance).
• Gap Elements 1
• Points/Springs/Damper Elements
• Rigid Constraints
Number of Nodes 2
The number of nodes for an element define where the displacements are calculated in
the analysis. Elements with only corner nodes are classified as first order elements and
the calculation of displacements at locations within the element are made by linear
interpolation. Elements that contain midside nodes are second order elements and
quadratic interpolations are made for calculating displacements.
3
In MSC.Nastran the number of nodes is designated at the end of the element name.
For example, a CQUAD4 has 4 nodes.
Interpolation
4
Interpolation (shape) function is an assumed function relating the displacements at a
point inside an element to the displacements at the nodes of an element. In
MSC.Nastran, three types of shape functions are used: linear, quadratic, and cubic.
Certain types of enhancements, such as Assumed Strain, shape functions, may
11
increase the elements ability to capture accurately certain types of deformation states.
Degrees of Freedom
Degrees of freedom (DOF) is the number of unknowns at a node. In the general case,
6
there are six degrees of freedom (DOFs) at a node in structural analysis (three
translations, three rotations). In special cases, the number of DOFs is two (translations)
for plane stress, plane strain, and axisymmetric elements; three (translations) for 3-D
truss element; six (three translations, three rotations) for a 3-D beam element).
Integration
Numerical integration is a method used for evaluating integrals over an element.
Element quantities – such as stresses, strains, and temperatures – are calculated at
each integration point of the element. Full integration (quadrature) requires, for every
464 Element Library
element, 2d integration points for linear interpolation and 3d points for quadratic
interpolation, where scalar “d” is the number of geometric dimensions of an element
(that is, d = 2 for a quad; d = 3 for a hexahedron). Reduced integration uses a lower
number of integration points than necessary to integrate exactly. For example, for an
8-node quadrilateral, the number of integration points is reduced from 9 to 4 and, for
a 20-node hexahedron, from 27 to 8. For some elements, an “hourglass” control
1 method is used to insure an accurate solution.
11
6
Element Selection 465
11.2 Element Selection

The MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear element library provides a complete finite
element modeling capability. Selecting elements to use for a SOL 600 analysis can be
very different than elements you might use for other solution sequences. In particular,
the large strains encountered in nonlinear analysis have implications for the element
formulations.
1
SOL 600 selects appropriate element formulations based on the analysis type, the
elements you use in constructing your model, element properties, and global
parameters. While most of the element formulation decisions made by SOL 600
require no additional user input, some of the formulation principles are discussed in
this section. 2
Element Interpolation
All of the elements in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are formulated in “element”
coordinate systems described in the MSC.Marc Volume B: Element Library. For 3
almost all elements, primary vector quantities (such as displacements) are defined in
terms of nodal values with scalar interpolation functions. When the interpolation
function for these vector quantities are the same interpolation functions used to define
the geometry (i.e., the position vector) the elements are called isoparametric. Such
elements are guaranteed to be able to exactly represent all rigid body modes and
4
homogeneous deformation modes, a necessary condition for convergence to the exact
solution as the mesh is refined (i.e. the patch test).
Element Integration 11
All elements are integrated numerically. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear normally
uses “full” integration elements but “reduced” integration elements are also available.
For full integration, the number of integration points is sufficient to integrate the
governing virtual work expression exactly, at least for linear material behavior. All 6
triangular and tetrahedral elements in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear use full
integration. Reduced integration can be used for quadrilaterals and hexahedral
elements; in this procedure, the number of integration points is sufficient to exactly
integrate the contributions of the strain field that are one order less then the order of
the interpolation. The (incomplete) higher-order contributions to the strain field
present in these elements will not be integrated.
466 Element Library
Hourglassing
The advantage of the reduced integration elements is that the strains and stresses are
calculated at the location that provide optimal accuracy, the so-called Barlow points.
The reduced integration elements also tend to underestimate the stiffness of the
element which often gives better results in a typically overly-stiff finite element
analysis displacement method. An additional advantage is that the reduced number
1 of integration points decreases CPU time and storage requirements. The disadvantage
is that the reduced integration procedure may admit deformation modes that cause no
straining at the integration points. These zero-energy modes cause a phenomenon
called “hourglassing,” where the zero energy mode starts propagating through the
mesh, leading to inaccurate solutions. This problem is particularly severe in first-order
2 quadrilaterals and hexahedrals. To prevent these excessive deformations, an
additional artificial stiffness is added to these elements. In this so-called hourglass
control procedure, a small artificial stiffness is associated with the zero-energy modes.
This procedure is used in many of the alternate solid and shell elements in
3 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. All primary elements translated from the
11
Figure 11-1 Hourglassing
6 standard MSC.Nastran finite elements are fully integrated. Reduced integration

elements may be selected using PARAM,MRALIAS. For more information, see
“MRALIAS,” on page 689 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
For a nonisotropic elastic material, an average shear modulus is used to calculate the
hourglass stiffness: for the ELASTIC ORTHOTROPIC or ANISOTROPIC options
G = ( D 1212 + D 1313 + D 2323 ) Eq. 11-1
and for ELASTIC ENGINEERING CONSTANTS or LAMINA options as:

Element Selection 467
1
G = --- ( G 12 + G 13 + G 23 ) Eq. 11-2
3
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear shell elements use a small artificial stiffness

associated with rotation about the shell normals. The default stiffness values used are
sufficiently small such that the artificial energy content is negligible.
Incompressible Elements 1
Sometimes fully integrated solid elements are unsuitable for the analysis of
(approximately) incompressible material behavior. The reason for this is that the
material behavior forces the material to deform (approximately) without volume
changes. Fully integrated solid element meshes, and in particular lower-order element 2
meshes, do not allow such deformations (other than purely homogeneous
deformation). For fully incompressible behavior, another complication occurs: the
bulk modulus and hence the stiffness matrix becomes infinitely large. For this case, a
mixed (Herrmann) formulation is required, where the displacement field is
augmented with a hydrostatic pressure field. In this formulation, only the inverse of 3
the bulk modulus appears, and consequently the contribution of the operator matrix
vanishes. In this formulation, the hydrostatic pressure field play the role of a Lagrange
multiplier enforcing the incompressibility constraints.
4
Overriding MSC.Nastran Element Selections
In most cases MSC.Nastran selects an equivalent MSC.Marc element to use in the
analysis. The selection is based on the considerations discussed above. In some cases
an experienced MSC.Marc user may want to use alternate elements and may do so by 11
adding a Parameter to the MSC.nastran Input File as follows.
PARAM,MRALIAS
For more information on the MSC.Marc override parameter, see “MRALIAS,” on
page 689 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide. 6
468 Element Library
11.3 Global Element Controls

Assumed Strain
Conventional isoparametric four-node plane stress and plane strain, and eight-node
brick elements behave poorly in bending. The reason is that these elements do not
capture a linear variation in shear strain which is present in bending when a single
1 element is used in the bending direction. As a default in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear, the element interpolation functions have been modified such that shear
strain variation can be better represented. For elastic isotropic bending problems, this
allows the exact displacements to be obtained with only a single element through the
thickness. Use PARAM, MARCASUM, 1 to activated this option.
2
Constant Dilatation
When performing nearly incompressible analysis with displacement based elements,
the conventional isoparametric interpolation methods result in poor behavior for
3 lower order elements. To address this case, an integration scheme option is included
(default) which makes the dilatational strain constant throughout the element.
Constant dilatational element formulation is preferred in approximately
incompressible, inelastic analysis, such as large strain plasticity, because conventional
4 elements can produce volumetric locking due to overconstraints for nearly
incompressible behavior. This option is also the formulation of choice for elastic-
plastic analysis and creep analysis because of the potentially nearly incompressible
behavior. Use PARAM, MARCDILT, 1 to activate this option.
11 Setting Global Element Parameters in MSC.Patran

Assumed strain, constant dilatation, plane stress, and reduced integration options, are
turned ON and OFF for the entire model.
6
Global Element Controls 469
1. On the Analysis Application form, select Solution Type..., then click

Solution Parameters...
2. Use the check boxes to turn OFF and ON Assumed Strain and Constant
Dilatation. 4
11
6
470 Element Library
11.4 Mass Elements, Springs, Dampers, and Bush

Elements
The following 0D and 1D special purpose elements allow you to model very specific
types of behavior.
1 Entry Description Cross-Ref to Element

Info in QRG
CMASSi Defines scalar mass elements. “CMASS1” on page 1101
CONM1, Defines a concentrated mass at a grid point. “CONM1” on page 1110
2 CONM2
“CONM2” on page 1111
CELAS1 Defines a scalar spring element. “CELAS1” on page 1064
CDAMPi Defines a scalar damper element. “CDAMP1” on page 1052
3 CVISC Defines a viscous damper element. “CVISC” on page 1201
CBUSH Defines a generalized spring-and-damper “CBUSH” on page 1040
structural element that may be nonlinear or
frequency dependent.
4 CBUSH1D Defines the connectivity of a “CBUSH1D” on
one-dimensional spring and viscous damper page 1044
element.
11 MSC.Patran FE Application Input Data

These elements are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type
combination on the Element Properties Application form.
6 Object Type Options Bulk Data Entries

0D Mass Coupled, Grounded, Lumped CONM1, CONM2
1D Mass CMASSi
0D Grounded CELAS1
Spring
1D Spring CELAS1
0D Grounded
Damper
1D Damper Scalar, Viscous CDAMPi, CVISC
Mass Elements, Springs, Dampers, and Bush Elements 471
Object Type Options Bulk Data Entries

OD Grounded CBUSH
Bush
1D Bush CBUSH1D
11
6
472 Element Library
11.5 Gap Elements

Gap elements are used in modeling contact problems. These elements allow for gap
opening and closing as well as friction along a surface. Gap elements should normally
be replaced with 2D or 3D contact. Gaps for SOL 600 are only offered for compatibility
with other MSC.Nastran solution sequences and cannot be simulated exactly the same
in SOL 600 as in the other solution sequences.
1
Entry Description Cross-Ref to Element
Info in QRG
CGAP Defines a gap or friction element. “CGAP” on page 1078
2
MSC.Patran FE Application Input Data
3
1D Gap Adaptive, Nonadaptive CGAP
11
6
Line Elements 473
11.6 Line Elements

MSC.Nastran offers a wide variety of line elements that include beams, bars, rods.
Beams can be defined using standard cross sections supplied in a library or general
cross sections that are user defined.

Info in QRG
1
CBAR Defines a simple beam element. “CBAR” on page 1024
CBEAM Defines a beam element. “CBEAM” on page 1031
CBEND Defines a curved beam, curved pipe, or elbow “CBEND” on page 1037 2
element.
CROD Defines a tension-compression-torsion element. “CROD” on page 1166
CONROD Defines a rod element without reference to a “CONROD” on
property entry. page 1113 3
CTUBE Defines a tension-compression-torsion tube “CTUBE” on page 1200
element.
MSC.Patran FE Application Input Data 4

Line elements are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type
Object Type Options Bulk Data Entries 11

1D Beam General Section CBAR
Curved w/ General Section CBEND
Curved w/Pipe Section CBEND 6
Lumped Section CBEAM/PBCOMP
Tapered Section CBEAM
General Section (CBEAM) CBEAM
1D Rod General Section CROD/CONROD
Pipe Section CTUBE
474 Element Library
11.7 Membranes, Panels, and Shells

MSC.Nastran includes standard triangular and quadrilateral elements as well as a
special purpose shear element. By specifying element properties these standard
elements can represent anticipated membrane, bending, and shearing responses
1 Entry Description Cross-Ref to Element

Info in QRG
CTRIA3, Defines an isoparametric “CTRIA3” on page 1185
membrane-bending or plane strain
triangular plate element.
2 CTRIA6 Defines a curved triangular shell element or “CTRIA6” on page 1189
plane strain with six grid points.
CQUAD4, Defines an isoparametric “CQUAD4” on page 1141
3 quadrilateral plate element.
CQUAD8 Defines a curved quadrilateral shell or plane “CQUAD8” on page 1145
strain element with eight grid points.
4 CTRIAR Defines an isoparametric

membrane-bending triangular plate
“CTRIAR” on page 1193
element.
CQUADR Defines an isoparametric membrane and “CQUADR” on page 1149
11 bending quadrilateral plate element.
CSHEAR Defines a shear panel element. “CSHEAR” on page 1170

6 These 2D elements are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type
Object Type Option 1 Option 2 Bulk Data Entries

2D Shell Homogeneous Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PSHELL
Revised CTRIAR, CQUADR
w/PSHELL
Membranes, Panels, and Shells 475
Object Type Option 1 Option 2 Bulk Data Entries

p- N/A
formulation
Laminate Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PCOMP 1
w/PCOMP
Equlvalent Section Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8 2
w/PSHELL
w/PSHELL 3
p- N/A
formulation
2D Bending Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
Panel CQUAD4, CQUAD8 4
w/PSHELL
w/PSHELL
11
p- N/A
formulation
2D Membrane Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8 6
w/PSHELL
w/PSHELL
p- N/A
formulation
2D Shear Panel CSHEAR w/PSHEAR
476 Element Library
11.8 Solid Elements

MSC.Nastran Advanced Nonlinear (SOL 600) contains continuum elements that can
be used to model plane stress, plane strain, generalized plane strain, axisymmetric
and three-dimensional solids. These elements have only displacement degrees of
freedom. As a result, solid elements are not efficient for modeling thin structures
dominated by bending. Either beam or shell elements should be used in these cases.
1
The solid elements that are available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear have either
linear or quadratic interpolation functions.
They include
2 4-, 6-, and 8-node plane stress elements (create plane stress elements using PARAM,
MRALIAS)
3-, 4-, 6-, and 8-node plane strain elements
3 3-, 4-, 6-, and 8-node axisymmetric ring elements

8-, 10-, and 20-node brick elements
4- and 10-node tetrahedron
4 In general, the elements in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear use a full-integration

procedure. Some elements use reduced integration. The lower-order reduced
integration elements include an hourglass stabilization procedure to eliminate the
singular modes.
11 Continuum elements are widely used for thermal stress analysis. For each of these
elements, there is a corresponding element available for heat transfer analysis
(available in version 2005) in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. As a result, you can use
the same mesh for the heat transfer and thermal stress analyses.
6 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has no singular element for fracture mechanics

analysis. However, in a future release (possibly version 2005) the simulation of stress
singularities can be accomplished by moving the midside nodes of 8-node
quadrilateral and 20-node brick elements to quarter-point locations near the crack tip.
Many fracture mechanics analyses have used this quarter-point technique
successfully.
The 4- and 8-node quadrilateral elements can be degenerated into triangles, and the
8-and 20-node solid brick elements can be degenerated into wedges and tetrahedra
by collapsing the appropriate corner and midside nodes. The number of nodes per
element is not reduced for degenerated elements. The same node number is used
repeatedly for collapsed sides or faces. When degenerating incompressible elements,
Solid Elements 477
exercise caution to ensure that a proper number of Lagrange multipliers remain. You
are advised to use the higher-order triangular or tetrahedron elements wherever
possible, as opposed to using collapsed quadrilaterals and hexahedra.
Axisymmetric Elements
Solids of revolution (axisymmetric solids) subjected to axially symmetric loading can
be modeled using the elements described in this section. For these problems, the 1
coordinate convention is a cylindrical system. Because of symmetry, the stress
components are independent of the angular coordinate so the components uq, grq,
gqz, trq, and tqz are zero. The nonzero components are sr, sq, sz, and trz.

2
Info in QRG
CTRIAX6 Defines an isoparametric and axisymmetric “CTRIAX6” on page 1198
triangular cross section ring element with
midside grid points. 3
CTRIAX Defines an axisymmetric triangular element “CTRIAX” on page 1196
with up to 6 grid points.
CQUADX Defines an axisymmetric quadrilateral
element with up to nine grid points.
“CQUADX” on page 1152
4
Axisymmetric elements are generated in MSC.Patran using the following 11
Object/Type combination on the Element Properties Application form.

2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric
6
• Standard CTRIAX6,
• Hyperelastic CTRIAX, CQUADX
• PLPLANE CTRIAX, CQUADX
Plane Strain Elements

Plane strain problems involve a long body whose geometry and loading do not vary
significantly in the longitudinal direction. In these problems, the dependent variables
can be assumed to be functions of only the x and y coordinates, provided we consider
478 Element Library
a cross section at some distance away from the ends. If it is further assumed that the
displacement component in the z direction is zero at every cross section then the strain
components εz, γyz, and γ zx vanish and the remaining non-zero strain components are
εx, εy and γxy. Also, since εz is assumed zero, the stress σz can be expressed in terms of
σx and σy for the linear elastic case as:
σz = ν ( σx + σy ) Eq. 11-3
1
Info in QRG
CTRIA3, Defines an isoparametric “CTRIA3” on page 1185
2 membrane-bending or plane strain
triangular plate element.
CTRIA6 Defines a curved triangular shell element “CTRIA6” on page 1189
or plane strain with six grid points.
3 CQUAD4, Defines an isoparametric “CQUAD4” on page 1141
quadrilateral plate element.
CQUAD8 Defines a curved quadrilateral shell or “CQUAD8” on page 1145
4 plane strain element with eight grid points.
CTRIAR Defines an isoparametric “CTRIAR” on page 1193
membrane-bending triangular plate
element.
11 CQUADR Defines an isoparametric membrane and “CQUADR” on page 1149
bending quadrilateral plate element.
6 MSC.Patran FE Application Input Data


2D 2D Solid Plane Strain
• Standard CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PSHELL
Solid Elements 479

• Revised CTRIAR, CQUADR
w/PSHELL
• p-Formulation N/A
• Hyperelastic CTRIA3, CTRIA6,

CQUAD4, CQUAD8
1
w/PLPLANE
3D Solid Elements
These are all isoparametric solid elements. These elements may have either a
2
homogeneous material definition, meaning that the element is made of a single
material, or a laminated material definition.
Entry Description Cross-Ref to Element 3

Info in QRG
CHEXA Defines the connections of the “CHEXA” on page 1097
six-sided solid element with eight to
twenty grid points. 4
CTETRA Defines the connections of the “CTETRA” on page 1182
four-sided solid element with four to
ten grid points.
CPENTA Defines the connections of a five-sided “CPENTA” on page 1136 11
solid element with six to fifteen grid
points.
MSC.Patran FE Application Input Data 6

Object Type Options Options Bulk Data Entries

3D Solid • Homogeneous • Standard CHEXA, CTETRA,
CPENTA
w/PSOLID
• p-Formulation N/A
480 Element Library
Object Type Options Options Bulk Data Entries

• Hyperelastic w/PLSOLID
• Laminate CHEXA, CTETRA,

CPENTA
w/PCOMP
1
11
6
SECTION
Contact
12
■ Overview
■ Contact Methodology
■ Defining Contact Bodies
■ Selecting and Controlling Contact Behavior
■ References
482 Contact
12.1 Overview
The simulation of many physical problems requires the ability to model the contact
phenomena. This includes analysis of interference fits, rubber seals, tires, crash, and
manufacturing processes among others. The analysis of contact behavior is complex
because of the requirement to accurately track the motion of multiple geometric
bodies, and the motion due to the interaction of these bodies after contact occurs. This
1 includes representing the friction between surfaces and heat transfer between the
bodies if required. The numerical objective is to detect the motion of the bodies, apply
a constraint to avoid penetration, and apply appropriate boundary conditions to
simulate the frictional behavior and heat transfer. Several procedures have been
2 developed to treat these problems including the use of Perturbed or Augmented
Lagrangian methods, penalty methods, and direct constraints. Furthermore, contact
simulation has often required the use of special contact or gap elements. MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear allows contact analysis to be performed automatically without the
use of special contact elements. A robust numerical procedure to simulate these
3 complex physical problems has been implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear.
Contact problems can be classified as one of the following types of contact.
4 • Deformable-Deformable contact between two- and three-dimensional

deformable bodies.
• Rigid - Deformable contact between a deformable body and a rigid body, for
two- or three-dimensional cases.
5 • Glued contact in two and three dimensions. This is a general capability for
tying (bonding) two deformable bodies, or a deformable body and a rigid
body, to each other.
Contact problems involve a variety of different geometric and kinematic situations.
12 Some contact problems involve small relative sliding between the contacting surfaces,
while others involve large sliding. Some contact problems involve contact over large
areas, while others involve contact between discrete points. The general Contact Body
approach adopted by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear to model contact can be used
to handle most contact problem definitions.
The contact body approach provides two formulations for modeling the interaction
between surfaces of structures. One formulation is a small-sliding formulation, in
which the surfaces can only undergo small sliding relative to each other, but may
undergo arbitrary rotation. An example of this type of application is the classical
Hertz contact problem. The second formulation is a large-sliding formulation, where
separation and sliding of large amplitude, and arbitrary rotation of the surfaces, may
Overview 483
arise. An example is the modeling of a rubber tire rolling on the ground. Currently,
the contact pair approach does not support large-sliding contact between two three-
dimensional deformable surfaces.
A special case of the small-sliding formulation is glued contact, in which the surfaces
are unable to penetrate each other, separate from each other, or slide relative to each
other. This feature is useful for mesh refinement purposes.
1
12
484 Contact
12.2 Contact Methodology

This section describes how contact is implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600).
Contact Bodies
1 There are two types of contact bodies in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear –
deformable and rigid. Deformable bodies are simply a collection of finite elements as
shown below.
Figure 12-1 Deformable Body

4 This body has three key aspects to it:
1. The elements which make up the body.
2. The nodes on the external surfaces which might contact another body or
5 itself. These nodes are treated as potential contact nodes.
3. The edges (2-D) or faces (3-D) which describe the outer surface which a node
on another body (or the same body) might contact. These edges/faces are
treated as potential contact segments.
12 Note that a body can be multiply connected (have holes in itself). It is also possible for
a body to be composed of both triangular elements and quadrilateral elements in 2-D
or tetrahedral elements and brick elements in 3-D. Beam elements and shells are also
available for contact.
Each node and element should be in, at most, one body. The elements in a body are
defined using the BCBODY option. It is not necessary to identify the nodes on the
exterior surfaces as this is done automatically. The algorithm used is based on the fact
that nodes on the boundary are on element edges or faces that belong to only one
element. Each node on the exterior surface is treated as a potential contact node. In
many problems, it is known that certain nodes never come into contact; in such cases,
Contact Methodology 485
the BCHANGE option can be used to identify the relevant nodes. As all nodes on free
surfaces are considered contact nodes, if there is an error in the mesh generation such
that internal holes or slits exist, undesirable results can occur.
The potential segments composed of edges or faces are treated in potentially two
ways. The default is that they are considered as piece-wise linear (PWL). As an
alternative, a cubic spline (2-D) or a Coons surface (3-D) can be placed through them.
The BCBODY option is used to activate this procedure. This improves the accuracy of 1
the calculation of the normal.
Rigid bodies are composed of curves (2-D) or surfaces (3-D) or meshes with only
thermal elements in coupled problems. The most significant aspect of rigid bodies is
that they do not distort. Deformable bodies can contact rigid bodies, but contact
between rigid bodies is not considered.
2
They can be created either in CAD systems and transferred through MSC.Patran or
some other GUI into MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, created within MSC.Patran, or
created directly through the MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear input. There are several
different types of curves and surfaces that can be entered including:
3
Table 12-1 Geometrical Entities Used
in Modeling Contact
2-D 3-D 4
line 4-node patch
circular arc ruled surface
spline surface of revolution
NURB Bezier 5
poly-surface
cylinder
sphere
NURB 12
trimmed NURB
Within MSC.Patran, all contact curves or surfaces are mathematically treated as

NURB surfaces. This allows the greatest level of generality. Within the analysis, these
rigid surfaces can be treated in two ways – discrete piecewise linear lines (2-D) or
patches (3-D), or as analytical NURB surfaces. When the discrete approach is used, all
geometric primitives are subdivided into straight segments or flat patches. You have
control over the density of these subdivisions to approximate a curved surface within
a desired degree of accuracy. This subdivision is also relevant when determining the
corner conditions ( see “Corner Conditions” on page 499). The treatment of the rigid
486 Contact
bodies as NURB surfaces is advantageous because it leads to greater accuracy in the

representation of the geometry and a more accurate calculation of the surface normal.
Additionally, the variation of the surface normal is continuous over the body which
leads to a better calculation of the friction behavior and a better convergence.
To create a rigid body, you can either read in the curve and surface geometry created
from a CAD system or create the geometry in MSC.Patran, or directly enter it into the
1 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear bulk data. You then use the BCBODY option to select
which geometric entities are to be a part of the rigid body. An important consideration
for a rigid body is the definition of the interior side and the exterior side. For
two-dimensional analysis, the interior side is formed by the right-hand rule when
moving along the body.
2
2
1
3 2
3
3 Interior
1
Side
4
Interior Side
4 Figure 12-2 Orientation of Rigid Body Segments
For three-dimensional analysis, the interior side is formed by the right-hand rule
along a patch. The interior side is visualized in MSC.Patran as the side with markers,
the exterior side is visualized in MSC.Patran as the side without markers.
5 It is not necessary for rigid bodies to define the complete body. Only the bounding
surface needs to be specified. You should take care, however, that the deforming body
cannot slide out of the boundary curve in 2-D (Figure 12-3). This means that it must
always be possible to decompose the displacement increment into a component
12 normal and a component tangential to the rigid surface.
1
Incorrect Correct
Figure 12-3 Deformable Surface Sliding Out of Rigid Surface
Numbering of Contact Bodies

2
When defining contact bodies for a deformable-to-deformable analysis, it is important
to define them in the proper order. As a general rule, a body with a finer mesh should
be defined before a body with a coarser mesh. 3
Note: For problems involving adaptive meshing or automated remeshing starting
in version 2005, care must be taken to satisfy this rule before as well as after
the mesh change.
If one has defined a body numbering which violates the general rule, or if the rule is 4
violated upon remeshing, then a BCTABLE definition option can be used to modify
the order in which contact will be established. This order can be directly user-defined
or decided by the program. In the latter case, the order is based on the rule that if two
deformable bodies might come into contact, searching is done for nodes of the body
having the smallest element edge length. It should be noted that this implies
5
single-sided contact for this body combination, as opposed to the default
double-sided contact.
Contact Detection
12
During the incremental procedure, each potential contact node is first checked to see
whether it is near a contact segment. The contact segments are either edges of other 2-
D deformable bodies, faces of 3-D deformable bodies, or segments from rigid bodies.
By default, each node could contact any other segment including segments on the
body that it belongs to. This allows a body to contact itself. To simplify the
computation, it is possible to use the BCTABLE entry to indicate that a particular body
will or will not contact another body. This is often used to indicate that a body will not
contact itself. During the iteration process, the motion of the node is checked to see
whether it has penetrated a surface by determining whether it has crossed a segment.
488 Contact
Because there can be a large number of nodes and segments, efficient algorithms have
been developed to expedite this process. A bounding box algorithm is used so that it
is quickly determined whether a node is near a segment. If the node falls within the
bounding box, more sophisticated techniques are used to determine the exact status
of the node.
During the contact process, it is unlikely that a node exactly contacts the surface. For
1 this reason, a contact tolerance is associated with each surface.
rance
2 x Tole
3 Figure 12-4 Contact Tolerance
If a node is within the contact tolerance, it is considered to be in contact with the

segment. The contact tolerance is calculated by the program as the smaller of 5% of the
smallest element side or 25% of the smallest (beam or shell) element thickness. It is
4 also possible for you to define the contact tolerance through the input.
(t) ( trial )
During an increment, if node A moves from A to A ( t + ∆t ) , where
( trial )
A ( t + ∆t ) is beyond the contact tolerance, the node is considered to have
penetrated. In such a case, either the increment is divided into subincrements as
5 discussed in “MSC.Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information under the section
titled Mathematical Aspects of Contact” or the increment is reduced in size.
12 A(t)
Atrial (t + ∆t)
Figure 12-5 Trial Displacement with Penetration

The size of the contact tolerance has a significant impact on the computational costs
and the accuracy of the solution. If the contact tolerance is too small, detection of
contact is difficult, leading to higher costs. Also many nodes are more likely to be
considered penetrating leading to increase in increment splitting, therefore,
increasing the computational costs. If the contact tolerance is too large, nodes are
considered in contact prematurely, resulting in a loss of accuracy. Furthermore, nodes
might “penetrate” the surface by a large amount.
1
An effective compromise is to bias the tolerance area so that a smaller distance is on
the outside surface than on the inside surface. This is done by entering a bias factor.
The bias factor should have a value between 0.0 and 1.0. The default in MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear is 0.9. This results in good accuracy and reasonable computational
costs. In analyses involving frictional contact, a bias (recommended value: 0.95 - 0.99) 2
to the contact core is also found beneficial to facilitate convergence.
In some instances, you might wish to influence the decision regarding the deformable
segment a node contacts (or does not contact). This can be done using the EXCLUDE
variable on the BCBODY bulk data entry. 3
(1 - Bias)∗ tolerance 4
(1 + Bias)∗ tolerance
Figure 12-6 Biased Contact Tolerance

5
Shell Contact
A node on a shell makes contact when the position of the node plus or minus half the
thickness projected with the normal comes into contact with another segment. In 2-D, 12
this can be shown as:
490 Contact
Shell
Midsurface
1 rance
x A t
2
2x tole
x
Figure 12-7 Default Shell Contact
2 x1 = A + n t ⁄ 2
x2 = A – n t ⁄ 2
If point x or y falls within the contact tolerance distance of segment S, node A is

3 considered in contact with the segment S. Here x 1 and x 2 are the position vectors of
a point on the surfaces 1 and 2 on the shell, A is the position vector of a point (node in
a discretized model) on the midsurface of the shell, n is the normal to the midsurface,
and t is the shell thickness.
4 As the shell has finite thickness, the node (depending on the direction of motion) can
physically contact either the top surface, bottom surface, or mathematically contact
can be based upon the midsurface. You can control whether detection occurs with
either both surfaces, the top surface, the bottom surface, or the middle surface. In such
cases, either two or one segment will be created at the appropriate physical location.
5 Note that these segments will be dependent, not only on the motion of the shell, but
also the current shell thickness.
12
S1
n n S1
2
S2
2
Include Both Segments Top Segment Only

1
2
n
S1
S2 2
1
1 2
Bottom Segments Only Ignore Shell Thickness
Figure 12-8 Selective Shell Contact

3
1, S 2 are segments associated with shell consisting of node 1 and 2.
Neighbor Relations
When a node is in contact with a rigid surface, it tends to slide from one segment to 4
another. In 2-D, the segments are always continuous and so are the segment numbers.
Hence, a node in contact with segment n slides to segment n – 1 or to segment
n + 1 . This simplifies the implementation of contact.
5
n-1
n
n+1
Figure 12-9 Neighbor Relationship (2-D)

12
In 3-D, the segments are often discontinuous. This can be due to the subdivision
of matching surfaces or, more likely, the CAD definition of the under lying
surface geometry.
492 Contact
Nonmatching
Segments
2
Continuous Surface Segments Discontinuous Surface Geometry
Figure 12-10 Neighbor Relationship (3-D)
3 Continuous surface geometry is highly advantageous as a node can slide from one
segment to the next with no interference (assuming the corner conditions are
satisfied). Discontinuous surface geometry results in additional operations when a
node slides off a patch and cannot find an adjacent segment. Hence, it is advantageous
to use geometry clean-up tools to eliminate small sliver surfaces and make the
4 surfaces both physically continuous and topologically contiguous.
Dynamic Impact
The Newmark-beta and the Single Step Houbolt procedure have the capability to
5 allow variable time steps and, when using the user-defined fixed time step procedure,
the time step is split by the algorithm to satisfy the contact conditions.
For most dynamic impact problems, the Single Step Houbolt method is
recommended, as this procedure possesses high-frequency dissipation. This is often
12 necessary to avoid numerical problems by contact-induced high-frequency
oscillations. If the other dynamic operators are used, it is recommended that
numerical damping be used during the analysis.
In dynamic analysis, the requirement of energy conservation is supplemented with
the requirement of momentum conservation. In addition to the constraints placed
upon the displacements, additional constraints are placed on the velocity and
acceleration of the nodal points in contact, except for the Single Step Houbolt method.
When a node contacts a rigid surface, it is given the velocity and acceleration of the
rigid surface in the normal direction. The rigid surfaces are treated as if they have
infinite mass, hence, infinite momentum.
Results Evaluation
The MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear post files t16 and t19 contain the results for both
the deformable bodies and the rigid bodies. In performing a contact analysis, you can 1
obtain three types of results. The first is the conventional results from the deformable
body. This includes the deformation, strains, stresses, and measures of inelastic
behavior such as plastic and creep strains (also available in op2 and xdb files). In
addition to reaction forces at conventional boundary conditions, you can obtain the
contact forces and friction forces imparted on the body by rigid or other deformable 2
bodies (only available in the t16 and t19 files). By examining the location of these
forces, you can observe where contact has occurred, and MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear also allows you to select the contact status as a t16/t19 post file variable.
It is also possible to obtain the resultant force following from contact on the 3
deformable bodies and the resultant force and moment on the rigid bodies. The
moment is taken about the user-defined centroid of the rigid body. The time history
of these resultant forces are of significant issues in many engineering analysis. Of
course, if there is no resultant force on a rigid body, it implies that body is not in
contact with any deformable body.
4
Finally, if the additional print is requested using param,marcprn,1 or 2, the output file
reflects information showing when a node comes into contact, what rigid
body/segment is contacted, when separation occurs, when a node contacts a sharp
corner, the displacement in the local coordinate system, and the contact force in the
5
local coordinate system. For large problems, this can result in a significant amount of
output.
The motion of the rigid bodies can be displayed in MSC.Patran as well as the
deformable bodies. Rigid bodies which are modeled using the piecewise linear
12
approach are displayed as line segments for flat patches. When the rigid surfaces are
modeled as analytical surfaces, the visualization appears as trimmed NURBS.
Tolerance Values
Five tolerances can be set for determination of the contact behavior. Not entering any
values here means that MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates values based on
the problem specification.
494 Contact
Relative Sliding Velocity Between Surfaces Below Which Friction Forces Drop
As discussed in “Friction Modeling” on page 505, the equations of friction are
smoothed internally in the program to avoid numerical instabilities. The equations are
inequalities whenever two contacting surfaces stick to each other and equalities
whenever the surfaces slide (or slip). Thus, the character of contact constraints change
depending on whether there is sticking or slipping. The smoothing procedure consist
1 of modifying it in such a way, that there is always slip; the amount is a function of the
relative velocity and a constant RVcnst. The value of this constant must be specified. It
actually means, that if we specify a small value in comparison to the relative velocity,
the jump behavior is better approximated, but numerical instabilities can be expected.
A large value means, that we need a large relative velocity before we get the force at
2 which the slip occurs.
It is suggested to use values between 0.1 and 0.01 times a typical surface velocity.
Distance Below Which a Node is Considered Touching a Surface

3 In each step, it is checked whether a (new) node is in contact with other surfaces. This
is determined by the distance between the nodes and the surfaces. Since the distance
is a calculated number, there are always roundoff errors involved. Therefore, a contact
tolerance is provided such that if the distance calculated is below this tolerance, a node
4 is considered in contact. A too large value means that a high number of body nodes
are considered to be in contact with the surface and are consequently all moved to the
surface, which can be unrealistic in some applications. A too small value of this
number means that the applied deformation increment is split into a high number of
increments, thus increasing the cost of computation.
5 The tolerance must be provided by the analyst or can be calculated by MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear. In general, the contact tolerance should be a small number
compared to the geometrical features of the configuration being analyzed. The value
calculated by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is determined as 1/20 of the smallest
12 element size for solid elements or 1/4 of the thickness of shell elements. If both shell
and continuum elements are present, the default is based upon the smaller of the two
values.
Tolerance on Nodal Reaction Force on Nodal Stress Before Separation Occurs

If a tensile force occurs at a node which is in contact with a surface, the node should
separate from the surface. Rather than using any positive value, a threshold value can
be specified. This number should theoretically be zero. However, because a small
positive reaction might be due only to errors in equilibrium, this threshold value
avoids unnecessary separations. A too small value of this force results in alternating
separation and contact between the node and the surface. A too large value, of course,
results in unrealistic contact behavior.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates this value as the maximum residual force
in the structure. The default for this value, is 10 percent of the maximum reaction
force. Consequently, if locally high reaction forces at a particular point are present, the
separation force is large as well. In most cases, however, the default value is a good 1
measure.
If you indicate that separation is to be based upon stresses, a value of the separation
stress is used. The default value is the maximum residual force at node n divided by
the contact area of node n. 2
Numerical Procedures
Workspace Reservation
In the definition of the contact behavior, a number of maximum workspace numbers
3
must be set for the workspace reservation in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. These
values are normally calculated for you by MSC.Nastran. For special situations such as
restart analyses with mesh rezoning or adaptive meshing, it might be necessary for the
user to specify maximum workspace values. Too large values of the numbers means 4
that the internal workspace for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is not optimally used.
Too small numbers are indicated at the start of the analysis by MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear, but if it occurs in a restart, it can mean that the complete analysis has to be
repeated, therefore it best to be conservative. 5
The numbers which may be set using Bulk Data PARAM, MARCCONi (where i=2 or
3) are the following:
• number of bodies
This is immediately clear from the surface definition and always determined 12
automatically in SOL 600.
• maximum number of entities for any surface
This number is easily determined by looking at each surface and counting
the number of straight segments to be created. For deformable surfaces, this
depends on the element mesh; for rigid surfaces, it is easily determined for
straight lines and circle segments (these are by default divided into 10
segments), for splines, it is a little more difficult since it depends on the value
of the error control (PARAM,MARCCON2).
496 Contact
• upper bound to the number of boundary nodes of any deformable surface

This number is, of course, closely related to the previous number for
deformable surfaces (PARAM, MARCCON3).
Lagrange Multipliers
In performing contact analyses, you are solving a constrained minimization problem
1 where the constraint is the ‘no penetration’ constraint. The Lagrange multiplier
technique is the most elegant procedure to apply mathematical constraints to a
system. Using this procedure, if the constraints are properly written, overclosure or
penetration does not occur. Unfortunately, Lagrange multipliers lead to numerical
difficulties with the computational procedure as their inclusion results in a
2 nonpositive definite mathematical system. This requires additional operations to
insure an accurate, stable solution which leads to high computational costs. Another
problem with this method is that there is no mass associated with the Lagrange
multiplier degree of freedom. This results in a global mass matrix which cannot be
3 decomposed. This precludes the used of Lagrange multiplier techniques in explicit
dynamic calculations which are often used in crash simulations. The Lagrange
multiplier technique has often been implemented in contact procedures using special
interface elements such as the MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear gap element. This
facilitates the correct numerical procedure, but puts a restriction on the amount of
4 relative motion that can occur between bodies. The use of interface elements requires
an apriori knowledge of where contact occurs. This is unachievable in many physical
problems such as crash analysis or manufacturing simulation.
5 Penalty Methods
The penalty method or its extension, the Augmented Lagrangian method, is an
alternative procedure to numerically implement the contact constraints. Effectively,
the penalty procedure constrains the motion by applying a penalty to the amount of
12 penetration that occurs. The penalty approach can be considered as analogous to a
nonlinear spring between the two bodies. Using the penalty approach, some
penetration occurs with the amount being determined by the penalty constant or
function. The choice of the penalty value can also have a detrimental effect on the
numerical stability of the global solution procedure. The penalty method is relatively
easy to implement and has been extensively used in explicit dynamic analysis
although it can result in an overly stiff system for deformable-to-deformable contact
since the contact pressure is assumed to be proportional to the pointwise penetration.
The pressure distribution is generally oscillatory.
Hybrid and Mixed Methods

In the hybrid method, the contact element is derived from a complementary energy
principle by introducing the continuity on the contact surface as a constraint and
treating the contact forces as additional elements. Mixed methods, based on perturbed
Lagrange formulation, usually consist of pressure distribution interpolation which is
an order less than the displacement field, have also been used to alleviate the
difficulties associated with the pure Lagrange method. 1
Direct Constraints
Another method for the solution of contact problems is the direct constraint method.
In this procedure, the motion of the bodies is tracked, and when contact occurs, direct
constraints are placed on the motion using boundary conditions – both kinematic
2
constraints (MPC and SPC) on transformed degrees of freedom and nodal forces. This
procedure can be very accurate if the program can predict when contact occurs. This
is the procedure that is implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear through the
BCBODY option. No special interference elements are required in this procedure and 3
complex changing contact conditions can be simulated since no apriori knowledge of
where contact occurs is necessary.
Mathematical Aspects of Contact 4

Please refer to MSC.Marc Volume A, Theory and User Information, section 8 for the
complete description.
Automatic Penetration Checking Procedure 5

To detect contact between bodies whose boundaries are moving towards each other,
an automatic penetration checking procedure is available. This procedure
significantly increases accuracy and stability for models in which boundary nodes are
displacing significantly. Typical examples include metal forming processes (sheet
forming and forging), highly deformable elastomeric models (rubber boots), and
12
snap-fit problems (inserting a key into a lock).
The automatic penetration checking procedure is automatically activated if the
adaptive loading procedure is selected. If the automatic penetration checking
procedure is selected for these two options, a different procedure, as described below,
is used instead.
From a computational perspective, the automatic penetration checking procedure
detects penetration each time displacements are updated.
498 Contact
For implicit analysis, this typically happens after a matrix solution which produces a
change in the displacements due to a change in applied loads and internal forces. The
procedure detects nodes traversing a contact boundary due to the change in
displacements. If at least one node penetrates a contact surface, a scale factor is applied
to the change in displacements such that the penetrating nodes are moved back to the
contact surface.
1 The automatic penetration checking procedure can, therefore, be considered to be a
type of a line search. The procedure also looks at the magnitude of the change in
displacement of nodes which already are contacting and not necessarily penetrating.
Using stability considerations, the scale factor calculated above may be further
modified. In addition, for nodes on a contact boundary which are not yet contacting,
2 a similar procedure is followed to enhance stability.
Because the procedure can reduce the change in displacements, it may require more
iterations to complete an increment. It is important to ensure that the maximum
allowable number of iterations to complete an increment is set to a sufficiently large
3 value. When the adaptive loading procedure is used, or when the fixed time stepping
procedure is used with automatic restarting, the increment automatically restarts if
the maximum allowable number of iterations is exceeded. In the case of the adaptive
loading procedure, the time step is modified.
4 When dynamics or the arc length control method is used, the above procedure is not
available. Instead, penetration is checked for when convergence is achieved, usually
after multiple iterations.
Note: The automatic penetration checking procedure is always used with the
5 default time stepping procedures in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Contact Tolerance
A node comes into contact with another body when it enters the contact tolerance zone.
12 This area is dependent upon the value of ERROR and BIAS entered on the BCPARA bulk
data entry. When BIAS is zero (the default us 0.9), the tolerance is equidistant from the
actual surface as shown in Figure 12-11 (a); otherwise, the situation shown in
Figure 12-11 (b) is used. If a node would have moved past line B, then increment
splitting would occur if the fixed time step procedure is used and the increment
splitting procedure is used.
ERROR ERROR*(1-BIAS)
ERROR ERROR*(1+BIAS)
B
(a) Equidistant Default (b) Biased
Figure 12-11 Contact Tolerances 1

Separation
A node on a body separates from another surface when a tensile load is required to
keep it on the surface. The procedure used is either based upon the nodal force or an
effective nodal stress. The default separation force is the maximum residual force
2
(separation based upon nodal force method) or the maximum stress at reaction nodes
times the convergence tolerance (nodal stress method).
Corner Conditions 3
When a node slides along a surface composed of multiple segments, three conditions
can occur based on the angle that the segments make. This is true for both
two-dimensional and three-dimensional problems. The Figure 12-12 shows the
two-dimensional case for simplicity. If the angle between the two segments is between
180 - β < α < 180° + β, the node smoothly slides between the segments. If the angle is
4
such that 0 < α < 180 - β, the node sticks in the sharp concave corner. If the angle is such
that α > 180 + β, the node separates. The value of β is 8.625° for two-dimensional
problems and 20° for three-dimensional problems.
5
α
12
Smooth Sharp Concave
Sharp Convex
Figure 12-12 Corner Conditions

500 Contact
Implementation of Constraints
For contact between a deformable body and a rigid surface, the constraint associated
with no penetration is implemented by transforming the degrees of freedom of the
contact node and applying a boundary condition to the normal displacement. This can
be considered solving the problem:
1 K 
K 
 u â 
 
 f â 
ââ âb
  =  
K K bb  u b   fb 
bâ    
2 where â represents the nodes in contact which have a local transformation, and b
represents the nodes not in contact and, hence, not transformed. Of the nodes
transformed, the displacement in the normal direction is then constrained such that
δu is equal to the incremental normal displacement of the rigid body at the
ân
contact point.
3
t
4 P
n
5 Figure 12-13 Transformed System (2-D)
As a rigid body can be represented as either a piecewise linear or as an analytical

(NURB) surface, two procedures are used. For piecewise linear representations, the
12 normal is constant until node P comes to the corner of two segments as shown in
Figure 12-14. During the iteration process, one of three circumstances occur. If the
angle α is small α smooth < α < α smooth, the node P slides to the next segment. In such
a case, the normal is updated based upon the new segment. If the angle α is large
( α > α smooth or α < – α smooth ) the node separates from the surface if it is a
convex corner, or sticks if it is a concave corner. The value of α smooth is important
in controlling the computational costs. A larger value of α smooth reduces the
computational costs, but might lead to inaccuracies. The default values are 8.625° for
2-D and 20° for 3-D. These can be reset using the ANG2D or ANG3D fields on the
NLSTRAT entry for each subcase.
P α
α
Convex Corner Concave Corner

1
Figure 12-14 Corner Conditions (2-D)
In 3-D, these corner conditions are more complex. A node (P) on patch A slides freely
until it reaches the intersection between the segments. If it is concave, the node first
tries to slide along the line of intersection before moving to segment B. This is the
natural (lower energy state) of motion.
2
These corner conditions also exist for deformable-to-deformable contact analysis.
Because the bodies are continuously changing in shape, the corner conditions (sharp
convex, smooth or sharp concave) are continuously being re-evaluated.
3
When a rigid body is represented as an analytical surface, the normal is recalculated
at each iteration based upon the current position. This leads to a more accurate
solution, but can be more costly because of the NURB evaluation.
4
A
P 5
P
12
Figure 12-15 Corner Conditions (3-D)
When a node of a deformable body contacts a deformable body, a multipoint

constraint (MPC or TYE in MSC.Marc terminology) is automatically imposed.
Recalling that the exterior edges (2-D) or faces (3-D) of the other deformable bodies are
known, a constraint expression is formed. For 2-D analysis, the number of retained
nodes is three – two from the edge and the contacting node itself. For 3-D analysis, the
number of retained nodes is five – four from the patch and the contacting node itself.
The constraint equation is such that the contacting node should be able to slide on the
502 Contact
contacted segment, subject to the current friction conditions. This leads to a

nonhomogeneous, nonlinear constraint equation. In this way, a contacting node is
forced to be on the contacted segment. This might introduce undesired stress changes,
since a small gap or overlap between the node and the contacted segment will be
closed. During initial detection of contact (increment 0), the stress-free projection
option avoids those stress changes for deformable contact by adapting the coordinates
1 of the contacting nodes such that they are positioned on the contacted segment. This
stress-free projection can be activated using the BCTABLE entry. A similar option
exists for glued contact; however, in this case, overlap will not be removed.
During the iteration procedure, a node can slide from one segment to another,
changing the retained nodes associated with the constraint. A recalculation of the
2 bandwidth is automatically made. Because the bandwidth can radically change, the
bandwidth optimization is also automatically performed.
A node is considered sliding off a contacted segment if is passes the end of the
segment over a distance more than the contact tolerance. As mentioned earlier, the
3 node separates from the contacted body if this happens at a convex corner. For
deformable contact, this tangential tolerance at convex corners can be enlarged by
using the delayed sliding off option activated via the BCTABLE bulk data entry.
4 Separation
After a node comes into contact with a surface, it is possible for it to separate in a
subsequent iteration or increment. Mathematically, a node should separate when the
reaction force between the node and surface becomes tensile or positive. Physically,
5 you could consider that a node should separate when the tensile force or normal stress
exceeds the surface tension. Rather than use an exact mathematical definition, you can
enter the force or stress required to cause separation.
Separation can be based upon either the nodal forces or the nodal stresses. The use of
12 the nodal stress method is recommended as the influence of element size is
eliminated.
In many analysis, contact occurs but the contact forces are small; for example, laying
a piece of paper on a desk. Because of the finite element procedure, this could result
in numerical chattering. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has some additional contact
control parameters that can be used to minimize this problem. As separation results
in additional iterations (which leads to higher costs), the appropriate choice of
parameters can be very beneficial.
When contact occurs, a reaction force associated with the node in contact balances the
internal stress of the elements adjacent to this node. When separation occurs, this
reaction force behaves as a residual force (as the force on a free node should be zero).
This requires that the internal stresses in the deformable body be redistributed.
Depending on the magnitude of the force, this might require several iterations.
You should note that in static analysis, if a deformable body is constrained only by
other bodies (no explicit boundary conditions) and the body subsequently separates 1
from all other bodies, it would then have rigid body motion. For static analysis, this
would result in a singular or nonpositive definite system. This problem can be
avoided by appropriate boundary conditions.
Release 2
A special case of separation is the intentional release of all nodes from a rigid body.
This is often used in manufacturing analysis to simulate the removal of the workpiece
from the tools. After the release occurs in such an analysis, there might be a large
redistribution of the loads. It is possible to gradually reduce the residual force to zero, 3
which improves the stability, and reduces the number of iterations required. The
BCMOVE Bulk Data entry allows the release (separation) of all the nodes in contact
with a particular surface at the beginning of the increment. The rigid body should be
moved away using the BCMOVE Bulk Data entry or deactivated using the BCTABLE
entry to ensure that the nodes do not inadvertently recontact the surface they were
4
released from.
Higher Order Elements

MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows contact with almost all of the available
5
elements, but the use of certain elements has a consequence on the analysis procedure.
Contact analysis can be performed with all of the structural continuum elements,
either lower order or higher order, including those of the Hermann (incompressible)
formulation, except axisymmetric elements with twist. Friction modeling is available 12
in all of these elements except the semi-infinite elements. Traditionally, higher order
isoparametric shape functions have interpolation functions which lead to the
equivalent nodal forces that oscillate between the corner and midside nodes. As this
has a detrimental effect on both contact detection and determining contact separation,
two procedures have been implemented to eliminate this problem.
1. On the exterior surfaces, the midside nodes are constrained (tied) to the
corner nodes automatically. This effectively results in a linear variation of the
displacement along this edge. Hence, the element does not behave as a full
bi-quadratic (2-D) or tri-quadratic element (3-D). All elements in the interior
504 Contact
of the body behave in the conventional higher-order manner. In many

manufacturing and rubber analyses, the lower-order elements behave better
than the higher-order elements because of their ability to represent the large
distortion; hence, these lower-order elements are recommended.
2. (Default for parabolic elements, LINQUAD=1). This is a new method that
has the added advantage of giving an accurate interface pressure
1 distribution.
The constraints imposed on the nodal degrees of freedom are dependent upon the
type of element.
1. When a node of a continuum element comes into contact, the translational
2 degrees of freedom are constrained.
2. When a node of a shell element comes into contact, the translational degrees
of freedom are constrained and no constraint is places on the rotational
degrees of freedom. The exception to this is when a shell contacts a
3 symmetry surface. In this case, the rotation about the element edge is also
constrained.
3D Beam and Shell Contact

4 Additionally, beams and shells contact is governed by the rules outlined below.
2-D Beams
All nodes on beams are potential contact nodes. Beam elements can be used in contact
5 in two modes.
1. The two-dimensional beams can come into contact with rigid bodies
composed of curves in the same x-y plane. The normal is based upon the
normal of the rigid surface.
12 2. The two-dimensional beams can come into contact with deformable bodies
either of continuum elements or other beam elements. As the beams are in
two dimensions, they do not intersect one another.
3-D Beams
Three-dimensional beam elements can be used in contact in three modes.
1. The nodes of the beams can come into contact with rigid bodies composed of
surfaces. The normal is based upon the normal of the rigid surface.
2. Nodes of the three-dimensional beams can also come into contact with the
faces of three-dimensional continuum elements or shell elements.
3. The three-dimensional elastic beams can also contact other elastic beams. In
this case, we can consider beams crossing one another. In such cases, the
beams are automatically subdivided such that four beams are created. As the
beams slide upon each other, they are adaptively changed in length.
2
Contact Occurs New Beams Created Adaptive Meshing of Sliding Beams
Figure 12-16 Beam-to-Beam Contact

3
Shell Elements
All nodes on shell elements are potential contact nodes. As the midside nodes of shell
elements are automatically tied, the high-order shell elements have no benefit. Shell
elements can contact either rigid bodies, continuum elements, or other shell elements. 4
Shell-shell contact involves a more complex analysis because it is necessary to
determining which side of the shell contact occurs.
Friction Modeling 5
The regularized form of the Coulomb friction model can be written as:
2µf n vr
f t = ------------ arctan  ------------------------
π RVCNST 12
is a nonlinear relation between the relative sliding velocity and the friction force.
Implementation in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has been done using a nonlinear
spring model. Noting that the behavior of a nonlinear spring, as shown in
Figure 12-17, is given by the equation:
K –K u1 F1
=
–K K u2 F2
506 Contact
u, F u, F
1 2
Figure 12-17 Spring Model
in which K is the spring stiffness and u 1 , u 2 , F 1 , and F 2 are displacements and forces
1 of points 1 and 2, the equivalent in terms of velocities is readily seen to read
K –K v1 F 1t
=
–K K v2 F 2t
2 Since K is a nonlinear function of the relative velocity, the above equation is solved
incrementally, where within each increment a number of iterations may be necessary.
For a typical iteration i , the equation to be solved looks like
3 K
i
–K
i δv 1
i i
∆F 1t
= Eq. 12-1
i i
–K
i
K
i δv 2 ∆F 2t
i i i i
where δv 1 and δv 2 are used to update v 1 and v 2 by
4 i i–1 i
v1 = v1 + δv 1
Eq. 12-2
i i–1 i
v2 = v2 + δv 2
5 i–1 i–1
Notice that v1 and v 2 correspond to the beginning of the iteration. For
deformable-rigid contact, it is easy to see that
i
δv 2 = 0
12 , Eq. 12-3
since the motion of a rigid body (to which node 2 belongs) is exactly prescribed by
you. In a static analysis, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides no direct
information about velocities, so they have to be calculated from the displacement and
time increments. Denoting a time increment by ∆t , we can write
i
i δu 1
δv 1 = --------- ,
∆t
i i–1
in which δu 1 represents the correction of the incremental displacement ∆u 1 for
iteration i like (see also Eq. 12-2).
i i–1
∆u 1 = ∆u 1 +δ Eq. 12-4
Substituting Eq. 12-3 and Eq. 12-5 into Eq. 12-1 yields
1 i i i
----- K δu 1 = ∆F 1 Eq. 12-5
∆t
For the first iteration of an increment, an improvement of equation Eq. 12-5 can be
p
1
achieved by taking into account the velocity v 1 at the end of the previous increment.
Then equation Eq. 12-3 can be rewritten as
1
1 ∆u 1 p
δv 1 = ---------- – v 1 , Eq. 12-6 2
∆t
so that Eq. 12-5 can be modified like
1 1 1 1 p p
----- K δu 1 = ∆F 1 – K [ v r – v 2 ]
∆t
Eq. 12-7
3
For the subsequent iterations,
1 i i i
----- K δu 1 = ∆F 1 Eq. 12-8
∆t 4
i
In equation Eq. 12-8, vr denotes the relative velocity between the points 1 and 2 at
the end of the previous increment. It must be noted that the additional term in Eq. 12-8
is especially important if the velocity of the rigid body differs much from the relative
velocity. This is usually the case in rolling processes, when the roll has been modeled 5
as a rigid body. For this reason, this improved friction model is called friction for
rolling.
Friction is a complex physical phenomena that involves the characteristics of the
surface such as surface roughness, temperature, normal stress, and relative velocity. 12
The actual physics of friction continues to be a topic of research. Hence, the numerical
modeling of the friction has been simplified to two idealistic models.
The most popular friction model is the Adhesive Friction or Coulomb Friction model.
This model is used for most applications with the exception of bulk forming such as
forging. The Coulomb model is:
σ fr ≤ – µ σ n ⋅ t
where
σ n is the normal stress

508 Contact
σ fr is the tangential (friction) stress
µ is the friction coefficient

t is the tangential vector in the direction of the relative velocity
vr
t = ---------
1 vr
v r is the relative sliding velocity.

The Coulomb model is also often written with respect to forces
2 f t ≤ – µf n ⋅ t
where
f t is the tangential force
3 f n is the normal reaction
Quite often in contact problems, neutral lines develop. This means that along a contact
surface, the material flows in one direction in part of the surface and in the opposite
direction in another part of the surface. Such neutral lines are, in general, not known
4 a priori.
For a given normal stress, the friction stress has a step function behavior based upon
the value of v r or ∆u .
5
ft or σfr
12 Stick
vr
Slip
Figure 12-18 Coulomb Friction Model

This discontinuity in the value of σ fr can result in numerical difficulties so a modified

Coulomb friction model is implemented:
vr
σ fr ≤ – µ σ n --- arctan  ------------------------ ⋅ t
2
π  RVCNST
Physically, the value of RVCNST is the value of the relative velocity when sliding
occurs. The value of RVCNST is important in determining how closely the 1
mathematic model represents the step function. A very large value of RVCNST results
in a reduced value of the effective friction. A very small value results in poor
convergence. It is recommended that the value of RVCNST be 1% or 10% of a typical
relative sliding velocity, v r . Because of this smoothing procedure, a node in contact
always has some slipping.
2
Besides the numerical reasons, this ‘ever slipping node’ model has a physical basis.
Oden and Pires pointed out that for metals, there is an elasto-plastic deformation of
asperities at the microscopic level (termed as ‘cold weld’) which leads to a nonlocal
and nonlinear frictional contact behavior. The arctan representation of the friction
3
model is a mathematical idealization of this nonlinear friction behavior.
When the Coulomb model is used with the stress based model, the integration point
stresses are first extrapolated to the nodal points and then transformed so a direct
component is normal to the contacted surface. The tangential stress is then evaluated
4
and a consistent nodal force is calculated.
For shell elements, since σ n ≡ 0 a nodal force based Coulomb model is used:
vr 5
f t = – µf n ⋅ --- arctan  ------------------------ ⋅ t
2
π  RVCNST
12
510 Contact
ft
C = 0.01 1
C = 0.1
C=1
1
C = 10
C = 100
ϖr
-10
10
2
3 -1
Figure 12-19 Stick-slip Approximation ( f n = 1, C = RVCNST )
4 This nodal forced based model should not be used if a nonlinear friction coefficient is
to be used, as this nonlinearity is, in general, dependent upon the stress, not the force.
This model can also be used for continuum elements.
The Coulomb friction model can also be utilized as a true stick-slip model. In this
5 procedure, a node completely sticks to a surface until the tangential force reaches the
critical value µf n . Also, to model the differences in static versus dynamic friction
coefficients, an overshoot parameter, α , can be used.
The stick-slip model is always based upon the nodal forces. When using the stick-slip
12 procedure, the program flow is:
Initial Contact
No Yes
∆u t ≈ 0
Assume Slipping
Mode
Assume Sticking
Mode
1
Determine Solution
of Next Iteration
2
Remain in Slipping Mode if: Remain in Sticking Mode if:

f t • ∆u t < 0 and ∆u t > β f t ≤ αµf n
3
Change to Sticking Mode if:
f t • ∆u t > 0 and ∆u t > β Change to Slipping Mode if:
f t > αµf n
or if ∆u t ≈ εβ
4
Note that this procedure requires additional computations to determine if the stick- 5
slip condition has converged. It requires that
ft
1 – e ≤ ---- ≤ 1 + e
p
ft 12
p
where f t is the tangential force in the previous iteration.
This additional testing on the convergence of the friction forces is not required when
the smooth/continuous model is used.
The friction model can be represented as shown in Figure 12-20.
512 Contact
ft
αµfn
2β
µfn
1 2εβ
∆υt
α = 1.05 (default; can be user-defined)

2 β = 1 x 10-6 (default; can be user-defined)
ε = 1 x 10-6 (fixed; so that εβ ≈ 0)
e = 5 x 10-2 (default; can be user-defined)
3 Figure 12-20 Stick-Slip Friction Parameters
Coulomb friction is a highly nonlinear phenomena dependent upon both the normal
force and relative velocity. Because the Coulomb friction model is an implicit function
of the velocity or displacement increment, the numerical implementation of friction
4 has two components: a force contribution and a contribution to the stiffness matrix.
The stiffness is calculated based upon:
∂f t
i
5 K ij = ----------
∂v r
j
This later contribution, if fully implemented would lead to a nonsymmetric system.

Because of the additional computational costs – both in terms of memory and CPU
12 costs, the contribution to the stiffness matrix is symmetrized, but will be available
before that happens in MSC.Nastran 2005 to calculate stability thresholds.
When the stress based friction model is used, the following steps are taken.
1. Extrapolate the physical stress, equivalent stress, and temperature from
the integration points to the nodes using the conventional element
shape functions.
2. Calculate the normal stress.
3. Calculate the relative sliding velocity. At the beginning of an increment, the

previously calculated relative sliding velocity is used as the starting point.
When a node first comes into contact, it is assumed that it is first sticking, so
the relative sliding velocity is zero.
4. Numerically integrate the friction forces and the stiffness contribution.
For the case of deformable-deformable contact, loads equal in magnitude and
opposite in direction are applied to the body that is contacted. Each of these loads is 1
extrapolated to the closest boundary nodes. With this procedure, it is guaranteed that
all friction forces applied are in self equilibrium.
The Coulomb friction model often does not correlate well with experimental
observations when the normal force/stress becomes large. If the normal stress 2
becomes large, the Coulomb model might predict that the frictional shear stresses
increase to a level that can exceed the flow stress or the failure stress of the material.
As this is not physically possible, the choices are either to have a nonlinear coefficient
of friction or to use the cohesive, shear based friction model.
3
σfr Linear Coulomb Model
µ
4
Observed Behavior
5
σn
Figure 12-21 Linear Coulomb Model Versus Observed Behavior
The shear based model states that the frictional stress is a fraction of the equivalent 12
stress in the material:
σ
σ fr ≤ – m ------- t
3
Again, this model is implemented using an arctangent function to smooth out the
step function:
σ 2 vr
σ fr ≤ – m ------- ⋅ --- arctan  ------------------------ ⋅ t
3 π  RVCNST
514 Contact
This model is available for all elements using the distributed load approach.
When a node contacts a rigid body, the coefficient of friction associated with the rigid
body is used. When a node contacts a deformable body, the average of the coefficients
for the two bodies are used. Various BCTABLE options can be used if complex
situations occur.
1 Recalling that friction is a complex physical phenomena, due to variations in surface

conditions, lubricant distribution, and lubricant behavior, relative sliding,
temperature, geometry, and so on.
The above two friction models may be extend, if necessary, by means of user the UFRIC
subroutine available starting in version 2005. In such a routine, you provide the
2 friction coefficient or the friction factor as
µ = µ ( x, f n, T, v r, σ y )
3 or
m = m ( x, f n, T, v r σ y )
x – position of the point at which friction is being calculated

4 f n – normal force at the point at which friction is being calculated
T – temperature at the point at which friction is being calculated

v r –relative sliding velocity between point at which friction is being calculated and
5 surface
σ y – flow stress of the material
Glue Model
12 A special type of friction model is the glue option, which imposes that there is no
relative tangential motion. The glue motion is activated through the BCTABLE bulk data
entry.
A novel application of contact is to join two dissimilar meshes. In such a case, by

specifying a very large separation force and that the glue motion is activated, the
constraint equations are automatically written between the two meshes.
Defining Contact Bodies 515
12.3 Defining Contact Bodies

This section describes surface geometry definition, motion definition, and friction
description in automatic two- and three-dimensional contact applications. The basic
philosophy behind these applications is the existence of one or more bodies that might
or might not come into contact with one another, or even contact with themselves
during an analysis. As far as the contact is concerned, it is the surface associated with
the body that plays a role.
1
There is a limit of 99 bodies in an analysis. Bodies may be combined if the 99 body limit
is exceeded. Some can be deformable, others can be rigid. Deformable surfaces must
always be declared in the input file before any rigid surface.
2
Deformable and Rigid Surfaces
A deformable surface is simply defined by the set of elements that constitute the body
to which it is associated. When a node of another body or the same body (in self
contact) comes into contact with a deformable surface, information regarding the 3
contacted surface is obtained. This is based upon the coordinates of the nodes on the
face of the element or the coordinates and an averaged normal if the BCBODY option is
used. This can improve the accuracy of the solution.
A rigid surface does not deform. There are two modes to describe the geometric 4
profile of a rigid surface. In the first, labelled the PieceWise Linear approach (PWL),
the profile is defined by sets of geometrical data which can be comprised of straight
lines, circles and splines, ruled surfaces, surfaces of revolution and patches, etc. These
sets have to be given in a proper sequence around the rigid body they define, even if
it is not necessary that the full enclosure be defined.
5
In the second method, labelled Analytical, the geometric profile is defined by
prescribing 2-D NURB curves, 3-D NURB surfaces, or exact quadratic descriptions.
Using this method, the surface is divided into line segments or patches The contact
condition is based on the true surface geometry. This method is more accurate for
12
curved surfaces, and might reduce the number of iterations, especially if friction is
present.
In coupled thermal-stress contact (starting in version 2005), it is possible to have a
surface defined strictly by thermal elements with a rigid body motion applied to it.
Motion of Surfaces
Deformable surfaces can move either because of contact with other surfaces, or
because of directly applied displacement boundary conditions or loads.
516 Contact
To each surface, we associate a point (center of rotation) that can be anywhere in

space. A translative velocity and a rotational velocity around that point define the
instantaneous motion of the surface. These velocities are integrated forward in time to
define the motion of the surfaces. It is also possible to directly prescribe the location of
the rigid body. As an alternative, you can prescribe a force or SPCD which is consider
a special type of force to the rigid body.
1 The BCBODY model definition option can be used for the input of constant rigid body
motions which do not change with time during the analysis. However, changes in
rigid body motion (time dependent motion) can be simulated either applying the
proper motion to the GRID point at the CG of the rigid body or by the user subroutine
MOTION activated through the model definition option UMOTION (starting in version
2 2005).
Cautions
In static analysis, it is necessary to artificially connect (for instance, by very low
3 stiffness springs) deformable bodies that during an analysis might be completely
separated from other deformable bodies and have no kinematic boundary conditions
applied. This is to avoid rigid body motion.
A debug printout parameter (PARAM,MARCPRN) is available in contact analysis, it
4 produces information on when any node on the boundary comes into contact or
separates from any surface. It also produces information on whether a contact node is
fixed to a surface or is free to slide along it. In addition to the printed contact
information, the incremental displacement and the reaction forces for those nodes in
5 contact with rigid surfaces are printed in a local coordinate system.
Contact creates transformations that are internally defined, and, as such, no standard
coordinate transformations (CORDij bulk data cards), or user routine UTRANFORM (starting in version
2005) are permitted on nodes which might come in contact.
12 The BCBODY option creates MPC’s between nodes which come into contact; hence,
you should not use standard MPC or RBE’s for any nodes which might come into
contact.
There are three implied loops in the portion of the program dealing with contact: the
outermost loop is over the number of surfaces; the next loop is over the number of sets
of geometrical data for each surface; and the innermost loop is over the number of
points comprised in each set. In case of deformable surfaces, the two inner loops
reduce to the list of elements.
Upper Bound Quantities

All geometrical data is internally reduced to two types of entities: for 2-D contact, a
linear segment, and for 3-D contact, a 4-point patch. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
will automatically enter an upper bound to the maximum number of entities to be
created for any surface. When calculating this value, it should be taken into account
the fact that a spline splits into linear segments within the contact tolerance error. This
is required for Analytical description as well, even though the number of patches does 1
not influence the accuracy of the solution.
One of the first things MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear does for contact is to
determine all nodal points that lie on the periphery of each deformable surface.
2
Control Variables and Option Flags
The variable RVCNST on the bulk data BCPARA entry allows the system to self-
adaptively search for sticking zones. RVCNST should be a relative sliding velocity very
small compared to the typical sliding velocities in the model, but not so small that it
would be overcome by changes between iterations. It is suggested you use values
3
between 10-1 and 10-2 times a typical relative surface velocity. MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear default is 1.0.
The variable ERROR on the BCPARA entry determines the tolerance for contact. A too
small tolerance might provoke too many increment splits. A too coarse tolerance
4
produces unrealistic behavior. If left blank, the code calculates ERROR as the smallest
nonzero element dimension divided by 20 or the shell thickness divided by 4. If there
are splines in surface definitions, a value should be entered.
The variable FNTOL (BCPARA entry) is used for the input of a separation force in a
5
contact analysis. If the contact force of a node, calculated by MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear, is greater than the prescribed separation force (FNTOL), the node is to be
separated from the contact surface.
You can control the type of friction in a contact analysis. Either shear friction,
12
Coulomb friction or a frictionless condition can be assumed in the analysis. The
friction behavior is either continuous or true-stick slip behavior.
The computation of Coulomb friction in a contact problem can be based on either

nodal stresses or nodal forces.
During each load increment, separations can occur. You can control the maximum
number of nodal separations allowed in each increment to reduce computational
costs. During each load increment, if the contact of a node (or a group of nodes) is
detected, the increment is split (subdivided) in order to accommodate the contact
518 Contact
condition. Depending on the occurrence of further contact, the load increment

recursively split until the total incremental load is reached. If you suppresses splitting,
the load increment is not split (subdivided), and all the penetrations occurring in the
current increment are adjusted for equilibrium at the beginning of the next increment.
Time Step Control

1 The automatic contact procedure is controlled by the TSTEPNL bulk data entry for
dynamic problems or the NLPRAM entry (actually load steps) for static analyses. This
is used to determine the motion of rigid surfaces and to control the splitting of
increments if penetration occurs. Even in a quasi-static analysis, a “time step” must be
defined by you. Several procedures can be used to enter this data. Additional control
2 is achieved using the NLAUTO and/or NLSTRAT bulk data entries. It is highly
recommended that at least 100 increments be specified for all contact problems.
• The NLAUTO and NLSTRAT subcase definition options can be used to define
several time steps, each of the same magnitude.
3 • The NLAUTO and NLSTRAT subcase definition options can also be used to
define a time period which is divided into equal time steps.
• The NLAUTO or NLSTRAT subcase options can also be used to define a total
time period which is divided into variable size time steps.
4
Dynamic Contact - Impact
The automatic contact procedure can also be used in dynamic analyses to model
impact problems. This can be used with the implicit single step Houbolt or Newmark-
5 beta operator or the explicit central difference operator. The TSTEPNL, NLAUTO and
NLSTRAT bulk data entries are used to control the choice. When SOL 700 becomes
available it should be used for short duration (impact) contact.
12 Two-dimensional Rigid Surfaces

In a two-dimensional problem, the rigid surfaces can be represented by any of or a
combination of the following geometric entities: (1) straight line segments, (2) circular
arcs, and (3) spline.
Note that the normal vector of the geometric entities (line segments, circular arc, and
the spline) always points into the rigid-body. The normal vector direction is
determined from the direction of the geometric entity, following a right-handed rule.
Care must be taken in entering the coordinates (x, y) data, in a correct direction, for
rigid-surfaces.
Line Segments
When the Line Segment option is chosen, the number NPOINT and the coordinates (x,
y) of (NPOINT) points must be entered for the definition of the rigid surface.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear automatically creates a rigid surface consisting of
(NPOINT -1) linear segments for the contact problem. A two-dimensional rigid surface
consisted of line segments is shown in Figure 12-22.
This entity supports analytic description/procedure.
1
η
tart point
2
1 2 3 Rigid body
4
y
x
5
6 7 8
End point
3
Figure 12-22 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Line Segment, ITYPE = 1)
Circular Arc 4
When the Circular Arc option is chosen, one circular segment is created by
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. There are five different methods available to define
a circular arc in two dimensions. Each method requires four data blocks with the
following type of data may be used to describe the arcs: 5
Starting Point of Arc(SP)
Ending Point of Arc (EP)
Center of Circle (C)
Radius of Circle (R)
Tangent Angles (TA) 12
Swept Angle (SA)
Number of Subdivisions(NS)
Clearly, not all of this information is required for each method. Table 12-2 describes
which data is required. The default number of subdivisions is 10. If the analytical
approach is used, the number of subdivisions does not influence the accuracy, but is
only used for visualization purposes.
520 Contact
Table 12-2 Data Required for Circular Arc Input

Method
Data Block
0 1 2 3 4
1 SP SP SP SP SP
2 EP EP EP EP blank
3 C C C TA1, TA2 C
1 4 R, NS R, NS R, NS R, NS SA, NS
Note: For methods 1 and 3, a positive radius means the center of the circle is on the
surface side. A negative radius means the center of the circle is on the outside.
2 For method 2, the first coordinate of the center is taken into account,
determining whether the center is above (>0) or below (<0) the segment
defined by the end points.
For planar problems, SP, EP and C are X, Y data.
3 For axisymmetric problems, SP, EP and C are Z, R data.

For methods 0, 1 and 2, if R is zero, it is calculated as distance from the center
to the starting point.
This entity supports analytical description/procedure.
4 A two-dimensional rigid surface represented by a circular arc is shown in Figure 12-23
and Figure 12-24.
5 η center
End point
Start point +
1 radius
Note: For additional circular arc definitions, see
12
Figure 12-23 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc, ITYPE = 2,
METHOD = 0)
EP EP
SP SP
R R
1
C+ C+
Method 0 Positive R Method 1 Negative R
2
EP
TA2
3
SP SA
R SP
TA1
C+ X
C + 4
Method 3 Positive R Method 4 Positive R
Figure 12-24 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc)

5
Spline
When the Spline option is chosen, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear creates a spline
by passing from the second point through to the second to last point entered. The first
and the last points entered are used to define the tangents at the beginning and end of 12
the spline. If a nonanalytical approach is used, then the spline is internally split into
linear segments in such a way that the maximum difference between any of them and
the spline is less than the contact tolerance ERROR. This operation is done before the
automatic tolerance calculation; therefore, a value for ERROR must be entered
whenever a spline is used. Figure 12-25 shows a two-dimensional rigid surface
defined by a spline.
522 Contact
nd point
6 Note: the normal vector η is pointed into the rigid body.
5
4
3 2 1
Start point
Rigid body
η
1
Figure 12-25 Two-dimensional Rigid Surface (Spline, ITYPE = 3)
This entity supports analytical description/procedure if only one spline is used in a

particular rigid body.
2
Three-dimensional Rigid Surfaces
In a three-dimensional problem, the rigid surfaces are represented by any of or a
combination of the following three-dimensional surface entities:
3
Surface Entity Type Type Identification (ITYPE)
Ruled surface 4
Surface of revolution 5
4 Bezier surface
4-node patch
6
7
Poly-surface 8
NURB 9
Cylinder 10
5 Sphere 11
The variable ITYPE defines the type of surface entity to be used for a rigid surface.
Since most of the three-dimensional surfaces can be easily and adequately represented
12 by a finite element mesh of 4-node plate (patch) elements, the option ITYPE = 7 is a
very convenient way of representing three-dimensional rigid surfaces. Both the
connectivities and the coordinates of the 4-node patches can be generated using
MSC.Patran, or entered through user subroutine DIGEOM (starting in version 2005).
The three-dimensional surface entities mentioned above, except 4-node patches,

can in turn be generated from three-dimensional geometric entities. Available
three-dimensional geometric entities are:
Geometric Entity Type Type Identification (JTYPE)

Straight line segment 1
Geometric Entity Type Type Identification (JTYPE)

3-D circular arc 2
Spline 3
Bezier Curve 4
Poly line 5
The variable JTYPE defines the type of geometric entities to be used for the generation 1
of three-dimensional rigid surfaces.
For the (PWL) approach, note that all geometrical data in 3-D space is reduced to
4-node patches. The four nodes will probably not be on the same plane. The error in
the approximation is determined by the number of subdivisions of the defined
surfaces. Note that the normal to a patch is defined by the right-hand rule, based on
2
the sequence in which the four points are entered.
Note: MSC.Patran produces a nurbs description for all 3D rigid surfaces, even
when patches or other geometrical shapes are specified. If rigid bodies made
of patches are desired then the geometry should be meshed, and the elements
3
specified as the application region.
Ruled Surface
When the Ruled surface option is chosen, a ruled surface is created by MSC.Nastran 4
Implicit Nonlinear based on the input of two surface generators, defined by straight
line segment (JTYPE = 1), 3-D circular arc (JTYPE = 2), spline (JTYPE = 3) or Bezier
curve (JTYPE = 4). If the surface generator is not a 3-D circular arc, the number NPOINT1
(NPOINT2) and the coordinates (x, y, z) of these NPOINT1 (NPOINT2) points must be
entered for the definition of the surface generators. In case the surface generator is a
5
3-D circular arc, a method (METH) must be selected for the definition of the circular arc.
A 3-D circular arc is defined by four points. In addition, the number of subdivisions,
NDIV1, along the first (surface generator) and the NDIV2 along the second (from the first
surface generator to second surface generator) direction must also be entered. For a 12
(PWL) approach, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear creates (NDIV1) x (NDIV2) 4-node
patches automatically to represent the prescribed ruled surface. For analytical
approach, (NDIV1 + 1) x (NDIV2 + 1) points are created and a NURB surface is general
which passes exactly through these points. The accuracy in general is controlled by the
number of points. Figure 12-26 shows a typical ruled surface.
524 Contact
Start point
End point
η 2
2nd Geometric entity
1 Start point
1
End point
st
1 Geometric entity
1: first direction
2: second direction
η: normal direction into the rigid body
2
z
3 x
y
NDIV2 = 3
NDIV1 = 4
4 NDIV1 = number of divisions in the first direction

NDIV2 = number of divisions in the second direction
Figure 12-26 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Ruled Surface, ITYPE = 4)
Surface of Revolution
5 When the Surface of revolution option is chosen, a surface of revolution is created by
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear based on the input of one surface generator, defined
by straight line segment (JTYPE = 1), 3-D circular arc (JTYPE = 2), spline (JTYPE = 3)
or Bezier curve (JTYPE = 4). If the surface generator is not a 3-D circular arc, the
12 number NPOINT and the coordinates (x, y, z) of these NPOINT points must be entered for
the definition of the surface generator. In case the surface generator is a 3-D circular
arc, a method (METH) must be selected for the definition of the circular arc. A 3-D
circular arc is defined by four points. In addition, the number of subdivisions NDIV1
along the surface generator and NDIV2 along the second (circumferential) direction
must also be entered.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear then creates (NDIV1 x NDIV2) four-node patches

automatically, to represent the prescribed surface of revolution. The axis of revolution
is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of two points in space, and an angle of rotation
from the initial position is also needed for the definition of the surface of revolution.
A positive rotation is about the axis formed from point 1 to point 2. Figure 12-27
shows a typical surface of revolution.
Axis of revolution defined

by the coordinates of
points 1 and 2
1
Start point
Surface generation
(initial position) 1
Point 1
2
Angle of
2
rotation
End point η
Point 2
4
z
1: First direction
2: Second direction
x y 5
Figure 12-27 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Surface of Revolution,
ITYPE = 5)
Bezier Surface
When the Bezier Surface option is chosen, a Bezier surface is defined by the
12
coordinates (x, y, z) of NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 control points. NPOINT1 points are entered
along the first direction and then repeated NPOINT2 times to fill through the second
direction of the surface. NPOINT1 and NPOINT2 have to be at least equal to 4. Number of
subdivisions (NDIV1, NDIV2) entered has to be equal or greater than NPOINT1 and
NPOINT2 for Bezier surface. (NPOINT1-1) x (NPOINT2-1) 4-node patches are created by
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear for the definition of a Bezier surface. Figure 12-28
shows a typical Bezier surface. If it can be treated as an analytical surface, an exact
conversion to NURBS is performed.
526 Contact
r13
r23
r22 r33
r03
r32
1 r12
r21
r11
r31
NPOINT2 = 4
r02
NDIV2 = 4
2 2
r20
r01 r10
η r30
3 z
1
y r00 NPOINT1 = 4
NDIV1 = 4
4 x
1: First direction
2: Second direction
Figure 12-28 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Bezier Surface, ITYPE = 6)

5 Four-node patches
When the Four-Node Patches option is chosen, you enter directly all the 4-node
patches that comprise this surface. They are entered following the same format
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear would use to specify connectivities and coordinates
12 of a mesh of CQUAD4 elements. In this way, a finite element preprocessor can be used
to create surfaces. Alternatively, this data can be entered via the user subroutine
DIGEOM starting in version 2005, further permitting you to read by yourself from any
data you have access to. Figure 12-29 shows a typical 4-node patch surface. It cannot
be used as an analytical surface.
z
Number of patches = 12
Number of nodes = 20
y 12
Nodal coordinates can be
using user subroutine DIG
x
13
7
8
1
2
12 13
2 Rigid body 7 2
8
3
12 η
η 13
1 Rigid body
7 8 4
1: First direction
2: Second direction
Figure 12-29 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (4-Node Patch, ITYPE = 7) 5

Poly-surface
When the Poly-Surface option is chosen, a poly-surface is defined by the
coordinates (x, y, z) of NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 control points. NPOINT1 points are entered
along the first direction and then repeated NPOINT2 times to fill through the second
12
direction of the surface. NPOINT1 and NPOINT2 have to be at least equal to 4 for a poly-
surface and there is no need to divide it. A typical poly-surface is shown in
Figure 12-30.
528 Contact
53
52 54
43 55
51 44
42
45
1 41
33 34
35
32
NPOINT2 = 5
23 24 25
31 22
2 2
21
η 13 14 15
z
12
3 1
y
11 NPOINT1 = 5
x
1: First direction
4 2: Second direction
Figure 12-30 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Poly Surface, ITYPE = 8)

5 In a three-dimensional contact problem, as in a two-dimensional situation, the surface
generators can be represented in a variety of ways. It can be treated as an analytical
surface. Approximate conversion to NURBS.
12 Nonuniform Rational Bspline Surface, NURBS

When the NURBS option is chosen, NURBS are defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of
NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 control points, NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 homogeneous coordinates and
(NPOINT1+NORDER1) + (NPOINT2+NORDER2) normalized knot vectors. If only the control
points are entered, the interpolation scheme is used such that the surface passes
through all of control points. The homogeneous coordinates and knot vectors are
calculated by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. NPOINTS and NPOINT2 have to be at
least equal to 3 for the interpolation scheme. A typical surface described by NURBS is
shown in Figure 12-31.
+10
+8 +6
1
+9
+7 +5 2
+4
+2
3
+3 Z
Y X
+1 4
Figure 12-31 Nonuniform Rational Bspline Surface, NURBS (ITYPE = 9)
Cylinder (Cone) Surface

When the Cylinder (Cone) Surface option is chosen, a cylinder or cone is defined
by the coordinates (x, y, z) of the center, C1, with radius, R1, in top face and the
5
coordinate (x, y, z) of center, C2, with radius, R2, in bottom face. The normal vector of
cylinder is inwards. If a negative value of R1 is entered, the normal vector is outwards.
A typical cylinder is shown in Figure 12-32.
12
530 Contact
R1
C1
1
R2
3 C2
X Y
4 Z
Figure 12-32 Cylinder (Cone) Surface (ITYPE = 10)
Sphere Surface
When the Spherical Surface option is chosen, a sphere is defined by the
5 coordinates (x, y, z) of the center, C1, with radius, R1. The normal vector of sphere is
inwards. If a negative value of R1 is entered, the normal vector is outwards. A typical
sphere is shown in Figure 12-33.
12
R1
1
C1
Z 3
Figure 12-33 Sphere Surface (ITYPE = 11)

X Y
4
3-D Circular Arc
When JTYPE = 2 is chosen, a circular arc is created by MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear. There are three different methods (Table 12-3) available to define a circular 5
arc in three dimensions. Circular arcs are denoted using the following type of data:
Starting point of arc(SP)
Ending point of arc(EP)
Enter of circle(C)
Radius of circle(R)
12
Swept angle(SA)
Swept angle flag(SAF)
Middle point(MP)
Arbitrary point (lying in plane of circle)(AP)
532 Contact
Table 12-3 Defining Circular Arcs

Method
Data Block
0 1 2
1 SP SP SP
2 EP MP AP
1 3 C EP C
4 R SAF SA
Note: For Method 1, a positive radius means the center of the circle is on the surface
side. A negative radius means the center of the circle is on the outside.
2 For Method 2, a SAF that is positive means an angle less than 180, a negative
value an angle greater than 180.
For Method 3, the starting point, arbitrary point and center define the plane
in which the circular arc lies.
3 SP, EP, C, MP and AP are X, Y, Z data.
For an arc with 180 degrees, either Method 1 or Method 2 is recommended.
A three-dimensional rigid surface represented by a circular arc is shown in
4 Figure 12-34.
12
EP
EP
MP
SP
R
SP
+ 1
C
Method 0 Method 1
2
SA
SP
3
+
C
AP
Method 2
Figure 12-34 Three-dimensional Rigid Surface (Circular Arc) 4
Spline
When JTYPE = 3 is chosen, the spline passes by all NPOINT declared, and has zero
curvature at the ends (enter at least 4 points). 5
Bezier curve
When JTYPE = 4 is chosen, a Bezier curve is defined by NPOINT control points (enter at
least 4 points).
12
Poly-line
When JTYPE = 5 is chosen, a poly-line defined by NPOINT control points.
Selective Contact Surfaces

In both the two- and three-dimensional contact problems, contact is always detected
between nodes on the surface of a deformable body and the geometrical profile of
another surface. There are two modes of the order in which a node checks contact with
other bodies. The default version is the double-sided contact procedure. In the single-
sided contact procedure, the nodes on a lower numbered body can come into contact
534 Contact
with equally or higher numbered surfaces. For instance, the boundary nodes of body
number 1 are checked against the surface profiles of bodies 1, 2, 3, .... The boundary
nodes of body number 2, however, are only checked against surface profiles of bodies
2, 3, ... It is possible, therefore, that due to surface discretization, a node of body 2
slightly penetrates the surface of body 1.
The double-sided contact option checks possible contact between any two surfaces
1 (surface i is checked for contact with surface j, and surface j is also checked for contact
with surface i, where i, j = 1, 2, 3, ..., total number of surfaces in the problem).
In addition, the BCTABLE entry is provided to you for the selection of contact
surfaces. Through this option, you can choose, for instance, the surface no. 1 to be in
2 contact with surfaces 3, 5, 6, 7, but not with surfaces 2 and 4. This option can
repeatedly be used during an analysis by specifying different BCTABLE entries for
different subcases.
You can further restrict the potential contact by using the BCHANGE bulk data entry.
3
12
Specifying Contact Body Entries
Entry Description Cross-Ref to Material

Info in QRG
BCBODY Defines a flexible or rigid contact body in “BCBODY (SOLs
2D or 3D. 600/700)” on page 949.
1
GMNURB Defines a 3D contact region made up of “GMNURB (SOL 600)”
NURBS using the MSC.Marc style. on page 1430.
BSURF Defines a contact body or surface defined by “BSURF (SOL 600)” on
Element IDs. page 1004.
BCBOX Defines a 3D contact region -- all elements “BCBOX (SOLs
2
within the region define a contact body. 600/700)” on page 959.
BCPROP Defines a 3D contact region by element “BCPROP (SOLs
properties. All elements with the specified 600/700)” on page 974.
properties define a contact body.
3
BCMATL Defines a 3D contact region by element “BCMATL (SOLs
material. All elements with the specified 600/700)” on page 963.
materials define a contact body.
4
BCHANGE Changes definitions of contact bodies. “BCHANGE (SOLs
600/700)” on page 961.
Defining Contact Bodies in MSC.Patran

5
The Create>Contact>Element Uniform combination on the Loads/Boundary
Application form defines slideline, deformable, and rigid contact bodies. This form is
used to define certain data for the MSC.Nastran Input entries. Other data entries are
12
536 Contact
defined under the Analysis Application when setting up a job for nonlinear static or
nonlinear transient dynamic analysis. A contact table is also supported; by default, all
contact bodies initially have the potential to interact with all other contact bodies and
themselves. This default behavior can be modified under the Contact Table form,
located on the Solution Parameters subform in the Analysis Application when
creating a Load Step. See “Contact Parameters” on page 540 and “Contact Table” on
1 page 547.
The Application Region form for contact is used to select the contact bodies whether
they be deformable or rigid. Deformable contact bodies are always defined as a list of
elements, the boundary of which defines the contact surface. Rigid bodies are
translated as ruled surfaces (2D) or straight line segments (1D) if a mesh or geometry
2 with an associated mesh is selected. Otherwise, if no mesh is associated with the
selected geometry, the contact definition will be written as geometric NURB surfaces
during translation.
3 Deformable Body
Defining a deformable contact body requires the following data via the Input
Properties subform on the Loads/Boundary Conditions Application form.
Description
4 Friction Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact
Coefficient (MU) between two bodies with different friction coefficients, the
average value is used.
Heat Transfer Heat transfer coefficient (film) to environment. This is only
5 Coefficient to necessary for coupled analysis (not available until version
Environment 2005).
Environment Sink Environment sink temperature. This is only necessary for
Temperature coupled analysis.
12 Contact Heat Contact heat transfer coefficient (film). This is only necessary
Transfer Coefficient for coupled analysis.
Description
Boundary By default a deformable contact body boundary is defined by
its elements (Discrete). However, you can use an Analytic
surface to represent the deformable body. This improves the
accuracy for deformable-deformable contact analysis by
describing the outer surface of a contact body by a spline (2D)
or Coons surface (3D) description. 1
Exclusion Region This is an optional input. The Analytic surface of a deformable
body can be described by a spline (2D) or Coons surface (3D)
and by default the entire outer surface will be included unless
an Exclusion Region is selected. For instance, you may not 2
want to represent locations of a body that never come in
contact with the SPLINE option. Select either Geometry entities
of the contact body that have element associated to them, or
select individual FEM nodes along the outer surface. Care
should be take when selecting Exclusion Regions that actual 3
outer surface or edge geometry is selected. If nodes are being
selected that describe a 3D edge of a solid, the nodes must be
in order (it is safer to select a geometric entity in this case as
the nodes could get reordered incorrectly). 4
Rigid Body
Defining a rigid contact body requires the following data via the Input Properties
subform on the Loads/Boundary Conditions Application form. The input data form
differs for 1D and 2D rigid bodies. One dimensional rigid surfaces are defined as beam
5
elements, or as curves (which may be meshed with beam elements prior to translation)
and used in 2D problems. The lines or beams must be in the global X-Y plane. Two
dimensional rigid surfaces must be defined as Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements, or as
12
538 Contact
surfaces (which may be meshed with Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements prior to translation)
and are used in 3D problems. The elements will be translated as 4-node patches if
meshed or as NURB surfaces if not meshed.
Input Description
Flip Contact Side Upon defining each rigid body, MSC.Patran displays normal
1 vectors or tic marks. These should point inward to the rigid
body. In other words, the side opposite the side with the
vectors is the side of contact. Generally, the vector points away
from the body in which it wants to contact. If it does not point
inward, then use the modify option to turn this toggle ON. The
2 direction of the inward normal will be reversed.
Symmetry Plane This specifies that the surface or body is a symmetry plane. It
is OFF by default.
Null Initial Motion This toggle is enabled only for Velocity and Position type of
3 Motion Control. If it is ON, the initial velocity, position, and
angular velocity/rotation are set to zero in the CONTACT
option regardless of their settings here (for increment zero).
Motion Motion of rigid bodies can be controlled in a number of
4 Control different ways: velocity, position (displacement), or
forces/moments.
Velocity For velocity controlled rigid bodies, define the X and Y
(vector) velocity components for 2D problems or X, Y, and Z for 3D
5 problems.
Angular For velocity controlled rigid bodies, if the rigid body rotates,
Velocity (rad/time) give its angular velocity in radians per time (seconds usually)
about the center of rotation (global Z axis for 2D problems) or
12 axis of rotation (for 3D problems).
Velocity vs Time If a rigid body velocity changes with time, its time definition
Field may be defined through a non-spatial field, which can then be
selected via this widget. It will be scaled by the vector
definition of the velocity as defined in the Velocity widget.
The Angular Velocity will also be scaled by this time field.
Friction Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact
Coefficient (MU) between two bodies with different friction coefficients the
average value is used.
Input Description
Rotation This is a point or node that defines the center of rotation of the
Reference Point rigid body. If left blank the rotation reference point will
default to the origin.
Axis of For 2D rigid surfaces in a 3D problem, aside from the rotation
Rotation reference point, if you wish to define rotation you must also
specify the axis in the form of a vector.
1
First Control Node This is for Force or SPCD controlled rigid motion. It is the
node to which the force or SPCD is applied. A separate LBC
must be defined for the force, but the application node must
also be specified here. If both force and moment are specified, 2
they must use different control nodes even if they are
coincident. If only 1 control node is specified the rigid body
will not be allowed to rotate.
Second Control Node This is for Moment controlled rigid motion. It is the node to 3
which the moment is applied. A separate LBC must be defined
for the moment, but the application node must also be
specified here. It also acts as the rotation reference point. If
both force and moment are specified, they must use different
control nodes even if they are coincident.
4
Note: After defining rigid bodies in your model, you can preview the rigid body
motion by selecting Preview Rigid Body Motion...
Slideline
5
Slideline contact is not supported by SOL 600.
12
540 Contact
12.4 Selecting and Controlling Contact Behavior

A series of MSC.Nastran entries can be used to implement and control the contact
behavior in an analysis.
Contact Parameters
1 This section describes the general parameters available in SOL 600 for detecting
contact, controlling separation, and modeling friction.

Info in QRG
2 BCONTACT Requests line contact output. .“BCONTACT” on
page 224.
BCPARA Defines contact parameters used in “BCPARA (SOL 600)”
3 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) on page 970.
Defining Contact Control Parameters in MSC.Patran

To define the Contact Control Parameters for an analysis:
Application form.
2. Click Solution Type... and select Solution Parameters...
12
Selecting and Controlling Contact Behavior 541
3. Select Contact Parameters... to bring up the Contact Control Parameters

subform. shown below.
4
Deformable-Deformable In Double-Sided method, for each contact body pair,
Method nodes of both bodies will be checked for contact. In
Single-Sided method, for each contact body pair, only 5
nodes of the lower-numbered body will be checked for
contact. Results are dependent upon the order in which
contact bodies are defined.
12
542 Contact
Penetration Check This controls contact penetration checking. sometimes

referred to as the increment splitting option. Available
options are: Per Increment, Per Iteration (default),
Suppressed (Fixed), Suppressed (Adaptive. Per Increment
means penetration is checked at the end of a load
increment. Per Iteration means that penetration is
1 checked at the end of every iteration within an increment.
If penetration is detected, increments are split. Suppress is
to suppress this feature for Fixed and Adaptive load
stepping types.
Reduce Printout of This controls reduction of printout of surface definition.
2 Surface Definition
Contact Detection Parameters

4. On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Contact Detection... This
3 form controls general contact parameters for contact detection.
12
Distance Tolerance Distance below which a node is considered touching a

body (error). Leave the box blank to have MSC.Marc
calculate the tolerance.
Bias on Distance Contact tolerance BIAS factor. The value should be within
Tolerance the range of zero to one. Models with shell elements seem
to be sensitive to this parameter. You may need to
1
experiment with this value if you have shell element
models that will not converge.
Suppress Bounding Box Turn ON this button if you want to suppress bounding
box checking. This might eliminate penetration, but slows 2
down the solution.
Check Layers For contact bodies composed of shell elements, this
option menu chooses the layers to be checked. Available
options are: Top and Bottom, Top Only, Bottom Only. 3
Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters
the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block.
Ignore Thickness Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness. Check
Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the 4
appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block.
Activate 3D Beam-Beam Turn this button ON to activate 3D beam-beam contact.
Contact Activate 3D Beam-Beam Contact enters a one(1) in the
13th field of the 2nd data block. 5
Quadratic Contact Turn this toggle ON to activate the new quadratic contact
algorithm that gives significantly improved interface
pressure distribution results when modeling contact
using higher order elements.
12
544 Contact
Separation
5. On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Separation... This form
controls general contact parameters for contact separation.
4 Maximum Separations Maximum number of separations allowed in each

increment. Maximum Separations is entered in the 6th
field of the 2nd data block. Default is 9999.
Retain Value on Turn ON this button if you do not want to reset NCYCLE
NCYCLE to zero when separation occurs. This speeds up the
5 solution, but might result in instabilities. You can not set
this and Suppress Bounding Box simultaneously. Retain
Value of NCYCLE enters a three(3) in field 8 of the 2nd
data block.
12 Increment Specifies whether chattering is allowed or not. Increment
and Chattering enters the appropriate flag in the 9th field
of the 2nd data block.
Chattering Specifies the separation criterion (forces or stresses) and
the critical value at which the separation will take place.
Increment and Chattering enters the appropriate flag in
the 9th field of the 2nd data block.
Separation Criterion Specifies in which increment (current or next) the

separation is allowed to occur. Separation Criterion enters
a one(1) in the 12th field of the 2nd data block if
separation is based on stresses.
Force Value Force/Stress Value is placed in the 5th field of the 3rd
Stress Value data block.
1
Friction Parameters
6. On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Friction Parameters...
12
546 Contact
Friction Type Available options for friction Type are: None (default),
Shear (for metal forming), Coulomb (for normal contact -
default), Shear for Rolling, Coulomb for Rolling, Stick-
Slip. Type and Method: places 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 in the 4th
field of the 2nd data block depending on fiction type and
1 places a 0 or 1 in the 5th field of the 2rd data block for
friction based on nodal forces or nodal stresses
respectively for Coulomb fiction. Stick-Slip is a Coulomb
type friction.
2 Note: Unless this pulldown is changed from None, no

friction will be active.
Method For Coulomb type of friction models (options 2, 4, and 5
above), there are 2 methods for computing friction: Nodal
3 Stress (by default), Nodal Forces. Type and Method:
places 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 in the 4th field of the 2nd data block
depending on fiction type and places a 0 or 1 in the 5th
field of the 2rd data block for friction based on nodal
forces or nodal stresses respectively for Coulomb fiction.
4 Relative Sliding VelocityCritical value for sliding velocity below which surfaces
will be simulated as sticking. Relative Sliding Velocity is
placed in the 1st field of the 3rd data block for all friction
models except Stick-Slip.
5 Transition Region Slip-to-Stick transition region. Transition Region is placed
in the 1st field of the 3rd data block for Stick-Slip model.
Multiplier to Friction Friction coefficient multiplier. Multiplier to Friction
Coefficient Coefficient and Friction Force Tolerance are placed in the
12 7th and 8th field of the 3rd data block respectively for the
Stick-Slip friction model.
Friction Force Friction Force Tolerance. Multiplier
to Friction Coefficient
Tolerance and Friction Force Tolerance are placed in the 7th and 8th
field of the 3rd data block respectively for the Stick-Slip
friction model.
Contact Table
This option is useful for controlling or activating contacting bodies and individual
contact pairs. To avoid unnecessary detection of contact between bodies, you can
control which bodies potentially may come into contact with other bodies. By default
MSC.Patran writes BCONTACT=ALLBODY which specifies is that every body
detects the possibility of contact relative to all other bodies and itself if it is a flexible
body. When the BCTABLE option is entered (MSC.Patran writes this entry only if you 1
change something on the contact table form), the default of detection for every body
is overridden. Instead, you specify the relationship of detection between bodies for
contact. The touching body does not contact itself unless you request it. Whenever the
touched body is a flexible one, by default, the capability of double-sided contact is
applied between the contacting bodies. This can be switched off by selecting 2
single-sided contact or by setting the searching order in the BCTABLE entry. A positive
value of the interference closure implies that there is an overlap between the bodies; a
negative value implies that a gap exists.
The following control variables of contact between bodies can be modified throughout 3
the table: contact tolerance, separation force, friction coefficient, interference closure
and contact heat transfer coefficient (for coupled thermal-stress-contact analysis
starting in version 2005). In addition, you can invoke the glue option, delayed slide off
a deformable body, and stress-free initial contact. The previous value of those control
variables is not overridden unless nonzero values are entered here. For an acoustic-
4
solid analysis (starting in version 2005), you can also modify the reactive boundary
coefficients.
In the glue option, when a node contacts a rigid body, the relative tangential
displacement is zero. When a node contacts a deformable body, all the translational
5
degrees of freedom are tied.
By default, if a node slides off the boundary of a deformable body at a sharp corner by
a distance more than the contact tolerance, contact between the node and the
contacted body is lost. By invoking the delayed sliding off option, the tangential
12
contact tolerance is increased by a factor of 10.
In any static contact analysis, a node contacting a body will be projected onto the
contacted segment of this body. Due to inaccuracies in the finite element model, this
might introduce undesired stress changes, since an overlap or a gap between the node
and the contacted segment will be closed. The option for stress-free initial contact
forces a change of the coordinates of a node contacting a deformable body, thus
avoiding the stress changes. In combination with the glue option, a similar effect can
be obtained; however, the overlap or gap will remain.
548 Contact
Specifying a Contact Table Entry

Info in QRG
BCTABLE Defines a contact table used in MSC.Nastran .“BCTABLE (SOLs
Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) 600/700)” on page 975.
1
Defining a Contact Table in MSC.Patran
To define a Contact Table:

Application form.
2. Click Subcases... ,select Subcase Parameters..., and click Contact Table.
12
Note: MSC.Patran will only write out the contact table if something on the contact
table form is changed. The default is to write out BCONTACT=ALLBODY
which does not require that the BCTABLE entry be written out.
Input Description
Contact Detection • Default (by body #) -This is the default where contact is
checked in the order the bodies are written to the input
deck. In this scenario, the most finely meshed bodies
1
should be listed first. There will be contact checks first for
nodes of the first body with respect to the second body
and then for nodes of the second body with respect to the
first body. If Single Sided contact is activated on the
Contact Parameters subform, then only the first check is
2
done.
• Automatic -Unlike the default, the contact detection is
automatically determined and is not dependent on the
order they are listed but determined by ordering the
3
bodies starting with those having the smallest edge
length. Then there will be only a check on contact for
nodes of the first body with respect to the second body
and not the other way around. 4
• First ->Second - Blanks the lower triangular section of the
table matrix such that no input can be accepted. Only the
contact bodies from the upper portion are written, which
forces the contact check of the first body with respect to 5
the second body.
• Second-> First - Blanks the upper triangular section of the
table matrix such that no input can be accepted. Only the
contact bodies from the lower portion are written.
Contact detection is done opposite of First->Second.
12
• Double-Sided -Writes both upper and lower portions of
the table matrix. This overrules the Single Sided contact
parameter set on the Contact Parameters subform.
Touch All Places a T to indicate touching status for all deformable-
deformable or rigid-deformable bodies.
Glue All Places a G to indicate glued status for all deformable-
deformable or rigid-deformable bodies.
Deactivate All Blanks the spreadsheet cells.
550 Contact
Input Description
Body Type Lists the body type for each body; either deformable or rigid.
Release This cell can be toggled for each body to Y or N (yes or no). If
Y, this indicates that the particular contact body is to be
removed from this subcase. The forces associated with this
1 body can be removed immediately in the first increment or
gradually over the entire Load Step with the Force Removal
switch described below.
Touching Body These are informational or convenience list boxes to allow you
Touched Body to see which bodies an active cell references and to see what
2 settings are active for Distance Tolerance and other related
parameters below. You must click on the touched/touching
bodies to see what values, if any, have been set for the pair
combination.
3 Distance Tolerance Set the Distance Tolerance for this pair of contact bodies. You
must press the Enter or Return key to accept the data in this
data box. A nonspatial field can be referenced that will write
this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies with time,
4 temperature, or some other independent variable. This
overrides any other settings for Distance Tolerance.
Separation Force Set the Separation Force for this pair of contact bodies. You
5 this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies with time,
temperature, or some other independent variable. This
overrides any other settings for Separation Force.
Friction Coefficient Set the Friction Coefficient for this pair of contact bodies. You
12 must press the Enter or Return key to accept the data in this
overrides any other settings for Friction Coefficient.
Input Description
Interference Closure Set the Interference Closure for this pair of contact bodies. You
overrides any other settings for Interference Closure. 1
Heat Transfer Set the Heat Transfer Coefficient for this pair of contact
Coefficient bodies. You must press the Enter or Return key to accept the
data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be referenced that
will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies 2
with time, temperature, or some other independent variable.
This overrides any other settings for Heat Transfer Coefficient.
This is only used in Coupled analysis.
Retain
Gaps/Overlaps
This is only applicable for the Glued option. Any initial gap or
overlap between the node and the contacted body will not be
3
removed (otherwise the node is projected onto the body which
is the default). For deformable-deformable contact only.
Stress-free Initial
Contact
This is only applicable for initial contact in increment zero,
where coordinates of nodes in contact can be adapted such
4
that they cause stress-free initial contact. This is important if,
due to inaccuracies during mesh generation, there is a small
gap/overlap between a node and the contacted element
edge/face. For deformable-deformable contact only. 5
Delayed Slide Off By default, at sharp corners, a node will slide off a contacted
segment as soon as it passes the corner by a distance greater
than the contact error tolerance. This extends this tangential
tolerance. For deformable-deformable contact only. 12
Note: All above references to use of the TABLE option refer to a future release and
are not supported in version 2004.
552 Contact
Movement of Contact Bodies

The motion of deformable bodies is prescribed using the conventional methods of
applying displacements, forces, or distributed loads to the bodies. Symmetry surfaces
are treated as a special type of bodies which have the property of being frictionless and
where the nodes are not allowed to separate.
1 There are three ways to prescribe the motion of rigid surfaces:
• Prescribed velocity
• Prescribed position
• Prescribed load or displacement of (a) control node(s).
2 Associated with the rigid body is a point labeled the centroid. When the first two
methods are chosen, you define the translational motion of this point, and the angular
motion about an axis through this point. The direction of the axis can be defined for
three-dimensional problems. For two-dimensional problems, it is a line normal to the
3 plane. For complex time-dependent behavior, the MOTION user subroutine (available
starting in version 2005) can be used to prescribe the motion as an alternative to the
input. The motion during a time increment is considered to be linear. The position is
determined by an explicit, forward integration of the velocities based upon the current
time step. A time increment must always be defined even if a static, rate-independent
4 analysis is performed.
When load controlled (a more accurate name would be “control node” rigid bodies)
rigid bodies are used, two additional nodes, called the control nodes, are associated
with each rigid body. In 2-D problems, the first node has two translational degrees of
5 freedom (corresponding to the global x- and y-direction) and the second node has one
rotational degree of freedom (corresponding to the global z-direction). In 3-D
problems, the first node has three translational degrees of freedom (corresponding to
global x-, y-, and z-direction) and the second node has three rotational degrees of
12 freedom (corresponding to the global x-, y-, and z-direction). In this way, both forces
and moments can be applied to a body for the control nodes. Alternatively, one may
prescribe one or more degrees of freedom of the control nodes by using the SPCD bulk
data entries. Generally speaking, load-controlled bodies can be considered as rigid
bodies with three (in 2-D) or six (in 3-D) degrees of freedom. The prescribed position
and prescribed velocity methods (see Figure 12-35) have less computational costs than
the prescribed load method (see Figure 12-36), however it is possible to change the
loads and constraints on the control node from one subcase to the next to prescribe
more complex motion of the rigid body.
Centroid
1 3
V
ω 1
2
1
Figure 12-35 Velocity Controlled Rigid Surface 2

Fy
Mz 3
Fx
Extra Node
5
Figure 12-36 Load Controlled Rigid Surface
If the second control node is not specified, the rotation of the body is prescribed to
be zero. 12
554 Contact
Specifying a Contact Movement Entry

Info in QRG
BCMOVE Defines movement of bodies in contact used .“BCMOVE (SOLs
in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600/700)” on page 965.
1 600) only.
This option is used in the Body Approach step which is created by MSC.Patran.
2 Initial Conditions
At the beginning of the analysis, bodies should either be separated from one another
or in contact. Bodies should not penetrate one another at the start of the analysis
unless the objective is to perform an interference fit calculation. Rigid body profiles
3 are often complex, making it difficult for you to determine exactly where the first
contact is located.
Unlike other MSC.Nastran solution sequences, before a SOL 600 analysis begins, some
calculations take place. This is defined as increment zero. During increment zero, if a
4 rigid body has nonzero motion, the initialization procedure brings it into first contact
with a deformable body. No motion or distortion occurs in the deformable bodies
during this process. In a coupled thermal mechanical analysis, no heat transfer occurs
during this process. If more than one rigid body exists in the analysis, each one with a
nonzero initial velocity is moved until it comes into contact. Because increment zero
5 is used to bring the rigid bodies into contact only, you should not prescribe any loads
(distributed or point) or prescribed displacements initially. For multistage contact
analysis (often needed to simulate manufacturing processes), the BCMOVE bulk data
entry in conjunction with the BCTABLE bulk data entry allow you to model contact
12 bodies so that they just come into contact with the workpiece. This procedure is called
a Body Approach subcase in MSC.Patran.
References 555
12.5 References
1. Oden, J. T. and Pires, E. B. “Nonlocal and Nonlinear Friction Laws and
Variational Principles for Contact Problems in Elasticity,” J. of Applied
Mechanics, V. 50, 1983.
2. Ju, J. W. and Taylor, R. L. “A perturbed Lagrangian formulation for the finite
element solution of nonlinear frictional contact problems,” J. De Mechanique
Theorique et Appliquee, Special issue, Supplement, 7, 1988.
1
3. Simo, J. C. and Laursen, T. A. “An Augmented Lagranian treatment of
contact problems involving friction,” Computers and Structures, 42, 1002.
4. Peric, D. J. and Owen, D. R. J. “Computational Model for 3-D contact
problems with friction based on the Penalty Method,” Int. J. of Meth. Engg.,
2
V. 35, 1992.
5. Taylor, R. L., Carpenter, N. J., and Katona, M. G. “Lagrange constraints for
transient finite element surface contact,” Int. J. Num. Meth. Engg., 32, 1991.
6. Wertheimer, T. B. “Numerical Simulation Metal Sheet Forming Processes,”
3
VDI BERICHET, Zurich, Switzerland, 1991
12
556 Contact
12
SECTION
Example Problem
13
■ Overview
■ Model Description
■ Constructing the Model
■ Running a SOL 600 Analysis
■ Postprocessing the Results

558
Example Problem
13.1 Overview
The purpose of this chapter is to give you an introduction to MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
(SOL 600) and illustrate how to set up and run SOL 600 problems in MSC.Patran by guiding you
through a comprehensive interactive exercise problem. This exercise illustrates many of the
capabilities in SOL 600 including large displacement analysis, rigid contact analysis using rigid
surfaces, and plasticity modeled with a perfectly plastic model. By completing the tutorial you
13 will become familiar with using MSC.Patran to run SOL 600 analyses and explore many of its
capabilities as well.
As you go through this exercise for the first time, concentrate on the process, rather than on the
details of each step. As you become more familiar with MSC.Patran and SOL 600, you can return
2 to this exercise to explore more details.
6
559
Model Description
13.2 Model Description

In this exercise, a model of a cylindrical pipe is modeled as being crushed between rigid bodies.
The model is created using 2D shell elements to model the pipe, and 2D rigid surfaces above and
below the pipe.
Move 2 in the -Y 13
R=4
Rigid Body 2
2
Pipe
R=3 Rigid Body 1 4

Move 2 in the Y
Data for Exercise:

5
Pipe Dimensions: D=8
Length = 24
Thickness = 0.4
Pipe Material: Steel, E = 30E6
ν = 0.3
6
Yield Stress = 36,000
Mesh- Rigid Body 1 and 2: 3D analytical
Pipe: S4R elements with IRS4 elements to
contact rigid bodies
560
Example Problem
13.3 Constructing the Model

In this section you will construct the geometry for the pipe and rigid surfaces, and then generate
a finite element model. Material properties, element properties, and loads and boundary
conditions are applied in this section.
Create Pipe Geometry

13 1. Open a new database named crush.db.
File/New ...
Database Name: crush.db
2 OK
Set the Analysis Preference to MSC.Nastran.
3 Analysis Code: MSC.Nastran

OK
Set the Picking Preferences.

4 Rectangular/Polygon Picking: • Enclose entire entity
Close
5 2. Create a new group rigid.
Group/Create...
New Group Name: rigid
6 ! Make Current
Group Contents: Add Entity Selection
Apply
Cancel
3. Create the model geometry.

• First, turn on the entity labels using the following toolbar icon:
Show Labels
561
Constructing the Model
" Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: XYZ
13
Points Coordinates List: [-3, -7.1, 4.5]
Apply
Create a second point by changing the Point Coordinates
List to [0, -7.1, 4.5]. 2
Apply
4. Sweep point to make a curve for the lower rigid surface. 3

Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Revolve 4
Axis: {Point 1[X1 Y1 5.0]}
Total Angle: 180
Point List: Point 2 5
Apply
The screen should now display the points and curves as shown in Figure 13.1:
6
562
Example Problem
Figure 13-1 - Curve for Lower Rigid Surface
13
5. Create the geometric points for the upper rigid surface

4
Action: Create
Object: Point
5 Method: XYZ
Points Coordinates List: [2, 8.1, 4.5]
Apply
This will create Point 4.
6 In a similar manner, create Point 5 using the Create, Point,
XYZ option. The Point Coordinates will be [6, 8.1, 4.5].
6. Create the curves for the upper rigid surface

Sweep Point 5 into an arc using Point 4 as the axis
Action: Create
Object: Curve
563
Method: Revolve
Axis: {Point 4[X4 Y4 5]}
Total Angle: -180
Point List: Point 5
Apply
13
This ends the definition of the geometry of the upper and lower rigid bodies. The screen should
now show the points and curves displayed in Figure 13.2:
Figure 13-2 - Curves to form Rigid Surfaces
2
7. Create a new group pipe and the geometry for the pipe.
Group/Create
New Group Name: pipe
564
Example Problem
Apply
Cancel
First, change to the isometric view by clicking on the Iso1 View icon in the toolbar.
Iso 1 View
13
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: XYZ
2 Points Coordinates List: [-12 0 0]
Apply
In a similar manner, using the Create, Point, XYZ method
3 to create Point 8 by changing the Point Coordinates List to
[-12 4 0].
Sweep Point 8 into a circle
4 Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Revolve
5 Axis: {Point 7[1 Y7 Z7]}

Total Angle: 360
Point List: Point 8
Apply
6
565
Create Finite Elements for Pipe

! Elements
Action: Create
Object: Mesh Seed
Type: Uniform 13
Element Edge Length Data: # Number of Elements
Number: 18
Curve List: See Figure 13.3 to choose
Curve 3 2
Figure 13-3 - Point to form Curve and Curve to Place Mesh Seeds
Curve 3 3
Point 8 5
1. Now you will create the mesh and extrude the elements to represent the pipe.
First, create a group called fem_pipe.
Group/Create
566
Example Problem
New Group Name: fem_pipe

Apply
Cancel
13 Mesh the curve
Action: Create
Object: Mesh
2 Type: Curve
Global Edge Length: 0.1
Element Topology: Bar 2
Curve List: see Figure 13.3 and choose
3 Curve 3
Apply
Now you will extrude the elements

4 First, be sure to set the view to the default using the following toolbar icon:
Front View
5 Action: Sweep
Object: Element
Type: Extrude
6 Mesh Control...
Mesh Control Data: # Number of Elements
Number: 3
OK
Direction Vector: <4.8, 0, 0>
! Delete Original Elements
Base Entity List: Select the elements you created on
the circle (see Figure 13.4)
567
To select these elements you will have to click on the Elements icon once you click in the Base
Entity List databox.
Elements
Then click on the Beam Element icon.
Beam Element 13
Figure 13-4 - Bar Elements to Sweep into Surface Elements
3
Select these
Elements
6
Apply
Repeat this process with:
Action: Sweep
Object: Element
Type: Extrude
Mesh Control...
568
Example Problem
Number: 12
OK
Base Entity List: see Figure 13.5
13 First, click on the Element’s Edge icon
Element’s Edge
Select the edge of the element as shown in Figure 13.5:

2 Figure 13-5 - Element Edges to Sweep into Surface Elements
4 Select Element
Edges
Apply
Repeat the process once again with the original settings
Action: Sweep
Object: Element
Type: Extrude
569
Mesh Control...
Number: 3
OK
13
Base Entity List: see Figure 13.6
Apply
Figure 13-6 - Element Edges to Sweep into Surface Elements

2
5
Select Element Edges
6
2. Verify that the Deformable Body element normals face the rigid members.
The pipe element’s normal direction should be pointing outward. If not, we need to correct the
elements that are in the wrong direction.
Action: Verify
Object: Element
Test: Normals
# Draw Normal Vectors
570
Example Problem
Apply
Figure 13-7 - Pipe Element Normals should Point in One Direction.
13
4 Modify the pipe elements so that they all point outward, in one direction. Click the Test Control
Option to change from Display Only to Reverse Elements.
Reverse Elements
5
Guiding Element: Choose an element pointing
outward, such as Elm 2
6 Apply
3. Equivalence the finite element nodes (eliminate any extra, overlapping nodes created
by the mesher).
Action: Equivalence
Object: All
Type: Tolerance Cube
Apply
571
Create Rigid Surfaces

First, post only the group rigid
Group/Post...
Select Groups to Post: rigid
Apply 13
Cancel
Switch the isometric view to Iso1 View.
Iso 1 View 2
1. Create the upper rigid surface.
3
! Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method: Translate
4
Translation Vector: [0 0 -10]
Curve List: See Figure 13.8 and select the
curves, Curve 1 2 5
Apply
6
572
Example Problem
Figure 13-8 - Transform the Curves for the Surfaces.
13
4
! Geometry
Action: Create
5 Object: Surface
Method: Curve
Option: 2 Curve
6 Starting Curve List: Curve 2

Ending Curve List: Curve 5
Apply
Repeat the process to create the lower surface.
! Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
573
Method: Curve
Option: 2 Curve
Starting Curve List: Curve 1

Ending Curve List: Curve 4
Apply
13
Figure 13-9 - Curves to Create Rigid Surfaces
3
Curves to select for upper rigid surface, Curve 2 and Curve 5
Curves to select for lower rigid surface, Curve 1 and Curve 4
4
2. Verify that the surface normals face the pipe. 6

In a later step, these surfaces will be used to define a rigid boundary. The rigid body outward
direction is defined by the surface’s normal direction. Therefore, we need to be sure that the
normals for each of the rigid boundaries are pointing towards the pipe.
Action: Show
Object: Surface
Info: Normal
# Surface Boundary
574
Example Problem
Surface List: Surface 1 2

Apply
All of the surface normals for the rigid surfaces should point towards the pipe. If any of them do
not, reverse their direction by following this procedure:
13 Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Reverse
Surface List: select the surfaces which had
2 normals facing the wrong
direction
Apply
3 Remove the entity labels using the following toolbar icon:
Hide Labels
4 3. Create a new group called contact_bodies which will be used for post processing later.
First create a group of only the rigid surfaces.
Group/Create...
5 New Group Name: fem_all

$ Make Current (OFF)
! Posted (ON)
Group Contents: Add All FEM
6
Apply
Next create a group consisting only of the current FEM.
Group/Create...
New Group Name: contact_bodies
! Make Current
Entity Selection: highlight all geometry and FEM entities
575
Apply
Cancel
Create Material Properties

1. Create constitutive material models for the pipe.
! Materials
13
Action: Create
Object: Isotropic
Method: Manual Input 2
Material Name: steel
Input Properties...
Constitutive Model: Linear Elastic
3
Elastic Modulus: 30E6
Poisson’s Ratio: 0.30
OK
Apply
4
The model will also experience yielding during the analysis, so a Plastic Constitutive Model
needs to be defined.
5
Input Properties...
Constitutive Model: Elastoplastic
Nonlinear Data Input: Perfectly Plastic
Yield Point: 36000
6
OK
Apply
2. Post the group fem_pipe only.
Group/Post...
Select Groups to Post: fem_pipe
Apply
576
Example Problem
Cancel
Create Element Properties

! Properties
Action: Create
13
Dimension: 2D
Type: Shell
Property Set Name: pipe
2 Options: " Homogeneous
" Standard Formulation
Input Properties...
3 Material Name: click on the Mat Prop Name

icon to open the Select Mate-
rial menu, then select steel
Thickness: 0.4
4 OK
Select Members: select the 2D Element icon in
the Select menu and then select
all elements displayed
5
Shell Element
6 Add
Apply
577
Apply Loads and Boundary Conditions

1. Add loads and boundary conditions to the end of the pipe.
Click on the Front View icon
Front View
13
The ends of the pipe are to be fixed in all translations. The upper rigid surface will then be forced
down into the pipe and lower rigid surface forced up into the pipe.
! Loads/BCs 2
Action: Create
Object: Displacement
Method: Nodal 3
New Set Name: end_disp
Input Data...
Translations <T1,T2,T3>: < 0, 0, 0 >
Rotations <R1,R2,R3>: < 0, 0, 0 >
4
OK
Select Application Region...
Geometry Filter: # FEM 5
Click in the Select Nodes databox, and screen select the nodes (while holding down shift) at both
ends of the pipe as shown in Figure 13.10:
Add
6
OK
Apply
578
Example Problem
Figure 13-10 - Nodes at fixed ends of the pipe
13
Nodes to select
3
2. Create the Load and Boundary Conditions for the contact. First, begin with the pipe as
the deformable body.
4
Post the group contact_bodies.
Group/Post...
5 Select Groups to Post: contact_bodies

Apply
Cancel
6 Click on the Reset Graphics icon
Reset Graphics
Action: Create
Object: Contact
Type: Element Uniform
Option: Deformable Body
New Set Name: contact_mid
579
Target Element Type: 2D

Geometry Filter: # FEM
Select 2D Elements: select pipe Elements, as in Fig-
ure 13.11, Elm 1:324
Add 13
OK
Apply
Next, develop the contact LBCs for the top rigid body. 2
Figure 13-11 - Elements Representing Pipe Contact
Deformable Contact Surface

Elements 6
Action: Create
Object: Contact
Type: Element Uniform
Option: Rigid Body
New Set Name: contact_top
580
Example Problem
Input Data...
! Flip Contact Side
Motion Control: Velocity
Velocity (vector): <0, -2, 0>
OK
13
Geometry Filter: # Geometry
Select Surfaces: see Figure 13.12 to select
2 upper surface, Surface 1
Add
OK
Apply
3
Figure 13-12 - Elements Representing Upper and Lower Surface Contact
4 Upper Surface Rigid

Contact
Lower Surface Rigid

Contact
581
Repeat the same procedure for the bottom
Action: Create
Object: Contact
Method: Element Uniform
Option: Rigid Body
13
New Set Name: contact_bottom
Input Data...
Motion Control: Velocity 2
Velocity (vector): <0, 2, 0>
OK
Select Application Region... 3
Select Surfaces: see Figure 13.12 to select upper-
surface, Surface 2
Add 4
OK
Apply
You can also preview the rigid body motion 5

Preview Motion...
Existing Sets: select one of the rigid bodies,
either contact_bottom or
contact_top 6
Preview Motion
Your model should now look like the picture shown in Figure 13.13:
582
Example Problem
Figure 13-13 - Correct Contact Normal Definitions
13
Note: If the arrows on your model are pointing outward, towards the pipe, then you must
4 perform this step. If not, skip to the next step.
! Load/BCs
Action: Modify
5 Object: Contact
Method: Element Uniform
Option: Rigid Body
6 Select Set to Modify: contact_bottom or top
Modify Data...
! Flip Contact Side
OK
Apply
583
Running a SOL 600 Analysis
13.4 Running a SOL 600 Analysis

The model of the pipe and rigid bodies is now complete and ready for a SOL 600 analysis.
Submit an Analysis from Inside MSC.Patran

! Analysis
13
Action: Analyze
Object: Entire Model
Method: Full Run
Job Name: crush 2
Solution Type...
Solution Type: " Implicit Nonlinear
OK 3
Subcases...
Subcase Name: pipe_crush
Analysis Type: Static
4
Subcase Parameters...
Linearity: " NonLinear
Nonlinear Geometric Effects: Large Displacement/
Large Strains 5
Load Increment Parameters...
Arclength Method: Modified Riks/Ramm
Max # of Increments: 100
6
OK
Iteration Parameters...
Max # of Iterations per 75
Increment:
OK
Contact Table...
Parameters Defining Contact Glue All
Between Bodies:
584
Example Problem
OK
OK
Apply
Cancel
13 Note: The default load case contains all the loads required to run this step and is selected by
default.
Subcase Select...
Subcases: pipe_crush
2 Subcases Selected: to deselect from the menu,
select the default subcase,
appropriately titled Default
OK
3 Apply
The non-linear analysis job crush will then be submitted for analysis to the workstation
designated in the Submit Script (usually your local workstation).
4
Look for the Analysis Results Files
The analysis job will take (on average) 1 to 2 minutes to run. When the job is done there will be
a results file titled crush.t16 in the same directory you started MSC/PATRAN in.
5 Again, you can monitor the progression of the job by looking at crush.marc.log and
crush.marc.sts and viewing the crush.marc.out file.
A job finishing successfully will end with: Job ends with exit number: 3004.
6 Troubleshoot a Failed Analysis
First, check the .sts, .f04, .f06, or .out files for licensing, disk access or format errors. The number
a the bottom of the crush.marc.sts is the Marc Exit Number.
• Exit 13 means there was a format error in the Marc input.

• Exit 2004 generally means you have unconstrained d.o.f.’s or rigid body modes.
• Exit 3002 means the analysis got part way through and then stopped.
The compete Marc Exit message is given at the end of the crush.marc.out file, which may also be
in crush.f06 depending on the value of CPYR.
585
Running a SOL 600 Analysis
If you get an Exit 13 check your input, make sure everything you need is in the MSC.Nastran
input deck. Check for elements, grids, contact body creation, etc. An easy way to debug these
type of problems is to read the jobname.marc.dat file (the Marc input file Nastran created) in to
Mentat or MSC.Patran (an empty db with preference set to Marc) and see what is missing. Often
you will see that some elements are missing, or that the contact bodies were not created as you
would expect them. You can also check the jobname.log file and search for the text “error”.
Read the Results in MSC.Patran

13
! Analysis
Action: Access Results
Object: Attach T16/T19
2
Select Results File...
Select Results File: crush.marc.t16
OK 3
Apply
6
586
Example Problem
13.5 Postprocessing the Results

Generate a Quick Plot
! Results
Action: Create
13 Object: Quick Plot
Change the Display Properties for results. Click on the Fringe Attributes icon.
2
Display: Element Edges
Click on the Deform Attributes icon.

3
$ Show Undeformed
4 (OFF)
Choose the Select Results Icon to Choose results data to plot.
5
Select Results Cases: Select the last increment
Select Deformation Result: Displacement, Translation
6 Apply
Note: Rather than use Select the Last Increment for the Select Results Cases, you can click and
drag to select all increments. When you see the deformation plot it will actually display
a pseudo-animation of the deformation.
Your model should appear as shown in Figure 13.14:

587
Postprocessing the Results
Figure 13-14 - Deformation of Pipe
13
4
3. Create a strain-deformation plot of the results.
Select Results Cases: Select the last increment 5

Select Fringe Result: Strain, Total
Select Deformation Result: Displacement, Translation
Apply 6
Your model should appear as shown in Figure 13.15:

588
Example Problem
Figure 13-15 - Strain Results of Pipe
13
6
589
Postprocessing the Results
Create an Animation
You may wish to create an animation of the Deformation Von Mises Stresses.
First, you might wish to view the three-dimensionality of the model by selecting the following
toolbar icon:
Iso 1 View
13
Action: Create
Object: Quick Plot
Select Results Cases: Select the last increment 2
Select Fringe Results: Stress, Equivalent Mises
Results Position: Position...(At Layer 1)
Select Deformation Result: Displacement, Translation 3
! Animate
Select the Animation Options icon

4
! Animate Fringe
! Animate Deformation 5
Animation Method: # Ramped
Animation Graphics: # 2D
Number of Frames: 8 6
Apply
When done viewing the animation, close the database and quit MSC.Patran.
590
Example Problem
13
6
I N D E X
A body approach 126

subcase parameters 207
adaptive load incrementation 66 defining in MSC.Patran 207
analysis boundary conditions 270
eigenvalue 133 nonlinear 118
free vibration 136 time-dependent 146
linear 90 treatment of 113
nonlinear 91, 92 BSURF 535
post-buckling 124 buckling analysis 87, 127
static 124 subcase parameters 199
types 122, 181 defining in MSC.Patran 200
defining in MSC.Patran 184 Bulk Data
analysis procedures 53, 84, 181 entries 19
linear and nonlinear 90 file 16
static 41, 124 Buyukozturk criterion 367
anisotropic materials 308
applying constraints
single degrees-of-freedom 43
arc-length incrementation 68
C
Arruda-Boyce model 316 Case Control Commands 18
CBAR 172, 473
AUTO 66
AUTO INCREMENT 68 CBEAM 473
CBEND 473
axisymmetric elements 477
CBUSH 470
CBUSH1D 470
B CDAMPi 470
CELAS1 470
basic load incrementation 66 CELAS2 172
BCBODY 535 central difference operator 140
BCBOX 535 CGAP 472
BCHANGE 535 CHEXA 172, 479
BCMATL 535 CMASSi 470
BCMOVE 207, 554 combined hardening 371
BCONTACT 540 conditioning number 55
BCPARA 540 CONM1 470
BCPROP 535 CONM2 470
bifurcation approach 129 CONROD 172, 473
2 INDEX
constant dilatation 468 CQUADR 474, 478

constitutive material models 299 CQUADX 477
defining in MSC.Patran 299 creep 114, 125, 149, 415
constraints 43 defining in MSC.Patran 421
multi-point 44, 250 implicit formulation 420
single point 43 subcase parameters 204
contact 270, 535 defining in MSC.Patran 204
automatic penetration checking 497 Crisfield method 73
beams 504 CROD 473
constraints 500 CSHEAR 474
controlling 540 CTETRA 172, 479
corner conditions 499 CTRIA3 172, 474, 478
deformable 536 CTRIA6 474, 478
detection 487 CTRIAR 474, 478
dynamic impact 492, 518 CTRIAX 477
glue model 514 CTRIAX6 477
neighbor relations 491 CTUBE 473
parameters 540 CVISC 470
defining in MSC.Patran 540
penetration 542
rigid 537
separation 499, 502
D
damping 147
shell 489, 504
debugging 216
tolerance 498
in MSC.Patran 224
contact bodies 484, 515
deformable surfaces 515
degrees-of-freedom 171
deformable surfaces 515
direct linear transient 182
direct substitution 64
movement 552
domain decomposition 162
rigid surface
ductile metals 408
rigid surfaces 515, 518
3D 522
circular arc 519
line segment 519 E
spline 521 EIGB 199
slideline eigenvalue
defining in MSC.Patran 539 analysis 133
contact table 547 buckling prediction 127
defining in MSC.Patran 548 extraction 130
convergence eigenvector
controls 78, 135 strain energy 132
coordinate systems 168 EIGR 197
CPENTA 172, 479 EIGRL 197, 199
CQUAD4 172, 474, 478 elasticity 109
CQUAD8 474, 478 elastomers 311, 411
INDEX 3
elements files
3D solid Bulk Data 16
defining in MSC.Patran 479 include 19
axisymmetric 477 message 36
defining in MSC.Patran 477 print 35
bush 470 results 35
defining in MSC.Patran 470 fixed load incrementation 64
damper flow rules 373
defining in MSC.Patran 470 foam model 319
dampers 470 parameters 332
gap 472 FORCE 274
defining in MSC.Patran 472 FORCE1 274
line 473 FORCE2 274
defining in MSC.Patran 473 free vibration analysis 136
mass 470 friction modeling 505
membrane 474
overriding MSC.Nastran selections 467
G
Gent model 318
panel 474
geometric nonlinearity 49, 96
global element controls 468
plane strain 477
glue model, friction 514
selection 465
GMNURB 535
shell 474
GRAV 283
solid 476
spring 470
defining in MSC.Patran 470 H
types 462 hereditary integral model 353
Executive Control Statements 18 Hill’s failure criterion 400
existing models 21 Hill’s yield function 364
experimental data fitting 437 Hoffman failure criterion 401
Houbolt operator 139, 143
hourglassing 466
F hyperelastic damage models 408
failure models 397
hyperelastic materials 310
hyperelastic properties
Hill criterion 400
least squares fit 335
Hoffman criterion 401
parameters 353
maximum strain 399
hypoelastic materials 310
maximum stress 397
Tsai-Wu criterion 402
fast explicit 140
4 INDEX
I loads and boundary conditions 267, 270

acceleration 286
INCLUDE 188 defining in MSC.Patran 286
include files 19 displacement 273
incompressible materials 109 defining in MSC.Patran 273
initial conditions 146, 293 distributed loads 287
inverse power sweep 133 defining in MSC.Patran 287
isotropic hardening 369 force 274
isotropic materials 304 defining in MSC.Patran 274
iteration methods 59 inertial loads 283
Newton-Raphson 59 defining in MSC.Patran 283
secant 62 initial displacement 293
strain correction 61 defining in MSC.Patran 293
iterations 51 initial temperature
initial velocity
J defining in MSC.Patran 294
Jamus-Green-Simpson model 315, 339 pressure 276
temperature 279
K defining in MSC.Patran 279
total loads 290
Kachanov factor 413 defining in MSC.Patran 290
Kelvin-Voigt model 352 velocity 285
kinematic hardening 371 defining in MSC.Patran 285
L M
Lagrange multipliers 496 MARCAUTO 204
Lagrangian formulation 97 MARCBAL 199
total 99, 312 mass elements 470
updated 102, 313 MAT1 304
nonlinear elasticity 319 MAT2 306, 308
laminates 426 MAT3 306
Lancozs 134 MAT8 306
line elements 473 MATED 301
linear analysis 90 MATEP 300, 391
linear elastic materials 303 material
load correction 65 damping 434
load increments 51, 85 defining in MSC.Patran 435
AUTO 66 direct integration 434
AUTO INCREMENT 68 instabilities 113
NLAUTO 66 nonlinearity 50, 107
size 64
INDEX 5
materials MATTG 301, 433

2d anisotropic MATTHE 301
failure 397 MATTORT 301
2d orthotropic MATTVE 301
failure 397 MATVE 301
anisotropic 308 MATVP 204, 301, 421
defining in MSC.Patran 309 maximum strain criterion 399
composite 423 maximum stress criterion 397
defining in MSC.Patran 426 membrane elements 474
Halpin-Tsai continuous ribbon 427 mesh
Halpin-Tsai discontinuous fiber 427 severe distortion 113
Halpin-Tsai discontinuous ribbon message files 36
427 metal plasticity 363
Halpin-Tsai particulate 427 METHOD 199
laminate 426 modal
rule-of-mixtures 426 stresses and reactions 136
short fiber (1D) 427 mode shape 131
short fiber (2D) 427 modified Drucker-Prager model
ductile metals 408 matching plane strain response 387
elastomers 311, 411 matching triaxial test response 385
gasket 428 Mohr-Coulomb
defining in MSC.Patran 433 linear material 365
geological 383 parabolic material 366
hyperelastic 310, 320 parameters 385
defining in MSC.Patran 338 MOMENT 274
hypoelastic 310 MOMENT1 274
inelastic MOMENT2 274
defining in MSC.Patran 391 Mooney-Rivlin model 314, 339
isotropic 304 MPC 251, 254, 256
defining in MSC.Patran 304 Mullin’s effect 411
plastic 392
linear elastic 303
metals 379
Mohr-Coulomb 365
nonlinear elastic 310
orthotropic 305
viscoelastic
MATF 300, 405
MATG 301, 433
MATHE 301
MATHED 414
MATORT 301, 306
MATTEP 300, 391
6 INDEX
multi-point constraints (MPCs) 250 nonlinear analysis 91, 92

cyclic symmetry 254 equation solution 51
defining in MSC.Patran 254 geometric nonlinearity 49
explicit 251 guidelines 84
defining in MSC.Patran 251 material nonlinearity 50
RBAR 257 numerical methods 54
defining in MSC.Patran 257 normal modes analysis 131
RBE1 258 subcase parameters 197
defining in MSC.Patran 259 defining in MSC.Patran 197
RBE2 260 numerical methods 54
defining in MSC.Patran 260 direct 54
RBE3 261 NURB 485
rigid 252
RROD 263
O
Oak Ridge National Laboratory criterion
367, 419
RTRPLT 264
Ogden model 315
operator
sliding surface 256
central difference 140
Houbolt 139
Newmark-beta 139
single step Houbolt 140
N orthotropic materials 305
Narayanaswamy model 116, 152, 421 output requests 229
nastran command 209 defining in MSC.Patran 229
natural frequency 131 form 229
nearly incompressible materials 113 OUTR 246
neighbor relations 491
Neo-Hookean 315
Newmark beta method
solution algorithm 142
P
panel elements 474
Newmark-beta operator 139, 141
parallel processing 162
Newton-Raphson
PARAMARC 162
full 59
PCOMP 424
modified 60
penalty
NLAUTO 66, 188
methods 496
NLPARM 188, 194, 204
penetration 542
NLPCI 194
perfectly plastic 378
NLSTRAT 56, 188
plane strain elements 477
nodes 171
plasticity 112
PLOAD 276, 287
PLOAD1 287
PLOAD2 276, 287
PLOAD4 276, 287, 290
INDEX 7
PLOADX1 276, 287, 290 singularity ratio 82

post-buckling 124 SOL 600 180, 183
preconditioners 55 procedure 53
preconditioners, iterative solvers 55 solid elements 476
print files 35 solution
progressive composite failure 404 parameters 188
procedures 58
R solution types 180
bifurcation buckling 182
rate-dependent yield 376
creep 182
RBAR 257
RBE1 259
linear static 181
RBE2 172, 252, 260
nonlinear static 181
RBE3 261
nonlinear transient dynamic 182
residual load correction 65, 77
viscoelastic (time domain) 183
RESTART 204
SPC 254
restarts 166
SPC1 273
SPCD 273
results
spring elements 470
element 233
static analysis 124
files 35
MSC.Marc quantities 238
stick-slip model, friction 510
MSC.Nastran quantities 246
storage methods 56
strain correction method 61
nodal 231
stress-strain
postprocessing with MSC.Patran 36
curves 379
types 238
measures 24
RFORCE 283
SUBCASE 191
rigid contact surfaces 515
subcases 51, 191
rigid plastic 378
flow 154
parameters 194
Riks-Ramm method 73, 74
superplastic flow 157
RROD 263
RTRPLT 264
T
S t16 file 238
TEMP 279
secant method 62
TEMPD 295
shell
TEMPPi 279
contact 489
TEMPRB 279
elements 474
Thermo-Rheologically Simple material 354
single step
TIC 293, 294
Houbolt operator 140, 143
8 INDEX
time dependent
boundary conditions 146
plasticity-creep
creep material law 415
time step 145
TLOAD 285, 286
transient analysis 155
transient dynamic analysis 138
translation parameters 185
Tsai-Wu failure criterion 402
TSTEPNL 188, 201
V
viscoelastic material
anisotropic 346
incompressible isotropic 346
isotropic 344
Thermo-Rheologically Simple 354
viscoelasticity 116, 125, 152
viscoplasticity 117, 125, 419
explicit formulation 419
explicit method 117
implicit method 118
von Mises 363, 370
W
work hardening
combined 371
isotropic 369
kinematic 371
rules 368
slope 380
X
xdb files 246

Implicit Nonlin

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Implicit Nonlin

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s Guide

Preface ■ List of MSC.Nastran Books, ii

■ Adding Nonlinear Effects, 49

■ Numerical Methods in Solving Equations, 54

■ Load Increment Size, 64

■ Residual Load Correction, 77

■ Nonlinear Effects and Formulations, 92

■ Overview of Analysis Types, 122

■ Body Approach, 126

■ Normal Modes, 131

■ Transient Dynamic Analysis, 138

■ Rigid-Plastic Flow (Available in MSC.Nastran 2005), 154

■ Superplastic Flow (Available in MSC.Nastran 2005), 157

■ Translation Parameters, 185

■ Solution Parameters, 188

■ Subcase Parameters, 194

■ Monitoring the Analysis, 212

■ Debugging the Analysis, 216

■ MSC.Marc Results Quantities, 238

■ MSC.Nastran Results Quantities, 246

■ Loads and Boundary Conditions, 267

■ Linear Elastic, 303

■ Nonlinear Elastic, 310

■ Failure and Damage Models, 397

■ Experimental Data Fitting, 437

■ Element Selection, 465

■ Global Element Controls, 468

■ Mass Elements, Springs, Dampers, and Bush Elements, 470

■ Gap Elements, 472

■ Line Elements, 473

■ Membranes, Panels, and Shells, 474

■ Solid Elements, 476

■ Selecting and Controlling Contact Behavior, 540

■ Running a SOL 600 Analysis, 583

■ Postprocessing the Results, 586

■ MSC. Software Products

■ MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)

■ How SOL 600 Solves Nonlinear Problems

■ This User’s Guide

1.1 MSC. Software Products

1.2 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)

Defining the Model

Using MSC.Patran with SOL 600

Postprocessing Features of MSC.Patran

• Deformed structural plots

2 • Animations of most of these plot types.

Capabilities for interactive results postprocessing also exist. Advanced visualization

1.3 Feature List

1.4 How SOL 600 Solves Nonlinear Problems

MSC.Nastran Input Deck deck echo and

IFP Processes Input Deck Nastran.f06,

Submit Marc No Yes

Figure 1-1 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) Solution Process

1.5 This User’s Guide

Other MSC.Nastran Documentation for SOL 600

3 Quick Reference Guide (QRG)

■ The MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File

2.1 The MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File

3 • Executive Control Statements

• (Additional History Definition

Model Data - grids,

• Give floating point numbers with or without an exponent. If you give an

2 • Give keywords exactly as they are written in the manual.